Syspro Inventory Setup

Inventory
SYSPRO 6.1 SP1

Published: June 2012
SYSPRO Authoring
Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd
All rights reserved
No part of this document may be copied, photocopied, or reproduced in any form or by any
means without permission in writing from Syspro Ltd. SYSPRO is a trademark of Syspro Ltd. All
other trademarks, service marks, products or services are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
Syspro Ltd reserves the right to alter the contents of this document without prior notice. While
every effort is made to ensure that the contents of this document are correct, no liability
whatsoever will be accepted for any errors or omissions.
This document is a copyright work and is protected by local copyright, civil and criminal law
and international treaty. This document further contains secret, confidential and proprietary
information belonging to Syspro Ltd. It is disclosed solely for the purposes of it being used in
the context of the licensed use of the Syspro Ltd computer software products to which it relates.
Such copyright works and information may not be published, disseminated, broadcast, copied
or used for any other purpose. This document and all portions thereof included, but without
limitation, copyright, trade secret and other intellectual property rights subsisting therein and
relating thereto, are and shall at all times remain the sole property of Syspro Ltd.
| TOC | 3
Contents
Setup............................................................................................................................... 12
Inventory Setup................................................................................................................................. 12
General................................................................................................................................... 12
Options.................................................................................................................................... 24
History..................................................................................................................................... 34
Periods.................................................................................................................................... 38
User Defined...........................................................................................................................40
Documents.............................................................................................................................. 40
Current Month.........................................................................................................................42
Depletion................................................................................................................................. 42
Browse.................................................................................................................................... 44
Numbering...............................................................................................................................46
Configurator............................................................................................................................ 50
Actual Costing Conversion Review...................................................................................................51
Serials..................................................................................................................................... 52
Lots......................................................................................................................................... 52
Processing Sequence.............................................................................................................52
Stock Code Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 54
Stock Code Maintenance....................................................................................................... 54
Stock Code Details.................................................................................................................58
Replenishment........................................................................................................................ 68
Production Details...................................................................................................................75
Sales Details...........................................................................................................................79
Tracking.................................................................................................................................. 87
Other....................................................................................................................................... 92
Additional Fields..................................................................................................................... 93
Stock Codes...................................................................................................................................... 94
Stock Codes........................................................................................................................... 94
Stock Codes Listview............................................................................................................. 98
Warehouses for Stock Code...........................................................................................................101
Warehouses for Stock Code................................................................................................ 101
Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code....................................................................................... 103
Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code............................................................................ 104
Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code............................................................................ 104
Maintain Hold Status....................................................................................................................... 117
Maintain Hold Status............................................................................................................ 117
Copy Stock Code............................................................................................................................ 118
Copy Stock Code................................................................................................................. 118
Copy Stock Code................................................................................................................. 120
Warehouse Maintenance.................................................................................................................121
Warehouse Maintenance......................................................................................................121
Copy Stock Codes to New Wh.......................................................................................................131
Copy Stock Codes to New Warehouses............................................................................. 131
Copy Options........................................................................................................................ 132
Validate Report..................................................................................................................... 135
Buyers Maintenance........................................................................................................................135
Buyers Maintenance............................................................................................................. 135
Buyer Code Maintenance.....................................................................................................135
Inventory Planner Maintenance...................................................................................................... 136
Inventory Planner Maintenance............................................................................................136
Unit of Measure Maintenance.........................................................................................................137
| TOC | 4
Unit of Measure Maintenance.............................................................................................. 137

Unit of Measure Maintenance.............................................................................................. 138
Alternate Stock Codes.................................................................................................................... 139
Alternate Stock Codes..........................................................................................................139
Alternate Stock Codes Maintenance....................................................................................140
Alternate Suppliers.......................................................................................................................... 142
Alternate Suppliers............................................................................................................... 142
Alternate Supplier Maintenance........................................................................................... 143
Approved Manufacturer Maintenance............................................................................................. 144
Approved Manufacturer Maintenance.................................................................................. 144
Example................................................................................................................................ 145
Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance....................................................................... 145
Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance.............................................................146
Approved Manuf. Part Number Maintenance.......................................................................146
Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance............................................................................ 148
Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance..................................................................148
Stock Code Price Maintenance...................................................................................................... 149
Stock Code Price Maintenance............................................................................................150
Pricing for a Price Code................................................................................................................. 151
Price Code Price Maintenance.............................................................................................151
Stock Code Quantity Discounts...................................................................................................... 152
Inventory Quantity Discounts............................................................................................... 152
Foreign Price Codes....................................................................................................................... 154
Foreign Currency Price Codes.............................................................................................154
Foreign Purchase Prices.................................................................................................................154
Foreign Prices.......................................................................................................................155
Foreign Price Maintenance.................................................................................................. 155
Inventory Sales Quantity History.....................................................................................................155
Inventory Initial Sales Quantity History................................................................................ 155
Inventory Sales Quantity History Take-on........................................................................... 156
Inventory Initial Aged Valuation...................................................................................................... 157
Inventory Initial Aged Valuation............................................................................................157
Aged Valuation Take-on.......................................................................................................157
Updating of Aged Valuation Buckets................................................................................... 158
Inventory Document Format............................................................................................................160
Inventory Document Format................................................................................................. 160
Format Options..................................................................................................................... 165
Preferences........................................................................................................................... 166
Heading Section................................................................................................................... 170
Detail Section........................................................................................................................170
Total Section.........................................................................................................................173
Serial Number Tracking Section.......................................................................................... 173
MS Word Options................................................................................................................. 174
Inventory Label Format................................................................................................................... 174
Inventory Label Format........................................................................................................ 174
Label Preferences.................................................................................................................175
Label Detail Section............................................................................................................. 176
Price Section.........................................................................................................................178
Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format...............................................................................................179
Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format.................................................................................... 180
Ticket Preferences................................................................................................................181
Ticket Detail Section.............................................................................................................182
Transaction Processing.............................................................................................. 185

Inventory Movements...................................................................................................................... 185
Inventory Movements........................................................................................................... 185
Preferences........................................................................................................................... 189
| TOC | 5
Transaction Date.................................................................................................................. 192

Receipts................................................................................................................................ 192
Adjustments.......................................................................................................................... 198
Cost Changes....................................................................................................................... 201
Cost Modifications................................................................................................................ 203
Transfers OUT...................................................................................................................... 204
Transfers IN.......................................................................................................................... 208
Transfers IN (GIT)................................................................................................................ 210
Immediate Transfers.............................................................................................................218
No Destination Transfers......................................................................................................221
Physical Counts.................................................................................................................... 223
Bin Transfers........................................................................................................................ 224
Expense Issues.................................................................................................................... 226
Backflushing.......................................................................................................................... 229
Stock Information..................................................................................................................237
Recap Totals.........................................................................................................................238
List of Journals..................................................................................................................... 239
Journal Entries......................................................................................................................239
Cost Multiplier Calculations.................................................................................................. 241
Actual Cost Allocation..................................................................................................................... 241
Actual Cost Allocation.......................................................................................................... 241
Actual Costing Allocation Details......................................................................................... 242
Serial Entry for Receipts................................................................................................................. 243
Serial Number Capture.........................................................................................................243
Manual Serials Capture........................................................................................................243
Batch Serials Capture.......................................................................................................... 246
Effect of Serial Numbers on Transactions........................................................................... 247
Inventory Document Print................................................................................................................250
Inventory Document Print.....................................................................................................250
Report Options......................................................................................................................251
Inventory Print Totals........................................................................................................... 253
Inventory On-line Document.................................................................................................254
Price-Cost Percentage Change...................................................................................................... 256
Price/Cost Percentage Change............................................................................................ 256
Price/Cost Percentage Change Criteria............................................................................... 256
Price/Cost Percentage Change Review............................................................................... 260
Minimum Quantity Calculation........................................................................................................ 260
Minimum Quantity Calculation..............................................................................................260
Information............................................................................................................................ 261
Report................................................................................................................................... 262
Calculation Formula..............................................................................................................262
Stock Take System......................................................................................................263

Stock Take System......................................................................................................................... 263
Stock Take Query........................................................................................................................... 263
Stock Take Query.................................................................................................................263
Warehouse Details............................................................................................................... 264
Stock Codes......................................................................................................................... 264
Stock Take Selection...................................................................................................................... 266
Stock Take Selection............................................................................................................266
Stock Take Selection............................................................................................................267
Selected Stock Codes Report.............................................................................................. 269
Stock Take Update..........................................................................................................................269
Stock Take Update...............................................................................................................269
Stock Take Update Quantities and Costs............................................................................270
Selected Stock Codes Report.............................................................................................. 271
Inventory Stock Take Tickets..........................................................................................................271
| TOC | 6
Report Options......................................................................................................................271
Stock Take Forms........................................................................................................................... 272
Report Options......................................................................................................................272
Output Options......................................................................................................................274
Inventory Stock Take Capture........................................................................................................ 274
Stock Take Capture..............................................................................................................274
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Stock Code...................................................................... 277
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Ticket............................................................................... 284
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Bin................................................................................... 287
Stock Codes in Stock Take............................................................................................................ 292
Stock Codes in Stock Take for Warehouse.........................................................................292
Ticket Numbers for Warehouse...................................................................................................... 293
Ticket Numbers for Warehouse........................................................................................... 293
Stock Take Import........................................................................................................................... 293
Stock Take Import................................................................................................................ 293
Stock Take Import Selection................................................................................................ 294
Stock Take Import Report.................................................................................................... 296
Stock Take Import Report - HTML...................................................................................... 296
File Layout............................................................................................................................ 296
Stock Take by Ticket...................................................................................................................... 299
Report Options......................................................................................................................299
Output Options......................................................................................................................301
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 301
Inventory Stock Take Report By Stock Code.................................................................................301
Report Options......................................................................................................................301
Output Options......................................................................................................................302
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 302
Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities....................................................................................... 303
Report Options......................................................................................................................303
Output Options......................................................................................................................304
Inventory Stock Take Variance Report........................................................................................... 304
Report Options......................................................................................................................304
Output Options......................................................................................................................307
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 307
Stock Take Confirmation.................................................................................................................307
Stock Take Confirmation...................................................................................................... 308
Confirmation Options............................................................................................................ 309
Stock take Confirmation Error Report.................................................................................. 311
Stock Take Confirmation Report.......................................................................................... 311
Stock Take Cancellation................................................................................................................. 312
Stock Take Cancellation.......................................................................................................312
Warehouse Information........................................................................................................ 312
Serial Tracking System............................................................................................... 313

Serial Tracking System................................................................................................................... 313
Serial Number Header Maintenance...............................................................................................313
Serial Number Header Maintenance....................................................................................313
Serial Number Take-On.................................................................................................................. 314
Serial Number Take-on........................................................................................................ 314
Take-on Header....................................................................................................................315
Take-on Transaction.............................................................................................................316
Transaction Posting.........................................................................................................................317
Serial Tracking Transaction Posting.................................................................................... 317
Transaction Details............................................................................................................... 320
Serial Details.........................................................................................................................321
Serial File Purge............................................................................................................................. 323
Serial File Purge...................................................................................................................323
| TOC | 7
Information............................................................................................................................ 324
Report................................................................................................................................... 325
Serial Number Maintenance............................................................................................................325
Serial Numbers..................................................................................................................... 326
Browse on Serial Number Transactions......................................................................................... 329
Transactions for Serial Number........................................................................................... 330
Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query..................................................................................331
Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query.......................................................................331
Component to Parent Details............................................................................................... 331
Component to Parent Serial Information..............................................................................331
Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code...................................................................................332
Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code........................................................................ 332
Component to Parent Tracking Query............................................................................................334
Component to Parent Tracking Query................................................................................. 334
Serial Tracking......................................................................................................................335
Lot Tracking.......................................................................................................................... 336
Serial File Balance Report.............................................................................................................. 337
Report Options......................................................................................................................337
Output Options......................................................................................................................338
Serial Tracking Report.................................................................................................................... 338
Report Options......................................................................................................................338
Additional Options.................................................................................................................340
Service Options.................................................................................................................... 341
Transaction Options..............................................................................................................342
Output Options......................................................................................................................343
GL Integration.............................................................................................................. 344
Inventory GL Integration..................................................................................................................344
Inventory GL Integration Update.......................................................................................... 344
Information............................................................................................................................ 345
Report................................................................................................................................... 346
Inventory Journals........................................................................................................................... 346
Inventory Journals................................................................................................................ 346
Inventory Journal Report.................................................................................................................348
Report Options......................................................................................................................348
Output Options......................................................................................................................350
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 350
Inventory GL Distribution.................................................................................................................351
Report Options......................................................................................................................351
Output Options......................................................................................................................353
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 354
Period End Processing............................................................................................... 355

Inventory Period End.......................................................................................................................355
Inventory Period End............................................................................................................355
Information............................................................................................................................ 356
Report................................................................................................................................... 362
Warehouse Balance Report................................................................................................. 362
Inventory Balance Report.....................................................................................................363
GIT Balance Report..............................................................................................................363
Period End Reporting........................................................................................................... 363
Balance................................................................................................................................. 363
Month End............................................................................................................................ 365
Year End...............................................................................................................................366
Purge.....................................................................................................................................366
Queries.......................................................................................................................... 369
Inventory Query............................................................................................................................... 369
| TOC | 8
Inventory Query.................................................................................................................... 369

Stock Code Details...............................................................................................................375
Distribution............................................................................................................................ 376
Production............................................................................................................................. 377
Warehouse Values............................................................................................................... 378
Warehouse History............................................................................................................... 383
Movements............................................................................................................................385
Notes..................................................................................................................................... 388
User Defined.........................................................................................................................388
Custom Form........................................................................................................................ 389
Goods in Inspection for Stock Code...............................................................................................389
Goods in Inspection for Stock Code.................................................................................... 389
Inspection Transactions for GRN......................................................................................... 391
Hold....................................................................................................................................... 392
Allocations for Stock Code..............................................................................................................392
Allocations for Stock Code...................................................................................................392
RMA for Stock Code....................................................................................................................... 394
RMA for Stock Code............................................................................................................ 394
Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code..................................................................................... 395
Blanket Purchase Orders for Stock Code............................................................................395
Requisition Query for Stock Code.................................................................................................. 396
Requisitions...........................................................................................................................397
Requisition Query Details................................................................................................................400
Requisition Query Details.....................................................................................................400
Details................................................................................................................................... 400
Routings................................................................................................................................ 401
GL Commitment Status Query........................................................................................................401
Commitment Values............................................................................................................. 401
Notation List.....................................................................................................................................402
Notation List..........................................................................................................................402
Sales Orders for Stock Code..........................................................................................................403
Sales Orders for Stock Code...............................................................................................403
Sales Orders.........................................................................................................................405
Sales Order Selection.......................................................................................................... 407
Purchase Orders for Stock Code....................................................................................................408
Purchase Orders for Stock Code.........................................................................................408
Browse on ECC Rev/Rel................................................................................................................ 412
Revision/Release for Stock Code........................................................................................ 413
P/O Browse on Order Lines History............................................................................................... 414
Detailed History for Purchase Order.................................................................................... 414
Work in Progress for Stock Code...................................................................................................414
Work in Progress for Stock Code........................................................................................ 415
Inventory Movements for Stock Code............................................................................................ 417
Inventory Movements for Stock Code..................................................................................417
Movements for Stock Code..................................................................................................419
Quotation Query by Stock Code.....................................................................................................421
Quotation Query by Stock Code.......................................................................................... 422
ECC Revision/Releases.................................................................................................................. 422
Revision/Release for Stock Code........................................................................................ 422
ECC Stock Quantities..................................................................................................................... 423
Stock Information for Rev/Rel.............................................................................................. 423
Stock Information for Rev/Rel.............................................................................................. 423
Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code....................................................................................424
Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code......................................................................... 424
Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code........................................................................................ 425
Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code............................................................................. 425
| TOC | 9
Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code Listview............................................................... 426

Inventory Journal Zoom.................................................................................................................. 427
Zoom on Inventory Journal.................................................................................................. 427
Inventory Journal Zoom.................................................................................................................. 427
Inventory Journal Summary Details..................................................................................... 428
Inventory Journal Summary Entries..................................................................................... 428
Browse on Operations.....................................................................................................................429
Stock Code for Operations Browse..................................................................................... 429
Stock Code Information........................................................................................................430
Operations.............................................................................................................................430
Customer Price Query.....................................................................................................................431
Customer Price Query..........................................................................................................431
Best Price Details................................................................................................................. 434
Last Price Paid..................................................................................................................... 438
Price Category/Code Table.................................................................................................. 438
Inventory Prices.................................................................................................................... 439
Customer Contracts..............................................................................................................439
Order Discounts....................................................................................................................439
Product Class Discounts...................................................................................................... 439
Service Charges................................................................................................................... 440
Trade Promotions................................................................................................................. 440
Inventory at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 441
Inventory at a Glance...........................................................................................................442
Valuation Criteria.................................................................................................................. 442
Inventory Valuation At A Glance..........................................................................................444
Browses........................................................................................................................ 445
Inventory Warehouses.....................................................................................................................445
Warehouse Maintenance......................................................................................................445
Suppliers for Stock Code................................................................................................................ 447
Suppliers for Stock Code..................................................................................................... 447
Approved Manufacturers................................................................................................................. 448
Approved Manufacturers...................................................................................................... 448
Approved Manufacturers Parts....................................................................................................... 449
Approved Manufacturer's Part Numbers.............................................................................. 449
Cost Unit of Measure...................................................................................................................... 451
Inventory Cost Unit of Measure........................................................................................... 451
Pricing for a Stock Code................................................................................................................ 453
Pricing for Stock Code......................................................................................................... 453
Browse on GIT References............................................................................................................ 454
Goods in Transit References............................................................................................... 454
Goods in Transit Selection...................................................................................................456
Reports.......................................................................................................................... 458
SRS Output Options........................................................................................................................458
Output Options......................................................................................................................458
Inventory Valuation..........................................................................................................................465
Report Options......................................................................................................................465
Additional Options.................................................................................................................469
Output Options......................................................................................................................470
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 470
Inventory Aged Valuation................................................................................................................ 471
Report Options......................................................................................................................471
Other Options....................................................................................................................... 473
Inventory Movement Report............................................................................................................474
Report Options......................................................................................................................475
| TOC | 10
Movement Options................................................................................................................477
Other Options....................................................................................................................... 478
Output Options......................................................................................................................479
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 479
Kardex Report................................................................................................................................. 479
Report Options......................................................................................................................480
Other Options....................................................................................................................... 485
Kardex Report Calculation................................................................................................... 486
Inventory Price List..........................................................................................................................487
Report Options......................................................................................................................487
Output Options......................................................................................................................488
Price History Report........................................................................................................................ 489
Report Options......................................................................................................................489
Output Options......................................................................................................................490
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 490
ABC Analysis...................................................................................................................................490
Report Options......................................................................................................................491
Output Options......................................................................................................................492
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 492
Classifications....................................................................................................................... 492
Warehouse Activity..........................................................................................................................492
Report Options......................................................................................................................493
Report Filters........................................................................................................................ 495
Output Options......................................................................................................................496
Stock Take Exception..................................................................................................................... 496
Report Options......................................................................................................................497
Output Options......................................................................................................................499
Warehouse Exception..................................................................................................................... 499
Report Options......................................................................................................................499
Report Filters........................................................................................................................ 502
Output Options......................................................................................................................503
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 503
Superseded Clearing Stock............................................................................................................ 503
Report Options......................................................................................................................503
Output Options......................................................................................................................506
Purchasing Work Sheet.................................................................................................................. 506
Report Options......................................................................................................................506
Criteria...................................................................................................................................508
Output Options......................................................................................................................510
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 510
Inventory Goods in Inspection........................................................................................................ 510
Report Options......................................................................................................................510
Output Options......................................................................................................................512
Report Details....................................................................................................................... 512
Goods in Inspection Offsite.............................................................................................................512
Report Options......................................................................................................................512
Output Options......................................................................................................................514
Inventory Amendment Journal........................................................................................................ 514
Report Options......................................................................................................................514
Output Options......................................................................................................................514
List of Buyers.................................................................................................................................. 514
Report Options......................................................................................................................515
Output Options......................................................................................................................515
List of Inventory Costs Um............................................................................................................. 516
List of Inventory Cost Units of Measure.............................................................................. 516
Output Options......................................................................................................................516
| TOC | 11
Inventory Notations..........................................................................................................................516
Report Options......................................................................................................................516
Output Options......................................................................................................................518
List of Planners............................................................................................................................... 518
Report Options......................................................................................................................518
Output Options......................................................................................................................519
List of Warehouses......................................................................................................................... 519
Report Options......................................................................................................................519
Output Options......................................................................................................................520
Inventory Label Print....................................................................................................................... 520
Report Options......................................................................................................................520
Other Options....................................................................................................................... 522
| Setup | 12
Setup
Inventory Setup
You use the Inventory Setup program to define the setup options of your Inventory module.
The Inventory Setup program comprises the following tabs:
General
Options
History
Periods
User Defined
Documents
Current Month
Depletion
Browse
Numbering
Configurator
General
Field
Values
Description
FIFO valuation
Select this to value your inventory on a First-In-First-Out basis.
FIFO valuation
Note:
Multiple bins
Implications of selecting this option are that stock

on hand cannot be allowed to go negative in any
warehouse. However, items defined as Floorstock
(Stock Code Maintenance) and stocked in the
Floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup) can have a
negative balance (see WIP Issue Floor Stock
Allocations).
In addition, inventory costs cannot be held in a unit
of measure other than stocked.
If you selected the option: Costing per warehouse,
and the costing method for any warehouse is set
to FIFO (Inventory Warehouses), then FIFO
valuation is automatically enabled and cannot be
deselected.
When you select Actual costing, this option is
automatically selected, because Actual costing uses
the FIFO valuation architecture to track and process
costs.
Multiple bins can be enabled for all warehouses or for selected

warehouses only.
Refer to Multiple bins for additional information.
Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.
| Setup | 13
Field
Values
Description
Multiple bins
Select this if you require a specific bin to be entered when you

receive items into stock, issue items from stock, transfer items
between warehouses and capture stock take information.
When you select this option, all warehouses are set to requiring
multiple bins. A single bin is created for each stock code/
warehouse combination with the entire quantity on hand for
the stock code/warehouse against it. If a bin location has been
defined against the stock code's warehouse, then this bin
location is used to generate the default bin, otherwise, the
warehouse code becomes the bin location.
Once you have enabled multiple bins for the company, you
can optionally disable bins for specific warehouses, using the
Warehouses function below. However, this function is available
only after you save your settings and reload the Inventory
Setup program.
The following points should be noted if you change this option
after the system is up-and-running, particularly if sales orders
or lot numbers already exist on file:
When switching multiple bins on, the Purge and Archive

program is automatically run to ensure that the default
bin created is inserted into existing lot records and their
associated transactions against your traceable or ECC
controlled stock items.
You should run the Balance function of the Order Purge
program to ensure there are no quantities in ship without bin
allocations.
If you activate this option at any time after the system has
been running without it, you must run the Balance function
of the Inventory Period End program, to transfer the
quantity on hand to the default bin created.
When switching multiple bins off for all warehouses, the
system automatically performs the processes required to
roll the bins (i.e. transfer the quantity on hand to the default
bins).
All bins are deleted against the stock code/warehouse
combination and all sales order bin allocations are deleted.
The quantities on hand for stock items in the warehouse
are transferred to the default bin. The default bin location
is generated from the warehouse code if no default bin
is setup against the stock code/warehouse combination
(Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code).
The Purge and Archiveprogram is automatically run to
ensure that the bins are cleared from existing lot records
and their associated transactions.
You can run the Balance function of the Inventory Period
End program and the Balance function of the Order Purge
program, although this is not a requirement.
Warehouses
Select this to apply multiple bins selectively by warehouse.
| Setup | 14
Field
Values
Description
The Inventory Warehouses program is loaded automatically,
enabling you to toggle the Multiple bins in use option for
each warehouse. This facility is only available from within the
Inventory Setup program.
Note:
The Warehouses function is available only after you

have enabled multiple bins, saved your settings and
reloaded the Inventory Setup program.
When activating (or deactivating) multiple bins for a
warehouse, a number of processes are performed
to ensure data consistency (see Warehouse
Maintenance).
Amendment
journals required
Yes
Select this to retain details of any changes and deletions of

items within the Stock Code Maintenance, Cost Implosion
and Lead Time Calculation programs.
No
Select this if you do not want to monitor information that has

changed for stock items held on file.
Yes, with additions Select this to retain details of any changes and deletions of
items as well as any stock items that were added to the file.
Note:
You can print details of additions, changes and
deletions using the Inventory Amendment Journal
program.
Rounding of WIP
allocs to stock
code's max no of
decimals
This is used when the number of decimals assigned to the

stock item differs from the number of decimals specified at the
Quantity per field for the same item.
5-up, 4-down
Select this to round up decimal places of .5 or larger, and to

round down decimal places of .4 or less.
Round up
Select this to round up decimals. This option is appropriate only

where the full 3 decimal places is not held against the stock
item on the product master file.
Round down
Select this to round down decimal places. This option is

appropriate only where the full 3 decimal places is not held
against the stock item on the product master file. In this case,
you are advised to select the Round up option, as values less
than 0.5 will be rounded down to zero.
Percentage
breaks for ABC
analysis
| Setup | 15
Field
Values
Description
A/B percentage
break
You use this field to indicate the cut-off percentage for A and
B items for classifying on the ABC Analysis, based on the
annual usage value of items (i.e. the total cost of each item
sold or issued over the past year).
This defaults to 80.
B/C percentage
break
You use this field to indicate the cut-off percentage for B and
C items for classifying on the ABC Analysis, based on the
annual usage value of items (i.e. the total cost of each item
sold or issued over the past year).
This defaults to 95.
Acceptable
cost variance
percentage
You use this field to indicate the percentage by which:
the cost of an item received into stock is allowed to differ

from the cost of the item held on file. Receipts include
receipts from Work in Progress and from Purchase orders.
a cost change to an item is allowed to differ from the cost of
the item held on file (Inventory Movements).
A warning is displayed if this percentage is exceeded. You can,

however, define a password which has to be entered when the
variance is exceeded. See Inventory override on inventory cost
variance (Password Setup).
Note:
The warning does not apply to receipts if your

costing method is set to Standard costing, as items
are receipted at standard cost and therefore no
variance occurs.
The warning only applies to cost changes made to
individual items and not to bulk cost changes (e.g.
Price-Cost Percentage Change and Transfer
BOM Costs to Wh Costs).
Reject import
Select this if you want to reject imported job and purchase
receipts if cost
order receipts if they exceed the acceptable cost variance
variance exceeded percentage defined.
If you do not select this option then no check is performed to
ensure that the receipt cost does not exceed the acceptable
cost variance percentage when importing job and purchase
order receipts.
Note:
This check is performed at the time of actually
processing the import and not at the time of validating
the import file.
Costing method
The costing method you select determines the manner in which

your inventory is valued.
A single costing method can be applied to all warehouses
within a company (costing at company level). Alternatively,
various costing methods can be used within the company, by
| Setup | 16
Field
Values
Description
assigning a costing method to a specific warehouse (costing at
warehouse level).
Note:
Once defined, changing costing methods must be
considered in detail before proceeding with the change.
Refer to Costing for additional information on inventory costing
methods.
Costing per
warehouse
Select this to apply costing methods selectively by warehouse.

You would typically use this option in cases where high value,
low usage items are stored in a separate warehouse and
require a different method of costing (e.g. FIFO) for accuracy.
Alternatively, you may manufacture and distribute a product
and want to apply Standard costing to your Work in Progress
and Average costing to your distribution warehouse. This is
only relevant in locations where mixing costing methods is an
acceptable practice.
When you select this option, each warehouse is set to requiring
the costing method you select on this tab page. Once you have
enabled costing per warehouse, you can optionally change the
costing method for specific warehouses, using the Warehouses
function. However, this function is available only after you save
your settings and reload the Inventory Setup program.
If you do not select this option, then the costing method
selected here is used for all warehouses.
Warehouses
Select this to apply the costing method you require to each

warehouse.
The Inventory Warehouses program is loaded automatically,
enabling you to select the Costing method to use for each
warehouse. This facility is only available when the Inventory
Warehouses program is called from the Inventory Setup
program.
Note:
Apply warehouse
BOM costs
The Warehouses function is available only after you

have enabled the Costing per warehouse option,
saved your settings and reloaded the Inventory
Setup program. However, stock for items defined
as Floorstock (Stock Code Maintenance) and
stocked in the Floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup)
will always be allowed to go negative, regardless of
FIFO costing or your warehouse settings.
When activating (or deactivating) costing for a
warehouse, a number of processes are performed
to ensure data consistency.
Select this to use the BOM costs held against the warehouse
for costing purposes for all stock items held in that warehouse.
| Setup | 17
Field
Values
Description
When you select this option, you use the Costing function of
the Warehouses for Stock Code program to define the BOM
costs to use for each warehouse.
If you do not select this option, then the BOM costs held
against each individual stock item are used for costing
purposes (Stock Code Maintenance).
In addition, if you do not select this option, then you will
be unable to process the cost implosion by warehouse
(Component Where-used).
Note:
You should use the Cost Implosion program to roll-up
costs before selecting this option.
Average
Select this to average out the unit cost of an item that is

received into stock. This is calculated as the average between
the new cost of the item and the existing cost of the item held
on file.
The average cost is calculated at the time the transaction is
processed. When a receipt is processed into a prior period, the
average cost is not recalculated.
Note:
If you want to switch from FIFO costing to Average
costing, then you must run the Balance function of the
Inventory Period End program and select the option:
Recalculate current cost from FIFO bucketsbefore
changing to average costing.
If you do not recalculate the current cost from FIFO
buckets before changing to average costing, then
there will be a difference between the Inventory
valuation and the General Ledger. You will need to
post manual journals to correct these discrepancies.
Standard
Select this to define a cost for each item and thereafter only
update this cost using the Cost Changes function of the
Inventory Movements program or using the Transfer BOM
Costs to Wh Costs program.
You typically select this option in a manufacturing environment
and when the costs of your items are relatively stable (i.e. not
subject to constant change).
Last cost
Select this if you want to value your inventory according to the

last cost that was entered for an item when it was received into
stock.
FIFO
Select this if you want all stock receipts to create a new FIFO
bucket and all issues/sales to be made from the oldest bucket
held on file.
You can only select this option if you selected the option: FIFO
valuation.
| Setup | 18
Field
Values
Description
Note:

warehouse. However, Floorstock items (Stock
Code Maintenance) stocked in the Floorstock
warehouse (WIP Setup) can have a negative
balance (see WIP Issue Floor Stock Allocations).
LIFO
Select this if you want all stock receipts to create a new LIFO
bucket and all issues/sales to be made from the newest bucket
held on file.
Note:
You cannot select this costing method if:
Do not calculate
average cost on
negative receipt
Costing per warehouse is selected.

FIFO valuation is selected.
Actual costing is selected.
Select this if you do not want the average cost of a stock item
to be recalculated when you post a negative receipt using the
Inventory Movements, Purchase Order Receipts or Job
Receipts programs.
If you do not select this option, then the average cost for a
stock item is recalculated only if the negative receipt does
not cause the quantity on hand for the stock item to become
negative.
Note:
Any variance between the current average cost and
the new cost entered is posted to the W/h variance
account configured against the warehouse (Inventory
Warehouses).
This option only applies if the costing method is defined as
Average at company level or against a specific warehouse. The
option is therefore only available if the Costing method is set to
Average, or if Costing per warehouse is selected.
Actual costing
Actual cost tracking (also known as item or batch specific

costing) can be set for lot traceable and/or batch serialized
items.
Note:
Actual Costing overrides any other costing method

defined, either by company or by warehouse. When
selected, Actual costing applies to all lot and/or
batch serialized items in Inventory.
Irrespective of your company costing method
and whether FIFO valuation is in place for all
warehouses, all actual costing items are processed
using FIFO costing at the detail level.
| Setup | 19
Field
Values
Description
Actual costing is only applied to new transactions
processed from the time you select this option.
Existing transactions are not changed.
Therefore, if you have stock on hand for an existing
stock code/warehouse combination, you will
be prompted to manually allocate these to cost
buckets.
Actual costing uses the FIFO valuation architecture to track
and process costs, so when you select to use actual costing,
the FIFO valuation option is automatically selected if it is not
already selected.
In addition, if you are currently not using FIFO costing at
company level and Costing by warehouse is selected, then the
following message is displayed:
"When the current costing method is not FIFO then the actual
cost bucket cost should be derived from:
Lot transaction value

Current inventory cost
This enables you to indicate whether the costs for the actual
costing buckets must be derived from the lot/serial transaction
value or the Inventory warehouse value. If a variance exists
between the actual cost value and the warehouse value, a
variance journal is created with transaction type "t".
Note:
Existing warehouses which use FIFO costing

will base the actual cost buckets on the lot/serial
transaction value.
If you are currently using FIFO costing at company
level and Costing by warehouse is not selected,
then this message is not displayed. The actual
cost buckets are based on the lot/serial transaction
values.
With actual costing, processing of the buckets is at stock code,

warehouse and lot/serial level as opposed to only stock code/
warehouse level. Buckets retain the original receipt quantities
to allow for accurate reversal of transactions when required.
You can indicate the number of days for which you want to
retain history of these buckets on the History tab of this setup
program.
When actual costing is selected, the system creates FIFO
buckets for each lot and/or batch serial number.
Actual costing is applied in every program in Inventory, Sales
and Work in Progress that depletes or adds to a FIFO bucket.
Actual costing is not applied to manuals serials.
None
Select this if you do not want to enable actual costing.
Lot traceable
Select this to use actual costing for all lot traceable items.
| Setup | 20
Field
Values
Description
This option is only available if the Lot Traceability module is
installed.
Note:
Costing by lot is only possible when manual lot

numbering is used (Lot Traceability Setup).
With Automatic lot numbering, you cannot process
two receipts into the same lot.
The FIFO buckets table is used to retain the history
of costs for affected items. This caters for the
situation where you receipt quantities for the same
lot from the supplier, but at different prices (due to
commodity price fluctuations).
When you select this option, the system performs the following
conversion procedure (see Actual Costing Conversion
Review):
Value the stock on hand for the item at the current valuation
method.
Remove the existing FIFO buckets.
Per lot on the lot detail table:
Batch serial
Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, and

Transfer In on the lot transaction table, recording the
cost from the transaction and the receipt date.
Process each negative transaction, running through the
FIFO buckets for that lot, until the transaction quantity is
used up, updating the issue date.
At the same time, other positive transactions are
processed, based on the issue date.
FIFO journals are written for tracking purposes.
Once all transactions are processed, a list of all the lots that
have been processed and the FIFO buckets / costs created
is displayed in the Actual Costing Conversion Review
program. You can redistribute these if required.
The final process of the conversion is to check the valuation
of each lot again and, if different from the initial value, to
post a variance.
The lot number is recorded in the Inventory Journal Detail
table and the Inventory Movements table for tracking
purposes.
Select this to apply actual costing to batch serialised items.

Note:
The following pre-requisites apply to setting actual
costing for batch serials:
If against any serialized stock item you selected:

Record serial numbers - During order entry (Stock
Code Maintenance - Tracking tab), then you need
to change these to Record serial numbers - During
receipt.
| Setup | 21
Field
Values
Description
With actual costing, serials must be captured at time
of receipt.
The option: Serial tracking system required must be
selected (Options tab).
If you are currently using serials, then before
selecting this option, you need to run the Serial File
Balance Report and ensure that all batch serials
are in balance.
When you select this option, the system performs the following
conversion procedure (see Actual Costing Conversion
Review):
Value the stock on hand for the item at the current valuation
method
Remove the existing FIFO buckets
Per batch serial on file:
Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, and

Transfer In on the serial transaction table, recording the
cost from the transaction and the receipt date.
Process each negative transaction, running through the
FIFO buckets for that serial, until the transaction quantity
is used up, updating the issue date.
At the same time, other positive transactions are
processed, based on the issue date.
FIFO journals are written for tracking purposes.
Once all transactions are processed, a list of all the
batch serials that have been processed and the FIFO
buckets / costs created is displayed in the Actual Costing
Conversion Review program. You can redistribute these if
required.
The final process of the conversion is to check the valuation
of each serial again and, if different from the initial value, to
post a variance.
The serial number is recorded in the Inventory Journal
Detail table and the Inventory Movements for tracking
purposes.
Note:
Auto depletion of
cost buckets
Actual costing does not apply to manual serials.
Select this to automatically deplete lots and/or serials when

processing multiple issues for the same lot/serial. The buckets
are depleted in bucket sequence.
If you do not select this option and more than one FIFO bucket
exists for the specific lot or serial, then you are prompted for
the bucket(s) from which to issue the quantity (see Actual
Cost Allocation).
Note:
This option only applies to issues in Work in

Progress and Inventory.
| Setup | 22
Field
Values
Description
Cost buckets used in Sales Orders are always autodepleted at the time the invoice or dispatch note is
generated. A credit note attached to an invoice or
a reversal of a dispatch note will automatically find
the buckets used for the original transaction and
reverse those.
Actual cost buckets are also automatically auto
depleted when processing a Transfer out of a
warehouse (especially since you can process a bulk
transfer out with apportionment from a Supply Chain
Transfer (SCT)).
This option is ignored when processing negative
allocations in Work in progress. A negative
allocation mimics a receipt and therefore a new
actual cost bucket is always created.
Record inventory
movements by
serial or lot
Select this to be able to view details of actual costs used in

Inventory movements and on lot or serial transactions.
If you do not select this option, then the unit cost displayed is
the warehouse cost based on the costing method applied to
that warehouse (Warehouse Maintenance).
In addition, if you select this option together with actual costing
for batch serials, then movement records are created per
serial. If this option is not selected, then a movement record is
create for the transaction.
Stock on hand
allowed to go
negative
Note:
Yes
Traceable, serialized, and ECC-controlled items will

not be allowed to go negative, regardless of your
warehouse settings.
Floorstock items stocked in the Floorstock
warehouse (WIP Setup) and Returnable items
(Stock Code Maintenance) will always be allowed
to go negative, regardless of your warehouse
settings.
If you select to apply automatic depletion and
multiple bins are in use, then the system will only
deplete available stock even if stock is allowed to
go negative, unless the option Negative on hand
deplete remainder from default bin (Depletion tab)
is selected and the conditions governing this option
are met.
If any warehouse is set to FIFO costing and/or you
selected FIFO valuation required, then you will be
unable to allow stock on hand to go negative in any
warehouse.
Select this to allow stock on hand to go negative at company

level.
If you select this option together with the option: Back orders
- Automatic (Sales Order Setup - General 3 tab), then items
| Setup | 23
Field
Values
Description
you place on backorder are automatically moved to ship by the
Sales Order Entry program.
No
Select this if stock is not allowed to go negative.
Dependent on w/h
list
Select this to indicate a specific list of warehouses in which

stock is allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.
List
You use this function to indicate a specific list of warehouses in

which stock is allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.
Dependent on w/h
range
Select this to indicate a range of warehouses in which stock is

allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.
Range
You use this function to indicate a range of warehouses in

which stock is allowed (or not allowed) to go negative.
Dependent on
warehouse
Select this to display an additional warehouse option that

allows you to indicate whether negative stock is allowed for the
warehouse.
Note:
Selecting this option does not activate negative stock
for the warehouse, it merely displays an additional
warehouse option that allows you to specify whether
negative stock is allowed for the warehouse.
You must select the Warehouse function and maintain
details against a warehouse for this option to take
effect.
Warehouse
You use this function to maintain specific warehouses for which

you want to allow stock to go negative.
Use Full goods in

Transit transfers
facility
Select this if you want to be able to monitor inter-warehouse

transfers generated from the Inventory Movements program,
as well as supply chain transfers generated from the Sales
Order Entry program.
Goods in Transit
You will need to select this option if you want to perform

Requisition Issues and/or Transfers (Purchase Orders Setup Requisition tab).
Note:
Any stock transfers that are still in process should

be completed before you enable/disable this
feature.
If the program detects that warehouse transfers are
currently in progress, a window is displayed with the
option to either run the Warehouse Exception or to
run the GIT Conversion Program program.
| Setup | 24
Field
Values
Description
Running the Warehouse Exception will
highlight where there are unfinished transfers
that need to be addressed.
Running the GIT Conversion Program program
will convert existing warehouse transfers to
Goods in Transit transfers.
A Conversion function is displayed if you save your
selection to use the full goods in transit transfers
facility, but have not yet addressed the issue of
stock transfers currently in process.
Use sales order

description for
stock items
originating from
SCT
Select this to allow the description of an item that is in transit

(or which has been transferred) to be obtained from the
originating Supply Chain Transfer. This is typically useful for
customers who regularly change the description of items being
transferred through the Supply Chain Transfer process, and
need to see this description at all times.
When this option is enabled, any use of the stock description is
obtained by tracing the appropriate information in the relevant
sales order reprint file (the transfer can originate from a sales
order or a dispatch) and using that description if found. If the
reprint has not been retained, then the inventory description is
used.
Save
Select this to save the selections you made on all the tab
pages and to exit the program.
Print
Select this to print a report of your Inventory module setup

options.
It is advisable to keep this report for disaster recovery
purposes.
Cancel
Select this to exit the program without saving any changes you
made.
Help
Select this to view the latest online Help documentation for this
program.
Options
Field
Values
Description
Aged inventory
valuation required
Select this if you want to print an Inventory Initial Aged

Valuation report of stock quantities over the last five years.
Miscellaneous
options
Update last cost if Select this if you want the last cost entered for a receipt to be
standard costing in held separately from the standard inventory cost.
use
Note:
| Setup | 25
Field
Values
Description
This option only applies if the costing method is defined
as Standard at company level or against a specific
warehouse (Inventory Warehouses). The option is
therefore only available if the Costing method is set to
Standard, or if Costing per warehouse is selected.
Include nonSelect this if you want to add the calculated cost multiplier
merchandise costs value to the receipt cost of an item when using the Inventory
in last cost
Movements program to process a Receipt or a GIT Transfer
In.
GIT Transfers only apply if you selected the option: Use Full
goods in Transit transfers facility (General tab).
If you do not select this option, then the cost multiplier defined
against the item (Warehouses for Stock Code) is ignored and
its value is not reflected in the Last cost of the item.
Note:
If you select this option, then you must also select the
option: Apply cost multiplier when processing receipts
to include the cost multiplier in the last cost of the item.
Serial tracking
system required
Select this if you want to record serial number information

when processing transactions for serialized stock items.
Same serial to be
used for multiple
stock codes
Select this if you want to allow the same serial numbers to be

used for different stock codes when accepting items into stock.
If you select this option, then when you receipt a batch
serialized item, you can enter a serial number that already
exists against another stock code. If the option Multiple batch
serial receipts allowed is not selected, then the existing serial
number must be stocked in the warehouse in which you are
processing the current receipt. If the option Multiple batch serial
receipts allowed is selected, then the existing serial number
can be applied even if it is not currently stocked in the current
warehouse. If the stock code is a manual serialized item then
you can enter a serial number that exists against another
manual serialized stock code regardless of the warehouse
in which it is stocked. If this option is not selected, then you
cannot enter a serial number that already exists against
another stock code regardless of whether the stock code is
manual or batch serialized or irrespective of your selection at
the option: Multiple batch serial receipts allowed.
If this option is not selected then you will not be able to receipt
reserved serials into an alternate stock code from inspection
(see WIP Inspection Maintenance).
Note:
You must not select this option if you require your
stock items to be assigned unique serial numbers at
company level.
| Setup | 26
Field
Values
Description
This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Serial
tracking system required.
Retain all serial

information after
negative receipt
Select this if you want to retain the history of header and

transaction details for manual serial numbers against which
a negative receipt has been processed. A negative receipt
is typically processed when reversing a receipt that was
processed against the incorrect serial number.
If you do not select this option, then serial history is removed if
the only other transaction for the serial was a receipt. (i.e. the
system assumes you are reversing a receipt done against an
incorrect serial number).
Note:
If you select this option, then you will be unable to reuse the serial number for the same stock item.
This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Serial
tracking system required.
Apply cost
multiplier when
processing
receipts
Select this if, when processing a receipt, you want to be able to

specify a portion of the transaction value that comprises nonmerchandise costs and to store these values in nominated
ledger accounts.
This option enables you to maintain accurate inventory costs
per warehouse for merchandise received into stock.
Note:
You must select this option if:
Supplier/stock
code interchange
system required
you intend using the full Goods in Transit transfers

facility and you want to apply a cost multiplier for
items which are transfer supplied.
you selected the option: Include non-merchandise
costs in last cost to include the cost multiplier value
in the last cost of an item
Select this if you want to be able to alternate between entering

a SYSPRO stock code or the supplier's catalogue number
during Purchase Order Entry.
If you select this option, and you purchase a non-stocked item
from a supplier, the system automatically creates an entry in
the supplier/stock code interchange file (Supplier/Stock Code
Details).
Multiple batch
serial receipts
allowed
If you select this option, then a batch serial number that exists
against a stock code in one warehouse can be receipted
against the same stock code in another warehouse.
If this option is not selected then a batch serial can only exist
in one warehouse and subsequent receipts against the serial
number must occur in the warehouse in which it is stocked.
| Setup | 27
Field
Values
Description
Allow blank list

price codes
Select this if you do not require a List price code to be assigned

to a stocked item.
Note:
If you are retaining a history of price changes (see
History tab) then capturing a stock item without
associating it to a price code will result in no price
history being created for that item.
Validate product
classes
Select this if you want to validate the product classes that you
assign to stock items using the Stock Code Maintenance
program. The product classes are validated against the
SALPDS/SalProductClassDes file/table (see Product
Classes).
This option is ignored by the Sales Order Import and EDI
Sales Order Lines programs as a valid product class must be
defined against each line. Lines with invalid product classes
are ignored by the export/import processes.
Allow backflush of
bought out items
Select this to indicate that you want to be able to backflush a

bought out item and issue any attached materials and labor.
A bought out item typically refers to an item that you purchase.
However, sometimes these items can be made-in so quickly
that there is no need to set up a job.
Alternatively, some companies initially purchase items but
are responsible for warranty and service jobs on the item
(e.g. appliances). These companies typically want to issue
components and labor for the service without the overhead of
maintaining a full manufacturing system.
Record
movements for bin
transfers
Select this if you want to include bin transfers when retaining

transaction movements processed for a stock item.
You indicate whether you want to retain movements for a stock
item within the Stock Code Maintenance program (Stock
Code Details).
If you do not select this option, then the bin transfer transaction
can be printed on the Inventory Journal Report, but no
movement is created.
This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Multiple
bins (Options tab).
Allow creation
of bins when
processing
inventory
transactions
Select this if you want enable the automatic creation of new

bins (i.e. without using the Inventory Bin Maintenance
program) when a non-existent bin is supplied against a
transaction.
Note:
Bins are not automatically created when processing
negative inventory transactions (e.g. a negative
Receipt).
| Setup | 28
Field
Values
Description
If you do not select this option, then operators can only
enter existing bins when processing the following types of
transactions:
Bin transfers
Receipts (with single and multiple bin entry) from the
Inventory, Purchase Order and Work in Progress modules
Expense issues
Normal warehouse transfers (Out)
Immediate transfers
Stock take imports
Stock take capture
Backflushing
Adjustments
Job issues, when issuing a negative allocation
This option is only enabled if you selected the option: Multiple

bins (Options tab).
If you do not select this option, then you will be unable to
maintain (add, change, delete) bins by:
Selecting the Multiple Bins option from the Query menu of

the Inventory Query program.
Selecting the Show option from the Multiple bins field in the
Inventory Query program.
This setup option does not apply to running the Inventory Bin
Maintenance program standalone.
Apply operator
access control
to destination
warehouse on
transfers OUT
Select this if you want to restrict access to the destination

warehouse when performing a warehouse transfer out using
the Inventory Movements program, or when processing a
supply chain transfer using the Sales Order Entry program.
If you select this option then the system checks the warehouse
security access settings and prevents the operator from
processing supply chain transfers if that operator has been
denied access to the target warehouse (Operators - Access
tab).
Similarly, the operator is prevented from processing a
warehouse transfer out if access is denied to the destination
warehouse.
Inventory cost to
be held in a unit
of measure other
than stocked
Select this to enable inventory costs to be held in a unit of

measure other than the stocking unit of measure. You define
the applicable cost unit of measure when adding stock items
using the Stock Code Maintenance program.
Note:
You cannot select this option if FIFO Valuation is
selected or if your costing method is set to FIFO or
LIFO (General tab).
| Setup | 29
Field
Values
Description
Negative quantity
Select this if you want inventory valuations to include negative
on hand to be
values owing to a negative on hand quantity. This will decrease
included in
the total value of stock.
Inventory Valuation
Request ledger
Select this if you want the ledger code to be requested and
codes for inventory used as the distribution entry when processing inventory
transactions
transactions.
Define Options
You use this function to selectively indicate the inventory

transactions for which you want the ledger code to be
requested (see Ledger Code Options).
Disallow single
warehouse
selection during
period end
Select this if you require all warehouses to be processed when

running the Balance or Month end functions of the Inventory
Period End program (i.e. you will be unable to select a specific
warehouse to process).
Note:
In order to finalize an Inventory month end and
increment the current month number, all warehouses
must be selected for processing.
Set up stock code

deletion options
Select this if you want to define conditions under which a stock

code can be deleted.
Typically, if you do not define stock code deletion options here,
then you will be unable to delete a stock code if ANY of the
following conditions apply:
operations are held against the stock item

the stock item is a parent part in a bill of materials structure
the stock item is a component part in a bill of materials
structure
there are outstanding purchase orders for the stock item
there are outstanding sales orders for the stock item
there is an on hand quantity of the stock item in any
warehouse
movements exist for the item in the current or two prior
periods
warehouse records exist for the item
the stock item is defined as traceable
a stock take is in progress affecting any warehouse to which
the stock item has been assigned
the stock item is attached to a customer/stock code cross
reference
the stock item is attached to a supplier/stock code cross
reference
However, you can use this option to selectively override

conditions under which a stock item can be deleted. These
conditions can be set using the Delete Stock Code Options
function.
| Setup | 30
Field
Values
Description
Define Delete
Options
This function enables you to define the conditions under

which a stock code may be deleted (see Delete Stock Code
Options).
FIFO/LIFO
options
Print FIFO journals Select this if you want to print FIFO journals.
If you do not select this option, then the journals are still
created, but they are not printed. This does not prevent FIFO
journals from being displayed in the Journal Entries listview of
the Inventory Movements program.
n the Inventory Movements program, there is no facility to
suppress FIFO journals from the Journal entries listview
Note:
You can only select this option if FIFO Valuation is
required, without FIFO costing.
Balance lots from
most recent FIFO
bucket
Select this if you require adjustments to lots to be made

from the most recent FIFO bucket when running the Balance
function of the Inventory Period End program.
Note:
You can select this option only if you indicated that
FIFO valuation is required (General tab).
Use zero cost

bucket for returns
Select this option if you want to be able to process a zero cost

transaction when returning stock to a FIFO/LIFO bucket that
has a zero unit cost. The returned quantity is added to the
FIFO/LIFO bucket, but the unit cost of the bucket remains
unaffected.
If you do not select this option, then the return of stock to a
FIFO/LIFO bucket with a zero cost will create a new FIFO/LIFO
bucket with the returned quantity at the current warehouse
cost.
Stock returns are typically made via a sales order credit note or
an inventory transaction such as a negative issue or a positive
adjustment.
The Stock Take Confirmation program updates FIFO/LIFO
buckets according to your selection at this option.
Note:
You can enable this option only if you indicated that
FIFO costing or LIFO costing is required (General tab).
Recalculate
current cost from
FIFO buckets
Note:
You can enable these options only if you indicated that
FIFO costing is required (General tab).
| Setup | 31
Field
Values
Description
During period end

balance function
Select this to enable the equivalent option within the Balance

function of the Inventory Period End program.
If you select this option during the Balance function, the total
value of the FIFO buckets and the total quantity is accumulated
and used to calculate the new current cost of the item.
When changing w/
h costing method
from FIFO
This option applies when the costing method of a warehouse is

changed from FIFO to any other method.
Select this if you want to re-calculate the current warehouse
cost for each item with a non-zero quantity on hand, based on
the FIFO buckets. The value of each FIFO bucket is calculated
and accumulated into a FIFO total value. This is then divided
by the warehouse stock on hand to get the new current cost for
the warehouse.
If you do not select this option, then the current warehouse cost
is not updated.
Stock take
variance
Percentage
Select this for the detection and subsequent reporting on

variances during a stock take to be based on the percentage
entered at the Maximum permitted stock take variance field
below.
Variance
Select this for the detection and subsequent reporting on

variances during a stock take to be based on the fixed quantity
entered at the Maximum permitted stock take variance field
below.
Maximum
permitted
You use this field to indicate the cut-off percentage (or quantity)
according to which variances detected during a stock take can
be reported on using the Inventory Stock Take Variance
Report report and queried using the Stock Take Query
program.
The Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report can be
used to print items only where the captured quantity differs
from the original quantity on hand by the percentage or quantity
variance specified here. You can also select to display these
items in the Stock Take Query program.
Note:
If you enter zero in this field, then no variance checking
is performed (i.e. zero does not mean no variance is
acceptable).
Therefore, variances are only calculated if this field is
non-zero.
For example: If you enter zero in this field, then when
you run the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report
report and select: Only print exception lines, no details
are printed as the exception check is not performed.
| Setup | 32
Field
Values
Description
Similarly, if you enter zero in this field, then when you
select to display only exceptions in the Stock Take
Query program, no stock items are displayed in the
listview.
Default
You use this field to indicate the default unit of measure applied
when capturing stock items (i.e. Stocking, alternate and other).
Unit of measure
Ledger Code Options

You use the Define Options function to selectively indicate the inventory transactions for which you want
the ledger code to be requested.
This function is enabled when you select the option: Request ledger codes for inventory transactions.
Field
Values
Description
Receipts
Select this if you want a ledger code to be requested when

processing an inventory receipt transaction.
Request ledger
code for
Note:
This excludes purchase order receipts which are
defined separately. (See Purchase order receipts
options below).
Adjustments

processing an inventory adjustment transaction.
Issues

processing an inventory issue transaction or an issue
from stores requisitions (Requisition Stores Issues and
Transfers).
Cost modifications

processing an inventory cost modification transaction.
Cost changes

processing an inventory cost change transaction.
Physical

processing an inventory physical transaction.
Stock transfers

processing an inventory stock transfer transaction.
Purchase order
receipts
Select this option if you want to define the ledger code options
for purchase order receipts.
When you select this option, the following options are enabled:
Debits (Non stocked)

Credits
| Setup | 33
Field
Values
Description
Non merchandise
Debits (Non
stocked)
Select this if you want be able to change the default ledger

code (typically an expense account), when processing the
receipt of a non stocked item (see Purchase Order Receipt
and Purchase Order Inspection).
Credits
Select this if you want to be able to change the default ledger

code (typically the GRN suspense account), when processing
the receipt of a stocked item or accepting an item from
inspection into stock (see Purchase Order Receipt and
Purchase Order Inspection).
Non merchandise
Select this if you want to be able to change the default ledger

code when processing a non merchandise receipt (NonMerchandise Distribution)
Allow change of
ledger code in
backflushing
Select this if you want to be able to override the default WIP

control account when processing a backflushing transaction.
Close
Select this to accept your selections and to return to the

previous screen. You must select the Save function to save
your selections.
Delete Stock Code Options

You use the Define Delete Options function to define the conditions under which a stock code may be
deleted.
This function is enabled when you select the option: Set up stock code deletion options.
Field
Values
Description
Used in a
configuration
Select this if the Product Configurator module is installed and

you want to be able to delete a stock code that has been used
in a product configuration.
Customer/stock
code cross
reference
Select this if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and

you want to be able to delete a stock code against which there
exists a customer/stock code cross reference.
Supplier/stock
code cross
reference
Select this if the Accounts payable module is installed, the

supplier/stock code interchange system is set to required
(Inventory Setup - Options tab), and you want to be able to
delete a stock code against which a supplier/stock code cross
reference exists.
ECC drawing
register
Select this if Engineering Change Control is installed and you

want to be able to delete a stock code against which a valid
drawing number exists.
Delete stock code
| Setup | 34
Field
Values
Description
Part of a bill
of landed cost
tracking
Select this if you want to be able to delete a stock code against

which there exists a bill of landed costs.
Temporary stock
code has sales
order details and/
or purchase order
details
Select this if you want to be able to delete temporary stock

codes that are associated with sales and/or purchase orders
providing that there are no quantities outstanding.
On partial or full
hold
Select this if you want to be able to delete a stock code that is

on hold.
Close

previous screen. You must select the Save function to save
your selections.
History
Field
Values
Description
Sales
Select this if you want sales history quantities to include the

value of stock that has been sold, but not the value of stock
that has been issued.
Issues
Select this if you want sales history quantities to include the

value of stock that has been issued, but not the value of stock
that has been sold.
Sales and Issues
Select this if you want sales history quantities to include both

the value of stock that has been sold and the value of stock
that has been issued.
Inventory Journals
You use this field to indicate the number of months for which
you want to retain your Inventory journals.
Sales history
qty's to include
Number of
months to retain
This determines the number of months for which you can

reprint the Inventory Journal Report and the Inventory GL
Distribution reports.
These journals are deleted when next you run the Purge
function of the Inventory Period End program, if they have
been held on file for at least the number of months entered
here and they meet all the criteria for deletion (see Purge).
The minimum number of months for which you can retain
information is one month. Enter 99 to retain these journals
indefinitely.
If the Inventory module is linked to the general Ledger
(General Ledger Integration), then you need to retain
| Setup | 35
Field
Values
Description
inventory journals for as long as you want to be able to zoom
on them from the General Ledger.
Documents
You use this field to indicate the number of months for which
you want to retain inventory documents.
Printed inventory documents are deleted when you run the
Purge function of the Inventory Period End program, if they
have been held on file for at least the number of months
entered here.
Inventory documents include: inventory receipts, issues,
transfers out and purchase order receipts.
Enter 99 to retain these documents indefinitely.
Note:
The default number of months to retain document print
transactions is set to zero (0). Unless this is changed,
all document print information is deleted when the
Purge function of the Inventory Period End program is
run.
Number of G/L
periods to retain
Goods in Transit
entries
You use this field to indicate the number of General Ledger

periods for which you want to retain completed goods in transit
detail lines.
Completed goods in transit detail lines are deleted when you
run the Purge function of the Inventory Period End program
if they have been held on file for more than the number of
periods entered here.
The minimum number of periods for which you can retain this
information is three (3) months. Enter 99 to retain these entries
indefinitely.
Note:
This option is only enabled if you selected the option:
Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (General
tab).
Purge movement
records
Note:
In a SQL environment, movement records are purged
faster if you select the By date option here.
By date
Select this to define the maximum number of days that

movements must be retained for each stock code/warehouse
combination.
By number
Select this to define the maximum number of movements to be

retained for each stock code/warehouse combination.
Maximum age of
You use this field to indicate either the maximum number of
records to maintain movement records you want to retain for each stock code/
| Setup | 36
Field
Values
Description
warehouse combination, or the maximum number of days that
movements must be retained for each stock code/warehouse
combination.
If you selected to purge movement records By date, then the
transaction date against each movement is compared to the
company date at the time you run the Purge function of the
Inventory Period End program. If the age difference between
these two dates is greater than the Maximum age of records to
maintain, then the movement record is deleted.
If you selected to purge movement records By number, then
at the time you run the Purge function of the Inventory Period
End program, the number of movement records is counted for
each stock code/warehouse combination. If this count exceeds
the maximum number of records you are retaining, then the
excess records are deleted, starting from the oldest record.
Note:
An entry of 99999 indicates that movement records
must be retained indefinitely. An entry of (0) zero
indicates that all movement records must be deleted
when next you run the Purge function of the Inventory
Period End program.
Stock balances
Retain last 12
months opening
stock balances
You must select this option if:
you want to be able to print a Kardex Report as the report

requires opening balances for each warehouse and stock
code.
you want to print Inventory Valuation report for previous
month 1 and 2. The Month end option of the Inventory
Period End program updates the month end balances
against all warehouses for each stock code.
you want to be able to post Adjustments, Bin Transfers and
Expense Issues transactions to a previous posting month
(Inventory Movements).
Price change
history
Retain history of
price changes
Select this if you want to retain a history of all changes made to

the price or the price basis of an item. This information can be
printed using the Price History Report program.
Note:
If you are allowing blank price list codes (see Options
tab) then capturing a stock item without associating it to
a price code will result in no price history being created
for that item.
No of days to
retain price history
You use this field to indicate the number of days or months

for which you want to retain a history of changes made to the
selling price or to the price basis of an item.
| Setup | 37
Field
Values
Description
Note:
If you select the option: History retention is
expressed in months then the number entered here is
taken to represent months and not days.
Price history data is deleted by the Purge function of
theInventory Period End program when the number of days
or months that you are retaining this information is exceeded.
Enter 999 to retain this information indefinitely. Enter (0) zero
if you want to delete all price history records dated prior to the
date on which you run the Purge function of the Inventory
Period End program.
History retention
is expressed in
months
Select this to take the values entered at the No of days to

retain price history and the No of days to retain buckets
with zero quantity to represent months and not days.
FIFO Buckets
No of days to
This enables you to indicate the number of days or months
retain buckets with for which you want to retain FIFO buckets that have a zero
zero quantity
quantity. This enables you to reduce the number of entries
retained.
Note:
If you select the option: History retention is
expressed in months then the number entered here is
taken to represent months and not days.
Retaining buckets for a period of time makes reversals back to
specific buckets easier.
This option applies regardless of whether actual costing is in
use.
Enter 9999 to retain this information indefinitely.
FIFO buckets are deleted when you run the Purge function of
the Inventory Period End program if:
Prior Year End

Dates
they have a zero quantity

and
the number of days or months between the current
company date and the bucket's last issue date is greater
than the days or months specified here.
Select this to specify the last five year end dates for the
Inventory module.
Prior Year End Dates

You use the Prior Year End Dates function to specify the last five year end dates for the Inventory module.
Field
Year prior
Values
Description
This column displays the prior year number.
| Setup | 38
Field
Values
Description
Year end date
This column displays the year end date defined for the relative
prior year.
Define Year End

Dates
Select this to define the year end date for the currently
highlighted prior year.
OK
Select this to accept the information you entered and to return

to the previous screen. You must select the Save function to
save your selections.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any information you entered and to return

to the previous screen.
Change Prior Year End

You use the Define Year End Dates function to define the year end date for the currently highlighted prior
year.
Field
Values
Description
Year end date
You use this field to enter the year end date for the selected
prior year.
OK
Select this to accept the date you entered and to return to the
previous screen.
Cancel
Select this to ignore the date you entered and to return to the
previous screen.
Periods
Field
Values
Description
Current year
Change Current
Select this to maintain the period end dates for the current
year, and control how information is posted to the Inventory
module.
The control of information posted is achieved by defining the
access status (i.e. Open or closed) for the current and previous
two periods. A status of open allows postings to be made to the
period, while a status of closed prevents further postings from
being made to the period.
Note:
Postings cannot be made to a future period, regardless
of whether the period is open or closed.
Period
This column displays the period to which the end date and
status relate for the current year.
End date
This column displays the period end dates defined for each
period in the current year.
Status
This column indicates whether or not posting can currently be

made to the period.
| Setup | 39
Field
Values
Description
A status of open allows postings to be made to the period,
while a status of closed prevents further postings from being
made to the period.
Previous year
Change Previous
Select this to maintain the period end date and access status
for the selected period for the previous year.
Period
This column displays the periods for the previous year.
End date
This column displays the period end dates defined for each
period for the previous year.
Status
This column indicates whether or not posting can currently be

made to the period.
Current month
This indicates the period your Inventory module is currently in.
Current Year
You use the Change Current function to define the period end dates for the current year.
Field
Values
Period end date
Description
You use this field to indicate the period end date for the
selected period.
Period is
Open
Select this to allow postings to be made to the period.

Note:
Within a sub-ledger only the current and previous two
periods can be defined as open.
Closed
Select this to prevent further postings from being made to the

period.
Note:
If you generally post only to the current month, then
you may find it useful to select the option: Close
previous month automatically (Company Setup Options tab).
This enables you to close a sub-ledger's month
automatically once you have completed the month end
function within the relevant module.
OK
Select this to set the end date and status for the selected
period and to return to the previous screen.
Cancel

Previous Year
You use the Change Previous function to define the period end dates for the previous year.
| Setup | 40
Field
Values
Period end date
Description
You use this field to indicate the period end date for the
selected period.
Period is
Open
Select this to allow postings to be made to the period.

Note:
You can only define the current and previous two
periods as open.
Closed
Select this to prevent further postings from being made to the

period.
OK
Select this to set the end date and status for the selected
period and to return to the previous screen.
Cancel

User Defined
Field
Values
Desc for fields

against stock
codes
Description
The wording you assign to these fields is the wording displayed
in entry/display forms.
Field 1-5
You use these fields to specify your own descriptions for

additional stock code fields that can be configured within the
Stock Codes program.
These fields can be used to store any extra information you
require for the stock item.
Descriptions for
fields against
warehouses
Field 1-3

additional warehouse fields that can be configured when
using the Warehouses for Stock Code program to maintain
warehouse details for stock items.
These fields can be used to store any extra warehouse
information you require for the stock item.
Descriptions for
alternate keys
Alternate key 1-2

alternate keys.
These fields can be used to change the sequence in which you
want to browse on stock codes.
Documents
| Setup | 41
Field
Values
Document
selections
Description
Note:
On the History tab, you can define the number of
months for which you want to retain these documents
before they are deleted by the Purge function of the
Inventory Period End program.
Receipts
No document
Select this if you do not need to print receipt documents.
Batch only
Select this to enable the printing of receipt documents in batch

mode only.
Online and batch
Select this to enable the printing of receipt documents online

and in batch mode.
Issues
No document
Select this if you do not need to print issue documents.
Batch only
Select this to enable the printing of issue documents in batch

mode only.
Online and batch
Select this to enable the printing of issue documents online and

in batch mode.
Transfers out
No document
Select this if you do not need to print transfers out documents.
Batch only
Select this to enable the printing of transfers out documents in

batch mode only.
Online and batch
Select this to enable the printing of transfers out documents

online and in batch mode.
P/O receipts
Select this to enable the printing of Purchase Order receipt

documents and receipts in from LCT.
No document
Select this if you do not need to print purchase order receipt

documents.
Batch only
Select this to enable the printing of purchase order receipt

documents in batch mode only.
Online and batch
Select this to enable the printing of purchase order receipt

documents online and in batch mode.
Note:
If you select this option and you are using multiple bins,
then you can only capture a single bin per receipt in the
Purchase Order Receipts program.
Inspections
| Setup | 42
Field
Values
Description
No document
Select this if you do not need to print inspection documents.
Batch only
Select this to enable the printing of inspection documents in

batch mode only.
Online and batch
Select this to enable the printing of inspection documents

online and in batch mode.
Include inspection
items in inventory
document receipts
Select this if you want to print inspection items on-line when

receipting an item into stock.
Default number
of decimals in
alignments
You use this field to indicate the maximum number of decimals

that must be printed when aligning your pre-printed stationery.
Values
Description
Inventory
document
receipts
Stationery
alignments
Current Month
Field
Year selection
This indicates the calendar year in which your current financial

year ends.
You can change this only if no active data is held within either
the inventory journal file or the inventory FIFO file.
Month selection
This indicates the month in which your company is running, in

relation to the start of your financial year. You can change this
only if no active data is held within either the inventory journal
file or the inventory FIFO file.
Number of
months per year
This indicates the number of accounting periods per year as

defined at company level (Company Setup).
Depletion
Field
Apply automatic
depletion in
Values
Description
Note:
For traceable items which do not allow issues from
multiple lots:
the Job Issues program searches for the first lot

that can fully satisfy the requirement, failing which
the kit quantity is reduced to the quantity that can be
manufactured using the lot with the highest quantity.
If accepted, the quantity to manufacture on the job
header is reduced to this figure.
| Setup | 43
Field
Values
Description
the Sales Order Entry program searches for the
first lot that can fully satisfy the requirement, failing
which the entire ship quantity is placed on back
order.
Kit issues
Select this to deplete lots and bins automatically when

processing a Kit issue (Job Issues). Stock is issued from the
oldest, smallest lots and/or bins first.
Automatic depletion can be applied to Specific issues by
selecting the Preference: Auto deplete lots and bins (Job
Issues)
Sales orders
Select this to deplete lots and bins automatically in Sales Order

entry, Return Merchandise, Dispatch Notes and Back Order
Release. Stock is issued from the oldest, smallest lots and/or
bins first.
When you select this option, the Point of Sale option below is
automatically selected.
Point of Sale
Select this to deplete lots and bins automatically Point of Sale

entry. Stock is issued from the oldest, smallest lots and/or bins
first.
Negative on hand - Select this if you want the quantity for which there is insufficient
deplete remainder stock available to be depleted from the default bin for items
from default bin
shipped in Sales Orders and items kit issued in Work in
Progress.
This only applies if:
the item is not defined as serialized, lot traceable or ECC

controlled (Stock Code Maintenance)
and
the default bin exists for the stock item and stock is
available in one of the bins against the stock item
a non-blank default bin exists for the warehouse from which
the stock is to be issued
In addition, all of the following options must be enabled:
Multiple bins (General tab)

Automatic depletion (Depletion tab)
Stock on hand allowed to go negative (General tab)
Stock is first depleted from the bins with available stock and the
remainder is then depleted from the default bin. This can cause
the a negative on hand quantity in the default bin.
You would typically select this option if you enabled negative
inventory and want to use automatic depletion to release or
issue items (regardless of their stock level) for which you do
not require a movement record through the system.
| Setup | 44
Field
Values
Description
Receipt date
Select this to deplete lots according to the earliest date that a

lot was received into stock.
Expiry date
Select this to deplete lots according to the earliest lot expiry

date.
Values
Description
Bin
Select this to default to browsing on multiple bins in bin number

sequence.
Receipt date
Select this to default to browsing on multiple bins according to

the date on which items were received into the bin.
Display price and

quantities
Select this if you want to display prices and quantities when

browsing on stock codes.
Filter stock code

based on operator
access list
Select this to restrict the viewing of stock items to those

warehouses that the operator has been authorized to access.
Against the operator, you must select the Filter in reports and
browses warehouse option and define a list of warehouses to
which access is either allowed or disallowed.
Automatic
depletion of lots
by
Browse
Field
Multiple bin
browse default
sequence
Stock code
browse options
This option applies only to the stock code browse, and is used
to reduce the number of stock codes shown. It does not apply
to the "Find" (Stock Codes) which checks operator access
either on the warehouse to use, or on the single warehouse if
necessary. It does not prevent the stock code being "found",
simply the display of the warehouse information.
Note:
Selecting this option may adversely affect the
performance of SYSPRO when browsing on stock
items.
Default
warehouse for
displaying qty's
Standard
Select this to use the default warehouse defined against the

operator to display quantities when browsing on stock items.
| Setup | 45
Field
Values
Description
If this is blank, then the program uses the default warehouse
defined against the company. If this is blank, then the program
uses the warehouse defined at the Warehouse to use field
against the stock item.
Operator default
Select this to use the warehouse defined against the operator

(Operators) to display quantities when browsing on stock
items.
Company default
Select this to use the warehouse defined against the company

(Company Setup) to display quantities when browsing on
stock items.
Warehouse to use
Select this to use the warehouse defined at the Warehouse

to use field against the stock item to display quantities when
browsing on stock items.
Distribution
warehouse to use
Select this to use the warehouse defined at the Distribution

warehouse to use field against the stock item to display
quantities when browsing on stock items.
Regular
Select this to display the quantity available in each period,

taking into account supply and demand.
Cumulative
Select this to add each period's regular ATP figure to the next
period and display a cumulative figure.
Show warehouse
values for multiple
companies
Select this if you want to be able to view Warehouse Values

and Warehouse History for multiple companies in the
Default ATP
presentation
Inventory Query
When you select this option, the Multiple Company Values

option is enabled in the Inventory Query program.
You use the Define List of Companies option to indicate the
companies for which you want to view these values.
Note:
This option will only work when the database format is
the same for all companies (i.e. all C-ISAM or all SQL).
Define List of
Companies
Select this to indicate the companies for which you want to

view Warehouse Values and Warehouse History values in the
Company List Selection

This screen is displayed when you select the Define List of Companies to indicate the companies for which
you want to view Warehouse Values and Warehouse History values in the Inventory Query program.
| Setup | 46
Field
Values
File
Description
Select this to exit the program.
Accept and Close
Select this to save your selections and to return to the previous

screen.
Cancel Any
Changes
Select this to ignore any changes you made and to return to

the previous screen.
Accept and Close
Select this to save your selections and to return to the previous

screen.
Cancel

Available
Companies
This listview displays the companies currently available for

selection.
Assign Selected
Select this to assign the company(ies) currently highlighted in

this listview to the Selected Companies listview.
You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys together with your mouse
pointer to individually highlight the companies you want to
assign.
Assign All
Selected
Companies
Select this to assign all companies displayed in this listview to

the Selected Companies listview.
This listview displays the companies for which you want to
Remove Selected
Select this to remove the company(ies) currently highlighted in

this listview from your list of companies for which you want to
pointer to individually highlight items you want to remove.
Remove All
Select this to remove all items in this listview from your list of
companies for which you want to view Warehouse Values and
Warehouse History values in the Inventory Query program.
Values
Description
Next stock receipt

document
You use this field to indicate the number that will be assigned
to the next document printed to record the receipt into stock of
an item using the Inventory Movements program.
Numbering
Field
Document
numbering
Note:
This number is assigned only if the option to generate
the next document number is enabled for your Stock
receipts document format.
| Setup | 47
Field
Values
Description
Next issue
document
to the next document printed to record the issue of items for
miscellaneous purposes using the Inventory Movements
program.
Note:
the next document number is enabled for your Issue
document format.
Next transfer out

document
to the next document printed to record the transfer of items
between warehouses using the Inventory Movements
program.
Note:
the next document number is enabled for your transfer
out document format.
Inspection
print document
numbering
Next inspection
print document
This indicates the reference number that will be used for the
next inspection document to be printed.
This number is automatically updated by the system each
time you print a new inspection document using the Purchase
Order Inspection program.
Next rejection print This indicates the reference number that will be used for the
document
next rejection note document to be printed.
This number is automatically updated by the system each time
you print a new rejection note document using the Purchase
Next scrapped
print document
This indicates the reference number that will be used for the
next scrap note document to be printed.
This number is automatically updated by the system each time
you print a new scrap note document using the Purchase
Goods in Transit
Reference
Manual
Select this to enter a GIT Reference number manually

whenever you process an inter-warehouse or supply chain
transfer of goods.
Company
Select this to assign the next GIT Reference number

automatically, according to your entry at the Next reference
field.
| Setup | 48
Field
Values
Description
Note:
You can select this option only if the key type of
the GIT Reference field is configured to be numeric
(Company Setup).
Next reference
You use this field to indicate the GIT Reference number that
will be used when next you process an inter-warehouse or
supply chain transfer of goods.
This number is incremented by one (1) each time you process
a transfer of stock into transit.
Note:
You can enter a reference here only if you indicated
that the system must generate the next number at
company level (i.e. If you selected the By company
option at the Goods in Transit Reference field).
By warehouse
Select this to assign the next GIT Reference number

automatically, according to the numbering method defined
against the source warehouse (Inventory Warehouses).
Note:
You can select this option only if the key type of
the GIT Reference field is configured to be numeric
(Company Setup).
By warehouse with prefix
Select this to assign the next GIT Reference automatically,

according to the numbering method defined against the source
warehouse, together with a two character prefix (Inventory
Warehouses).
Note:
You can select this option only if the key type of the
GIT Reference field is configured to be alphanumeric
(Company Setup).
Manual serial
number tracking
Tracking of manual serial numbers enables you to create

sequential ranges of manual serial numbers.
The serial number can be created according to the Prefix and
Next suffix defined either against the company or against each
individual serialized stock item.
For example:
You define the Prefix as A1 and the Next suffix as 001.
You create a range of three manual serial numbers. The serial
numbers are generated as: A1001, A1002, A1003. The next
range of manual serials numbers created will begin with A1004.
These options are only enabled if:
The option: Serial tracking system required (Inventory

Setup - Options tab) is selected.
| Setup | 49
Field
Values
Description
The Key type for Serial number is set to Alphanumeric
(Company Setup - Key Types tab).
None
Select this if you do not want to keep track of the range of

manual serial numbers generated in the system.
By stock code
Select this to keep track of manual serial number ranges at

stock code level.
If you select this option, then you define the prefix and
next suffix against each individual stock item (Stock Code
Maintenance - Tracking).
You would select this option if you wanted the system to keep
track of the last serial number range created for a specific stock
code. This would enable you to create ranges of manual serial
numbers that are sequential for a specific stock item.
By company
Select this to keep track of manual serial number ranges at

company level.
You would select this option if you wanted to create ranges of
manual serial numbers that are sequential within the company.
These number ranges can be assigned to various stock codes.
When you take on serials and do not change the prefix from
the default company prefix, then the last suffix used + 1 is
stored so that the next manual serial entered defaults to that
suffix. If you change the sequential suffix numbering of serials,
then the system updates the suffix accordingly. This applies in
all programs which enable you to take on manual serials.
Manual serial number ranges are created according to the
prefix and next suffix defined against the company.
Note:
Up to 15 characters may be used for either the prefix or
the next suffix, but the combination of prefix and suffix
cannot exceed 20 characters (i.e. the serial number
cannot exceed 20 characters).
Prefix
You use this field to enter the character(s) that must form the
start of the serial number when you add a range of manual
serial numbers within this company.
Next suffix
You use this field to enter the number to append to the prefix.
The combination of prefix and suffix forms the serial number.
The system automatically increments the Next suffix for each
new serial number created in the range providing the number
was created using the prefix.
The number of numeric characters entered for the suffix must
cater for the total quantity of serial numbers you want to add
using the defined prefix. For example: A suffix of 1 character
will allow 9 serials to be added for the prefix you defined.
| Setup | 50
Field
Values
Stock code
numbering
method
Description
These options enable you to indicate how the Stock code must
be allocated to new stock items added using the Stock Code
Maintenance program.
Manual
Select this if you want to manually allocate a unique stock code

to identify a new stock item added.
Automatic
Select this if you want the system to assign the next stock code
automatically when you use the Stock Code Maintenance
program to add a new stock item.
The stock code is assigned based on the entry in the Next
stock code field below.
Note:
You can only assign stock codes automatically if the
Stock code Key type is set to Numeric (Company
Setup - Key type tab).
Scripted
Select this if you want the system to assign the next stock code
automatically when you add a new stock item, based on a user
defined script.
You can use the VBScript Editor, accessed from the Stock
Code Maintenance program, to build a unique stock code for
each new stock item added.
The scripted stock code can be built up using values from other
entered fields. For example, using characters from the stock
item short description together with the supplier code.
Next stock code
You use this field to indicate the next stock code number that
must be allocated to the Stock code field when next you add a
stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program.
This number is incremented automatically by the system each
time you add a new stock item.
You can only access this field when your Stock code
numbering method is set to Automatic.
Configurator
Field
Values
Description
Do not prompt
from price
Select this if you do not want to be prompted for the price of a

component when adding a sales order for configuration.
Price options
Note:
You will be prompted to specify a price only if you are
required to indicate a quantity.
Accept zero price
Select this if you do not want to be prompted for the price of

a component when adding a sales order for configuration,
regardless of whether a price is held against the component.
| Setup | 51
Field
Values
Description
Note:
You will be prompted to specify a price only if you are
required to indicate a quantity.
Sales orders
with selection
criteria generated
parents
Create job for
existing parent
Select this if you want to be able to create a job and add a

sales order line for a generated parent part which already
exists as a stocked item. Selecting this option will only be
effective if you are generating parent codes according to
selection criteria.
Note:
The generated parent must be a made in stocked item
and a bill of material for route 0 must be held on file for
the existing parent.
Override existing
parent description
with generated
description
Select this for the generated parent part in Sales Orders and
Work In Progress to use the parent description entered within
Product Configurator instead of the parent description from the
inventory master file.
Note:
If you enable the option: Update stock descriptions
from inventory master file (WIP Period End or Order
Purge) then the descriptions entered are overwritten by
the descriptions from the inventory master file.
Do not update
Select this to prevent warehouse costs from being updated
warehouse cost for when configuring a product from within sales orders, for an
existing parent
existing parent that does not have a bill of material and the
quantity on hand is zero.
Costs to use for
bought out items
when creating a
BOM
This option enables you to define which costs to use for bought
out items at the time of creating a Bill of Material from within
Product Configurator.
Inventory
Select this to use the inventory cost for bought out items
when rolling up the single level costs towards the new parent
created.
BOM
Select this to use the Bill of Material costs for bought out items
when rolling up the single level costs towards the new parent
created.
Actual Costing Conversion Review

You use the Actual Costing Conversion Review program to review and optionally re-distribute the
quantities in the FIFO buckets displayed.
| Setup | 52
This program is automatically loaded when you select the Actual costing > Lot traceable or Actual costing >
Batch serial options in the Inventory Setup program.
Actual costing uses the FIFO valuation architecture to track and process costs. The purpose of this
program is to create entries in the FIFO table that relate back to the lots and/or serials.
Serials
The following panes are displayed in the Actual Costing Conversion Review program if you selected
Actual costing > Batch serial.
Stock Codes
This pane displays the batch serials for stock codes/warehouses in a treeview structure.
The Adjustment column indicates whether an adjustment record was created by the Actual Costing
Conversion Review program. Adjustments are created where an imbalance occurred between the
serial quantity on hand and the serial transaction quantities.
When you highlight a serial, the cost bucket information is displayed in the Actual Cost Buckets pane
Adjustments
This pane displays details of the adjustment records created where an imbalance occurred between the
serial quantity on hand and the serial transaction quantities.
Actual Cost Buckets
This pane displays the actual cost buckets created by the Actual Costing Conversion Review
program, based on the serial transaction records.
If more than one bucket exists for a serial then you can move existing quantities from one bucket to
another and save these changes. Note that the bucket quantities must still equal the quantity on hand
against the serial. If they do not, then you will be unable to save your changes.
Lots
The following panes are displayed in the Actual Costing Conversion Review program if you selected
Actual costing > Lot traceable.
Stock Codes
This pane displays the lots for stock codes/warehouses in a treeview structure.
The Adjustment column indicates whether an adjustment record was created by the Actual Costing
Conversion Review program. Adjustments are created where an imbalance occurred between the lot
quantity on hand and the lot transaction quantities.
When you highlight a lot, the cost bucket information is displayed in the Actual Cost Buckets pane
Adjustments
This pane displays details of the adjustment records created where an imbalance occurred between the
lot quantity on hand and the lot transaction quantities.
Actual Cost Buckets
This pane displays the actual cost buckets created by the Actual Costing Conversion Review
program, based on the lot transaction records.
If more than one bucket exists for a lot, then you can move existing quantities from one bucket to
another and save these changes. Note that the bucket quantities must still equal the quantity on hand
against the lot. If they do not, then you will be unable to save your changes.
Processing Sequence
The processing phases performed by the Actual Costing Conversion Review program are as follows:
| Setup | 53
Run an Inventory valuation on the item, storing the total value.

Process stock items as follows:
Create FIFO buckets according to the lot transaction file for Lot traceable items.
This applies if you selected the Actual costing > Lot traceable option (Inventory Setup).
Create FIFO buckets according to the serial transaction file for Batch serialised items only.
This applies if you selected the Actual costing > Batch serial option (Inventory Setup).
Process all Engineering Change Control (ECC) items, excluding batch serialized items if Actual
costing is enabled for batch serials.
All existing FIFO buckets are updated with the revision and/or release of all existing ECC controlled
items.
Remove all existing Goods in Transit FIFO buckets and Transfer FIFO buckets at stock code level.
Remove any existing FIFO buckets against the stock item.
Create new FIFO buckets as follows:
For each lot, batch serial and revision/release for ECC items where the item is not lot traceable (i.e.
dummy lots exist):
Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, and Transfer In on the lot transaction table,
recording the cost from the transaction and the receipt date.
Update the transaction with the new cost and bucket fields.
Create FIFO journals for tracking purposes.
Process the transactions again, for the following transaction types: I - Issues, S - Sales, A - Adjustments
(including physical adjustments), T - transfers, R - Receipts, D - Dispatch notes, starting at the oldest
transaction and netting the buckets off with the transactions.
At this point, the issue date is updated.
It is important to note the following:
A bucket will not go negative.
If the issue quantity is greater than the quantity against the bucket, then the quantity in the bucket
is subtracted from the issue quantity and then set to zero. This routine is repeated until the issue
quantity is zero.
The new cost and bucket fields on the transaction are updated.
Note:
If the transaction spans more than one bucket, then the average cost of the buckets used is
the cost updated against the transaction record.
For transactions which cause the bucket quantities to increase, the FIFO bucket issue date must be
equal to or greater than the Lot/Serial transaction date.
FIFO journals are created for tracking purposes.

Create Adjustment records (if required) after creating the buckets based on the lot/serial transactions.
Variance journals are created if the transaction records do not balance with the lot/serial quantity on
hand. The variance journal type is "t" and the reference is ActualCst.
Once all buckets are processed, you can review these buckets and move quantities between buckets
for a single lot/serial as required. The quantities must balance back to the Lot/Serial quantity on hand.
FIFO journals are created for tracking purposes.
| Setup | 54
Stock Code Maintenance

You use the Stock Code Maintenance program to define the characteristics of stock items that your
company uses or sells. The stock code is the key to the inventory master file and can be defined as
alphanumeric or numeric (Company Setup).
The Stock Codes listview displays details of stock items currently defined.

Field
Values
Description
Save
Select this to save the details you entered or changed.
File
The date on which a new stock code is added and the date on
which a stock code is attached to a warehouse can be viewed
using the Inventory Query program.
This option is only enabled after the information in at least one
field is changed.
Save and Close
Select this to save the details you entered or changed and to

return to the previous screen.
This option is only enabled after the information in at least one
field is changed.
Close
Select this to return to the previous screen.

Note:
If you do not select the Save or Save and Close
options before selecting this option, then any changes
made to the stock item's details is lost.
Edit
New
Select this to add a new stock item.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently displayed stock item.
Preferences
Select this to assign preferences that you want to apply to

all new stock codes added to the system. These include the
take-on of warehouses, pricing, foreign purchase prices, sales
quantity history and aged valuation detail
Use Product Class

Defaults
Select this to use the default entries defined against the

product class when adding a stock item.
Options
Defaults
If you do not select this option then the entries defined using
the Maintain Global Defaults option are used when adding a
stock item.
| Setup | 55
Field
Values
Description
Change Product
Class
Select this to select a different default product class to use

when adding stock items. This option is only enabled when you
selected the option Use Product Class Defaults.
Maintain Product
Class Defaults
You use product class defaults to assign default entries to

fields according to the product class to which the stock item
belongs. When capturing a stock item that belongs to a specific
product class, you can then elect to use the default entries that
you assigned to the product class.
Maintain Global
Defaults
Select this to assign entries to fields that you want to use by

default whenever you capture a stock item.
Warehouse
Defaults
Select this to use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to

define the default entries required for warehouses to which you
are adding the stock item.
This option is only enabled when you selected either the
Maintain Global Defaults or Maintain Product Class Defaults
option from the Defaults menu. If you selected to maintain
product class defaults, then you must enter a product class
before you can define the warehouse defaults.
New
Select this icon to add a new stock item.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the currently displayed stock item.
Save
Select this icon to save the details you entered or changed.

This icon is only enabled after the information in at least one
field is changed.
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the code of the item you want to
add or maintain.
The stock code uniquely identifies the item.
If you are adding a new stock code, then the code cannot
already exist as a non-stocked code (Non-Stocked
Maintenance).
Note:
This field is only enabled when adding a new stock
item if your Stock code numbering method is set to
Manual (Inventory Setup - Numbering tab).
The maximum number of characters you can use for
the stock code depends on the key type you selected
for Stock codes (Company Setup - Key Type tab).
If you defined the Stock code key type as Numeric,
then you can enter up to 15 numeric characters in this
field.
If you defined the Stock code key type as
Alphanumeric, then you can enter up to 30 characters
in this field.
| Setup | 56
Field
Values
Description
You can use the stock code as a selection criterion for various
Inventory, Sales Orders, Purchase Orders, Requirements
Planning and Sales Analysis reports.
This field is disabled when you are defining global defaults.
Product class
This field is displayed when you select to maintain product

class defaults. You use this field to enter the product class for
which you want to maintain the default entries. When adding
a stock item that belongs to a specific product class, you can
elect to use the default entries that you assigned to the product
class.
Play
Select this to use the Multimedia program to view multimedia

objects defined against the item.
Edit
Select this to use the Multimedia program to define multimedia

objects against the item.
Notes
Select this to view and maintain various text notations against

the stock item. A tick alongside any of the notations indicates
that text has been assigned to the item.
Notations are stored in the Inventory Narrations Detail file
(INVNAD - CISAM/InvNarrations - SQL) and can be included
on a report defined using the Create Report program.
The text is determined by the narration class as follows:
T - Technical spec
S - S/order additional text
P - P/order additional text
W - Job narrations
I - Inspection text
D - Dangerous goods handling
Note:
You can prevent the unauthorized editing of these

notational fields using the Fields function located on
the Security tab of the Operators program.
Notation List
Select this to use the Notation List program to selectively
print stock code notes assigned to the stock
Technical
Specification
Select this to use the Text Editor program to capture technical

information text that can be printed on the GRN document,
inspection document and factory documentation.
Sales Order Add

Text

information text that can be retrieved onto a sales order and
printed on sales order documents.
P/Order Add Text

information text that can be retrieved into a purchase order and
printed on purchase order documents.
| Setup | 57
Field
Values
Description
Job Narrations

information text that can be printed on factory documentation
and viewed using the WIP Query program.
Inspection Text

Dangerous Goods
Handling

information text that can be retrieved into a sales order/
purchase order and printed on sales order/purchase order
documents. In addition, you can be notified during Sales Order
Entry when dangerous goods text is held against a stock item
being processed.
Preferences
This screen is displayed when you select the Preferences option from the options menu.
The options enable you to indicate preferences to apply at the time of adding new stock items to the
system. These include the take on of warehouses, pricing, foreign purchase prices, sales quantity history
and aged valuation details.
For each preference selected, the appropriate program is loaded when you select the Save option to save
the details for the new stock item. You then have the option of entering the details at this point or later if
required. If you do not select a preference, you can still use the appropriate program to enter the required
details later.
Field
Values
Description
Take on
warehouses
when adding
stock codes
Select this to use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to

define the warehouse details for the new item.
Take on pricing
when adding
stock codes
Select this to use the Pricing for a Stock Code program to

define the coded prices and quantity discount breaks for the
new item.
Take on foreign
purchase prices
when adding
stock codes
Select this to use the Foreign Purchase Prices program to

assign foreign prices for the new item.
Take on sales
quantity history
when adding
stock codes
Select this to use the Inventory Sales Quantity History

program to capture details of quantities sold for the stock item
over the last 12 months, as well as additional sales history
information.
Take on aged
valuation when
adding stock
codes
Select this to use the Inventory Initial Aged Valuation

program to take on the stock item's year end quantity on hand
for the last five years.
Save
Select this to save your selections against your operator code.
Close
Select this to save your selections for the current run of the
program only.
| Setup | 58
Use Product Class Defaults

This screen is displayed when you select the Use Product Class Defaults or the Change Product Class
option from the Defaults menu.
Field
Values
Description
OK
Select this to accept the product class selected.
Product class
You use this field to indicate the product class from which to
use the default entries when adding a stock item.
Default product
class information
Product class
This indicates the product class code you selected to use
Description
This indicates the description defined against the product class

code selected.
Long description
This indicates the long description defined against the product

class code selected.
Stock Code Details

If you change the unit of measure for a stock item and you have Bills of Material, you can use the BOM
Update Unit of Measure program to change the unit of measure for the item against all your bills.
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item you are currently
adding or maintaining.
Stock code
(scripted)
This field is only enabled if you indicated that the Stock code
numbering method is Scripted (Inventory Setup).
Stock code
information
You use the VBScript Editor to build a unique stock code for
each new stock item added. The scripted stock code can be
built up using values from other entered fields, to update the
StockCodeDetails.CodeObject.StockCodescripted field.
Description
You use this field to enter the description of the stock item.
This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout the
system whenever the stock code is entered. You can use it to
verify that the correct item has been entered.
Long description
You use this field to enter the long description of the stock item.
This is an additional description assigned to a stock code which
is viewable from within the Inventory Query program and
which can be printed on reports and inventory documents.
Warehouse to use
This indicates the warehouse that must be used to extract

the quantities of stock required by the Bill of Materials module
when performing functions such as a cost implosion and
creating material allocations.
| Setup | 59
Field
Values
Description
This is also the default warehouse used for the parent when
adding a job and is used to calculated the new landed cost of
an item.
The Purchase Order module does not use the Warehouse to
use as the default warehouse when adding a purchase order.
You will only be able to enter a warehouse to which you have
access (Operators - Access tab).
Note:
If you are using the full Goods in Transit transfers

facility then the warehouse to use defaults to being
the top level warehouse for the item.
You will be unable to specify a warehouse to use if it
is supplied by another warehouse.
Warehouse to use
description
This indicates the description defined against the warehouse to

use you selected.
Drawing number
This field is for documentary purposes and is printed on reports

and factory documentation.
This field is only enabled if the ECC (Engineering Change
Control) module is installed.
Part category
Note:
It is important that the correct part category is assigned
to a stock item as it has different implications when
used with other modules.
B - Bought out
This indicates that the item is purchased from an external

supplier.
You can use the Structures and Routings program to define
a structure and routing against a bought out item and then
create a job for the item. This feature is available in case you
need to make the item internally from time to time. However,
while you can create a job for a bought out item, it is not
treated as a made-in item anywhere else in the system (such
as cost implosion, MRP, Advanced Trial Kitting, etc). The
decision on how to define an item which is both bought out and
made-in therefore depends on how you want the costing and
MRP for the item to work. An alternative is to create two stock
codes for the item and define one as made-in and the other as
bought out.
M - Made in
This indicates that the item is manufactured internally.
S - Subcontracted
This indicates that the item is a made-in part that has been
assigned at least one subcontract operation.
A subcontract item is treated in the same manner as a made-in
part in SYSPRO. This part category was introduced before the
functionality was added to Material Requirements Planning to
raise suggested requisitions for subcontract operations, but it is
now only used for reporting purposes.
| Setup | 60
Field
Values
Description
G - Phantom part
This indicates that the item is a parent part in a bill of material,

but will typically not be booked into stock for issuing purposes.
It can be used as a grouping mechanism to reflect the way
in which a product is built, as well as to facilitate the use of
common bills of material for engineering and manufacturing.
It is used for sub assemblies that are typically non-stocked,
and permits MRP logic to drive requirements straight through
the phantom item to its components. However, the MRP
system usually retains its ability to net against any occasional
inventories of the item (e.g. if you add an allocation to a
phantom manually and then run a Requirements Calculation,
existing stock of the phantom will be netted off and a job
suggested for the net requirement).
P - Planning bill
This indicates that the item is an artificial part used to assist

in forecasting. It cannot be stocked, sold, or bought out and is
used merely to allow the forecasting of a family of products as
an entity.
This allows you to generate gross requirements into the
MPS or MRP (see the Requirements Planning module)
independently for each member of the family.
K - Kit part
This indicates that the stock code represents one item

made up from a group of items which together comprise one
manufactured inventory item.
If selected here, then at the Kit type field in the Sales Details
pane, you can only select the Kit type and Sub type options.
C - Co-product
This indicates that the stock item is a product which is

manufactured together with another item or items. The
manufacturing process of the item can take place together
or sequentially. Products are usually manufactured together
because of product and/or process similarities. Co-products
make a material contribution to the market value of the outputs
of a manufacturing process.
A co-product can be manufactured by itself as any other madein item, or it can be attached to a Notional part in a Bill of
Materials Structure and Routing (see BOM Co-products). Only
items defined as co-products can be attached to notional parts.
Co-products are planned for in requirements planning.
Currently, a co-product cannot be defined as ECC controlled
(Tracking tab). In addition, you will be unable to define activity
based costing for a co-product (Element Structures).
Note:
When manufacturing co-products, you will be unable
to link a sales order directly to a job nor can you link a
sub-job with multiple outputs to a master job.
| Setup | 61
Field
Values
Description
Y - By-product
This indicates that the stock item is an incidental or residual

item produced as part of the manufacturing process of the
parent item.
A by-product may be recycled, sold as is or used for other
purposes. You use the Structures and Routings program to
add a by-product to a bill of materials as a negative material
allocation.
A by-product is regarded as recoverable scrap in SYSPRO.
Irrecoverable scrap is not and should not be treated as a by
product, but as scrap.
Currently, by-product items are used for reporting purposes
only.
You can use the Structures and Routings program to define
a structure and routing against a by-product, although a
warning message is displayed when you select to do so.
By-products are not planned for in requirements planning.
When you define an item as a by-product, the Batching rule
(Replenishment tab) is set to P - Suppress MRP ordering and
cannot be changed.
You include the cost of a by-product in the parent's bill of
materials by running the Cost Implosion program.
N - Notional part
This indicates that the stock code is a notional part, which

exists in name only. This item is not recognized as physical
stock and can therefore not be bought or sold or have any
inventory movements associated with it.
A notional part is used as a link between the Bill of Materials
Structure and Routing information and the physical co-products
being manufactured (i.e. it is an imaginary part that attaches
a bill of materials structure and routing to multiple end-items
(co-products). It can only be defined as a parent part in a Bill of
Materials and not as a component.
A notional part cannot be a sub-job.
Currently, a notional item cannot be defined as ECC controlled
(Tracking tab) or as an MPS item (Production tab). In addition,
you will be unable to define activity based costing for a notional
item (Element Structures).
This option is only enabled if the Bill of Materials module is
installed.
Note:
You can only define a stock item as a notional part
when adding the item (i.e. you cannot for example
change an existing item with a part category of Made-in
to a part category of Notional part).
| Setup | 62
Field
Values
Description
Product class
This indicates the category to which the item is assigned. It is

used for reporting purposes (Sales Analysis) and as a method
of defining your integration to the General Ledger module.
You must enter a valid product class if you selected the option:
Validate product class (Inventory Setup - Options tab). When
you enter a valid product class, the description for the product
class is displayed. If you did not select to validate product
classes, then, although a product class must be assigned to a
stock item, your entry is validated only at the time of generating
a sales order (see Sales Order Entry).
You will be unable to access this field if you selected the
option: Use Product Class Defaults (Defaults function). The
product class you entered on the Use Product Class Defaults
screen is automatically entered in this field. To change the
default product class, you select the Change Product Class
option from the Defaults function.
Product class
description
This indicates the description for the product class you

selected.
Stocking unit of
measure
This indicates the unit of measure in which the stock item is

held on file. A stocking unit of measure entry must be assigned
to a stock item.
Stocking unit
metrics
If you selected the setup option: Unit of measure conversion

factors are theoretical (Sales Order Setup - Tax/Um tab),
then you enter the theoretical unit of measure in this field. For
example, if you sell boxes of fruit that you stock in kilograms,
but sell by the box. If there are theoretically 10kg in one box,
then kilograms is the theoretical unit of measure because only
at the time of selling the fruit do you know the exact number of
kilograms sold.
Mass per stocking
unit
This indicates the weight of a single unit of the stock item in

the stocking unit of measure. It is used for reporting purposes
(Inventory and Sales Analysis) and can be printed on inventory
and sales documents.
If the option: EC VAT system required is selected (Tax
Options - General tab), then the mass per stocking unit is
required for the Supplementary Declarations.
When creating a parent item from Product Configurator (see
Product Configurator Wizard), the mass of the item is the
sum of the masses of the components used to create the
parent item.
Volume per
stocking unit
This indicates the volume of a single unit of the stock item in

the stocking unit of measure. It is used for reporting and query
purposes. In addition, the stock unit volume, the order line
volume and total volume can be printed on delivery notes and
invoices.
| Setup | 63
Field
Values
Description
When creating a parent item from Product Configurator (see
Product Configurator Wizard), the volume of the item is the
sum of the volumes of the components used to create the
parent item.
Specific gravity
This indicates the value that must be used to convert volume

measurements to weight measurements (e.g. conversion
between kilograms and liters, or vice versa).
This field is used if you indicated that the stock item is required
in a batch bill of materials.
Alternate unit of
measure
If you want to be able to hold inventory costs in a unit of

measure other than the stocking unit of measure, you need
to select the option: Inventory cost to be held in a unit of
measure other than stocked (Inventory Setup - Options
tab).
Alternate uom unit
This indicates the description for the alternative unit of measure

for the sale or purchase quantity of an item and the pricing.
Alternate uom
factor
The conversion factor enables you to convert the Alternate unit

of measure into the Stocking unit of measure.
Note:
When you change a conversion factor, any outstanding
sales or purchase orders processed using the alternate
unit of measure are not changed. These orders are still
recorded at the factor applicable at the time the order
was created. Outstanding sales and purchase orders
must therefore be manually changed as required.
The field is used by the Sales Order module if you have
indicated that the unit of measure must be requested for order
quantities (Sales Order Setup).
In addition, it is used by the Purchase Order module if you
have indicated that the Alternate unit of measure must be used
for order quantities (Purchase Orders Setup).
For example: if your item is stocked as each and sold or
ordered in dozens, then you would set up the conversion as
follows:
Table 1: Alternate unit of measure table
Stocking unit of measure
EA
Alternate unit of measure
DOZ
Conversion factor
12
Conversion method
Multiply
This is the equivalent of saying: one dozen is equal to 12 each.

If you selected the setup option: Unit of measure conversion
factors are theoretical (Sales Order Setup - Tax/Um tab),
then you enter the absolute unit of measure in this field. For
| Setup | 64
Field
Values
Description
example, you sell boxes of fruit that you stock in kilograms,
but sell by the box. The box is the absolute unit of measure. If
there are theoretically 10kg in one box, then kilograms is the
theoretical unit of measure.
Alternate uom
method
You use this field to indicate whether the Stocking unit of

measure must be multiplied or divided to give the alternate unit
of measure.
Alternate uom
conversion
This displays the result of converting from the stocking unit of

measure to the alternate unit of measure or vice versa. You
can select the Test option from the Alternate uom unit field to
view the same results in a separate screen.
Other unit of
measure
If you want to be able to hold inventory costs in a unit of

measure other than the stocking unit of measure, you need
to select the option: Inventory cost to be held in a unit of
measure other than stocked (Inventory Setup - Options
tab).
Other uom unit
This indicates the description for the other unit of measure for
the sales ordering quantity of an item and the pricing.
Other uom factor
A conversion factor enables you to convert the Other unit of

measure into the Stocking unit of measure.
Note:
When you change a conversion factor, any outstanding
sales orders processed using the other unit of measure
are not changed. These orders are still recorded at the
factor applicable at the time the order was created.
Outstanding sales orders must therefore be manually
changed as required.
The field is used by the Sales Order module if you have
indicated that the unit of measure must be requested for order
quantities (Sales Order Setup).
For example: If your item is stocked as Each and sold in
Dozens or Boxes (5 per box), then you would set up the
conversion as follows:
Table 2: Other unit of measure table
EA
DOZ
Conversion factor
12
Conversion method
Multiply
Other unit of measure
BOX
Conversion factor
Conversion method
Multiply
This is the equivalent of saying: one box is equal to 5 each.
| Setup | 65
Field
Values
Description
Other uom method You use this field to indicate whether the Stocking unit of
measure must be multiplied or divided to give the Other unit of
measure.
Other uom
conversion
Manufacturing
unit of measure
This displays the result of converting from the Stocking unit of

measure to the Other unit of measure or vice versa. You can
select the Test option from the Other uom unit field to view the
same results in a separate screen.
Defining a manufacturing unit of measure enables you to view,
and report on, the unit of measure you entered to manufacture
the item.
This provides you with an additional unit of measure over and
above the stocking, alternate and other units of measure.
You can only define manufacturing units of measure if you
selected the setup option: Use manufacturing u/m (WIP Setup
- General 2 tab).
Note:
A manufacturing unit of measure cannot be defined

for parent or component stock items with the
following Part categories:
Planning bill
Kit part
Phantom part
Notional part
Irrespective of whether you define a manufacturing

unit of measure, transactions for lots, bins and
serials are always done in the stocking unit of
measure.
Manufacturing uom You use this field to indicate the description for the
unit
manufacturing unit of measure.
Manufacturing uom A conversion factor enables you to convert the Manufacturing
factor
unit of measure into the Stocking unit of measure.
Manufacturing uom You use this field to indicate whether the Stocking unit
method
of measure must be multiplied or divided to give the
Manufacturing unit of measure.
Manufacturing uom This displays the result of converting from the Stocking unit of
conversion
measure to the Manufacturing unit of measure or vice versa.
You can select the Test option from the Manufacturinguom unit
field to view the same results in a separate screen.
Other options
Cost unit of
measure
This indicates the unit of measure to be used for the inventory

cost of the item. You define cost units of measure using the
Unit of Measure Maintenance program.
Note:
A cost unit of measure can be assigned to the item

only if you indicated that your inventory costs must
| Setup | 66
Field
Values
Description
be held in a unit of measure other than stocked
(Inventory Setup - Options tab).
The cost unit of measure can only be defined when
adding a stock code and you will be unable to
change the cost unit of measure once the stock item
has been created.
You will be unable to save the details for the stock
code if the cost unit of measure is not defined or
does not exist.
Maximum number
of decimals
This indicates the number of decimals to which you want to

store and print stock quantities. You can specify a maximum of
3 decimals.
Stock code related quantities are displayed in listviews to the
number of decimals you define here, providing you select the
setup option: Edit quantities using decimals associated with
item (Company Setup - Options tab).
Unit quantity
processing
Select Yes if you want quantities of a specific stock code to be

handled and displayed as units of the stocking and alternate
unit of measure, rather than as units and decimal places.
For example: If an item is stocked in cases with an alternate
unit of measure of 12 bottles per case, then a quantity of 2.5 is
presented as 2/06, or entered as two fields - one for 2 and one
for 6 (i.e. no decimal places are allowed on either the stocking
or alternate unit of measure).
When entering this type of stock code during Sales Order
Entry, the system requests the entry of quantities in two
separate fields - the primary quantity is always in the stocking
unit of measure, followed by the equivalent alternate unit of
measure where decimal places would previously have been
entered.
The same procedure applies to Stock Takes, Inventory
Movements, Purchase Orders and Dispatch Notes. It is not
possible to enter a job for anything other than units of the
stocking quantity.
Note:
Alternate key 1
The alternate unit of measure must be less than the

stocking unit of measure.
No decimal places can be used in either the
stocking or the alternate units of measure.
Pricing of the sales order line is always in terms of
the stocking unit of measure.
This indicates additional information assigned to the stock item

which can be used as selection criteria when browsing on stock
codes.
It can also be used to change the sequence in which items are
displayed when browsing on stock codes.
| Setup | 67
Field
Values
Description
The wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit your
own requirements (Inventory Setup).
Alternate key 2

codes.
Retain stock
movements
Select Yes if you want to store on file all transaction

movements processed against the stock item.
If you selected the option: Record movements for bin transfers
(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then details of bin transfers
within the same warehouse are retained.
A listing of stock movements can be printed using the
Inventory Movement Report and Kardex Report programs.
Stock code status
This enables you to define the status of the stock item.
Normal
Select this to indicates that the stock code is a normal stock

item.
Temporary
Select this if you require the stock item to be deleted

automatically when you run the purge routine within the
Inventory Period End program (providing the item meets all
the requirements for the deletion of a stock code - see the
Purge).
Note:
Serialized or traceable items cannot be defined as
temporary items.
Clear
Select this to indicate that the stock item must be sold or

cleared as a matter of urgency.
This option can also be used by the Superseded Clearing
Stock report as a criterion according to which stock items are
selected for printing.
When you select this option, the Batching rule for the stock
item is set to P -Suppress MRP ordering ( Replenishment
pane).
Stock code on hold This indicates the on hold status for the stock item.
status
This is maintained using the Maintain Hold Status program.
You can access the Maintain Hold Status program by
browsing on the Stock code field and then selecting the On
Hold Status option from the Edit menu of the Stock Codes
program displayed.
Additional items
| Setup | 68
Field
Values
Description
Warehouses
Select this to assign the stock item to a warehouse and to

define the warehouse information for the highlighted stock item
using the Warehouses for Stock Code program.
Pricing
Select this to define the pricing information for the highlighted

stock item using the Pricing for a Stock Code program.
Foreign purchase
prices
Select this to define the foreign purchase pricing information for

the highlighted stock item using the Foreign Purchase Prices
program.
Alternate stock
codes
Select this to define the alternate stock code information for

the highlighted stock item using the Alternate Stock Codes
program.
Alternate suppliers Select this to define the alternate supplier information for the
highlighted stock item using the Alternate Suppliers program.
Replenishment
Field
Values
Description
Supplier
You use this field to indicates the code of the primary supplier
from whom you usually purchase this stock item.
Purchasing
This field is not mandatory.

The supplier code is validated only if the Accounts Payable or
Purchase Order modules is installed.
Supplier name
This indicates the name of the selected supplier.
Buyer
You use this field to buyer code of the person responsible for
purchasing the stock item.
It is used as a selection criterion for stock codes printed on
various Requirements Planning reports.
Buyer name
This indicates the name of the selected buyer.
Tariff code
This is used in the Landed Cost Tracking system to determine

the duty rate applicable to an imported item.
The tariff code is also used in the EC VAT system and is an
important data field on the Supplementary Declarations report.
This number identifies the goods that are the subject of a
dispatch or arrival and is the basis for most of the statistical
information used by government departments, the European
Commission, United Nation's agencies and businesses
themselves.
Tariff code
description
This indicates the description for the selected tariff code (see
Tariff Code Maintenance).
Supplementary
units
Select to indicate that supplementary units are required for the

tariff code.
| Setup | 69
Field
Values
Description
A number of tariff codes require the declaration of a
supplementary unit, for example the number of pieces, litres
or cubic metres. Generally, a supplementary unit is required
when it is a more appropriate measure of particular goods than
the net mass and allows a greater degree of comparison and
analysis.
When adding a sales order line for a stock item that requires
supplementary units, the supplementary unit code is passed
to the order line from the stock code. A factor can then be
added for calculating the supplementary unit quantity. When
invoicing, the supplementary unit information is saved and
made available for printing on the EC Sales reports.
When receipting a purchase order, the supplementary unit
information is requested, saved and made available for printing
on the PO EC Declaration of Arrivals report.
Supplementary
code
You use this field to indicate the supplementary code to use for
the stock item.
This field may be left blank, but if entered must be a valid
supplementary code (see Intrastat Supplementary Units).
This field is only available if you selected the Supplementary
units option.
Supplementary
code description
This indicates the description defined against the

supplementary code selected (see Supplementary Code
Maintenance).
Landed cost
tracking required
Select this to indicate that the stock item is required in the

Landed Cost Tracking system.
Note:
You can only select this for bought-out items.
Lead time (days)
This indicates the number of days in which to either buy out or

manufacture the stock item.
For bought out items, you enter the number of days it takes
your supplier to deliver the item to you from the date you place
the order. The lead time for bought out items must be manually
buffered for non-working days. For example, if your supplier
takes 3 days from date of order to deliver the item to you, this
represents 3 working days. You will therefore need to buffer the
lead time to account for weekends.
For made in items, you use the Lead Time Calculation
program to calculate and update the lead time. The Lead Time
Calculation program calculates a ratio of working to nonworking days and applies this when calculating the lead time
for an item. This means that you do not need to buffer the
lead time for made in items if you are using the Lead Time
Calculation program to update this field.
The lead time is used in the calculation performed by the
Minimum Quantity Calculation program to establish
| Setup | 70
Field
Values
Description
the minimum quantity required for each stock code and
warehouse. It is also used in the Requirements Planning and
Bill of Materials modules.
Refer to Lead time for additional information on lead time.
Replenishment
details
Dock to stock
(days)
This indicates the number of days that a bought out or made in

stock item must be in stock prior to usage. This enables you to
calculate an earlier due date for jobs or purchase orders and,
from these, an earlier start date.
Non-working days per the factory calendar are taken into
account when the delivery date is calculated to add to the ship
date.
Batching rule
The batching rule (or buying rule) is used by the Requirements

Planning module to indicate how you want to address quantity
shortages encountered for the stock item.
Although a buying rule is applied to bought-out items
and a batch rule is applied to made-in items, the term is
interchangeable within the Requirements Planning system
because the buying or batch rules can apply to either boughtout or made-in items.
The buying rule defined against each stock item is used to
modify the actual shortage quantity in order to calculate an
order quantity.
Note:
SYSPRO does not allow any order policy to exceed the
Maximum quantity defined (Warehouse Maintenance
for Stock Code).
The reason is that you may, for example, be ordering
frozen fish. The Maximum quantity is set to fill up your
freezer. If the system allowed you to order over this
maximum quantity, the additional quantity would not fit
in the freezer and would rot.
Batching rules are applied to MPS items when producing the
Master Production Schedule and to non-MPS items when
running the Requirements Calculation program.
Note:
SYSPRO reserves buying rules from A to Q. Any

buying rule entered beyond this range is treated as
if it was buying rule A.
Buying rules are NOT applied to MPS items if you
have enabled the option: Include build schedule in
requirements calculation (Requirements Planning
Setup).
The fixed time period in a time-phased batching rule
is ignored by the Master Production Schedule and
| Setup | 71
Field
Values
Description
MPS Review programs because they use variable
time period lengths.
The fixed time portion of the batching rule is applied
only in the Requirements Calculation.
An MPS item with a buying rule of C is treated as if
the rule was A. Buying rules K, L, M, and N revert to
rules B, F, G, and H respectively.
A - Lot for lot
Select this to indicate that the order quantity is the shortage

quantity.
All sub jobs are automatically created as lot for lot.
You would typically select this batching rule when
implementing MRP (Material Requirements Planning) in
SYSPRO for the first time. The reason is that this rule simply
generates planned supply (jobs, purchase order requisitions
and purchase orders) for the actual net shortage in demand
for each period. Once you have familiarised yourself with
SYSPRO's Material Requirements Planning module, you can
implement the other batching rules as required.
B - Multiples of
EBQ
To calculate the order quantity, the shortage quantity is

rounded up to the next multiple of the economic batch quantity.
For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the shortage is 32, then the
order quantity will be 40.
C - Fixed time
period
When a shortage is encountered, the order quantity is

calculated by adding all the shortages in the fixed time period
ahead.
For example: If the shortage is 32 today and 14 tomorrow, and
the fixed time period is 1 day (1 future working day) then the
order quantity will be 46 (32 + 14).
D - Order to
maximum if
shortage
When a shortage is encountered, the order quantity is

calculated to increase the stock holding up to the maximum
defined against the warehouse.
For example: If the shortage is 32 and the maximum quantity
is 100, then the order quantity will be 132 (32 + 100). This
is because the shortage of 32 must be filled, plus 100 are
required to bring the stock holding up to its maximum of 100.
E - Order to max if
less than min
As soon as the result field (during netting-off) falls below the

minimum quantity, an order quantity is calculated to order
sufficient to increase the quantity available up to the maximum
quantity.
For example: If the minimum quantity is 50 and the maximum
quantity is 200 and the result field is 12, then the order quantity
will be 188 (200 - 12).
When you select this option, the MPS Review and Master
Production Schedule programs use the minimum and
maximum quantities defined against the warehouse to
| Setup | 72
Field
Values
Description
calculate the suggestions made. Safety stock is not taken into
account.
F - Multiples of pan This rule is identical to rule B, except that the pan quantity is
used instead of the economic batch quantity.
To calculate the order quantity, the shortage quantity is
rounded up to the next multiple of the pan size.
For example: If the Pan size 10 and the shortage is 32, then
the order quantity will be 40.
G - Multiple EBQ
lots
If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should be created to

satisfy the shortage, each the size of the EBQ.
For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the shortage is 32, then 4
orders (each having an order quantity of 10) are suggested.
H - Multiple pan
lots
This rule is identical to rule G, except that the pan quantity is

If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should be created to
satisfy the shortage, each the size of the Pan.
For example: If the Pan size is 10 and the shortage is 32, then
4 orders (each having an order quantity of 10) are suggested.
I - Minimum of
EBQ
If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is the quantity required

to meet the shortage, unless this is less than the EBQ (in which
case the EBQ is used).
For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the shortage is 8, then the
order quantity is 10 (the 8 required to meet the shortage is less
than the EBQ, so the EBQ is used). However, if the shortage is
32 and the EBQ is 10 then the order quantity is 32.
J - Minimum of pan This rule is identical to rule I, except that the pan quantity is
If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is the quantity required
to meet the shortage, unless this is less than the Pan size (in
which case the Pan size is used).
For example: If the Pan size is 10 and the shortage is 8, then
the order quantity is 10 (the 8 required to meet the shortage
is less than the Pan size, so the Pan size is used). However,
if the shortage is 32 and the Pan size is 10 then the order
quantity is 32.
K - Multiples of
EBQ (fixed time)
This rule is a combination of rules B and C.

The order quantity is calculated by adding all the shortages in
the fixed time period ahead.
Once this total shortage quantity has been calculated, then
this is rounded up to the next multiple of the economic batch
quantity.
| Setup | 73
Field
Values
Description
L - Multiples of pan This rule is a combination of rules F and C.

(fixed time)
This rule is identical to rule K, except that the pan quantity is
Once this total shortage quantity has been calculated, then this
is rounded up to the next multiple of the pan size.
M - Multiple EBQ
lots (fixed time)
This rule is a combination of rules G and C.

multiple orders (each the size of the EBQ) are suggested.
N - Multiple pan
lots (fixed time)
This rule is a combination of rules H and C.

This rule is identical to rule M, except that the pan quantity is
multiple orders (each the size of the pan) are suggested.
O - Min of EBQ,
If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is at least the EBQ.
thereafter multiples However, if the EBQ is insufficient to satisfy the shortage, then
of pan
the remaining shortage is rounded up to the next multiple of the
pan quantity.
For example: If the EBQ is 10 and the pan quantity is 5,
a shortage of 3 would cause an order quantity of 10 (the
shortage is less than the EBQ). A shortage of 23 would cause
an order quantity of 25.
P - Suppress MRP
ordering
Demand generated for this item will not result in any suggested
purchase orders, unless you have indicated that batching rules
must be overridden (Requirements Planning Setup).
This is the default batching rule for an item defined as a Byproduct (Descriptive tab), and cannot be changed.
In addition, when you set the Stock code status to Clear (Stock
Code Details pane), the batching rule for that stock code is set
to P - Suppress MRP ordering. This cannot be changed until
the Stock code status is changed.
Q - Apply
warehouse order
policy
Select this if you want to define the batching rules against

the individual warehouses in which the item is stocked (see
Warehouses for Stock Code). This enables you to define
different batching rules for each warehouse in which the item is
stocked.
Economic batch
quantity
The economic batch quantity is used to determine the costing

of a bill of materials. It is also used within the Requirements
| Setup | 74
Field
Values
Description
Planning module together with batching rules B, G, I, K, M and
O.
Note:
The economic batch quantity is used instead of the Pan
size, depending on your selection at the Manufacturing
basis field for the item.
If progressive scrap is in use then the Economic Batch
Quantity must be defined as the net EBQ. Progressive
scrap works backwards taking into account the scrap at
each operation to calculate the starting quantity.
Pan size
This can be likened to a container size. Within the Bill of

Materials module you can indicate whether the elapsed time
against work centers or cost centers is based on the pan size
or the economic batch quantity.
Note:
This is used instead of the economic batch quantity,
depending on your selection at the Manufacturing basis
field for the item.
Fixed time period

(days)
This indicates the number of working days that represents a

fixed time period.
For example: A fixed time period of 1 day indicates that if a
shortage is encountered, that the total shortage for today and
the next working day is used as if the shortage falls today.
The entry made here is used for all time-based buying rules
(i.e. C, K, L, M and N) within the Requirements Planning
module.
Date of
supersession
This indicates the date on which the stock item should no

longer be sold.
It is used by the Superseded Clearing Stock report as a
criterion according to which stock items are selected for
printing.
Quantity cycle
count
You use this field to indicate the number of times that you want
to count the stock item during the year.
When you use the Stock Take Selection program to select
stock items for a stock take, you can indicate that you only
want to include items with a specific quantity cycle count in a
stock take.
It can also be used as a selection criterion for reporting
purposes.
ABC analysis
required
Select Yes to indicate that you want to include the stock item in
the calculations performed by the ABC Analysis program.
The ABC Analysis program is used to print a list of stock items
in descending order of usage value, based on the cost value of
stock used (issued and/or sold) over the last 12 months.
| Setup | 75
Field
Values
Description
The report indicates which are your most used and least used
items, enabling you to determine what quantities of selected
stock items should be included in your inventory.
Values
Description
MPS item
This indicates that the stock item is used in the Master

Production Schedule system.
Production Details
Field
Master
production
schedule
A Notional part (Descriptive tab) cannot be defined as an MPS

item.
Non-MPS item
This indicates that the item is a normal stock code that is

included in the Requirements Calculation program.
Statistical item
This indicates that the item is always in stock and its lead time
is ignored when calculating the cumulative lead time and/or
manufacturing lead time of its parent.
Gross requirement
rule
This is used by the Master Production Schedule (Requirements

Planning) to indicate how you want to calculate the demand
for a component prior to the netting off of on hand inventory
and scheduled receipts. It is used to calculate the projected
available stock and the suggested build schedule.
C - Cumulative
highest of
forecasts & s/
orders
Select this if you want to use the forecasts or sales orders

(whichever is the cumulative highest figure) as the gross
requirement. This is calculated as the cumulative highest figure
less the cumulative gross requirement of the previous period.
I - Forecasts only
Select this if you want to use only forecasts as the gross

requirement.
H - Highest of
forecasts & sales
orders
Select this if you want to use either forecasts or sales orders

(whichever is the highest figure) as the gross requirement.
S - Sales orders
only
Select this if you want to use only sales orders as the gross
requirement.
A - Sum of
forecasts & sales
orders
Select this if you want to use both the forecasts and sales
orders as the gross requirement.
Percent yield
This indicates what percentage of the item is lost in the

manufacturing process so that a shortfall in actual production
does not cause an unexpected inability to meet demand on
time.
For example: If a quantity of 10 is required to be manufactured
for an item with a yield percentage of 50, then you must
| Setup | 76
Field
Values
Description
schedule 20 in order to meet the demand of 10. This field
applies only to MPS items.
Manufacturing
quantity basis
This indicates the basis of the elapsed time calculated against

work centers or cost centers.
Economic batch
quantity
Select this to use the economic batch quantity as the

manufacturing quantity basis.
Pan size
Select this to use the pan size as the manufacturing quantity

basis.
Floorstock
This indicates whether the Stock item relates to an inexpensive

production part held in the factory from which production
workers can draw without requisitions.
Manufacturing
options
Floorstock items must be stocked in the warehouse defined as

the floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup).
Floorstock item
Floorstock item indicates that the Stock item can be issued

automatically to a job upon confirmation of the job. It is
included in the costing process.
Note:
The warehouse quantity is reduced when a

floorstock item is issued and a journal is created.
A serialized or traceable item cannot be defined as
being a Floorstock item.
Irrespective of your selection at the setup option: Stock on

hand allowed to go negative (Inventory Setup - General
tab), items defined as Floorstock which are stocked in the
floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup) will always be allowed to go
negative at the time of confirming a job (Job Issues) or when
Backflushing (Inventory Movements), regardless of your
warehouse settings. For other types of transactions, floorstock
items are treated in the same manner as any other stock item.
Therefore if stock on hand is not allowed to go negative and
there is insufficient stock, you will be unable to process those
transactions.
Bulk issue item
Bulk issue item indicates that the Stock item can be issued
automatically as a material allocation to a job without affecting
the on hand quantity of the item. The item is included as a
component in the costing process.
A serialized or traceable item cannot be defined as being a
Bulk issue item.
You would typically define an item that is considered a
'consumable' as a bulk issue item. This enables you to include
this consumable in the cost of a job without forcing you to keep
accurate inventory of the item.
| Setup | 77
Field
Values
Description
No direct debit and credit journal entries are posted for Bulk
Issue items. The reason for this is that there is no quantity
moved out of the warehouse to the job.
However, any cost associated with a bulk issue item is included
in the cost of the parent in the BOM (it is calculated and rolled
up to the parent's material cost) and, by extension, when a job
is created it is part of the expected cost of materials.
To ensure that costs exist to be cleared at job closure, the
value of materials issued to the job is updated with the cost of
the bulk issue and an entry is made in the job postings record.
The updating of the cost is what creates the variance at the
point of closing the job.
Typically because bulk issue items are of little or no value,
this is cleared with automatic variance clearing when the
job is completed. The automatic variance follows the rules
you indicated in WIP for clearing variances (WIP Setup General 1 tab). If the cost remaining on the job is within these
boundaries then it will be automatically cleared (i.e. the WIP
Control account will be credited and the WIP Variance account
debited). If the value of the variance exceeds the rules then
this variance must be cleared using the WIP Job Closure
program).
The assumption on bulk issue items is that they should only be
used for consumables. If quantities and values are required to
be tracked, then you need to define the item as floorstock.
Note:
When you confirm a job, bulk issue items specified
against the Bill of Materials are issued to the job
automatically. If you want to delete the job, you will
need to reverse the bulk issue allocation before doing
so, even though no journals were created. A job cannot
be deleted until all the allocations are reversed.
The warehouse quantity is not reduced when a bulk
issue item is issued and no journal is created.
Once a job is confirmed, then any additional issue or
reversal of a bulk issue item affects the stock on hand
(i.e. the bulk issue item is treated as any other stock
item).
Neither
Select this if the item is neither a floorstock or bulk issue item.
Include in
relationship
validation
Select this if the stock item is included in the processing

performed by the Relationship Validation program (Bill of
Materials).
Soft phantom
This is not used in the current version of the program.

In a future release of the software, when you select this
option and the item is attached to a Bill of Materials as a
component, it will act similarly to a phantom part (i.e. the item
itself is not attached to the job as a material allocation, but it
explodes through and brings its components in as allocations).
| Setup | 78
Field
Values
Description
However, you will be able to create a job for the item, stock it
and sell it.
Batch bill of
material
Select this if a parent part has components by percentage

instead of quantity (i.e. the wet weight percentage of the parent
must be used instead of the quantity per for the components).
The specific gravity of the parent and component part(s) must
be specified.
Note:
Manufacture lead
time
No check is performed on the stocking units of

measure of the parents and components. This could
result in inaccurate results if these measures are
not compatible. For example: If the parent part
is stocked in liters and one of the components is
stocked in tons, the wet weight percentage ratio
could be incorrect.
Batch bill percentages are only retained on the Bill
of Materials and are a tool to aid the calculation of
a physical quantity per in a BOM. When you create
a job, these figures are not pulled through onto
the job. Therefore, if you have a stock code that
is defined as a batch bill with the percentage wet
weight defined against the material requirements,
when you print Factory Documentation (Factory
Documentation), the percentages are not printed.
This indicates the number of days it takes to manufacture

a made in stock item, assuming that all the raw materials
are available (i.e. it is the longest cumulative manufacturing
time, established from the sum of the elapsed time and interoperation movement time for all levels of the bill of materials).
For make to order items, the manufacturing lead time is the
total time between the release of an order to the production
process and shipment to the customer. For make to stock
items, it is the length of time between the release of an order to
the production process and receipt into inventory.
For made in items, you use the Lead Time Calculation
program to calculate and update the lead time. The Lead Time
Calculation program calculates a ratio of working to nonworking days and applies this when calculating the lead time
for an item. This means that you do not need to buffer the
lead time for made in items if you are using the Lead Time
Calculation program to update this field.
Refer to Lead time for additional information on lead time.
Planner
This indicates the person in a company responsible for

planning the manufacture of made-in stock items.
You can use the planner as a selection criterion in various
Requirements Planning reports. For example: If you have
a number of planners within a planning department (each
| Setup | 79
Field
Values
Description
responsible for a different product line) you can generate
reports selectively by planner.
Planner name
This indicates the name of the selected planner.
Resource
This indicates the parent of a resource structure of critical

resources for the stock code. It is the default resource
parent which can be changed within the Build Schedule
This resource parent is applied only to new build schedules.
Existing build schedules must be maintained to reflect the
resource parent.
The resource code is used by the Resource Planning system
and is validated only if the Requirements Planning module is
installed.
Resource
description
This indicates the description for the resource code selected.
WIP ledger control

account
This indicates the default account to which you want to post the
value of work in progress when a job is created for this stock
item.
If not defined against the stock item, then the Work in Progress
G/L control account (General Ledger Integration) is used as
the default instead. However, at the time of creating the job
(Job Maintenance) the ledger code entered at the WIP ledger
code field overrides these defaults.
This field is validated if Inventory is linked to General Ledger.
WIP ledger control

description
This indicates the description for the WIP ledger code selected.
Default job
classification
This indicates the default job classification assigned to the job.

Job classifications enable you to group your jobs according to
similar characteristics. In addition, you can optionally specify
that job numbering must take place according to the job
classification (WIP Setup).
You can also configure security access settings by job
classification, to restrict the unauthorized processing of jobs
and allocations (i.e. viewing, adding, changing, importing,
canceling and posting). This is achieved using the Operators
program.
Default job
classification
description
This indicates the description for the job classification code

selected.
Values
Description
Sales Details
Field
Pricing
| Setup | 80
Field
Values
Description
Pricing category
The entry against this field is only used with Extended pricing.
It is used to establish the price or discount code (depending on
the pricing method) to be applied to the stock code by finding
the corresponding entry in the customer's price category/code
table.
For example:
When define a pricing category of E against a stock code, then
the price or discount code entered against E on the customer's
price category/code table is the price or discount code that
is applied when selling items with that pricing category to the
customer.
Pricing method
Refer to Pricing and Discounts for additional information.
Coded
This indicates that the price code retrieved against the

customer (from either the auto price code or the price category/
code table depending on whether simple or extended pricing
is in force) must be used to determine the price of the stocked
item from the Price Code Table.
Customers, who have multiple prices against their stocked
items and therefore make use of Price Lists, use this method.
Typically, the prices differ because of the differing costs
involved in the delivery of the stock (e.g. transport methods,
special packing / treatment options etc.) or customers are
categorized differently (e.g. wholesale, retail).
A discount at line level per customer can also be entered when
processing the sales order.
Discounted
This indicates that the code retrieved against the customer

(from either the auto price code or the price category/code
table depending on whether simple or extended pricing is in
force) must be used to determine the discount(s) to apply to the
stock code's list price, cost price or another price code.
Up to three discounts may be chained.
Customers, who have certain stock items that attract different
discounts, rather than specific prices, use this method. It is
often used in an environment where there are frequent prices
fluctuations and it is easier to change the price once and let the
various discount options apply.
If the discount is based on the cost of the stock item, then it is
added to the cost. In effect the item is therefore being sold on a
Cost plus basis.
Quantity
discounted
This indicates that the quantity ordered determines the price

retrieved.
Only if the order quantity exceeds all the quantity breaks does
the system revert to determining the price based on the pricing
method in force for the company (i.e. simple or extended Sales Order Setup Pricing tab).
| Setup | 81
Field
Values
Description
Customers who sell stock in large volumes and who offer
"more for less" buying opportunities use this method.
A discount at line level per customer can also be entered when
processing the sales order.
List price
This indicates the list price for the item. Discounts for the stock
code can be based on this price during Sales Order Entry
processing.
Note:
The full stop and exclamation mark characters (. !)
cannot be used as these are reserved for manual and
contract pricing.
List price basis
This indicates the unit of measure on which the first selling

price of the stock item is based.
Commission code
This indicates the percentage of commission you want to apply

against a sale of the stock item, if the commission is based on
the price for the stock item (Sales Order Setup).
An entry of 0 indicates that you do not want commission to be
calculated.
Currency
List price code
This indicates the standard price code for the stock item
on which discounts can be based during Sales Order Entry
processing.
This field can be blank if you selected the option to allow blank
list price codes (Inventory Setup).
Note:
The List price code basis applies the discount
percentage to the list price held against the stock
item only if the stock code Pricing method is set to
Discounted.
Minimum % above
cost
This indicates a minimum percentage by which the price of

stocked order lines must exceed the cost of the item. If this is
defined as zero against the stock item, then the minimum price
percentage above cost defined within the Sales Order Setup
program is used.
The minimum % above cost defined against the item is used
only if you indicated that the stock code margin (instead of the
company margin) must be used (Sales Order Setup).
You can indicate whether the margin check is based on the
gross or net value (Sales Order Setup) and you can override
this margin if you have indicated that this override is allowed
(Sales Order Setup).
Tax codes
| Setup | 82
Field
Values
Description
Kit type
This indicates whether the stock code is used in a single level

bill of materials.
None
This indicates that the stock item is not to be treated as a kit

type.
Finished type
This indicates that the stock item is a finished part.

The cost, price and quantity is determined by the finished part,
while components are treated as comment lines.
Kit type
This indicates that first level components from the bill of

material are automatically received into stock when this stock
item is received into stock.
The cost, price and quantity is determined by the components
and the finished part is treated as a comment line. The parent
part, however, determines the order and ship quantities of the
components by multiplying the parent quantity by the quantity
per defined in the structure.
Sales analysis information is maintained on the component
stock codes.
Sub type
Select this if the parent stock code must be treated as a normal

stocked line to determine the price of the kit. The component
parts are treated as normal stocked lines to determine the cost
and quantity of items pulled from inventory (i.e. the price is
determined by the finished part and the cost and quantity is
determined by the components).
Sales analysis information is maintained for the parent stock
code.
Tax code
This indicates the tax percentage applicable to the stock item

by assigning it a tax code.
This is the default tax code used for sales orders, purchase
orders and requisitions created for the item.
Tax codes are maintained using the Tax Codes program.
If the customer is defined as taxable, then the rate for the tax
code entered in this field is applied by the Sales Order Entry
program when the item is sold to that customer. Conversely, if
the customer is defined as non-taxable (Customers), then this
tax code is ignored and the customer is not charged tax on the
item.
Note:
If you do not assign default tax codes to a stock item,
then the system assumes that the item is exempt from
tax.
In addition, if you select the Tax by geographic area
option (Tax Options) the system disregards the tax
code assigned to the geographic area when calculating
tax for that item on a sales order.
| Setup | 83
Field
Values
Description
Tax code
description
This indicates the description for the tax code selected. This is
displayed for information purposes.
Tax code rate
This indicates the rate defined against the tax code selected
(see Tax Codes). This is displayed for information purposes.
Other tax code
This indicates an alternative tax code for the stock item which
is used only if the stock item is sold to a customer against
whom you indicated that the Other tax code must be used
(Customers).
This enables you to define different rates of tax for this item
and then apply these rates to different customers when using
the Sales Order Entry program. You need to select the option:
Other tax code against those customers for whom you want to
apply the Other tax code rate (Customers).
For example:
Tax code A is defined as 14% inclusive and is used to sell the
stock item.
Tax code C is defined as 14% exclusive and is used for
purchasing stock item.
Assume that only selected customers purchase the item with
inclusive tax.
Against the customer, select Other tax code at the Tax

exemption selection field (Customers - General Details
pane).
Against the stock item enter Tax code C in the Tax code
field and Tax code A in the Other tax code field (Stock
Code Maintenance).
When processing sales orders for the item:
orders for customer accounts linked to Other tax code, the

default tax code for the orders will be Tax code A - 14%
inclusive
orders for customer accounts linked to the default Tax code
for the orders will be Tax code C - 14% exclusive
When processing requisitions and purchase orders for the item,

the default tax code or all suppliers will be Tax code C - 14%
exclusive.
Other tax code rate This indicates the rate defined against the other tax code
selected (see Tax Codes). This is displayed for information
purposes.
Other tax code
description
This indicates the description for the other tax code selected.
This is displayed for information purposes.
Demand time
fence
This indicates the number of days from the time an order is

placed until it can be fulfilled.
Sales options
This is used in the calculations performed by the Master

Production Schedule.
| Setup | 84
Field
Values
Description
It is ignored if an entry of 0 is assigned to the field, or you have
not indicated that the stock code is a make-to-order item.
Country of origin
If EC VAT is installed (Tax Options, then the country of origin

is required for the Supplementary Declarations.
This field is validated if the EC VAT system is installed.
Country of origin
description
This indicates the description for the country of origin selected.
Distribution
warehouse
This is used by the Post to a Sales Order business object

(used to import orders into SYSPRO) as a possible source of
supply if no warehouse is specified against individual stock
lines, or on the order header.
If blank, then the warehouse specified at the Warehouse to use
field is used as the default.
You can also indicate that this warehouse must be used at the
default warehouse for displaying quantities when browsing on
stock items (Inventory Setup).
Distribution
warehouse
description
This indicates the description for the distribution warehouse

selected.
Make to order item Select this if the stock item must be manufactured only if a
sales order for the item has been placed.
If you do not select this option, then the item is manufactured
according to the gross requirements rule, regardless of whether
a sales order exists.
Note:
This option is applied in Master Production Scheduling.
In Master Production Scheduling, when an item is
Make to order the demand time fence is set to 999,
which means that it will only apply sales orders.
This option is ignored by the Requirements
Calculation program.
Returnable item
Select this to define the item as returnable.

Note:
Stock for returnable items sold as part of a Sales Order
Service Charge will always be allowed to go negative,
irrespective of your selection at the setup option: Stock
on hand allowed to go negative (Inventory Setup General tab), and irrespective of your costing method.
If the returnable item is not sold as part of a Sales
Order Service Charge (i.e. it is sold or issued in its own
right) and stock on hand is not allowed to go negative,
then stock must be available.
A returnable item is usually sold together with a stock item,
but is returnable (e.g. a re-usable container, crate or pallet). A
| Setup | 85
Field
Values
Description
deposit may have been paid on the returnable item and it may
be returned for credit.
The warehouse quantity is reduced when a returnable item is
sold and a journal is created.
If you selected the setup option: Multiple bins (Inventory
Setup - General tab), then stock of a returnable item is
always depleted from the bin which has the same name as
the warehouse. Stock must manually be transferred into this
bin. The warehouse from which returnable items are depleted
is defined against the Returnable item setup options (Sales
Order Setup - General 1 tab).
If you select this option, then the Maximum number of decimals
for the returnable item (Stock Code Maintenance - General
tab), must be set to zero.
In addition, a returnable item may not:
Be lot traceable (Tracking tab)

Be serialized (Tracking tab)
Have a part category: K-Kit part (Descriptive tab)
Be ECC controlled (Tracking tab)
Be defined with unit quantity processing (General tab)
Sales weight
analysis
Fixed
This indicates that the item has a fixed weight.
Random (pricing
quantity)
This indicates that the item has a random weight and requires
a manually entered conversion factor to be specified during
Sales Order Entry. This facility caters for items that are sold in
a certain unit of measure, but where the weight of each item
sold differs from unit to unit.
Canadian GST
These options are only available if your nationality code is

defined as CAN (System Setup) and you indicated that the
Canadian GST system is required.
Note:
If you do not assign default tax codes to a stock item,
then the system assumes that the item is exempt from
tax.
In addition, if you select the Canadian GST required
and Tax by geographic area options (Tax Options)
the system disregards the tax code assigned to the
geographic area when calculating tax for that item on a
sales order.
GST code
You use this field to indicate the GST code for the stock item.
The percentage GST assigned to the stock item is based on
the GST code (Tax Codes).
GST codes are maintained using the Tax Codes program.
| Setup | 86
Field
Values
Description
GST code rate
This indicates the rate defined against the GST code selected
(see Tax Codes). This is displayed for information purposes.
GST code
description
This indicates the description for the GST code selected. This
is displayed for information purposes.
GST included in
price
This option enables you to indicate whether or not the

calculated tax amount must be included in the price of the item
during sales order processing.
Trade promotion
pricing
Trade promotion prices can be applied to specific stock items,

product classes, product groups or departments. This means
that different prices can be defined for a single stock item. The
options on this tab enable you to select the trade promotions
price that must apply to this specific stock item.
For example:
You used the Price Table program to define the following three
trade promotion price breaks for stock item A100:
1. for all stock items in product group Bicycles, the customer
pays a price of 500 for buying a quantity of 10 or more of
these items
2. for all stock items in product class BA, the customer
receives a 10% discount for buying a quantity of 5 or more
of these items
3. for stock item A100, the customer receives a 20% discount
for buying a mass of 50 or more of this item
Stock item A100 belongs to product group Bicycles and to
product class BA, so all these prices apply to stock item A100.
You use the Price type and Price basis options against the
stock item to select which price you want to apply for stock item
A100. Therefore, if you wanted to apply price break 1, then you
select Price type = Product group and Price basis = Quantity.
Similarly, if you wanted to apply price break 2, then you select
Price type = Stock code and Price basis = Mass.
Note:
The price type and price basis for the stock item must
match the price type and price basis defined against
the price break for the price to be applied when selling
the item.
Product group
You use this field to link the stock item to a specific product
group. Product groups provide a facility to group items together
in a more specific or general manner than product classes.
Product groups are maintained using the Product Group
program.
Price type
You use this field to indicate what you want to base trade
promotions price breaks on.
None
Select this if you do not want to apply any trade promotions

price breaks to the stock item.
| Setup | 87
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this to apply the stock code price break to the stock
item.
Product class
Select this to apply the price break defined for the product
class to the stock item.
Product group
Select this to apply the price break defined for the product
group to the stock item.
You use the Product group field above to define the stock item
as a member of a specific product group.
Department
Select this to apply the price break defined for the department
to the stock item.
Price basis
You use this field to indicate the unit of measure on which the
price break is based.
None
Select this to indicate that price breaks are not required.
Quantity
Select this if the price break you want to apply is based on the
quantity of the item sold.
Volume
volume of the item sold.
Mass
mass of the item sold.
Values
Description
Tracking
Field
Serial tracking
Serial tracking
method
None
Select this if you do not require serial tracking for this stock
item.
Manual serial
Select this to define the stock code as manual serialized,

where each serial number represents an individual item.
Batch serial
Select this to define the stock code as batch serialized, where

a group of items can have the same serial number.
Note:
Serialized and traceable items cannot be defined as
either a Floorstock items or a Bulk issue items.
Record serial
numbers
This option enables you to indicate when you want to capture

serial numbers.
During receipt
Select this to capture serial numbers at the time of receipting

a serialized item into stock. Serial numbers for traceable items
are recorded only at the time of processing a receipt.
| Setup | 88
Field
Values
Description
You must select this option when using Actual costing for Batch
serials (Inventory Setup). For actual costing, serials must be
captured at time of receipt.
During order entry
Select this to capture serial numbers at the time of placing a

sales order for a serialized item.
The point at which the serial number is requested when you
process a sales order depends on your selection at the option:
Capture serial numbers for orders (Sales Order Setup Details tab).
Note:
This option is not available for serialized items that

are also traceable.
This option is not available when using actual
costing for batch serials (Inventory Setup). For
actual costing, serials must be captured at time of
receipt.
If capturing serial numbers at the time of placing an
order, then the following should be noted:
any program that normally requests serial

numbers (except order entry) ignores the fact
that the item is serialized and does not request
serial numbers to be entered.
when selling the item in order entry, the entered
serial number does not have to exist, and it
is added to the serial master file as if you had
processed a normal receipt. However, if you
process a credit note for the item, the entered
serial number must be held on file.
the warehouse's stock on hand will probably not
balance to the total serials on hand. Additionally,
the Serial File Balance Report program will
not indicate an imbalance between the stock on
hand and the serial quantities on hand for those
items where serial numbers are being recorded
during order entry.
Lot traceability
control
Lot traceability
This option enables you to indicate whether the item is lot

traceable.
Non traceable
This indicates that the stock item is neither traceable nor

requires inspection before being receipted into inventory.
You cannot change a previously traceable item to be nontraceable if there is existing quantity on hand for the item in any
warehouse.
Traceable
Select this to indicate that the item is traceable and optionally

requires an inspection phase when processing a purchase
| Setup | 89
Field
Values
Description
order receipt for the item and before receipting a made-in item
into inventory.
A traceable item cannot be defined as a Kit type K or S.
When you select this option, you can specify whether the item
must be inspected before being receipted into stock.
Danger:
Do not select this option unless you have the Lot

Traceability module installed.
Once an item is set to be traceable, you will be

unable to unset this option if lot information exists
against the item (i.e. once any movement has been
processed against the item). Lot information cannot
be deleted, only archived using the Purge and
Archive program.
Business rules dictate that lot traceable items
must remain in the system indefinitely. If an item
is defined as traceable and one or more lots exist
against the item, then it can never be deleted,
irrespective of whether these lots are archived. If
you do not want any transactions processed for the
item, then you can place the item on full hold.
You can only set a stock item to be traceable if:
the quantity on hand is zero in all warehouses

the quantity allocated to sales orders is zero in all
warehouses
there are no outstanding sales orders for the item
there are no outstanding purchase orders for the item
there are no outstanding requisitions for the item
there are no outstanding SCTs (Supply Chain Transfer) for
the item
there are no outstanding jobs for the item
there are no outstanding quantities for the item in WIP
Inspection
Inspection required Select this to indicate that an inspection phase is required

when processing a purchase order receipt for a bought out item
and before receipting a made-in item into inventory.
Note:
Before setting a previously non-traceable item to be
traceable, ensure that the existing quantity on hand
for the item is reduced to zero in all warehouses (see
Reduce existing quantity on hand to zero in all
warehouses).
If you select this option, then you also need to select
the setup option: Work in Progress inspection required
(WIP Setup - General 1 tab) if you want to inspect a
made-in item before receipting it into inventory.
| Setup | 90
Field
Values
Description
Traceable
These options are only enabled if you selected the option:Lot

traceability - Traceable.
With inspection
Select this if all receipts for the item must go through an

inspection phase before being receipted into stock using the
Purchase Order Receipts/Purchase Order Inspection or
Job Receipts programs.
This option is selected by default.
Without inspection
Select this if you want to bypass the inspection phase for this
item and receipt the item directly into stock when using the
Purchase Order Receipts or Job Receipts programs.
Sample quantity
Select this if you want only a sample quantity of the item to

be inspected and the balance receipted directly into stock
when using the Purchase Order Receipts or Job Receipts
programs.
Allow issues from

multiple lots
Select this if you want to be able to issue this stock item from
more than one lot during sales order entry and issues to jobs.
Lot shelf life (days) This indicates the number of days before the expiry of a
traceable item and is used when performing a Two-stage
Receipt of the item into stock.
Engineering
change control
ECC controlled
Select Yes to indicate that the stock item is regulated by the

Engineering Change Control system.
Configuring a stock item to be engineering change controlled
means that any changes to that item within a bill of materials
can only be made by means of an engineering change order.
You will be unable to set a stock item which is in transit
between warehouses or which is currently part of a stock take
to be ECC controlled.
Engineering change control tracking information (revisions/
releases) for an item is only retained from the time the item is
set to be ECC controlled.
You can use the Set ECC Control for Stock Code program to
set multiple stock items to be ECC controlled.
Responsible ECC
user
This indicates the engineering user assigned to the stock item.

This enables you to notify the appropriate person(s) of changes
to the status of stock codes under their control.
If this field is left blank, then the default ECC user configured
within the Bill of Materials Setup program is used.
Revision
You use this field to indicate the current revision for the stock
item. The revision is used to indicate design changes made to
the stock item.
| Setup | 91
Field
Values
Description
Note:
You can only access this field if the item is not ECC
controlled or you are adding a new item which must be
ECC controlled.
Once defined, the revision for an ECC controlled item
can only be changed using the Engineering Change
Control module.
You will be unable to access this field if engineering
changes are being controlled at stock code level (Bill
of Materials Setup).
Release
You use this field to indicate the current release for the stock
item. The release is used to indicate minor design changes to
the stock item.
Note:
You can only access this field if the item is not ECC
controlled or you are adding a new item which must be
ECC controlled.
Once defined, the release for an ECC controlled item
can only be changed using the Engineering Change
Control module.
You will be unable to access this field if engineering
changes are being controlled at stock code level or at
revision level (Bill of Materials Setup).
Manual serial
numbers
These options are only available if:
The Serial tracking method is set to Manual.

You have selected Manual serial number tracking to be By
stock code (Inventory Setup - Numbering tab).
Tracking of manual serial numbers at stock code level enables

you to create sequential ranges of manual serial numbers for
each serialized stock item.
Ranges of serial numbers are created according to the Prefix
and Next suffix defined against each individual serialized stock
item.
For example:
You define the Prefix as 22 and the Next suffix as 001.
You create a range of three manual serial numbers. The serial
numbers are generated as: 22001, 22002, 22003. The next
range of manual serials numbers created would begin with
22004.
Note:
Up to 15 characters may be used for either the

prefix or the next suffix, but the combination of prefix
and suffix cannot exceed 20 characters (i.e. the
serial number cannot exceed 20 characters).
| Setup | 92
Field
Values
Description
Defining a prefix and suffix does not prevent you
from creating serial numbers with a different format.
Manual serial
prefix
You use this field to enter the character(s) that must form the
start of manual serial numbers generated for this stock item.
Manual serial next

suffix
You use this field to enter the number added after the prefix,
to form the next serial number in a range of manual serial
numbers for this stock item.
The system updates the Next suffix whenever a new serial
number is created using the prefix.
Note:
The number of numeric characters entered for the
suffix must cater for the total quantity of serial numbers
you want to add using the defined prefix. For example:
A suffix of 1 character will allow 9 serials to be added
for the prefix you defined.
Other
Field
Values
Costing
Description
If you selected the option:Apply warehouse BOM costs
(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the BOM cost fields are
disabled. You enter the BOM costs against the warehouse
using the Costing function of the Warehouses for Stock Code
program.
BOM operations
cost
This indicates the total cost of all operations for items included
in the stock item's structure.
This is updated for all parent parts by the Bill of Materials
Cost Implosion program, unless you selected the option:
Manualcost.
BOM material cost
This indicates the total cost of all materials for items included in
the stock item's structure.
Manualcost.
BOM fixed
overhead
This indicates the total cost of all fixed overheads for items
included in the stock item's structure.
Manualcost.
BOM variable
overhead
This indicates the total cost of all variable overheads for items
included in the stock item's structure.
Manualcost.
| Setup | 93
Field
Values
Description
BOM subcontract
cost
This indicates the total cost of all subcontract operations for

items included in the stock item's structure.
Manualcost.
This field is only enabled if you selected the setup option:
Split subcontract operation costs from material costs (Bill of
Materials Setup - General tab).
Activity based
costing required
Select this if you want to more accurately accumulate overhead

costs to specific products by applying these costs at the points
of transition in the procurement, manufacturing and sales cycle.
You will be unable to select this option for items with a Part
category of Co-product or Notional part (Descriptive tab).
Note:
You must indicate that the activity based costing
system is required (Bill of Materials Setup) before you
can enable this against a stock item.
Refer to Activity Based Costing for additional information on
activity based costing.
Manual cost
Select this if you do not want the Cost Implosion program to

update the BOM costs defined against this stock item.
If you select this option, you will need to update the costs
manually as required.
This option is only enabled if you have NOT selected the
option: Apply warehouse BOM costs (Inventory Setup General tab).
User defined
User defined 1-5
You use these fields to indicates extra information you want to

assign to the item.
You can specify your own wording for these fields using the
Additional Fields
This pane can be used to add any additional fields you want to display on the Stock Code Maintenance
screen. An example could be custom fields you defined (see Custom Form Design).
Note:
If you defined custom fields for stock items in a prior version of the software, then when upgrading
to SYSPRO 6.0 Issue 10 SP2, you need to manually add these fields to the Stock Code
Maintenance screen (typically in this pane).
Field
Custom
information
Values
Description
This field is defined by default, as a pane cannot be created
without any fields.
| Setup | 94
Field
Values
Description
Once you have added at least one other field, you can delete
this Custom information field from the pane.
Stock Codes
You use the Stock Codes program to view details of stock items currently defined.
Stock items are maintained using the Stock Code Maintenance program.
Stock Codes
The following options can be selected from the listview menu:
Field
Values
Description
Select
Select this to use the entry currently highlighted in the listview

in the corresponding field of another program.
Start At
Select this to navigate to a specific entry in the listview.
Find
Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate items

according to extensive search criteria.
Play
Select this to use the Multimedia program to view any

multimedia objects assigned to the entry currently highlighted
in the listview.
Bitmaps
Select this to use the Multimedia program to allocate a bitmap

to the stock item currently highlighted in the listview.
Exit
Add
You use this option to add a new stock item.
File
Edit
You will be unable to access this option if you have been

denied access to the activity: Inventory add stock code
(Operators - Security tab).
Change
You use this option to change the information for the currently
highlighted stock item.
denied access to the activity: Inventory change stock code
Delete
You use this option to delete the currently highlighted stock

item.
denied access to the activity: Inventory delete stock code
If you delete a stock item, then all movement records
associated with the item are removed. If you delete a
warehouse in which an item is stocked, then all movement
records for the warehouse are removed.
| Setup | 95
Field
Values
Description
If you have not defined stock code deletion options (Inventory
Setup - Options tab), you will be unable to delete a stock code
if ANY of the following conditions apply:
operations are held against the stock item

the stock item is a parent part in a bill of materials structure
the stock item is a component part in a bill of materials
structure
there are outstanding jobs for the stock item
there are outstanding purchase orders for the stock item
there are outstanding sales orders for the stock item
there is an on hand quantity of the stock item in any
warehouse
movements exist for the item in the current or two prior
periods
warehouse records exist for the item
the stock item is defined as traceable
Note:
Business rules dictate that lot traceable items must
remain in the system indefinitely.
If an item is defined as traceable and one or more

lots exist against the item, it can never be deleted,
irrespective of whether these lots are archived. If
you do not want any transactions processed for the
item, then you can place the item on full hold.
a stock take is in progress affecting any warehouse to which
the stock item has been assigned
the stock item is attached to a customer/stock code cross
reference
the stock item is attached to a supplier/stock code cross
reference
the stock item is a Notional part with a structure/routing or
co-products attached to it (BOM Co-products)
If you have defined the options against which a stock code may
be deleted, (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then some of the
above checks can be bypassed and the codes deleted.
Copy
Select this to use the Copy Stock Code program to create a

copy of the currently highlighted stock item.
denied access to the activity: Inventory add stock code
Warehouses
You use this option to assign the stock item to a warehouse

and to define the warehouse information for the highlighted
stock item using the Warehouses for Stock Code program.
Pricing
You use this option to define the pricing information for the
highlighted stock item using the Pricing for a Stock Code
program.
| Setup | 96
Field
Values
Description
Foreign Purchase
Prices
You use this option to define the foreign purchase pricing

information for the highlighted stock item using the Foreign
Purchase Prices program.
Alternate Stock
Codes
You use this option to define the alternate stock code

information for the highlighted stock item using the Alternate
Stock Codes program.
Alternate Supplier
You use this option to define the alternate supplier information

for the highlighted stock item using the Alternate Suppliers
program.
On Hold Status
You use this option to use the Maintain Hold Status program
to define the on hold status for the highlighted stock item.
denied access to the activity: Inventory stock Code on Hold
Functions
Query
You use this option to use the Inventory Query program to

view detailed information for the highlighted stock item.
Ignore Alt
Sequence for
Warehouse
Select this to always display the information in stock code

sequence when accessing the Stock Codes program for
a specific warehouse from within another program. When
this option is selected, your selection at the Sequence menu
is ignored when browsing on stock codes for a specific
warehouse from within another program.
You typically select this preference when you have a large
number of stock items, as it will speed up browsing on these
items (for a specific warehouse) from other programs.
When you browse on stock codes for all warehouses (e.g.
from Inventory Query, the information is displayed in the
sequence last selected at the Sequence menu of the Stock
Codes program.
This option does not affect your selection at the Sequence
menu when browsing from within the Stock Codes program.
Options
Confirm Deletions
Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm the
deletion of a stock item when you select to delete it. If you do
not select this option, then the stock code is deleted without
warning, providing the pre-requisites for deleting it are met.
Only Specific W/
house's Stock
You use this option to select a specific warehouse for which

you want to list the stock items in the listview.
Change
Warehouse
You use this option to change the warehouse for which you
want to display the stock items in the listview.
Include
This option is only enabled if you selected to view stock items

for a specific warehouse.
| Setup | 97
Field
Values
Description
Specific Supplier's
Stock
You use this option to select a specific supplier for whom you
want to list the stock items in the listview.
This option is only available if you selected to sequence the
stock codes in the listview by supplier.
Change Supplier
You use this option to change the supplier for whom you want
to display the stock items in the listview.
This option is only enabled if you selected to view stock items
for a specific supplier.
Price and Wh
Information
Although this option is selected by default, you can deselect it

if you do not want to display pricing and warehouse information
for the selected stock item.
You would typically deselect this option if you have a large
number of stock items. By not including the pricing and
warehouse information (which comes from separate files/
tables), the system is able to display the stock code information
more quickly in the listview.
This option is only enabled if you selected the setup option:
Display price and quantities (Inventory Setup - Browse tab).
Sequence
On Partial Hold
Status
Select this to include items which are on full hold in the listview.
On Full Hold
Status
Select this to include items which are on partial hold in the

listview.
This option enables you define the sequence in which the stock
items are displayed in the listview. The following sequences
can be selected:
Stock Code
Description
Long Description
Alternate Key 1
Alternate Key 2
Supplier
Product Class
Note:
When you select a sequence other than Stock
Code and you browse on stock codes for a specific
warehouse from within another program, the system
may take some time to display the information.
You can use the option: Ignore Alt Sequence for
Warehouse from the Functions menu to always display
the details in stock code sequence when browsing on
stock codes for a specific warehouse from another
program.
Select

| Setup | 98
Field
Values
Start at
Description
Your entry here indicates the point from which you want to start
viewing stock codes in the listview.
You can enter either the Stock code, Description, Long
description, Alternate key 1, Alternate key 2, Supplier or
Product class depending on your selection at the Sequence
menu.
Play

in the listview.
Stock Codes Listview

When you select the Stock Codes program, the currently defined stock codes are displayed in a listview.
The following information is included in this listview:
Note:
Not all information is displayed by default. You use the Field Chooser option to add columns to the
listview (see Listviews).
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item.

Description
This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout the system whenever the stock code is
entered. You can use it to verify that the correct item has been entered.
Long description
This is an additional description assigned to a stock code which is viewable from within the Inventory
Query program and which can be printed on reports and inventory documents.
Alternate key 1
This indicates additional information assigned to the stock item which can be used as selection criteria
when browsing on stock codes.
It can also be used to change the sequence in which items are displayed when browsing on stock
codes.
The wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit your own requirements (Inventory Setup).
Alternate key 2
This indicates additional information assigned to the stock item which can be used as selection criteria
when browsing on stock codes.
It can also be used to change the sequence in which items are displayed when browsing on stock
codes.
The wording displayed for this field can be changed to suit your own requirements (Inventory Setup).
This indicates the unit of measure in which the stock item is held on file.
This indicates an alternative unit of measure for the sale or purchase quantity of an item and the pricing.
This indicates an additional unit of measure for the sales ordering quantity of an item and the pricing.
Mass
| Setup | 99
This indicates the weight of a single unit of the stock item in the stocking unit of measure.
Volume
This indicates the volume of a single unit of the stock item in the stocking unit of measure
Supplier
This indicates the primary supplier from whom you usually purchase this stock item.
Product class
This indicates the category to which the item is assigned. It is used for reporting purposes (Sales
Analysis) and as a method of defining your integration to the General Ledger module.
Kit type
This indicates whether the stock code is used in a single level bill of materials.
Buyer
This indicates the person responsible for purchasing the stock item.
Planner
This indicates the person in a company responsible for planning the manufacture of made-in stock
items.
Lead time
This indicates the number of days in which to either buy out or manufacture the stock item.
Part category
This indicates the type of the stock item.

Warehouse to use
This indicates the warehouse that must be used to extract the quantities of stock required by the Bill of
Materials module when performing functions such as a cost implosion and creating material allocations.
This is also the default warehouse used for the parent when adding a job and is used to calculated the
new landed cost of an item.
Batching rule
This indicates the batching rule defined against the stock item. The batching rule (or buying rule) is
used by the Requirements Planning module to indicate how you want to address quantity shortages
encountered for the stock item.
EBQ
This indicates the Economic Batch Quantity for the stock item.
Pan
This indicates the pan size of the stock item.
This can be likened to a container size. Within the Bill of Materials module you can indicate whether
the elapsed time against work centers or cost centers is based on the pan size or the economic batch
quantity.
User defined 1 - 5
This indicates extra information that you have assigned to the item.
You can specify your own wording for these fields using the Inventory Setup program.
Drawing number
This field is for documentary purposes and is printed on reports and factory documentation.
This field is only relevant if the ECC (Engineering Change Control) module is installed.
Quantity on hand
This indicates the quantity of the item physically in the warehouse(s). This includes quantities on hold.
Quantity allocated to sales orders
| Setup | 100
This indicates the quantity of the item allocated to sales orders (quantity on back order + sales order
ship quantity). These quantities exclude unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities.
Available quantity
This indicates the quantity available of the stock item.
This is the quantity on hand less the quantity allocated to sales orders for the item in the selected
warehouse. The quantity allocated to sales orders is the order quantity and includes quantities on
backorder.
Note:
The quantity available includes stock on hold, stock in expired lots, stock locked by Engineering
Change Orders and stock in bins that are on hold. The reason is that the quantity on hand (used
in the calculation) is the quantity physically in the warehouse and includes quantities on hold.
Quantity on order
This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers for
the item.
Back order quantity
This indicates the quantity on back order (sales order back order quantity). This quantity excludes
unallocated scheduled order back order quantities.
Quantity in transit
This indicates the In transit quantity for the item (outstanding non-immediate warehouse transfers
shown against the target warehouse).
WIP allocations
This indicates the quantity allocated to Work in Progress (outstanding materials to be issued to jobs).
This includes allocations to both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs.
Quantity in inspection
This indicates the quantity of the item which is in inspection (quantity of purchased items awaiting
inspection, i.e. receipted into inspection but not receipted into stock).
Minimum quantity
This indicates the minimum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point in
time.
A quantity of zero indicates that the minimum quantity is undefined.

Maximum quantity
This indicates the maximum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point in
time.
A quantity of zero indicates that the maximum is undefined.

Cost
This indicates the unit cost of the item.

Default bin
This indicates the default bin location for the item within the warehouse. Refer to Multiple bins for
additional information.
User defined 1 - 3
This indicates extra information that you have assigned to the warehouse.
You can specify your own wording for these fields using the Inventory Setup program.
List price
This indicates the list price for the item.

List pricing uom
| Setup | 101
This indicates the unit of measure for the list price.

ECC controlled
This indicates whether the stock item is regulated by the Engineering Change Control system.
Revision
This indicates the revision of the stock if the item is ECC controlled.
Release
This indicates the release of the stock if the item is ECC controlled.
ECC user
This indicates the engineering user assigned to the stock item. It only applies if the item is ECC
controlled.
Stock code status
This indicates the current status of the stock item.
Temp indicates that this is a temporary item which will be deleted the next time the Purge function of
the Inventory Period End program is run.
Clear indicates that the stock item must be sold or cleared as a matter of urgency.
If this column is blank then it indicates that this is a normal stock item.
Warehouses for Stock Code

You use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to view details of the warehouses in which a selected
stock item is currently stocked.
You use the Inventory Warehouses program to define and maintain warehouses.
You access the Warehouses for Stock Code program by selecting the Warehouses option from the Edit
menu of the Stock Codes program.
Stock codes are assigned to warehouses using the Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code program.
Warehouses for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start At
Exit
Add
Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance for Stock

Code program to assign a new warehouse to the stock code
Change
Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance for Stock

Code program to maintain the entry currently highlighted in the
listview.
Delete
Select this to delete the entry currently highlighted in the

listview.
File
Edit
| Setup | 102
Field
Values
Description
Confirm Deletions
Select this if you want the system to prompt you to confirm

the deletion of a warehouse link when you select to delete it.
If you do not select this option, then the link is deleted without
warning.
Options
Start
These options are displayed when you select the Start At option from the File menu.
Field
Values
Description
Start at
warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you want to
navigate in the listview.
OK
Select this to navigate to the entry you made in the previous

field.
Cancel
Select this to return to the listview without navigating to a

different entry.
Listview
When you select the Warehouses for Stock Code program, the warehouses in which the selected stock
item is currently stocked are displayed in a listview.
W/h
This indicates the warehouse code.

Description
This indicates the description of the warehouse.

On hand
This indicates the quantity of the stock item which is physically in the warehouse.
Available
This indicates the quantity of the stock item on hand in this warehouse less the quantity allocated to
sales orders.
Back order
This indicates the sales order back order quantity for the stock item in this warehouse. This quantity
excludes unallocated scheduled order back order quantities.
On order
This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers for
the stock item in this warehouse.
WIP allocations
This indicates the quantity of outstanding materials to be issued to jobs. This includes allocations to
both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs.
Bin
This indicates the bin location for the item within the warehouse.
The bin location defaults to the warehouse code. It is displayed if you selected the option: Multiple bins
in use against the warehouse (Inventory Warehouses).
| Setup | 103
This is also the location from which stock is issued during the Backflushing function of the Inventory
Movements program.

Safety stock
This indicates the safety stock level for the item in this warehouse.
Safety stock is the quantity of stock kept in the warehouse to protect against fluctuations in demand or
supply.
A quantity of zero indicates that the safety stock level is undefined.

Minimum quantity
This indicates the minimum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point in
time.
A quantity of zero indicates that the minimum quantity is undefined.

Maximum quantity
This indicates the maximum quantity of the item required to be stocked in this warehouse at any point in
time.
A quantity of zero indicates that the maximum is undefined.

Order policy
This indicates the order policy defined for the stock item in this warehouse.
Major order multiple
This indicates the major order multiple for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.
Minor order multiple
This indicates the minor order multiple for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.
Min order quantity
This indicates the minimum order quantity for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.
Max order quantity
This indicates the maximum order quantity for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.
Fixed time period
This indicates the fixed time period for the order policy for the item in this warehouse.
Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code

You use the Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code program to assign a stock item to a warehouse
and to define the warehouse information for a stock item. Before you can process transactions for stock
items, they must be assigned to (i.e. stocked in) at least one warehouse.
Note:
When you add a stock code to a warehouse, the cost entered is saved against the current period
and prior periods. This ensures that when a transaction is processed for a previous period, the cost
of the transaction is not zero.
However, if an operator adds the warehouse from within a posting program, then only the current
period is updated with the cost entered.
You use the Inventory Warehouses program to define and maintain warehouses.
The Warehouses for Stock Code listview displays details of warehouses in which the selected stock item
is currently stocked.
| Setup | 104

This screen is displayed when you select theAdd or Change option from the Edit menu of the Warehouses
for Stock Code program.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to indicate a new stock code to which you want to

assign a warehouse.
Delete
Select this to remove the stock item from the warehouse

currently displayed (i.e. remove the stock code to warehouse
link).
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to indicate a new stock code to which you want
to assign a warehouse.
Delete
Select this icon to remove the stock item from the warehouse
currently displayed (i.e. remove the stock code to warehouse
link).
Save
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the stock item you want to link to a
warehouse or to several warehouses.
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you want
to link the stock item. This is the warehouse in which the item
must be stocked.
Add Multiple
Warehouses
Select this to assign the stock item to multiple warehouses with

the same information against the item in each warehouse.
This means you only enter the data for the item once and this
data is then transferred to each warehouse into which you add
the item. For example, if you set the cost of the item to 1000
and add the item to four warehouses, then the cost of the item
is 1000 in all four warehouses.
If you want to define different data (for example a different
cost or different policy details) for the item in the different
warehouses, then you need to add the item to each warehouse
individually (i.e. do not use this function).
If you select this option, then you use the Warehouse list >
Click to add a list option to indicate the warehouses you want
to add to the stock item.

If you want to assign a stock item to more than one warehouse, you can use the Add Multiple Warehouses
option.
| Setup | 105
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item you selected to link to
the warehouse(s).
Stock code
description
This indicates the description of the stock code you selected to

link to the warehouse(s).
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you want
to link the stock item. This is the warehouse in which the item
must be stocked.
Warehouse
description
This indicates the description of the warehouse you selected to

link to the stock item.
Warehouse list
This option is only enabled when you select the option: Add
Multiple Warehouses.
Click to add a list
Cost multiplier
Select this to indicate a list of warehouses to which the stock

code must be linked (see Warehouse List Selection).
This indicates what portion of the transaction value of the stock
item comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g. freight, duty, tax,
etc.).
The cost multiplier is used within the Inventory Movements
program when processing a receipt, but only if you have
indicated that you want to apply a cost multiplier when
processing receipts (Inventory Setup).
If you selected the option: Include non-merchandise costs
in last cost (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then the Last
cost of the item is calculated as the Receipt cost plus the
calculated cost multiplier value. If the option: Include nonmerchandise costs in last cost (Inventory Setup - Options
tab), is not selected, then the Last cost is the Receipt cost
entered when processing the receipt using the Inventory
Movements program.
Cost
This indicates the cost of one unit of the stock item in the
selected warehouse.
Where applicable, it includes additional charges such as
freight, customs duty, packaging, etc, and any purchase price
variances.
Once you have entered and saved the Unit cost for a stock
item, you will be unable to change it using the Warehouses for
Stock Code program.
The cost entered here is saved against the current period
and prior periods. This ensures that when a transaction is
processed for a previous period, the cost of the transaction is
not zero.
Note:
If an operator adds the warehouse from a posting
program, then only the current period is updated with
the cost entered.
If your costing method is set to Standard (Inventory Setup
- General tab or Inventory Warehouses if you are using
| Setup | 106
Field
Values
Description
costing per warehouse), then you need to use the Inventory
Movements or Transfer BOM Costs to Wh Costs program
to change the unit cost. If your costing method is not set to
Standard, then the unit cost is adjusted automatically by the
movements that affect the unit cost (for example when using
Purchase Order Receipts). Irrespective of your costing
method, the unit cost of an item can be changed using the Cost
Change function of the Inventory Movements program.
Note:
You can suppress the display of stock item costs (i.e.
normally visible in the Cost column of the listview pane)
selectively by operator. To achieve this, you must deny
operators access to the Show costs in Stock code
maintenanceFields.
Be careful that you do not deny an operator access to
the viewing of costs in stock code maintenance, while
allowing the same operator the facility to maintain stock
codes. In this scenario, the operator will still be able to
view details of BOM costs held against the item.
Minimum quantity
This indicates the minimum quantity of the item required to be

stocked in the warehouse at any point in time. It is used as a
stock control feature, and you can report on items where the
on hand quantity is less than this figure using the Warehouse
Exception program. This field is updated by the calculation
performed by the Minimum Quantity Calculation program.
Maximum
quantity
This indicates the maximum quantity of the item required to be

stocked in the warehouse at any point in time.
It is used as a stock control feature, and you can report on
items where the on hand quantity exceeds this figure using the
Warehouse Exception program (providing that the entry made
here is non-zero).
It is also using together with batching rule D (i.e. order to
maximum quantity) within the Requirements Planning module.
Note:
SYSPRO does not allow any order policy (Stock Code
Maintenance - Batching rules) to exceed the Maximum
quantity defined.
Safety stock level
This stock control feature highlights instances where stock falls

below a prescribed level and is used within the Requirements
Planning module.
The safety stock level is usually set to be above the minimum
stock level. It is the quantity of stock kept in the warehouse to
protect against fluctuations in demand or supply.
You can report on items where the on hand quantity falls below
this figure, using the Warehouse Exception program.
Re-order quantity
This indicates when you should place an order for more of a

particular stock item.
| Setup | 107
Field
Values
Description
If you are using costing by warehouse (Inventory Setup) and
are retaining the BOM Costs by warehouse then the Re-order
quantity is used as the EBQ (Economic Batch Quantity) in all
calculations.
The re-order quantity is printed on the Purchasing Work Sheet
report.
Pallet quantity
This indicates a default quantity of the stock item that is

required to be held in each bin, and is used when processing a
purchase order receipt.
Default bin
location
This indicates the specific location of the stock item in a

particular warehouse.
The bin location defaults to the warehouse code and an entry
must be made if you selected the option: Multiple bins in use
against the warehouse (Inventory Warehouses).
This is also the location from which stock is issued during the
Backflushing function of the Inventory Movements program.
User defined 1-3
This indicates extra information you want to store against the

warehouse.
Note:
You can specify your own wording for these fields
(Inventory Setup).
Order policy
details
These options enable you to indicate the batching rules you

require for the stock item in this warehouse.
The batching rule (or buying rule) is used by the Requirements
Planning module to indicate how you want to address quantity
shortages encountered for the stock item. Although a buying
rule is applied to bought-out items and a batch rule is applied
to made-in items, the term is interchangeable within the
Requirements Planning system because the buying or batch
rules can apply to either bought-out or made-in items.
These options are only enabled if you selected the Batching
rule: Q - Apply warehouse order policy for the item (Stock
Code Maintenance).
Order policy
The order policy you select depends on the equivalent batching

rule you require. See Batching Rules and Order Policy
Equivalents.
Note:
If you selected the setup option: Consolidate selected
warehouses (Requirements Planning Setup Warehouses tab), then the order policy defined against
the warehouse to use (Stock Code Maintenance) is
applied.
The following order policies can be selected:
| Setup | 108
Field
Values
Description
C - Cover shortages
S - Order to max if shortage
M - Order to max if less than minimum
P - Suppress MRP ordering
Major order
multiple
If this field is set to anything other than zero, then the order
quantity will be calculated as a multiple of the entered value.
Minor order
multiple
quantity will be calculated as a multiple of the entered value.
Minimum order
quantity
If this field is set to anything other than zero, then the

order quantity will be at least the entered value even if the
requirement is for less.
Maximum order
quantity
quantity will not exceed the entered value. If the requirement
is greater than the entered value, then multiple orders will be
required.
Fixed time period
This indicates the number of working days that represents a

fixed time period.
module.
All order policies take the entry in this field into account. If
you enter one or zero in this field, then orders are raised on
the date required. Any value greater than zero will cause
requirements planning to apply the time period to scheduling
demand and raising suggestions.
Transfer supplied
details
These options enable you to assign defaults that you want to

use when transferring this stock item from a source warehouse
to this warehouse.
Note:
You will be unable to configure transfer supply details
if the warehouse being maintained for the stock item
is also the designated Warehouse to use for the stock
item.
The reason for this is that requirements planning
assumes that the item is either going to be
manufactured or purchased for this warehouse and
then distributed through the supply chain. Therefore,
if it is set up correctly (with this being the supply
warehouse) you should not encounter supply loops
which would cause an error in planning.
You can manually transfer to the Warehouse to
use either as an SCT or GIT, using the Inventory
Movements, Sales Order Entry or Back Order
Review programs.
Transfer supplied
item
This indicates whether the stock item for this warehouse can
be supplied by another warehouse.
| Setup | 109
Field
Values
Description
You must select this option if you want to be able to create
supply chain transfer orders for this warehouse/stock code
combination using the Back Order Review program.
This option must also be selected if you want the Requirements
Planning system to take account of supply chain transfer
orders.
Source warehouse You use this field to indicate the supplying warehouse from
which stock will be transferred to replenish the warehouse you
are maintaining for the stock item.
Lead time (days)
You use this field to indicate the number of days it takes to

move the stock item from the source warehouse to the target
warehouse.
It is used to calculate the expected delivery date.
Note:
Dock to stock
(days)
If this field is left blank, then the program uses

the entry defined in the Warehouse Move Matrix
program. If the entry in the matrix is blank, then this
field defaults to zero (0).
Within MRP, the lead time entered here is added
to the dock to stock days and the entry defined at
the Number of days after stock arrives that it can be
used field (Requirements Planning Setup).
You use this field to indicate the number of days a stock item
is required to be in stock at the source warehouse prior to
transfer.
Note:
Within MRP, the dock to stock days entered here is
added to the lead time and the entry defined at the
Number of days after stock arrives that it can be used
field (Requirements Planning Setup).
Use warehouse
buying rule
Select this to indicate that the buying rule specified against

the warehouse must be used by the Requirements Planning
system to calculate order quantities in the event of a stock
shortage.
Note:
If you select to use the warehouse buying rule, then the
Re-order quantity assigned to the warehouse is used
instead of the Economic Batch Quantity and the Pallet
quantity is used instead of the pan size.
Replenishment
rule
This field is enabled only if you selected the option: Use

warehouse buying rule.
The buying rule selected here is used by the Requirements
Planning system and indicates how you want to address
quantity shortages encountered for the stock item.
| Setup | 110
Field
Values
Description
Fixed time period

(days)
This field is enabled only if you selected the option: Use

warehouse buying rule.
It indicates the number of working days that represents a fixed
time period.
For example: A fixed time period of 1 day indicates that if a
shortage is encountered, that the total shortage for today and
the next working day is used as if the shortage falls today.
module.
Transfer cost
multiplier
Your entry here is used to calculate the additional nonmerchandise costs that you want to add to the cost of
transferring goods (e.g. Freight and handling charges).
Note:
Your entry made here is only applied if you selected
to apply a cost multiplier when processing receipts
(Inventory Setup).
Ledger code
BOM costing
This indicates the ledger account to which you want to disburse

the non-merchandise value arising from the transfer of goods.
You use these fields to indicate the BOM costs to use for all
items in the currently selected warehouse.
If you do not select the option: Manual cost, then these BOM
costs are updated for all parent parts by the Bill of Materials
Cost Implosion program.
These options are only enabled if you selected the option:
Apply warehouse BOM costs (Inventory Setup - General tab).
BOM operations
cost
This indicates the total cost of all operations for each item
included in this warehouse.
BOM material cost
This indicates the total cost of all materials for each item
BOM fixed
overhead
This indicates the total cost of all fixed overheads for each item
BOM variable
overhead
This indicates the total cost of all variable overheads for each
item included in this warehouse.
BOM subcontract
cost
This indicates the total cost of all subcontract operations for

each item included in this warehouse.
This field is only enabled if you selected the setup option:
Split subcontract operation costs from material costs (Bill of
Materials Setup - General tab).
Manual cost
Select this if you do not want the Cost Implosion program to

update the BOM costs defined against the warehouse.
| Setup | 111
Field
Values
Description
If you select this option, you will need to update the costs
manually as required.
Warehouse List Selection

This screen is displayed when you select the Warehouse list > Click to add a list option to assign the stock
item to multiple warehouses with the same information against the item in each warehouse.
Field
Values
Description
Accept and Close
Select this to assign the warehouses in the Selected

Warehouses list to the stock code and to return to the previous
screen.
Cancel Any
Changes
Select this to ignore any selections you made and to return to

File
If you made any changes, then you are prompted to save these
before returning to the previous screen.
Accept and Close
Select this to assign the warehouses in the Selected

Warehouses list to the stock code and to return to the previous
screen.
Cancel

If you made any changes, then you are prompted to save these
before returning to the previous screen.
Available
Warehouses
This listview displays the warehouses currently defined in

SYSPRO to which the selected stock code can be assigned.
Assign Selected
Select this to assign the warehouses highlighted in the

Available Warehouses listview to the Selected Warehouses
list. These are the warehouses you want to assign to the stock
code.
pointer to individually highlight the warehouses you want to
assign to the stock code.
Assign All
Selected
Warehouses
Select this to assign all the warehouses in the Available

Warehouses list to the stock code. All the warehouses in
the Available Warehouses list are added to the Selected
Warehouses list.
This listview displays the warehouses to which you selected to
assign the stock code.
Remove Selected
Select this to remove the currently highlighted warehouse(s)

from the Selected Warehouses listview. The warehouses which
are removed will not be linked to the stock code.
pointer to individually highlight the warehouses you want to
remove from the Selected Warehouses list.
Remove All
Select this to remove all the warehouse(s) from the Selected

Warehouses list.
| Setup | 112
Batching Rules and Order Policy Equivalents

If you selected the Batching rule: Q - Apply warehouse order policy for the item (Stock Code
Maintenance), then you use the Order Policy Details options against the warehouse to define the batching
rule for the item.
For each batching rule you can define against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance), an equivalent
rule can be defined against the warehouse for the stock item using the order policies.
This is illustrated in the tables below:
Batching Rule: A - Lot for lot
The order quantity is the shortage quantity.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Minimum order quantity
Maximum order quantity
Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: B - Multiples of EBQ
To calculate the order quantity, the shortage

quantity is rounded up to the next multiple of the
economic batch quantity.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set this to the same as the EBQ against the stock

item (Stock Code Maintenance)

Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: C - Fixed Time Period
When a shortage is encountered, the order quantity

is calculated by adding all the shortages in the fixed
time period ahead.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Fixed time period
Set to 1 and 99 depending on the time period you

require.
Batching Rule: D - Order to Maximum if

Shortage
When a shortage is encountered, the order quantity

is calculated to increase the stock holding up to the
maximum defined against the warehouse.
Order policy
S - Order to max if shortage
0
| Setup | 113
Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: E - Order to Maximum if Less

Than Minimum
As soon as the result field (during netting-off) falls

below the minimum quantity, an order quantity
is calculated to order sufficient to increase the
quantity available up to the maximum quantity.
Order policy
M - Order to max if less than minimum
Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: F - Multiples of Pan
To calculate the order quantity, the shortage

quantity is rounded up to the next multiple of the
pan size.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set this to the same as the Pan size against the

stock item (Stock Code Maintenance)

Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: G - Multiple EBQ Lots
If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should be

created to satisfy the shortage, each the size of the
EBQ.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set to 0
Set to 0


Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: H - Multiple Pan Lots
If a shortage occurs, then multiple orders should be

created to satisfy the shortage, each the size of the
Pan.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
| Setup | 114
Set to 0
Set to 0


Fixed time period
Set to 1
Batching Rule: I - Minimum of EBQ
If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is the

quantity required to meet the shortage, unless this
is less than the EBQ (in which case the EBQ is
used).
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set to 0
Set to 0

Set to 0
Fixed time period
Set to between 1 and 99 depending on the time

period you require.
Batching Rule: J - Minimum of Pan
If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is the

quantity required to meet the shortage, unless this
is less than the Pan size (in which case the Pan
size is used).
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set to 0
Set to 0

Set to 0
Fixed time period

period you require.
Batching Rule: K - Multiples of EBQ (fixed time

period)
This rule is a combination of rules B and C.

The order quantity is calculated by adding all the
shortages in the fixed time period ahead.
Once this total shortage quantity has been
calculated, then this is rounded up to the next
multiple of the economic batch quantity.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage

| Setup | 115

Fixed time period

period you require.
Batching Rule: L - Multiples of Pan (fixed time

period)
This rule is a combination of rules F and C.

This rule is identical to rule K, except that the pan
quantity is used instead of the economic batch
quantity.
calculated, then this is rounded up to the next
multiple of the pan size.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage


Fixed time period

period you require.
Batching Rule: M - Multiple EBQ Lots (fixed time This rule is a combination of rules G and C.
period)
calculated, then multiple orders (each the size of
the EBQ) are suggested.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set to 0
Set to 0


Fixed time period

period you require.
Batching Rule: N - Multiple Pan Lots (fixed time

period)
This rule is a combination of rules H and C.
| Setup | 116
This rule is identical to rule M, except that the pan

quantity is used instead of the economic batch
quantity.
calculated, then multiple orders (each the size of
the pan) are suggested.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage
Set to 0
Set to 0


Fixed time period

period you require.
Batching Rule: O - Minimum of EBQ, thereafter

multiples of pan
If a shortage occurs, the order quantity is at least

the EBQ. However, if the EBQ is insufficient to
satisfy the shortage, then the remaining shortage is
rounded up to the next multiple of the pan quantity.
Order policy
C - Cover shortage



Set to 0
Fixed time period

period you require.
Batching Rule: P - Suppress MRP ordering
Demand generated for this item will not result in

any suggested purchase orders, unless you have
indicated that batching rules must be overridden
(Requirements Planning Setup).
Order policy
P - Suppress MRP Ordering
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Fixed time period
Not applicable
| Setup | 117
Maintain Hold Status

You use the Maintain Hold Status program to maintain the hold status of a stock item.
This program can be accessed by selecting the On Hold Status option from the Edit menu of the Stock
Codes program.
Placing a stock code on hold enables you to limit what transactions can be processed against it (i.e.
prevent it from being bought, sold, or manufactured). Placing a stock code on hold does not prevent you
from using the Forecast Maintenance program to enter forecasts for the item, or from using the Build
Schedule Maintenance program to create build schedules for the item.
You will be unable to change the hold status of a stock item if you have been denied access to the activity:
Inventory stock Code on Hold (Operators - Security tab).
Maintain Hold Status

Field
Values
Description
Save
Cancel

Maintain Hold
Status
Status
Hold status
Partial hold
Select this if you want to allow any transaction type to be

processed against the item using the Inventory Movements
program. You are notified that a partial hold exists for the item,
but you can optionally elect to continue with the transaction.
You will be unable to place any quantity of the item into
backorder using the Sales Order Entry program. However, if a
backorder quantity already exists for the item (before the item
was placed on partial hold), then you will still be able to ship
the entire quantity, providing you have available stock.
You will be unable to place new purchase orders for the item.
In addition, if the item exists against an existing purchase order
(before the item was placed on partial hold), you will be unable
to change the quantity for the item on that purchase order.
You will be unable to place new purchase order requisition for
the item.
You can receipt the item using the Purchase Order Receipts
program providing you use the Receive Quantity option and not
the Receipt All option.
You would typically place an item on partial hold if you are in
the process of discontinuing the item, but you want to be able
to sell or otherwise dispose of the quantity you currently have
in stock.
Full hold
Select this to prevent transactions being processed against the

item with the following exceptions:
| Setup | 118
Field
Values
Description
The Stock Take Confirmation program ignores the hold
status of a stock item.
Release hold
Reason code
This means that stock items on hold are included in a stock

code selection (see Stock Take Selection) and a stock
take confirmation (see Stock Take Confirmation).
If the item is in Ship on a sales order at the time of putting
the item on hold, it can still be invoiced.
Items on full hold are included in the Requirements
Calculation and in the pegging information, but you cannot
raise purchase orders or create jobs.
Forecasts can still be entered for the item, using the
Forecast Maintenance program.
Build schedules can still be created for the item using the
Build Schedule Maintenance program.
Select this to release a hold that has been placed on a stock

item.
You use this field to assign a code that depicts the reason for
placing a hold on the item.
Although entry at this field is optional, if a reason code is
specified, then it must currently be defined (see Reason
Codes).
Reason code
description
This indicates the description defined against the selected

reason code.
Copy Stock Code

You use the Copy Stock Code program to create a copy of an existing stock item.
This program can be accessed by selecting the Copy option from the Edit menu of the Stock Codes
program.
Copy Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Close
Confirm Copy
Select this if you want to be prompted by the system before the

copy process is performed.
Preferences
Select this to indicate specific information you want to include

when copying a stock item.
File
Options
Save
Select this to create the copy of the stock code.

If you selected the Confirm Copy option from the Options
menu, then you are prompted to confirm the copy operation.
| Setup | 119
Field
Values
Copy from stock

code
Description
You use this field to indicate the code of the stock item from
which you want to copy the information to create the new item.
All Inventory Master Information is copied. You can use the
Preferences options to specify the additional information you
want to copy.
If you accessed the Copy Stock Code program from within
the Stock Codes program, then this defaults to the stock item
highlighted in the listview at the time you selected the Copy
option. You can, however, enter a different code if required.
Stock Code Copy Preferences

You use the Preferences option from the Options menu to indicate specific information you want to include
when copying a stock item.
Field
Copy warehouses
(quantities
zeroized)
Values
Description
Select this to copy warehouse records, but with quantities set
to zero.
The copy stock code function only creates the dummy bin
required in a company that uses multiple bins, Copying of a
warehouse does not imply the copying of a bin.
Note:
If you copy warehouses that contain transfer supply
details and you are using the Full goods in transit
transfers facility (Inventory Setup - General tab), then
you must run the GIT Supply Warehouse Validation
program to ensure that the Requirements Calculation
program recognises the new stock code as transfersupplied.
Retain warehouse
history
Select this to copy the opening costs for the past 12 months
and the quantity sold from last month back 12 months.
All quantity on hand balances are set to zero for the new stock
code.
Retain last 12
months' closing
balances
Select this if you want to copy details held against the

warehouse, including history information for the warehouse.
This includes:
the opening costs for the past 12 months

the quantity sold from last month back for 12 months
the quantity sold from last month back for 12 months
aged inventory balances for the current year and 5 previous
years
Note:
Selecting this option will result in the Inventory
Valuation, Kardex and Aged Inventory Valuation
reports reflecting inaccurate figures for the copied stock
codes (i.e. Quantities and values are reported against
| Setup | 120
Field
Values
Description
the original and copied stock codes, thereby inflating
the stock values).
Copy price
entries
Select this if you want to copy all price codes that were
assigned to the original stock code.
Copy alternate
stock codes/
Suppliers
Select this if you want to copy any alternate stock codes and/or
suppliers that were assigned to the original stock code.
Copy custom
forms
Select this if you want to copy custom form information defined

against the original stock code to the new stock code.
Custom forms are maintained using the Custom Form Design
program.
Copy notes
You use this to indicate which notations held against the

original stock code you want to copy. This includes:
Technical specifications
Sales order additional text
Purchase order additional text
Job narrations
Inspection text
Dangerous goods handling text
Select All
Select this to set all preferences to selected.
Deselect All
Select this to set all preferences to deselected.
Save
Select this to save the preferences against you operator code.
Close
Select this to save the preferences for the current run of the
program only.
Copy Stock Code

Field
Values
Copy from
Description
This indicates information defined against the stock item
from which you are creating the copy and is displayed for
information purposes.
Copy from stock

code
This indicates the code of the stock item from which you are
creating the new item.
Copy from
description
This indicates the description of the stock item from which you
are creating the new item.
Copy from long

description
This indicates the long description of the stock item from which
you are creating the new item.
Copy to
Copy to stock code You use this field to enter the code of the new stock item you
are creating.
New description
You use this field to enter the description for the new stock
item.
| Setup | 121
Field
Values
Description
This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout the
system whenever the stock code is entered. You can use it to
verify that the correct item has been entered.
New long
description
You use this field to enter the long description for the new stock
item.
This is an additional description assigned to a stock code which
is viewable from within the Inventory Query program and
which can be printed on reports and inventory documents.
New alternate key

1
You use this field to enter the first alternate key for the new
stock item.
codes.
New alternate key

2
You use this field to enter the second alternate key for the new
stock item.
codes.
Warehouse Maintenance
You use the Warehouse Maintenance program to maintain the warehouses required for your stock items.
Once the warehouses are defined, you use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to link stock items
to these warehouses.
The Inventory Warehouses program lists the warehouses currently defined.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Select this to save the details you entered for the warehouse.
Save and Close
Select this to save the details you entered for the warehouse
and to return to the Inventory Warehouses listview.
Close
Select this to return to the Inventory Warehouses listview.
File
| Setup | 122
Field
Values
Description
New
Select this to add a new warehouse.
Delete
Select this to delete the warehouse entered in the Warehouse

field.
Edit
If you selected the option: Confirm Deletions, then you are

prompted to confirm the deletion of the selected warehouse.
The warehouse can only be deleted if no balances or
outstanding transactions exist against the warehouse.
New
Select this icon to add a new warehouse.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the warehouse entered in the

Warehouse field.
Save
Select this icon to save the details you entered for the
warehouse.
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the code of the warehouse you want
to add or maintain. This is a two character alphanumeric field
that you can link to your stock items using the Stock Code
It can represent an actual warehouse containing your inventory
items (i.e. a physical warehouse) or it can represent a grouping
of your inventory according to specific characteristics of the
item (i.e. a logical warehouse).
For example: You may want to split your inventory raw
materials and finished goods into different logical warehouses
even though they are located in the same physical warehouse.
Note:
You can set up a default warehouse for all

transactions at company level (Company Setup
- General tab). You can, however, override this
setting at the time of processing information at most
Warehouse fields.
You will be unable to add a warehouse code of
** as this is reserved for use within the system to
represent a non-stocked
Field
Warehouse
Values
Description
This indicates the code of the warehouse you are currently
maintaining.
| Setup | 123
Field
Description
Values
Description
This is used to describe the warehouse and is displayed
throughout the system whenever the warehouse code is
entered.
You can use it to verify that the correct warehouse has been
entered.
Next stock take

ticket number
This is used by the system to generate the next number that

will be printed on tickets/labels for this warehouse when next
you perform a stock take.
Nationality
You use this field to indicate the nationality code for the country
in which the warehouse is located.
This field is only enabled if you selected the option: EC VAT
system required (Tax Options - General tab).
The nationality code entered here is used as:
the default Country of Origin code when a Sales Order is

invoiced (Sales Analysis Intrastat Transactions - Maintain
Intrastat Dispatches)
the default nationality code when using the Sales Order
Entry program to process a Supply Chain Transfer
the default Arrival Nationality when a Purchase Order
is receipted (P/O Intrastat Transactions - PO Intrastat
Transactions)
Nationalities are maintained using the Nationalities program.

Negative stock
allowed
This indicates whether stock in the warehouse is allowed to go

negative.
Note:
The field is displayed only if you selected Dependent
on warehouse at the Stock on hand allowed to go
negative option (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Multiple bins in
use
This field is automatically enabled when you select the setup

option: Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).
When this option is selected, a specific bin has to be entered
when you receive items into stock, issue items from stock or
transfer items between warehouses.
When you deselect this option against a warehouse, the
bins against each stock item stocked in the warehouse are
deleted and replaced by a single default bin with the entire
quantity on hand for the stock code/warehouse against it. The
default bin location is generated from the warehouse code,
if no default bin is setup against the stock code/warehouse
combination (Warehouse Maintenance for Stock Code).
Any bins allocated to sales order lines are replaced with an
allocation for the newly created bin. The bin associated with
existing lot records (and their transactions) against traceable
and ECC controlled items is replaced with the newly created
bin. All transactions are then be processed against the newly
| Setup | 124
Field
Values
Description
created bin. The operator will not be required to supply bins
when processing transactions.
When you select this option against a warehouse, no other
action is required, as the default bin will already be defined
against lots and sales order ship quantities.
Note:
This option is only enabled when the Inventory

Warehouses program is accessed by selecting the
Warehouses function from the Inventory Setup
program.
Refer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiple

bins in SYSPRO.
Costing level
This option only applies if you selected the option: Costing per
warehouse (Inventory Setup) as you can then define different
costing methods for individual warehouses.
In addition, this option is only enabled when you access
the Warehouse Maintenance program by selecting the
Warehouses option from the Inventory Setup program.
Company
Select this if you want to use the costing method defined

against the company (Inventory Setup) for this warehouse
(i.e. you do not want to define a costing method which is
different from the company costing method for this warehouse).
When you select this option, the Costing method field below is
disabled.
Warehouse
Select this to use the costing method defined against the

warehouse (Warehouse Maintenance) for this warehouse.
When you select this option, the Costing method field below is
enabled for you to define the costing method to use.
Costing method
You use this to select the costing method you require for this
warehouse.
You can only access this option if you set the Costing level
above to Warehouse.
The costing method you select determines the manner in which
your inventory is valued for this warehouse.
By default, the costing method is set to that defined against the
company (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Note:
This field is only enabled if you selected the option:

Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General
tab).
This field is only enabled when the Inventory
Warehouses program is run by selecting the
Warehouses function from the Inventory Setup
program.
| Setup | 125
Field
Values
Description
LIFO costing can only be applied across all
warehouses for a company and not at individual
warehouse level.
Average
Select this to average out the unit cost of an item that is

received into this warehouse. This is calculated as the average
between the new cost of the item and the existing cost of the
item held on file.
Standard
Select this for costs to be updated in this warehouse only

when the Cost Changes function is used from the Inventory
Movements program.
Last cost
Select this if you want to value inventory in this warehouse

according to the last cost that was entered for an item when it
was received into this warehouse.
The Last cost is updated by the following programs:
Transfer BOM Costs to Wh Costs if:
standard costing is being used

the item is made-in
the new calculated cost differs from the current cost
Inventory Movements - All cost transactions irrespective of
costing method and part type
Purchase Order Receipts, Purchase Order Inspection,
Job Receipts and Shipment Receipt (Legacy) if:
FIFO
standard costing is being used

the option: Update last cost if standard cost in use is
selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab)
Price-Cost Percentage Change - All cost change
transactions
Select this if you want all stock receipts to create a new FIFO
bucket and all issues/sales to be made from the oldest bucket
held on file for items held in this warehouse.
You can only select this option if you selected the option: FIFO
valuation (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Note:

warehouse. However, items defined as Floorstock
(Stock Code Maintenance) can have a negative
balance (see WIP Issue Floor Stock Allocations).
Cost implosion,
suggested jobs
Component
warehouse to use
This indicates the warehouse from which material allocations

must be allocated to suggested jobs created by the
Requirements Calculation program.
| Setup | 126
Field
Values
Description
If you selected the option: Consolidate selected warehouses
(Requirements Planning Setup), then this warehouse is used
by the consolidation routine in the Requirements Calculation
program. If this is blank, then MRP cannot raise suggested
supply.
In addition, you can set this to be the default warehouse from
which material allocations must be allocated when creating a
job (Job Entry - Preferences).
If this is not specified, then material allocations are allocated
from the warehouse to use assigned to the component.
Note:
You can access this field only if you are using Costing
by warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab)
and either the Bill of Materials or the Requirements
Planning module is installed.
Routing
This indicates the routing that must be used for materials and
operations which are assigned to suggested jobs that use this
warehouse.
In addition, you can set this to be the default route to use for
materials and operation assigned when creating a job (Job
Entry - Preferences).
Suggested jobs are created by the Requirements Calculation
program.
Note:
You can access this field only if the Bill of Materials
and Requirements Planning modules are installed and
if you selected the option: Alternate routings required
(Bill of Materials Setup - General tab).
Include warehouse Select this to include the warehouse in the calculations

in requirements
performed by the Requirements Calculation program.
planning
Note:
calculation
This option is displayed only if you selected By
warehouse at the option: Warehouse selection
(Requirements Planning Setup - Warehouses tab).
G/L accounts
Warehouse control This is the control account for all inventory transactions
processed against the warehouse.
Note:
Your entry is validated only if the Inventory module
is integrated to General Ledger in summary or detail
(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger tab).
Warehouse
variance
This is the ledger account to which all variances are posted

arising from rounding errors when processing receipts into
stock.
| Setup | 127
Field
Values
Description
Note:
GRN suspense
This is the ledger account to which all receipts of stocked

items are posted for the purpose of Accounts Payable invoice
matching and checking.
For non-stocked receipts, the GRN suspense account defined
in the Purchase Orders Setup program is used.
Note:
Goods in transit
control
You can access this field only if you indicated that

the GRN suspense system is required (Purchase
Orders Setup - GRN tab).
(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger
tab).
This is the control account to which postings are made for

all goods in transit transactions that are processed for this
warehouse.
If no entry is assigned to the warehouse, then the Goods in
Transit control account defined at company level, is used
(General Ledger Integration - Inventory tab).
Note:
Dispatched but not This is the clearing account that is used when dispatching
invoiced
items from the warehouse using the Dispatch Note system.
This account is debited at the time of creating and printing the
dispatch note (i.e. Stock on hand is reduced for each item on
the dispatch note, even though an invoice has not yet been
produced). This account is credited when the dispatch note is
invoiced against the customer. This account is also credited
when a dispatch note is cancelled or an adjustment made that
decreases the value of the dispatch note (e.g. the quantity is
decreased).
Note:
Dispatches involving non-stocked items use the
account defined at company level (General Ledger
Integration).
WIP inspection
This indicates the account to which the WIP value of goods

received into inspection for this warehouse must be posted.
You can only access this field if you enabled the option: Work
in Progress inspection required (WIP Setup - General 1 tab).
| Setup | 128
Field
Values
Description
If you leave this field blank then the account configured at
company level is used (General Ledger Integration - W.I.P.
tab).
Note:
You will be unable to receive items from inspection
into stock using the WIP Inspection Maintenance
program if you have not defined a WIP inspection
account in this field or against the company (General
Ledger Integration) and you did not select the setup
option: Request ledger code for inventory transactions
(Inventory Setup).
Work in progress
This indicates the default account to which the value of work in

progress is posted when a job is created.
This account is only used if a work in progress account is not
defined against the Stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).
If you leave this field blank (and a work in progress account
is not defined against the Stock item), then the account
configured at company level is used (General Ledger
Integration - W.I.P. tab).
WIP variance
This indicates the account to which postings are made during

the Backflushing function of the Inventory Movements
program if there is a variance between the entered cost of the
manufactured item and the cost of the item's material and labor
allocations calculated by the system.
If you leave this field blank then the account configured at
company level is used (General Ledger Integration - W.I.P.
tab).
Automatically
cleared variances
This indicates the default General Ledger account to which

work in progress variances (falling below your specified value)
are posted automatically when receiving a finished part into
stock from a completed job.
This applies only if standard costing is in use.
If you leave this field blank then the account configured
at company level is used as the default (General Ledger
Integration - W.I.P. tab).
The General Ledger cleared variances account to use when
receipting items in from inspection can be defined using the
Preferences option of the WIP Inspection Maintenance
program.
Delivery address
Delivery address
line 1-5
You use these fields to assign up to five lines of delivery

address information for the warehouse.
This address can be printed on inventory documents.
| Setup | 129
Field
Values
Description
Delivery address
postal/zip code
You use this field to indicate the postal zip code for the delivery
address.
Delivery route
You use this field to enter a default delivery route code to use
for Supply Chain Transfer deliveries to this warehouse.
Delivery route codes are maintained using the Delivery
Routes program.
This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Load
planning required (Sales Order Setup - Load Planning tab).
Delivery distance/
sequence
You use this field to enter a default delivery distance or

sequence number to use for Supply Chain Transfer deliveries
to this warehouse.
For example, you may want to assign this delivery warehouse
as the first one to which deliveries must be made on the
delivery route specified in the previous field, in which case you
enter 1 in the sequence field. Alternatively, you may enter the
distance of the target warehouse delivery location from the
source warehouse as the sequence. If you specify this distance
against all the warehouse addresses on this route, then you
can sequence the loads on the route based on the delivery
distance from the source to the target warehouses.
This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Load
planning required (Sales Order Setup - Load Planning tab).
Supply chain
transfer
documents
Fax SCT
documents
Select this if you want to be able to fax transfer documentation

when ending the supply chain transfer order.
SCT fax number
This indicates the default fax number that must be used when
you end the supply chain transfer order and fax the transfer
document.
SCT contact name This indicates the contact person who must receive the transfer
document that is faxed when you end the supply chain transfer
order.
SCT default
document format
You use this field to define a default document format to use for
Supply Chain Transfer documents.
The Sales Order Entry program uses this default format
defined against the source warehouse if the option: Use source
branch for numbering SCT documents is selected (Sales
Order Setup - Numbering tab). In all other cases, the Sales
Order Entry program uses this default format defined against
the target warehouse when generating the SCT document.
Warehouse
management
Warehouse under
control of WMS
| Setup | 130
Define Numbering
Field
Values
Description
Goods in Transit
Branch
This indicates the branch that must be used for the warehouse
when processing a supply chain transfer order (SCT).
Goods in Transit
A supply chain transfer order is captured using the Sales

Order Entry program. It enables you to raise an order against
a warehouse designated as a source warehouse for the supply
of a particular Stock item.
The branch assigned to the warehouse is used to validate the
product class assigned to the Stock item.
If the A/R branch is not defined against both the source and
target warehouses, then the error message: "Branch to be
used for SCT is invalid" is displayed when you attempt to
process a SCT using the Sales Order Entry program.
Goods in Transit
Geographic area
This indicates the regional location of the warehouse.
GIT Reference
number
This indicates the first two characters that you want to appear
in front of the goods in transit reference number generated for
this warehouse.
The geographic area is used when processing a supply chain

transfer order using the Sales Order Entry program.
GIT Reference
number
Note:
You can only access this field if you selected the
option: By warehouse - with prefix (Inventory Setup Numbering tab).
GIT Next reference This indicates the goods in transit reference number that will
number
be used when next you process an inter-warehouse or supply
chain transfer of goods. This number is incremented by one (1)
each time you process a transfer of Stock into transit.
Note:
You can only access this field if you selected the
option: By warehouse - with prefix (Inventory Setup Numbering tab).
Purchase orders
Purchase order
prefix
This indicates the single character that you want to appear

in front of the next purchase order number generated for this
warehouse.
Note:
You can only access this field if you selected By
warehouse with prefix at the option: Purchase order
| Setup | 131
Field
Values
Description
numbering method (Purchase Orders Setup Numbering tab).
Next purchase
order number
This indicates the next order number that will be used when
capturing a purchase order.
Note:
warehouse at the option: Purchase order numbering
method (Purchase Orders Setup - Numbering tab).
Goods Received
Note
GRN Prefix
This indicates the two characters that you want to appear

in front of the Goods Received Note number that is next
generated for this warehouse when processing a purchase
order receipt.
Note:
warehouse with prefix at the option: GRN Numbering
(Purchase Orders Setup - Numbering tab).
Next GRN number
This indicates the Goods Received Note number that will next
be used when processing a purchase order receipt.
Note:
warehouse at the option: GRN Numbering (Purchase
Orders Setup - Numbering tab).
Copy Stock Codes to New Wh

You use the Copy Stock Codes to New Wh program to create warehouse records for a selective range of
stock items.
Although the Warehouses for Stock Code program allows you to assign a stock item to multiple
warehouses, this can only be performed for one stock item at a time. The Copy Stock Codes to New Wh
program allows you to perform a similar function but for a range of stock items (including a list of items).
You would typically use the Copy Stock Codes to New Wh program if you added a new warehouse and
now want to copy all or some of your existing stock codes into the new warehouse.
Copy Stock Codes to New Warehouses

Field
Start Copy
Values
Description
Select this function to copy the stock codes according to your
selections.
The following source warehouse details are copied to the new
warehouse:
Cost multiplier
Unit cost
| Setup | 132
Field
Values
Validate
Description
Minimum quantity
Maximum quantity
Safety stock level
Re-order quantity
Pallet quantity
Bin location
User defined 1-3
Select this to validate your selections before copying stock
codes. Any exceptions detected are displayed in the Validate
Report output pane.
You use the After processing completed options to print or
email this information.
Print
Select this to print the information currently displayed in the

Validate Report output pane.
Save Form
Values
Select this to save the options you selected using Design

mode.
This option is only enabled when you access the program
in design mode from the SYSPRO Menu System or the
Automation Design programs.
See Design Mode.
Copy Options
Field
Values
Description
From warehouse
You use this field to indicate the source warehouse from which
you want to copy stock items (i.e. the warehouse in which the
stock codes already exist).
From warehouse
description
This indicates the description of the warehouse selected.
Copy to
warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) to which you

want to copy the selected stock codes.
Stock code
selection
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to copy
to the selected warehouse(s).
Product class
selection
This enables you to indicate that only stock codes matching a

specific product class must be selected for copying.
Copy from
warehouse
details
Copy to
warehouse
Stock codes
Product classes
| Setup | 133
Field
Values
Description
Default bin
Default bin
selection
Use new
warehouse
Select this to use the target warehouse code as the entry at the
Bin field.
Copy existing
default bin
Select this if you want to use the bin location currently assigned
to the stock item from the source warehouse as the default
entry at the Bin field.
Create new default Select this if you want to specify a new bin location for the
bin
stock codes in the target warehouse.
Bin
You use this field to indicate the bin location that you want to
assign to all the stock codes created in the new warehouse.
Print options
Print options
selections
Exceptions only
Select this if you only want to print a list of stock codes that
were not copied (e.g. a duplicate key message indicates that
the stock code already exists against the new warehouse).
Created records
only
Select this if you only want to print a list of stock codes that
were copied.
Created records
and exceptions
Select this if you want to print a list of stock codes that were
copied as well as those that were not copied.
After processing
complete
These options relate to the information displayed in the

Validate Report output pane.
Refer to After Processing Completed.
Selection Filtering Options

The following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include:
Note:
Not all of these options may be available for each selection.
Field
Values
Description
All
Select this to include all the items from the selection.
Range
Select this to indicate a range of items from the selection to

include.
You indicate this range using the From and To fields.
Single
Select this to indicate a single item from the selection to

include.
Where no field is displayed in which to enter the single item,
you use the From field to indicate the item.
List
Select this to indicate a list of items from the selection to

include.
| Setup | 134
Field
Values
From
Description
You use the Define list option to indicate the list of items to
include in the selection (refer to the List Selection section
below).
You use this field to enter the first item in the range of the
selected item to include.
If you indicated that you want to include only a single item
from the selection, then you use this field to enter that item.
This applies where no field is displayed in which to specify the
single item.
To
You use this field to enter the last item in the range of the
This field is only enabled if you selected the Range option.
List Selection
This screen is displayed when you select the Define list option to include a list of items in a selection.
Field
Values
Description
Accept and Close
Select this to accept the list of items in the Selected listview of

items and to return to the previous screen.
Cancel Any
Changes

File
Accept and Close
Select this to accept the list of items in the Selected listview of

items and to return to the previous screen.
Cancel

Available
(listview)
This listview displays the items currently defined which can be

selected for inclusion in the list.
Assign Selected
Select this to assign the items currently highlighted in the

Available listview to the list of items you want to include in the
list (the Selected listview).
pointer to individually highlight the items you want to assign.
Assign All
Selected
(listview)
Select this to assign all items currently displayed in the

Available listview to the Selected listview.
This listview displays the items currently selected for inclusion
in the list.
Remove Selected
Select this to remove the currently highlighted item(s) from your

list of items in the Selected listview.
pointer to individually highlight the items you want to remove.
Remove All
Select this to remove all items from the list (i.e. from the
Selected listview).
| Setup | 135
Validate Report
The information in this pane is displayed when you select the Validate option, providing you did not select
the option: After processing completed > Close this application.
You use the After processing completed options to print or email this information.
Buyers Maintenance
You use the Buyers Maintenance program to create and maintain Inventory buyers.
A buyer indicates the person in a company who is responsible for purchasing stock items. Buyers are
assigned to stock items within the Inventory module.
Buyers can be used as a selection criterion to generate reports in the Requirements Planning module.
For example: If you have a number of buyers within a buying department (each responsible for a different
product line) you can generate reports selectively by buyer.
You can generate a report of all your buyers using the List of Buyers program.
The Buyers listview displays details of Inventory buyers currently defined.
Buyers Maintenance
This screen is displayed when you select the Add or Change option from the Edit menu of the Buyers
program.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to add a new Inventory buyer code.
Delete
Select this to delete the buyer code currently displayed.
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to add a new Inventory buyer code.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the buyer code currently displayed.
Save
Buyer code
You use this field to indicate the code of the buyer you want to
add or maintain. This code uniquely identifies the buyer.
Play

objects defined against the buyer code.
Edit

objects against the buyer code.
Buyer Code Maintenance
| Setup | 136
Field
Values
Description
Buyer
This indicates the code of the buyer you are currently adding or
maintaining.
Name
This indicates the descriptive name you want to assign to the

buyer. This is typically the buyer's name.
Email address
This indicates the address of the buyer to which you want to

send e-mail notifications.
Inventory Planner Maintenance

You use the Inventory Planner Maintenance program to create and maintain the planners that you can
assign to selected stock items within the Inventory module.
A Planner indicates the person in a company responsible for planning the manufacture of made-in stock
items. Planners are assigned to stock items within the Inventory module.
Planners can be used as a selection criterion in various Requirements Planning reports. For example: If
you have a number of planners within a planning department (each responsible for a different product line)
you can generate reports selectively by planner.
You can generate a report of all your planners using the List of Planners program.
You use the Planners program to view detail of planners currently defined.
Inventory Planner Maintenance

Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

return to the listview.
Close
Select this to return to the listview.
New
Select this to add a new planner.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently displayed planner.
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to add a new planner.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the currently displayed planner.
Planner
You use this field to enter the code of the planner you want to
add or maintain.
This code uniquely identifies the planner.
Play

objects defined against the planner.
Edit

objects against the planner.
Inventory Planner
Maintenance
| Setup | 137
Field
Values
Description
Planner
This indicates the code of the planner currently being

maintained.
Name
You use this field to enter the descriptive name you want to
assign to the planner.
E-mail address
You use this field to enter the address of the planner to which
you want to send e-mail notifications.
Unit of Measure Maintenance

You use the Unit of Measure Maintenance program to define conversion factors for stocked items where
the unit of measure in which the item is stocked is not the same as the unit of measure in which the item is
costed.
This is particularly useful for large merchandise quantities, where each individual item has a low cost
factor. For example: If your stocking unit of measure for pencils is each (EA) and the cost per EA is 0.01,
you can apply a costing unit of measure of 10.00 per thousand (THO).
The Cost Unit of Measure listview displays details of unit of measure conversion factors currently defined.

This screen is displayed when you select to add or change an Inventory cost unit of measure.
Danger:
Changing the cost unit of measure affects your Inventory valuation for those units of measure
defined against stock items.
The Inventory Valuation report uses the cost defined against each stock item in each warehouse
and converts this cost using the current cost and the current value of the factor. Therefore changing
only the factor affects the report, but not the General Ledger (no journal entries are created).
For example, assume you have the following:
Stock item A111 with Cost unit of measure defined as Box
One Box = 100 Each.
One Box costs 200.00
You have 100 Each on hand.
The Inventory Valuation report calculates this as: 100 Each / 100 per Box = 1 Box
1 Box at 200.00 per box = 200.00 (so value of inventory is 200.00)
You now change the Rate for Box to be: 1 Box = 90 Each
The Inventory Valuation report calculates this as: 100 Each / 90 per Box = 1.11 Boxes
Assuming the current cost (i.e. 200.00) also applies to the new factor:
1.11 Boxes at 200.00 per box = 1.11 * 200.00 = 222.00 (so value of inventory is now 222.00).
No General Ledger journal is created for the difference between the initial valuation of 200.00 and
the new valuation of 222.00. This means that the Inventory Valuation report will not balance to
your General Ledger control account for stock item A111.
Before changing the cost unit of measure:
Identify each stock item which uses that cost unit of measure.
For all items identified, identify those with a non zero stock on hand.
| Setup | 138
Check the current cost and determine whether that cost is also appropriate to the new factor.
If the current cost must still be applied to the new factor, then:
1. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock on hand to zero for all the items
you identified.
This creates an adjustment journal for the General Ledger.

2. Use the Cost Unit of Measure program to change the cost unit of measure RATE as
required.
3. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock back into the warehouse(s).
If the current cost no longer applies to the new factor, then:
1. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock on hand to zero for all the items
you identified.
2. Use the Cost Unit of Measure program to change the cost unit of measure RATE as
required.
3. Use the Cost Change option of the Inventory Movements program to change the current
cost of the items.
4. Use the Inventory Movements program to adjust the stock back into the warehouse(s).
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to add a new unit of measure conversion factor.
Delete
Select this to delete the unit of measure conversion factor

currently displayed.
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to add a new unit of measure conversion factor.
Delete
Select this icon to delete unit of measure conversion factor

currently displayed.
Save
Stock uom
You use this field to indicate the unit of measure in which the
item is stocked.
Cost uom
You use this field to indicate the unit of measure in which the
item is costed.

Field
Values
Description
Stock uom
This indicates the stocking unit of measure you selected.
Cost uom
This indicates the cost unit of measure you selected.
| Setup | 139
Field
Values
Conversion factor
Description
A conversion factor must be entered to indicate the relationship
between the cost unit of measure and the stocking unit of
measure.
Uom method
Multiply
Select this to multiply the cost unit of measure by the factor

entered at the Rate field. This converts the stocking unit of
measure to the cost unit of measure.
Divide
Select this to divide the cost unit of measure by the factor

entered at theRate field. This converts the costing unit of
measure to the stocking unit of measure.
Rate
You use this field to indicate the rate that must applied to the
cost and stocking units of measure.
Uom conversion
This displays the conversion from one unit of the stocking unit
of measure converted to the costing unit measure according to
the entries you made.
Alternate Stock Codes

You use the Alternate Stock Codes program to create a link between stock codes whereby one item can
be used as a substitute for another when a shortage of the primary stock item occurs.
Although you can create a link to an alternate stock item that does not exist, you will need to use the Stock
Code Maintenance program to create the alternate item before it can be used in the system.
Alternate Stock Codes

Field
Values
Description
Select

Exit
New
Select this to add a new alternate stock code.
Save
Select this to save any changes you made.
Delete

listview.
Select Warehouse
By default, the warehouse for the alternate stock code is not

displayed in the listview, as the alternate code may be stocked
in various warehouses.
File
Edit
Functions
You use this option to select the warehouse(s) for which you
want to display the warehouse code, quantity available and
quantity on hand for the alternate stock code.
| Setup | 140
Field
Values
Description
The warehouse selection does not filter the alternate stock
codes.
See Select Warehouse.
Select
Select this icon to use the entry currently highlighted in the

listview in the corresponding field of another program.
New
Select this icon to add a new alternate stock code.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the entry currently highlighted in the

listview.
Save
Select this icon to save any changes you made.
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the primary stock item for which
you want to assign a substitute.
Select Warehouse
This screen is displayed when you select the Select Warehouse option from the Functions menu.
Field
Values
Warehouse
selection
Description
This enables you to indicate the warehouse for which you want
to display the warehouse code, quantity available and quantity
on hand for the alternate stock code.
All
Select this to display the information for all warehouses.
Single
Select this to display the information for a single warehouse.
Warehouse
You use this field to indicate the single warehouse for which
you want to display the information.
OK

listview.
If you selected to view information for a single warehouse, then
the warehouse code you selected is displayed in the listview,
together with the quantity available and quantity on hand for
the alternate stock code in that warehouse. These details are
only displayed if the alternate stock code is stocked in the
selected warehouse.
Cancel

the listview.
Alternate Stock Codes Maintenance

When you select the Alternate Stock Codes program, the currently defined alternate stock codes are
displayed in a listview.
You can print or query alternate stock codes in the following programs:
Trial Kitting (prints alternate stock codes for component shortage lines)
Superseded Clearing Stock (prints the first five alternate stock codes)
Inventory Label Format (print positions can be defined for the first five alternate stock codes)
Purchasing Work Sheet (prints the first four alternate stock codes)
| Setup | 141
Inventory Query (view alternate stock codes. Quantities can only be viewed if you specify a single
warehouse - see Select Warehouse)
Sales Order Entry (view the alternate stock codes for the item)
Field
Alternate stock code
Value
Description
You use this field to assign an
alternate stock code for the
primary stock code entered at the
start of the program.
Note:
If you enter a stock

code that does not
exist on file, you are
given the opportunity
to 'add' this code.
However, this merely
creates a link between
this 'new code' and
the Stock code for
which you are adding
alternate codes.
It does not create
the actual alternate
stock code. The
listview displays
this 'new code' with
a description of
'Non stocked' and
without a warehouse
allocation. You must
use the Stock Code
Maintenance program
to create the 'new
code' as a legitimate
stock item and link
it to at least one
warehouse before
you can use it in the
system (e.g. in Sales
Order Entry).
Once you have added
the 'new code' as
a legitimate stock
item and linked it to
a warehouse, you
can use the Select
Warehouse option
from the Functions
menu to select a
warehouse in which
the alternate item is
stocked. The listview
then displays the
Warehouse, Quantity
| Setup | 142
on hand and Quantity

available of the
alternate item in the
selected warehouse.
Description
This indicates the description

assigned to the alternate stock
code.
Long description
This indicates the long description

assigned to the alternate stock
code.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse for

the alternate stock code. This is
only displayed if you selected to
view a single warehouse (see
Select Warehouse).
Quantity on hand
This indicates the quantity of the

alternate stock code which is on
hand in the warehouse. This is
only displayed if you selected to
view a single warehouse (see
Select Warehouse).
Quantity available
This indicates the quantity of the

alternate stock code which is
available in the warehouse. This
is only displayed if you selected
to view a single warehouse (see
Select Warehouse).
Alternate Suppliers
You use the Alternate Suppliers program to assign alternate suppliers to selected stock items.
Alternate Suppliers
Field
Values
Description
Select

Exit
New
Select this to add a new alternate supplier.
Save
Delete
Select this to the delete the entry currently highlighted in the

listview.
File
Edit
Select

| Setup | 143
Field
Values
Description
Add
Select this icon to add a new alternate supplier.
Delete
Select this icon to the delete the entry currently highlighted in

the listview.
Save
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the stock item for which you want
to assign alternate suppliers.
This stock code cannot be defined as a Notional part (Stock
Code Maintenance - Descriptive tab).
Alternate Supplier Maintenance

When you select the Alternate Suppliers program, the currently defined alternate supplies for the stock
item are displayed in a listview.
Field
Alternate supplier
Values
Description
You use this field to assign an alternate supplier to the stock
code entered at the start of the program.
Note:
A message is displayed if you enter an alternate

supplier who is not held on the supplier master file.
If you elect to add the alternate supplier to the list,
you will have to take on the supplier details before
using it as a substitute.
You can query alternate supplier information using
the Inventory Query program and the Purchase
Order Requisition System. In addition, you can print
the first three alternate suppliers on the Purchasing
Work Sheet report.
Name
This indicates the name of the supplier.
Currency
This indicates the currency defined against the alternate

supplier (see AP Supplier Maintenance).
Last price
This indicates the price last paid for a purchase from the
supplier.
Price uom
This indicates the unit of measure for the price.
Quantity
This indicates the quantity last purchased from the supplier.
Receipt date
This indicates the last date on which a receipt was processed

for the supplier.
Catalog
This indicates the supplier's catalog number.
Primary supplier
This indicates the primary supplier for the stock item (Stock
Code Maintenance).
| Setup | 144
Approved Manufacturer Maintenance

You use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program to maintain the approved manufacturers
from whom your company obtains parts.
Once you have defined your approved manufacturers, you use the Approved Manufacturers Parts
program to define the manufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock
codes.
From the Approved Manufacturers Parts program, you use the Suppliers for Stock Code program to
enter the approved SYSPRO suppliers of these parts.
You would typically use these programs if you source parts from numerous manufacturers, and need to
specify from which manufacturer you sourced a specific part or you want to link a specific supplier with a
preferred manufacturer (see Example).
The Approved Manufacturers listview displays the approved manufacturers currently defined.
Approved Manufacturer Maintenance

This screen is displayed when you select to add or change an approved manufacturer from the listview of
the Approved Manufacturers program.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Select this to save the information you entered.
Save and Close
Select this to save the information you entered and to return to

Close
New
Select this to add a new manufacturer.
Delete
Select this to delete the manufacturer currently displayed.
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to add a new manufacturer.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently displayed manufacturer.
Save
Select this to save the details you entered for the manufacturer.
Approved
Manufacturer
You use this field to enter a code for a new manufacturer or to

indicate the code of the manufacturer you want to maintain.
Edit
Select this to use the Multimedia program to maintain

multimedia objects for the manufacturer.
Play
Select this to view multimedia objects attached to the

manufacturer.
Approved
Manufacturer
Maintenance
Manufacturer
This indicates the code of the manufacturer you are currently

maintaining.
Manufacturer
name
You use this field to enter the name of the manufacturer you
want to link to this manufacturer's code.
| Setup | 145
Field
Values
Description
Notes
You use this option to use the Text Editor program to enter
up to six lines of free format notes for the manufacturer. This is
optional.
Manufacturer
information
Note:
If you enter more than six lines of notes, then the
additional lines are ignored by the system.
Example
Following is an example of the use of the Approved Manufacturers facility:
When you purchase 5 foot fluorescent light bulbs / tubes, you only buy specific brands because you have
had some bad experiences.
Create a stock code for the 5' fluorescent tube. In this example, the SYSPRO part number is "FluorTube5".
Use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program define the manufacturers (i.e. not suppliers, the
original manufacturers) who manufacture the fluorescent tube makes you are willing to purchase. In this
example, the approved manufacturers are Osram, Philips and General Electric.
Use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to add a relationship between your
stock code, the original manufacturer, and the original manufacturer's part/model number. In this example,
against stock code "FluorTube5" there are three entries:
one entry for the Osram model which is 17-889-12

one entry for the Philips model number which is A30278
one entry for the General Electric model number which is B17-777.
You can also enter supplier codes against these entries. From the Approved Manufacturer Part Number
Maintenance program, you use the Suppliers for Stock Code program to enter the approved SYSPRO
suppliers of these parts. In this example, supplier code 0000001 was defined against both the General
Electric B17-777 part and the Philips A30278 part. The Osram part is not available from this supplier.
When you add a purchase order against supplier 000001, you can either specify the stock code as
"FluorTube5", or browse on the Approved Manufacturers parts list and select the relevant manufacturer's
part number. If you specify the stock code FluorTube5 in the stock code field, the relevant manufacturers'
part numbers are stored on the line. Depending on how you defined your purchase order document format,
the manufacturer's part number section either prints all the different manufacturers and their part numbers
that you will accept for FluorTube5, or only those that the selected supplier supplies.
Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance

You use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to define details of approved
manufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock codes.
Before using the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program, you need to use the
Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program to add the details of your manufacturers.
Once you have linked the manufacturer's part numbers to SYSPRO stock codes, you use the Suppliers
for Stock Code program to enter the approved SYSPRO suppliers of these parts.
The Approved Manufacturers Parts listview displays details of manufacturers' parts currently defined.
| Setup | 146
Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance

This screen is displayed when you select the Add or Change option from the Edit menu of the Approved
Manufacturers Parts program.
The options enable you to add details of manufacturer's part numbers and to link the part numbers to
SYSPRO stock codes.
Note:
One SYSPRO stock code can be linked to multiple manufacturer's part numbers. One
manufacturer's part number can be linked to multiple SYSPRO stock codes.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to add a new manufacturer's part.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently displayed manufacturer's

part.
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to add a manufacturer's part number and link it

to a SYSPRO stock code.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the currently displayed manufacturer's

part.
Save

Note:
Once you have saved the manufacturer/part number
combination, neither the manufacturer nor the
part number can be changed. This is because the
manufacturer and part number are part of the key for
the table/file and thus cannot be changed. You will
need to remove the item and then re-enter it with the
correct manufacturer and part number.
Stock code
You use this field enter a valid SYSPRO stock code. This is the
stock code you want to link to the approved manufacturer's part
number.
Approved Manuf. Part Number Maintenance

Field
Values
Description
Stock code
This field displays the stock code you are maintaining.
Stock code
description
This field displays the description of the stock code you are
maintaining.
Stock code long

description
This field displays the long description of the stock code you
are maintaining.
| Setup | 147
Field
Values
Description
Manufacturer
You use this field to enter the approved manufacturer of the

part number you want to link to the SYSPRO stock code.
Note:
Once the manufacturer/part number combination is
saved, you will be unable to change it.
Manufacturer
name
This indicates the name of the approved manufacturer.
Manufacturer part
number
You use this field to enter the manufacturer's part number for
which you want to add the details and link to the SYSPRO
stock code.
Note:
Once the manufacturer/part number combination is
saved, you will be unable to change it.
Revision number
You use this field to indicate the current revision of this

manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code combination.
Note:
This is documentary only. No validation is performed.
Preferred
Note:
Yes
Select this if the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO

stock code link is the preferred combination for purchasing
purposes.
No

stock code link is not the preferred combination for purchasing
purposes.
Status
Note:
Active

stock code link is active for purchasing purposes.
Inactive

stock code link is not active for purchasing purposes.
Effective date
You use this field to enter the date from which the current
manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code link can be
used for purchasing purposes.
Note:
Manufacturer
suppliers
Select this to use the Suppliers for Stock Code program

to link one or more approved SYSPRO supplier to the part
number/stock code combination.
| Setup | 148
Field
Values
Description
Notes
You use this option to use the Text Editor program to enter
up to six lines of free format notes for the manufacturer's part
number. This is optional.
Part number
information
Note:
Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance

You use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance program to link approved SYSPRO
suppliers to the part numbers of approved manufacturers.
Before you use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance program, you need to have used
Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to have entered details of approved
manufacturers' part numbers and linked these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock codes.
The Suppliers for Stock Code listview displays details of suppliers currently linked to manufacturers' part
numbers.
Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance

You use this screen to link approved SYSPRO suppliers to the part number highlighted in the listview of
the Approved Manufacturers Parts program.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to add a new supplier for the manufacturer's part.
Delete
Select this to delete the link between the supplier currently

displayed and the part number.
File
Edit
New
Select this to add a new supplier for the manufacturer's part.
Delete

Delete
Select this icon to delete the link between the supplier currently
Save
Stock code
This indicates the SYSPRO stock code that is linked to the

manufacturer's part number.
You use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number
Maintenance program to define details of approved
| Setup | 149
Field
Values
Description
manufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to
your SYSPRO stock codes.
Stock code
This indicates the SYSPRO stock code to which you want to

link the supplier.
Manufacturer
This indicates the manufacturer of the part number linked to the

SYSPRO stock code.
Manufacturer part
number
This indicates the manufacturer's part number.
Supplier
You use this field to enter the supplier code you want to link to
the manufacturer's part number. This must be a valid SYSPRO
supplier.
Supplier name
This field displays the name for the supplier code entered in the
previous field.
Approved
Manuf. Supplier
Maintenance
Preferred
Note:
This option is currently documentary only. No validation
is performed. Its purpose will be activated in a later
version of the program.
Yes
Select this to indicate that the current manufacturer part

number?SYSPRO supplier link is the preferred combination for
purchasing purposes.
No
Select this to indicate that the current manufacturer part

number/SYSPRO supplier link is not the preferred combination
for purchasing purposes.
Notes
You use this option to use the Text Editor program to enter up
to six lines of free format notes for the supplier. This is optional.
Supplier
information
Note:
Stock Code Price Maintenance

You use the Stock Code Price Maintenance program to maintain coded prices and quantity discount
breaks against selected stock items.
The Pricing for a Stock Code listview displays details of coded prices and quantity discount breaks
assigned to stock items.
| Setup | 150
Stock Code Price Maintenance

This screen is displayed when you select the Add or Change option from the Edit menu of the Pricing for
a Stock Code program.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to add a new price.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently displayed price.
File
Edit
Functions
Quantity Discounts Select this to use the Stock Code Quantity Discounts
program to assign price codes to selected stock items based
on the sale of specific quantities of that item.
New
Select this icon to add a new price.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the currently displayed price.
Save
Stock code
You use this field to enter the code of the stock item against
which you want to maintain coded prices and quantity discount
breaks.
Price code
You use this field to indicate the price code you want to
maintain.
Although you will be unable to delete the list price code for a
stock item, you can change the designated list price code using
the Stock Code Maintenance program.
Note:
You will be unable to assign either a full stop or
exclamation mark (. or !) as price code entries. The
reason for this is that both characters have specific
applications within the system (i.e. the full stop is
reserved for manual price entry and the exclamation
mark is reserved for contract price entry).
Price Maintenance
Field
Values
Description
Price
Maintenance
Stock code
This indicates the stock item for which you are maintaining the
coded prices and quantity discount breaks.
Price code
This indicates the price code you are currently maintaining.

| Setup | 151
Field
Values
Price
Description
You use this field to indicate the selling price you want to
associate with the price code.
This selling price can be selected during processing in the
Sales Order Entry program providing that you have configured
a pricing method of Coded or Quantity discounted for the stock
item. The pricing method to use for the company is defined on
the Pricing tab of the Sales Order Setup program.
The entry in brackets alongside the Price field indicates the
currency that you have assigned to the entered price code.
Basis
You use this field to indicate the unit of measure on which the
price is based.
This can be the stocking, alternate, or other unit of measure
defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).
It defaults to the stocking unit of measure.
Stocking u/m
Select this to base the price on the stocking unit of measure

defined against the stock item.
Alternate u/m
Select this to base the price on the alternate unit of measure

Other u/m
Select this to base the price on the other unit of measure

Pricing u/m
This indicates the unit of measure for the price basis selected
above.
Commission
code
You use this field to indicate the commission code that you
want to assign to the price code. An entry of 0 indicates that
you do not require a commission percentage to be assigned to
the price code.
If this field is left blank, then the default commission code
defined in Sales Order Setup - Commission tab is used as the
default commission code by the Sales Order Entry program.
Pricing for a Price Code

You use the Pricing for a Price Code program to maintain the selling price assigned either to a specific
price code or to the list price held against a specific stock code.
Price Code Price Maintenance

Field
Values
Description
Save
Close
File
Function
| Setup | 152
Field
Values
Description
Specific Code
Select this to change the Selling price associated with the Price
code assigned to a stock code.
Stock Code List

Price
Select this to change the Selling price associated with the List
price of a stock item.
Save
Select this icon to save the information you entered.
Price code
You use this field to indicate the price code you want to
maintain.
This field is only enabled when you select the Specific Code
option at the Function field.
Stock code
You use this field to enter the code of the stock item for which
you want to change the price.
Pricing for a Price Code

Field
Values
Description
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item for which you are
maintaining the price.
Description
This indicates the description assigned to the stock code

(Stock Code Maintenance).
Long description
This indicates the long description assigned to the stock code.
Currency
This indicates the currency for the price code.
Price
You use this field to indicate the new Selling price required.
Stock Code Quantity Discounts

You use the Stock Code Quantity Discounts program to assign price codes to selected stock items
based on the sale of specific quantities of that item.
The quantity discount breaks assigned to a stock item here are applied during processing in the Sales
Order Entry program providing that you have configured a pricing method of Quantity discounted for the
stock item.
Price codes for Quantity discount breaks are associated with a currency, enabling you to associate the
quantity discount with a price code in the customer's own currency.
The Stock Code Quantity Discounts program can also be accessed by selecting the Quantity Discounts
option from the Function menu of the Pricing for a Stock Code program.
Inventory Quantity Discounts

The following options can be selected from the menu:
Field
Values
Description
Delete
Select this to delete the currently displayed price code.
Save
Exit
File
| Setup | 153
Field
Values
Description
New
Select this icon to add a new quantity discount price to a price

code.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the currently displayed price code.
Save
Select this icon to save the information you entered.
Close
Select this icon to return to the previous screen.
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the code of the stock item for
which you want to define quantity discount pricing.
Qty Discounts
Maintenance
Qty Discounts Maintenance
Field
Currency
Values
Description
You use this field to define the currency applicable to the price.
You can only use a foreign currency with a foreign currency
price code.
This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Foreign
currency sales required (Accounts Receivable Setup General tab).
Quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity of items that you want
to link to a specific price code.
These quantity breaks are applied if the stock code has a
pricing method of Quantity discounted.
Example: If you enter a Price code A for a quantity of 10 and
Price code B for a quantity of 50, it means that Price code A
applies to quantities from 1-10 and Price code B applies to
quantities of 11-50. There is no price code specified for 51 or
more items, which means that the system determines the price
code according to the Pricing method.
Price code
You use this field to indicate the price code that must be used
when a specific quantity of the item is sold.
If you entered a foreign currency in the Currency field, then
you must enter a foreign currency price code on this field (see
Pricing for a Stock Code).
Note:
You will be unable to assign either a full stop or
exclamation mark (. or !) as price code entries. The
reason for this is that both characters have specific
applications within the system (i.e. the full stop is
reserved for manual price entry and the exclamation
mark is reserved for contract price entry).
Price
This field displays the price applicable to the price code.
| Setup | 154
Foreign Price Codes

You use the Foreign Price Codes program to assign a foreign currency to selected price codes.
Foreign Currency Price Codes

Field
Values
Description
Delete

listview.
Save and Close
Select this to save your changes and then exit the program
Exit
File
New
Select this icon to assign a foreign currency to a price code.
Delete
Select this icon to delete the entry currently highlighted in the

listview.
Save and Close
Select this icon to save your changes and then exit the
program.
Cancel
Select this icon to exit the program. Any information you have
not saved is lost.
Foreign
Price Code
Maintenance
Price code
This indicates the price code to which you are assigning the
foreign currency.
Currency
You use this field to indicate the currency that you want to
associate with the price code.
Description
This indicates the description for the currency code selected

(Currencies).
Foreign Currency Price Codes Listview

When you access the Foreign Price Codes program, a listview displays the foreign price codes currently
defined.
Price code
Currency
This indicates the currency for the price code.

Description
This indicates the description defined against the currency.
Foreign Purchase Prices

You use the Foreign Purchase Prices program to assign foreign prices to selected stock items. These
foreign prices can be assigned to detail lines processed within the Purchase Order Entry program.
| Setup | 155
Foreign Prices
Field
Values
Description
Select

Exit
New
Select this to add a new foreign price for the stock item.
Save
Select this to save the changes you made.
Delete

listview.
File
Edit
Select
Select this icon to use the entry currently highlighted in the

listview in the corresponding field of another program.
Add
Select this icon to add a new foreign price for the stock item.
Delete
Select this icon to the delete the entry currently highlighted in

the listview.
Save
Select this to save the changes you made.
Stock code
to assign a foreign purchase price.
This stock code cannot be defined as a Notional part (Stock
Foreign Price Maintenance

Field
Values
Description
Currency
You use this field to indicate the currency in which you want to
assign the purchase price.
Description
This indicates the description defined against the currency

code.
Purchase price
You use this field to indicate the purchase price of the item in
the currency specified.
Inventory Sales Quantity History

You use the Inventory Sales Quantity History program to capture details of quantities sold for a stock
item over the last 12 months, as well as additional sales history information.
You would normally use this program when converting from a manual inventory system to a computerized
one where you need to take on sales information for your existing stock items.
Inventory Initial Sales Quantity History
| Setup | 156
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
you want to maintain sales quantity history.
Quantity History
Take-on
Select this to capture the sales quantity history for the selected
stock item.
Close
Inventory Sales Quantity History Take-on

Field
Values
Description
Stock code
This indicates the stock item for which you want to capture
sales quantity history.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse for which you want to capture

sales history for the selected stock item.
History from last

month back 12
months
Month 1 - 12
You use these fields to indicate the quantities of the stock item
sold in each of the last 12 months.
Sales History
Select this to capture additional sales information for the stock

code. This information is maintained automatically by the
system.
Save
Select this function to save your entries.

The system will check that the maximum number of decimals
allowed for the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance) is not
exceeded. You can either re-enter the quantity or allow the
program to truncate your entry to the permitted number of
decimals.
Close
Sales History
This screen is displayed when you select the Sales History function.
Field
Values
Description
Date of last sale
You use the field to indicate the date on which the item was
last sold.
Date of last
purchase
You use this field to indicate the date on which the item was
last purchased.
Year-to-date
usage value
You use this field to indicate the annual usage value of the
stock item.
Note:
For a new warehouse (where the stock item has been
on file for some time) your entry here should reflect
the value of the stock item according to the number of
months the stock code has been on file.
| Setup | 157
Field
Values
Description
This information is used by the ABC Analysis program
to classify a stock item according to its annual usage
value.
Year-to-date
sales value
You use this field to indicate the annual sales value of the stock
item.
Previous year
sales value
You use this field to indicate the sales value of the stock item
for the previous year.
OK
Select this to accept your entries.
Cancel

Inventory Initial Aged Valuation

You use the Inventory Initial Aged Valuation program to take on a stock item's year end quantity on
hand for the last five years.
This facility is useful when you carry a limited stock of spare parts for componentized items that may have
a long life (e.g. spares for motor vehicles, aircraft, etc.) and you need to provide for the depreciation of
these items annually.
You would normally use this program at the time of implementation, or when first selecting the option:
Aged inventory valuation (Inventory Setup) to enter previous years' results. Thereafter, the system
automatically maintains this information for you.
Note:
You will be unable to access this program if you have not selected the option: Aged inventory
valuation (Inventory Setup).
You will be unable to access this program if the Prior Year End Dates have not been defined
(Inventory Setup).
Refer to Updating of Aged Valuation Buckets for information on how aged valuation buckets are
updated.
Inventory Initial Aged Valuation

Field
Values
Description
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the item for which you want to
take on valuation details.
Aged Valuation
Take-on
Select this to take on the stock item's year end quantity on

hand.
Close
Aged Valuation Take-on

This screen is displayed when you select the Aged Valuation Take-on function.
Field
Stock code
Values
Description
This indicates the item for which you are maintaining the take
on valuation details.
| Setup | 158
Field
Values
Warehouse
Description
You use this field to indicate the warehouse for which you want
to take on valuation details.
Quantity on hand
Quantity for
current year
This indicates the current quantity of the item in the selected

warehouse.
You use this field to indicate the quantity on hand for the
current year.
A negative quantity cannot be entered.
Quantity for year

ending
You use these fields to indicate the quantity on hand for the
stock item at year end for the previous 5 years.
A negative quantity cannot be entered.
Quantity
outstanding
This indicates the difference between the current warehouse

quantity on hand and the sum of the quantities on hand for
each of the six years.
Note:
You will be unable to save your data if this field does
not equal zero (i.e. the quantity on hand is equal to the
sum of the six yearly buckets - current and five prior
years).
Save
Select this to save the changes you made and to return to the
previous screen.
Close

Updating of Aged Valuation Buckets

Aged valuation buckets are updated by the following processing functions:
Field
Values
Sales order invoices
This decrements the quantity in the oldest bucket

which contains a quantity. If there is insufficient
quantity, the bucket is reduced to zero and the next
oldest bucket is reduced by the remainder (if there
is insufficient in this bucket then this is reduced to
zero and the next oldest reduced by the remainder,
etc). A negative invoice increments the quantity in
the oldest bucket which contains a quantity greater
than zero.
Sales order credit notes
This increments the quantity of the oldest bucket

which contains a quantity. A negative credit note
reduces the quantity in the oldest bucket which
contains a quantity greater than zero. If there is
insufficient stock in this bucket, then the remainder
is taken from the next oldest bucket.
Sales order debit notes
This decrements the oldest bucket that contains a

quantity (in the same way as an invoice). Negative
| Setup | 159
Field
Values
debit notes increment the quantity in the oldest
bucket that contains a quantity greater than zero.
Sales order IBTs
This is treated in the same way as an invoice.

A negative IBT is treated in the same way as a
negative invoice.
Inventory receipts
A positive receipt into stock increments the current

year's bucket. A negative receipt into stock reduces
the current year's bucket. If there is insufficient
stock in this bucket, then the remainder is taken
from the next youngest bucket.
Inventory Adjustments
A positive adjustment of stock increments the

quantity in the current year's bucket. A negative
adjustment of stock decrements the quantity in the
oldest bucket that contains a quantity greater than
zero.
Inventory issues
A positive issue from stock decrements the quantity

in the oldest bucket where the quantity is greater
than zero. If this causes a shortage, then the
remainder is taken from the next oldest bucket. A
negative inventory issue increments the quantity in
the oldest non-zero bucket.
Physical quantity adjustment
An adjustment that causes the quantity on hand to

increase is treated in the same way as a positive
inventory adjustment. An adjustment causing the
quantity on hand to decrease is treated in the same
way as a negative inventory adjustment.
Transfer from this warehouse
This is treated in the same way as a positive

inventory issue.
Transfer to this warehouse
This is treated in the same way as a positive

inventory receipt.
Purchase order receipt
This is treated in the same way as an inventory

receipt. A negative purchase order receipt is treated
in the same way as a negative inventory receipt.
Backflushing
The finished item is treated as a receipt into stock

and the components are treated as an issue
from stock. If there is insufficient stock of these
components to satisfy the demand, then the issues
of lower down components are treated as inventory
issues, and the receipts of these components are
treated as inventory receipts. When processing a
negative Backflush, negative issues and negative
receipts occur.
Work in Progress Kit Issues
This is treated in the same way as inventory issues.

Negative issues are treated as negative inventory
issues.
Issues to Work in Progress
This is treated in the same way as issues from

inventory. Negative issues are treated in the same
way as negative issues from stock.
| Setup | 160
Field
Values
Accounts Receivable
Invoices, credit notes and debit notes are treated

in the same way as if they had occurred in Sales
Orders, if the option to update stock is selected.
Stock Take System
When a stock take is confirmed and the quantity

counted is greater than the original quantity on
hand, a positive inventory adjustment is performed.
If the quantity counted is less than the original
quantity on hand then a negative adjustment
is performed. These are treated as inventory
adjustments.
Interface System
Stock changes that occur at another branch, and

are brought into this company using the Interface
system are treated as if they had been keyed into
this company normally.
Inventory Document Format

You use the Inventory Document Format program to define the page layout for printing your Inventory
documents for transactions that were created using the Inventory Movements program.
These documents can be used to travel with the inventory items, or for record-keeping to indicate whether
items are outstanding.
Inventory Document Format

Field
Values
Document type
Description
This enables you to indicate the type of Inventory document for
which you want to configure the print settings.
If you want to copy a document type, then you enter the
document type you want to create from the copy in this field
(i.e. you enter the document type you want to copy to in this
field).
Stock receipts
Select this to define a document format for the receipt of stock

items.
Issues
Select this to define a document format for issuing stock items.
Transfers out
Select this to define a document format for use when

transferring stock items out of a warehouse (possibly to
another warehouse or branch).
If you selected to use the full Goods in Transit Transfers facility
(Inventory Setup - General tab), then this document type is
referred to as the Goods in Transit Reference.
Purchase order
receipts
Format
Select this to define a document format for purchase order

receipts of stock items. This document type is also referred
to as a GRN (Goods Received Note) in the Purchase Order
module.
This indicates the format assigned to the document type.
| Setup | 161
Field
Values
Description
You can define up to 4 different formats (i.e. 1 to 4) for each
document type. This flexibility allows you to configure and print
inventory documents according to your own requirements.
The formats defined here are only used for the types of
inventory documents you have specified you want to print
(Inventory Setup - Document tab). The Inventory Setup
program also enables you to indicate whether you want to print
your inventory documents in batch mode using the Inventory
Document Print program or on-line from the Inventory
Movements program or both.
Description
This enables you to enter a description for the document type

and format you selected.
Print method
These options enable you to select the method by which you

want to print the Inventory document for the selected format.
Standard
document
Select this if you want to print your Inventory document for this
format using pre-printed stationery.
SRS document
format using SRS Document Printing.
Word document
format using MS Word.
Refer to Word printing for additional information about printing
using MS Word.
General
Format options
These options enable you to indicate which section of the

document you want to maintain. You select one of the options
and then use the Change function to define the preferences
and page layouts for your document (see Format Options).
Note:
The options available vary according to the type of
Inventory document you select to configure as well as
the Print method you select.
Change
Heading Section
Messages
You use this function to edit the preferences and print positions
for the various Format options selected for each of the
Inventory document types (see Format Options).
You use this function to enter print positions for a Reprint
message and a Continuation message on the Inventory
document.
Each message can be 20 characters in length.
Detail Section
Message
You use this function to enter print positions for a Reject

message and a Serial message on the Inventory document.
| Setup | 162
Field
Values
Description
You can only access the Serial message field if you indicated
that serial numbers must be printed (Preferences section).
Copy
Select this to copy a document type to another format, or to

another document type.
Save
Select this to save the details assigned to the document format.
Alignment
Select this to print a document using test characters, This

enables you to verify that the print positions and fields you
defined for the document are correctly aligned.
It is advisable to print the alignment to the printer on which you
will be printing your documents.
Print
Select this to print the inventory document format you defined.

purposes.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently selected document type and

format.
Close
Select this to exit the program without saving any changes you
made.
If you made changes to the format, then the program prompts
you to save or discard these changes.
Heading Section Messages

You use the Heading Section Messages function to enter print positions for a reprint message and a
continuation message on the Inventory document.
Field
Values
Description
Row
You use this field to indicate the row number on which the
reprint message must be printed.
Column
You use this field to indicate the column number at which the
reprint message must be printed.
Message
You use this field to indicate the text you want to print for the
reprint message.
Row
continuation message must be printed.
Column
continuation message must be printed.
Message
continuation message.
Reprint message
Continuation
message
Close
| Setup | 163
Field
Values
Description
You save the changes you made to the format at the time of
exiting the program.
Detail Section Message

You use the Detail Section Message function to enter print positions for a reject message and a serial
message on the Inventory document.
You can only access the Serial message field if you indicated that serial numbers must be printed
(Preferences section).
Field
Values
Description
Row
reject message must be printed.
Column
reject message must be printed.
Message
reject message.
Row
serial message must be printed.
Column
serial message must be printed.
Message
serial message.
Reject message
Serial message
Close

Copy
The Copy function enables you to copy a document type to another format, or to another document type.
This is useful if you want to define multiple formats for the same document type, with minor differences
in each. Instead of having to re-define the entire document, you can copy the original document to
another format and then apply the required changes to the copied format. Similarly, if you have two similar
document types, you can define the document format for one document type and then copy this document
format to the other document type. You can then amend the copied document as required.
Document types and formats can also be copied between companies (i.e. from one company to another).
Field
Values
Description
Company
This indicates the company in which you are currently working.
Copy from
document type
This indicates the document type you want to use to create the
new document.
| Setup | 164
Field
Values
Description
The document type you select here is copied to the document
type you indicated in the Document type field on the previous
screen.
Stock receipts
Select this if you want to copy a stock receipt document format

to the new document.
Issues
Select this if you want to copy an issues document format to

the new document.
Transfers out
Select this if you want to copy a transfers out document format

to the new document.
Purchase order
receipts
Select this if you want to copy a purchase order receipt

document format to the new document.
Format
You use this to select the format of the document type you
want to copy. This is only relevant if you have more than one
format for a single document type.
Change Company
Select this if the format you want to copy from is in a different

company.
Copy from
company
You use this field to indicate a valid company from which you
want to copy a document format.
OK
Select this to accept the company id you entered at the

previous prompt.
Cancel
Select this to return to the Copy Format screen without

changing the company id.
OK
Select this to copy the document format you selected to the

new document.
Note:
This option does not save the format you copied. To
save the new format, you must select Save from the
Inventory Document Format screen.
Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without performing

the copy.
Alignment
You use the Alignment function to print the selected inventory document using test characters to verify that
the fields you have defined are correctly aligned on your stationery.
It is advisable to print the alignment to the printer on which you will be printing your documents.
Field
Values
Description
OK
Select this to print the test format alignment for the document.
Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without printing an

alignment.
Print test
inventory
document
alignment?
| Setup | 165
Format Options
The Format options enable you to maintain each section of the document.
The following Format options are available for Inventory documents when the Print method is Standard
document:
Preferences (see Preferences)

Heading section (see Heading Section)
Detail section (see Detail Section)
Total section (see Total Section)
SRS Options (see SRS Document Print Setup and SRS Document Template)
MS Word Options (see MS Word Options)

Serial number tracking section (see Serial Number Tracking Section)
When you highlight a section for a Standard document format and select the Change function, the fields for
which print positions can be defined are displayed.
The following options are used to indicate the print positions for these fields:
Field
Values
Clear Row/
Column
Description
You use this function to delete the row and column print
positions for the highlighted field.
When you select this function, the print positions for the
highlighted field are set to zero, which means the field is not
printed.
Text Fields
The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to 8 lines of

text (30 characters per line) that you want to print at a specific
position on each document.
Change
Select this to maintain the row and column print positions for
the highlighted field.
Close
Select this to close the current window and return to the

previous window.
Text Fields
The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to 8 lines of text (30 characters per line) that you want to
print at a specific position on each document.
Field
Values
Description
Clear text
You use this function to clear the text and print positions for the
highlighted text field.
Change
This function enables you to maintain the highlighted text line.

Text
This indicates the actual text that must be printed on the

document.
Row
This indicates the vertical position (i.e. Top to bottom) at which

you want to print the text entered in the Text field.
The row specification for any field cannot exceed 65.
| Setup | 166
Field
Values
Description
Column
This indicates the horizontal position (i.e. Left to right) at which

The column specification for any field cannot exceed 120.
OK
Select this to accept the information you entered for the text
field.
Cancel
Select this to ignore the information you entered for the text
field and to return to the previous screen.
Close
Positions
You use the Change function from within each section to maintain the row and column print positions for
the highlighted field in the section.
Field
Values
Positions
Description
All measurements are based from the top left hand corner of
the page.
For some fields, only the Row or only the Column may be
available for you to define.
To assist you in positioning the fields correctly, select the Print
Mask for Document Alignment to print a grid of the required
columns and lines. Ensure that the layout mask is output to the
printer on which you will be printing your documents.
Row

you want to print the highlighted field.
Column

OK
Select this to accept the print positions you entered.
Cancel
Select this to ignore the print position you entered and to return
Preferences
You use the Preferences function to define the default page layout for each of the available inventory
documents.
Note:
These preferences are defined separately for each document.
Field
Total number of
lines on a page
Values
Description
You use this field to indicate the number of lines you require on
your inventory document.
The entry made here cannot exceed 99 characters.
| Setup | 167
Field
Values
First transaction
line starts on line
Description
You use this field to indicate the line number from the
beginning of the page at which the first transaction line must be
printed, within the block of detail line information.
Last transaction
line ends on line
You use this field to indicate the line number at which the last
transaction line must be printed.
This must be from the beginning of the page, within the block of
detail line information.
Number of
spaces between
transaction lines
You use this field to indicate the number of blank lines you
want to insert between transaction lines.
An entry of zero indicates no blank lines.
If the entry made at the Transaction line print block size field
is greater than 1, then this option defines the number of blank
lines between each transaction print block.
Transaction line
print block size
You use this field to indicate the number of lines that are
required to print all the information associated to one
transaction.
Maximum number
of text lines to
print
You use this field to indicate the maximum number of Technical

specification, Inspection text or P/Order text lines that you want
to print.
Print date format
You use this field to indicate the format in which you want to
print dates on your stationery.
This can be based on your system date format or a user
defined date format (i.e. Short date or long date).
These formats are defined within the System Setup program.
Print options
New page per
transaction
Select this if you want each transaction to be printed as a

separate document.
Note:
This option only applies when you print documents in
batch mode. When you print documents online, then
each transaction is treated as a separate document,
irrespective of your selection for this option.
If you do not select this option, then numerous transactions can
be printed on one document, according to the following rules:
Stock receipts - each change of warehouse is a new

document
Issues - each change of warehouse is a new document
Transfers out - each change of destination warehouse is a
new document
| Setup | 168
Field
Values
Description
Purchase order receipts - each change of GRN number or
purchase order number is a new document
Print negative
quantities
Select this if you want to be able to print negative quantities on

the document.
This option is not available for Transfers out documents.
Generate next
document number
Select this if you want the system to automatically allocate the

next available document number to the document when it is
printed for the first time.
Document numbers are assigned according to the next
document number defined against the Document numbering
option on the Numbering tab of the Inventory Setup program.
If you do not select this option, then document numbers are not
assigned to your inventory documents.
This option is not available for Purchase order receipt
documents. For these documents the GRN number is used
as the document number. If the GRN system is not required
(Purchase Orders Setup - GRN Tab), then the purchase order
number is used as the document number.
Print serial
numbers
Select this if you want to print serial numbers on the document.

You can only access this option if the serial number tracking
system is required (Inventory Setup - Options tab).
If you select this option, then you must select the Serial
Number Preferences function to define additional preferences
related to printing serial numbers.
Use 1000
Select this to apply the 1000 separator configured within the
separator in
Company Setup program (Options tab) to all numeric values.
values and prices
Note:
If you have not configured a 1000 separator at
company level, then selecting this option has no effect.
Serial Number
Preferences
Select this to indicate your preferences for the printing serial

numbers on the document. You need to select the preference:
Print serial numbers, in order to enable this function.
This is not available when your Print method is set to SRS
document.
Close

You use the Save function from the Inventory Document
Format screen to save these preferences against the document
type and format.
Serial Number Preferences

You use the Serial Number Preferences function to indicate your preferences for the printing serial
numbers on the document.
| Setup | 169
The Serial Number Preferences function is not available when your Print method is set to SRS document.
To print serial numbers on the document using SRS printing, you need to define a sub-report within the
SRS report (see SYSPRO Reporting Services).
Field
New page per
serial number
Values
Description
You use this field to indicate whether you want to print each
serial number on a new page.
The header information is repeated on each page, but the
totals are printed only on the last page.
Serial numbers do not form part of the transaction detail lines
and therefore do not print within the transaction print block.
Note:
You will be unable to access the Gap from one serial to
next and Number of serial numbers across page fields
if you select the New page per serial number option.
Gap from one

serial to next
You use this field to indicate the number of characters between

where the first character of the first serial number on the line
prints, and the first character of the second serial number on
the line prints.
For example, if your serial numbers are 10 characters long,
then you need to set this field to at least 11 to get one space
between each serial number. If you want 2 spaces between
each serial number, then set this field to 12.
This option is only relevant if you selected to print more than
one serial number on a single line. (See: Number of serial
numbers across page option below).
Number of serial
numbers across
page
You use this field to indicate the number of serial numbers you
want to print on a single line.
If you set this to 1, then each serial number is printed on a
separate line. To save paper, you would most likely want to
print more than one serial number on a single line.
If you set this field to 2 or more, then you need to specify the
gap you require between the serial numbers on the line (i.e.
the spaces you require between each serial number). This gap
is specified in the: Gap from one serial number to next field
above.
Note:
If this field is set to zero, then serial numbers are not
printed on the document.
Close

You select the Save function from the Inventory Document
Format screen to save these preferences against the document
type and format.
| Setup | 170
Heading Section
In this section, you define the row and column at which you want to print each of the heading fields on the
inventory document.
The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the document, while the column refers to the
horizontal (left to right) position on the document.
Fields
The table below indicates the fields that can be printed in the heading section. Not all fields are available
for all document types (i.e. the fields that are available for printing depend on the document type selected).
Note:
Fields that can be printed as barcodes are denoted with the words (with attribute). Refer to
Barcode Printing.
Field
Document
Origin/Remarks
Document number. You use this if you selected the
Preference: Generate next document number.
Document (with attribute)

System date document printed
System date on which the document was printed.
System time document printed
System time at which the document was printed.
Operator
Operator who processed the transaction
Operator name
Operators
Page number
Page number for document. This is useful if

single documents run to more than one page for
transactions.
Transaction warehouse
From Inventory Movements, or Purchase Order

Receipts or Job Issues.
Transaction warehouse name
Warehouse name for the transaction warehouse

printed in previous field.
Destination warehouse
Inventory Movements.
Destination warehouse name
Inventory Warehouses
Warehouse delivery address line 1 - 5
Warehouse delivery postal/zip code
Warehouse contact
Warehouse fax
Goods in transit reference
Inventory Movements
Source warehouse
Inventory Movements
Source warehouse name
Inter warehouse lead time
Warehouse Move Matrix
Expected receipt date
Detail Section
You use this function to define the row and column at which you want to print each of the detail fields on
the inventory document.
| Setup | 171
Fields
Note:
Barcode Printing.
Field
Origin/Remarks
Stock code
Stock code from Inventory Movements, or

Purchase Order Receipts or Job Issues.
Stock code (with attribute)
Stock code with attributes defined for this field. You

use the Print Setup program to define attributes
against specific fields.
Stock description
Stock long description
Purchase order description
This prints the description for the item as it appears

on the purchase order detail line. You typically
use this field to print the item description if you
tend to change the default item description when
processing purchase orders (Purchase Order
Entry).
Product class
Positive transaction quantity

Negative transaction quantity

Transaction value
In local currency from Inventory Movements, or

Purchase Order Receipts or Job Issues.
Transaction value (foreign)
In foreign currency
Transaction unit cost
In local currency. This is the cost that was used in

the warehouse (i.e. the current inventory cost in the
warehouse).
Transaction unit cost (foreign)
In foreign currency. This is the cost that was used in

the warehouse (i.e. the current inventory cost in the
warehouse).
Purchase order price
In local currency. This is the purchase order receipt

unit cost.
Purchase order price (foreign)
In foreign currency. This is the purchase order

receipt unit cost.
Transaction mass

| Setup | 172
Field
Origin/Remarks
Transaction volume

Transaction date

Transfer from warehouse
Inventory Movements - Goods in Transit Transfers
Transaction warehouse

Receipts or Job Issues
Transaction reference

Receipts or Job Issues
Journal number
Journal notation
Concession number
Ledger code
Bin location
For Purchase Order Receipts, this prints the bin

entered in the Bin location field on the Purchase
Order Receipt pane in Purchase Order Receipts
program.
Bin location (with attribute)

Lot
Lot (with attribute)
Start print line-Technical spec
Start print line-Inspection text
Start print line-P/order text
Start print line-P/order comment
Tariff code
Job
Job reference
Job (with attribute)
Job reference with attributes defined for this

field. You use the Print Setup program to define
attributes against specific fields.
Reject code for (-ve) receipts
Purchase Order Receipts
Purchase order line number
Purchase order due date
Purchase Order Header Maintenance
Purchase order line due date
Purchase Order Header Maintenance
Purchase order original quantity
Purchase Order Entry
P/O qty outstanding after receipt
For Purchase order receipts
Merchandise value
In local currency for Purchase order receipts
Merchandise value (foreign)
In foreign currency for Purchase order receipts
Non-merchandise value
Non-merchandise value (foreign)
| Setup | 173
Field
Origin/Remarks
Requisition
Requisition line
Originator of requisition
Dr ledger code (non-stk p/ord)
GRN source code
Supplier's delivery note
Catalogue
Total Section
You use this function to define the row and column at which you want to print each of the total fields on the
inventory document.
Fields
Field
Origin/Remarks
Total transaction quantity

Total transaction value
In local currency
Total transaction value (foreign)
In foreign currency
Total transaction mass

Total transaction volume
Total merchandise value
Total merchandise value (foreign)
Total non-merchandise value
Total non-merch value (foreign)
Serial Number Tracking Section

You use this section to indicate the initial print positions for printing more than one serial number across a
page.
This section is only available if all of the following apply:
you are defining an SRS document or a Word document

you selected the Preference: Print serial numbers
you did not select the New page per serial option from the Serial Number Preferences screen.
The table below indicates the fields that can be printed in this section:
Field
First position of serial number
Origin/Remarks
This indicates the column number in which to start
printing the first serial number.
| Setup | 174
Field
Origin/Remarks
First position of batch quantity
This indicates the column number in which to start

printing the first batch quantity.
MS Word Options
As an alternative to printing your documents on pre-printed stationery, you can configure SYSPRO to allow
you to print your stationery documents using Microsoft Word.
Refer to Word printing for additional information about printing using MS Word.
Design Template
You use the Design Template function to open the applicable Word template and insert the fields that you
want to print on your stationery.
Refer to Design Template for additional information.
Inventory Label Format

You use the Inventory Label Format program to define the page layout for printing your stock code labels.
A label format must be defined before you can use the Inventory Label Print program.
Inventory Label Format

Field
Values
Description
Save
Change
This function enables you to define and maintain the

preferences and print positions for your Inventory labels.
Alignment
Select this to print a label using test characters to verify that the
fields you defined are correctly aligned on your stationery.
Print
Select this to print the stationery format information you defined

and saved for the Inventory labels.
purposes.
Copy Format
Select this to copy an Inventory label format from another

company to your current company.
Cancel
Select this to exit the program without saving any information

you entered.
Alignment
You use the Alignment function to print labels using test characters to verify that the fields you defined are
correctly aligned on your stationery.
Two sets of labels are printed, enabling you to check whether the information on each label is aligned
correctly not only on the first label, but also on the subsequent label.
Field
Values
Description
Print test label

alignment?
| Setup | 175
Field
Values
Description
OK
Select this to print the test format alignment.
Cancel

alignment.
Copy Format
The Copy Format function enables you to copy a label format from another company to your current
company.
Field
Values
Description
Current company

This is the company to which the label format will be copied.
Copy from
company
want to copy an Inventory label format.
OK
Select this to copy the Inventory label format from the company
you selected to the current company.
Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without copying a

format.
Label Preferences
The following preferences can be selected when you use highlight the Label preferences line and select
the Change function:
Field
Total number of
lines on label
Values
Description
You use this field to enter the number of lines you want to print
on each label (i.e. The height of a label, including the vertical
gap before the next label).
A maximum of 60 lines can be assigned to each label.
Gap from start of

one label to next
You use this field to indicate the number of columns between

the start of one label and the start of the next (i.e. The width of
one label, including the gap before the next label).
This gap cannot exceed 66 columns.
Number of labels
to view
You use this field to indicate the number of labels to be printed

across the page.
This must be in the range 1 to 99.
Number of labels
per stock code
You use this field to indicate how many labels you want to print
for a stock code.
You can override the entry made here at the time of printing
labels using the Inventory Label Print program.
Up to 9999 labels can be printed for each stock code.
Print date format
This indicates the format in which you want to print dates on

your A/P labels.
| Setup | 176
Field
Values
Close
Description
The system defaults to using the date format configured for
the company (Company Setup), but you can select to use the
Short date format or the Long date format.
Label Detail Section

The following options are available when you use highlight the Label detail section line and select the
Change function:
Within this section, you define the row and column at which you want to print each of the stock code fields
on the label. The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the label, while the column refers to
the horizontal (left to right) position on the label.
Field
Values
Clear Row/
Column
Description
printed.
Text Fields
The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to five lines of

position on each supplier label.
Change
Close

previous window.
Detail Section Text

This screen is displayed when you select the Text Fields function.
You can enter up to five lines of text (15 characters per line) that you want to print at a specific position on
each Inventory label.
Field
Values
Description
Clear text
Change
Detail Section
Text Entry
Text
This indicates the actual text that must be printed on the

Inventory label.
Row
This indicates the vertical position (i.e. top to bottom) at which

| Setup | 177
Field
Values
Description
Column

Print attribute
The entry made here relates to the attribute that you have
assigned to your printer using the Attribute maintenance
function (Print Setup).
This option is only available for those fields defined as "with
attribute".
OK
field.
Cancel
Close
Positions
You use the Change function from within the Label detail section to maintain the row and column print
positions for the highlighted field in this section.
Field
Values
Positions
Description
the page.
printer on which you will be printing your documents.
Row

Column

OK
Cancel
Fields
The following table lists the fields you can print in the Label Detail section:
The majority of these fields are defined against each stock item - see Stock Code Maintenance.
| Setup | 178
Field
Origin/Comment
Stock code
Stock description
Unit of measure
This is the stocking unit of measure

Mass per unit
Supplier
Supplier's name
Product class
Sales tax code
List price code
List price
List price basis
ABC classification
ABC analysis required flag
Alternate stock codes 1-5
Long description
Alternate supplier 1-3
Label print date
List price (excluding tax)
List price (including tax)
Tax amount
User defined fields 1-5
Alternate key 1
Alternate key 2
Tariff code
Buyer code
Drawing office no
Volume per unit
Warehouse
Bin location
Price Section
You use the Price section to define the rows and columns at which you want to print up to four price codes
and its associated prices on the label.
| Setup | 179
The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the label, while the column refers to the horizontal
(left to right) position on the label.
Field
Values
Clear Price Entry
Description
printed.
Change
This function enables you to define the print positions for the
highlighted field.
Price code to print
You use this field to indicate the price code you want to print on
the label.
Price code
These fields enable you to indicate the print positions for the
price code.
Row

you want to print the price code field.
The row specification for any field cannot exceed the number of
lines defined for the label.
Column

you want to print the price code field.
Price
These fields enable you to indicate the print positions for the
actual price.
Row

you want to print the price field.
The row specification for any field cannot exceed the number of
lines defined for the label.
Column

you want to print the price field.
Close
OK
Cancel
Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format

You use the Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format program to define the page layout for printing your
stock take tickets.
A ticket format must be defined before you can use the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program.
| Setup | 180
Inventory Stock Take Ticket Format

Field
Values
Description
Save
Change
This function enables you to define and maintain the

preferences and print positions for your Stock Take Tickets.
Alignment
This enables you to print a ticket using test characters to verify

that the fields you have defined are correctly aligned on your
stationery.
Print
Select this to print the stationery format information you defined

and saved for the Stock Take Tickets.
purposes.
Copy Format
Select this to copy a Stock Take Ticket format from another

company to your current company.
Cancel
Select this to exit the program without saving any information

you entered.
If you have made any changes to the format, then the program
prompts you to save or discard these changes.
Alignment
You use the Alignment function to print one or more tickets using test characters to verify that the fields you
have defined are correctly aligned on your stationery.
Field
Values
Number of pages
to print
Description
This enables you to indicate the number of test tickets to print.
You can select up to 5 test tickets to print, one after the other.
This enables you to check whether the information on each
ticket is aligned correctly not only on the first ticket, but also on
each subsequent ticket.
Print test format

alignment?
OK
Select this to print the test format alignment according to your

selection at the previous field.
Cancel

alignment.
Copy
The Copy function enables you to copy a Stock Take Ticket format from another company to your current
company.
Field
Values
Description
Current company

This is the company to which the format will be copied.
Copy from
company
want to copy a Stock Take Ticket format.
| Setup | 181
Field
Values
Description
OK
Select this to copy the Stock Take Ticket format from the
company you selected to the current company.
Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without copying a

format.
Ticket Preferences
You use the Preferences section to define the default page layout for your stock take tickets.
The following preferences can be selected when you use highlight the Ticket preferences line and select
the Change function:
Field
Total number of
lines on a ticket
Values
Description
You use this field to enter the number of lines you want to print
on each ticket (i.e. The height of a ticket, including the vertical
gap before the next ticket).
A maximum of 66 lines can be assigned to each ticket.
Gap from start of

one ticket to next
You use this field to indicate the number of columns between

the start of one ticket and the start of the next (i.e. The width of
one ticket, including the gap before the next ticket).
This gap cannot exceed 66 columns.
Number of tickets
to view
You use this field to indicate the number of tickets to be printed

across the page.
This must be in the range 1 to 99.
Number of tickets
per bin
You use this field to indicate how many tickets you want to print
for each bin.
You can override the entry made here at the time of printing
tickets using the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program.
Up to 9999 tickets can be printed for each bin.
Number of copies
of each ticket
You use this to define the number of tickets to print for each
stock code.
Print date format
This indicates the format in which you want to print dates on

your Stock Take tickets.
The system defaults to using the date format configured for
the company (Company Setup), but you can select to use the
Short date format or the Long date format.
Close

| Setup | 182
Ticket Detail Section

You use this section to define the row and column at which you want to print the required fields on your
Stock Take tickets. The row refers to the vertical (top to bottom) position on the ticket, while the column
refers to the horizontal (left to right) position on the ticket.
When you highlight the Detail section Format option and select the Change function, the fields for which
print positions can be defined are displayed.
The following options can be used to define/maintain the print positions for these fields:
Field
Values
Clear Row/
Column
Description
printed.
Text Fields
The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to five lines of

position on each stock take ticket.
Change
Close

previous window.
Text Fields
The Text Fields function enables you to enter up to five lines of text (15 characters per line) that you want
to print at a specific position on each stock take ticket.
Field
Values
Description
Clear text
Change
Detail Section
Text Entry
Text
This indicates the actual text that must be printed on the Stock
Take ticket.
Row

The row specification for any field cannot exceed 66. In
addition, it cannot exceed the number of lines defined for the
ticket.
Column

| Setup | 183
Field
Values
Description
OK
field.
Cancel
Close
Positions
You use the Change function from within the Detail Section to maintain the row and column print positions
for the highlighted field in the section.
Field
Values
Positions
Description
the page.
printer on which you will be printing your Stock Take tickets.
Row
This indicates the vertical position (i.e. top to bottom) at which

Column

OK
Select this to accept the print positions you entered. You save
the changes you made to the format at the time of exiting the
program.
Cancel
Fields
The following table lists the fields you can print in the Ticket Detail section:
Note:
Barcode Printing.
Field
Origin/Comment
Stock code
Stock description
Warehouse
Warehouse description
| Setup | 184
Field
Origin/Comment
Bin location
Product class
Unit of measure
Ticket number
System date
Unit cost
Stock code (2nd position)
Stock description (2nd position)
Ticket number (2nd position)
Bin location (with attribute)
Copy number
| Transaction Processing | 185
Transaction Processing
Inventory Movements
You use the Inventory Movements program to process transactions against your stock items.
These transactions (although unrelated to any sales transaction) do affect the movement of inventory
throughout the company. Sales-related transactions are processed using the Accounts Receivable and
Sales Order Processing modules.
If a General Ledger account used in this program requires General Ledger analysis (Ledger Code
Maintenance or General Ledger Structure Definition), then the GL Analysis program is displayed when
you post the transaction, enabling you to enter the analysis details or to select to enter them later (see
General Ledger Integration). General Ledger analysis entries are always distributed in the local currency,
irrespective of the currency in which the original transaction is processed.
Inventory Movements
Field
Values
Description
Exit
Preferences
Select this option to configure default settings that must be

used when processing transactions.
Change Period
Select this to use the Change Posting Period program to

indicate the period to which you want to post the transactions
entered for the current run of the program.
File
Options
You can post transactions to the Current month, Previous

month 1 or Previous month 2 providing the access status for
the period is set to open and you selected the option: Stock
balances > Retain last 12 months opening stock balances
(Inventory Setup - History tab).
Note:
Change Date
You can only post Adjustments, Bin Transfers and

Expense Issues transactions to a previous posting
month if you are retaining your last 12 months'
opening balances (Inventory Setup - History tab).
You use this option to indicate the date for which you want to
process the transactions for the current run of the program.
Note:
This facility should be used with caution - see
Transaction Date.
New
Select this to add a new transaction.
Transaction type
You use this field to select the transaction you want to process.
Field
Values
Description
This defaults to your selection at the preference: Default
transaction type (Preferences).
None of these options can be performed on a stock item
defined as a Notional part (Stock Code Maintenance Descriptive tab).
In line with generally accepted accounting principles, any
transaction that could affect the unit cost is only allowed in the
current period. Therefore, if you change the processing period
to a previous period using the Change Period option, then only
the following options are available for posting into a previous
period:
Adjustments
Bin Transfers
Expense Issues
Only the transactions to which you have access are available

(Operator Maintenance - Security > Activities > Inventory
Control).
Receipts
Select this option to record the receipt of items into stock from
your suppliers, usually where a purchase order has not been
raised in advance.
This option is not available if you have been denied access to
the activity: Inventory stock receipts (Operators - Security
tab - Activities).
Adjustments
Select this to adjust the on hand quantity of an item either

positively or negatively.
This option is not available if you have been denied access
to the activity: Inventory stock adjustments (Operators Security tab - Activities).
Cost Changes
Select this option to change the cost of a stock item.

to the activity: Inventory stock cost changes (Operators Security tab - Activities)
Cost Modifications
Select this option to adjust the inventory cost of a specific

quantity of stock items (e.g. to change the cost of a batch
of items received into stock where the cost was incorrectly
entered).
to the activity: Inventory cost modifications (Operators Security tab - Activities).
This option is disabled if your company inventory costing
method is set to FIFO or Standard, or you selected FIFO
valuation (Inventory Setup). If you selected Costing per
warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab) and you have
not selected FIFO valuation, then the Cost Modifications
option is enabled, but you will be unable to perform a cost
Field
Values
Description
modification against a warehouse with a costing method
defined as Standard (Inventory Warehouses).
Transfers OUT
Select this if you want to transfer items out of a source

warehouse. These items remain in transit until you record the
transfer into the destination warehouse.
This option is not displayed if you have been denied access to
the activity: GIT transfers In/Out (Operators - Security tab).
Transfers IN
Select this if you want to receive items in transit into the

destination warehouse.
This option is not displayed if you have been denied access to
the activity: GIT transfers In/Out (Operators - Security tab).
Immediate
Transfers
Select this if you want to transfer items out of the source

warehouse and into the destination warehouse in one
transaction.
You would use this option when the transportation time
between the warehouses is short; the transfer has already
been completed; or if the destination warehouse does not have
the facility to record the receipt of the transfer.
Note:
No Destination
Transfers
If multiple bins are installed (Inventory Setup) and

you are not using the full goods in transit transfers
facility (Inventory Setup), then you must use this
option to transfer ECC items and/or traceable items.
Immediate transfers ignore cost multipliers defined
against the warehouse (see Warehouses for Stock
Code)
Select this if you want to transfer stock out of a warehouse,

thereby decreasing the stock on hand in that warehouse,
specifying a destination warehouse.
You should only use this when you need to write off stock
because it was damaged whilst in transit. The transaction type
is TRF and the general ledger code defined for transfers at
Inventory level is used even if the option to select the ledger
code at transaction time is selected.
This transaction should not be required when using the full
goods in Transit system, as that provides for this type of
functionality.
Physical Counts
Select this option to change the quantity of stock on hand to a

counted amount.
the activity: Inventory physical count (Operators - Security
tab - Activities).
Note:
You will be unable to select Physical Counts if the

following applies:
Field
Values
Description
multiple bins are in use in the selected
warehouse (Inventory Setup).
the item is traceable (Stock Code
Maintenance).
you selected Previous month 1 or Previous
month 2 from the Change Period menu.
Bin Transfers
Select this option to record the transfer of items from one bin to
another.
the activity: Inventory bin transfers (Operators - Security tab
- Activities).
Expense Issues
Select this option to record the issue of items from inventory for
miscellaneous purposes.
the activity: Inventory expense issues (Operators - Security
tab - Activities).
Backflushing
Select this option to record the manufacture of items without

using a Work in Progress job.
the activity: Inventory backflushing (Operators - Security tab
- Activities).
You will be unable to perform this option if the Inventory and
Work in Progress modules are not in the same month and year.
A stock item defined as a Co-product (Stock Code
Maintenance - Descriptive tab) can only be backflushed on a
route on which it has its own structure (i.e. the co-product item
is not attached to a notional part).
Print journal
Select this to print the Inventory journals created from the

posted transactions during the current run of the program.
Once the journals are printed, the system returns you to the
main SYSPRO menu.
Alternatively, you can use the Inventory Journal Report
program to print the inventory journals.
Post
Select this to post the transaction.

Refer to Processing for processing details when using Actual
Costing.
Post
This screen is displayed when you select the Post option.
Field
Values
Description
OK to post
transaction?
Field
Values
OK
Description
If you are processing a Transfer in and you changed the
quantity for a serialized or a lot traceable item, then the GIT
Lots and Serials Query/select program is displayed.
Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without posting the

transaction.
Preferences
You use the Preferences option from the Options menu to configure default settings that must be used
when processing transactions within the Inventory Movements program.
You can save these preferences against the operator or you can elect to apply them only for the current
run of the program.
Field
Default
transaction type
Values
Description
You use this preference to indicate the default type of
transaction you want to process when processing inventory
movements.
The entry in the Transaction type field defaults to your
selection at this preference. If you do not have access to
process the preferred transaction type (Operators), then
the entry in the Transaction type field defaults to the first
transaction type you are allowed to process.
Clear reference/
notation after
each transaction
Select this if you want to clear any entries made at the

Reference and Notation fields after each transaction is posted.
If you do not select this option then your last entry made at
these fields is retained for the next transaction.
Clear serial
number field after
entry
Select this if you want to clear the Serial number field of the
Serial Entry for Receipts program after each entry when
entering serial numbers for a receipt. The field is cleared when
you select the Add option.
If you do not select this option, then the previous serial number
you entered remains displayed in the Serial number field of the
Serial Entry for Receipts program.
You would typically select this option if you are using a
scanning device to automatically record serial numbers.
Give warning
when processing
a kit receipt
Select this if you want to be warned whenever you process the

receipt of a kit item.
Give information
about generated
lot
Select this if you want the system to display information

concerning generated lots.
Warn if
transferring lots
with different
dates
Select this if you want to be able to process a bin transfer

transaction when the same lot number is stored in two separate
bins but the expiry date against the lot number is different in
each bin.
Field
Values
Description
This preference is only enabled if the activity: Warn if lot has
different dates is set to allowed against your operator code
(Operators - Security tab - Activities).
Give warning
about blank
concession
number entered
Select this if you want the system to notify you whenever a

blank concession number is assigned to a transaction.
Warn if
transferring bin
on hold
Select this if you want the system to display a warning

message when processing a bin transfer, if the From bin or To
bin is on hold. You will be able to accept the warning message
and process the transaction.
If you do not select this preference, then you will be unable to
process a bin transfer transaction if either the From bin or To
bin is on hold.
Prompt for
posting

whether you want to post transactions. If you do not select this
option, then transactions are posted automatically when you
select the Post option.
Backflush level
All
Select this if you want the system to default to issuing

components from all levels in the bill when using the
backflushing facility.
First
Select this if you want to issue components from the first level
of a bill only, when using the backflushing facility.
Exclude comps/
ops against a
bought out part
Select this if you want the system to default to ignoring

components and operations held against a bought out item.
Goods in Transit
transfer in
You will be unable to access the Goods in Transit transfer in

fields if the full Goods in Transit transfers facility is not installed
(Inventory Setup).
Automatically set
line to complete
Select this if you want the Transfer complete option to be

selected by default when you process a Transfer IN at the
target warehouse.
Use default
warehouse bin
location
Select this if you want to default to using the bin location

held against the warehouse assigned to the stock item when
processing a transfer in. If you do not select this option, then
you must specify a bin location to use.
You can enter a different bin when processing the transfer in
transaction.
Bin location to use
You use this field to enter the default bin location to use if
you did not select the preference: Use default warehouse
bin location. You can enter a different bin when processing
theTransfer IN transaction.
Create bin location Select this if you want the system to automatically create the
if not on file
bin location if it does not exist.
Field
Values
Description
Note:
Your selection at the option: Allow creation of bins
when processing inventory transactions (Inventory
Setup) does not apply in this case.
Use stock
description from
originating SCT
Select this if you want to display the stock description entered

when the SCT was created using the Sales Order Entry
program and not the description defined against the stock item
(Stock Code Maintenance) when receiving the in the transfer.
If you do not select this preference, then the description
defined against the stock item is always displayed when
receipting in the transfer, irrespective of whether a different
description was entered when using the Sales Order Entry
program.
Update originating
order with GIT
receipt details
Select this if you want to automatically release a normal sales

order which was placed into back order when you process a
GIT receipt.
This only applies if you created a SCT from a normal sales
order which was placed into backorder due to insufficient stock.
Goods in Transit
transfer out
Print multiple lines
per GIT document
Select this if you want to be able to print one transfers out

document that contains multiple lines processed against a GIT
reference for the current run of the program. The document
is printed when you select the Last transfer before printing
option that is displayed when you select to post the transaction.
If you do not select this option, then a separate transfers out
document is printed for each transaction processed against a
GIT reference for the current run of the program.
Note:
You will be unable to access the Goods in Transit
transfer out fields if the full Goods in Transit transfers
facility is not installed (Inventory Setup)
This facility applies only if you have indicated that you
require Transfers out documents to be printed on-line
(Inventory Setup)
Give warning if lot

is on hold
This preference is only enabled if the activity: GIT Transfer of

lots on hold is enabled against your operator code.
Select this if you want to be able to allocate lots that are on
hold when processing a GIT Transfer Out transaction.
Save
Select this to save the preferences you selected against your

operator code.
The preferences are saved until next you change them.
Field
Values
Close
Description
Select this to save the preferences you selected for the current
run of the program only.
Transaction Date
You use the Change Date option from the Options menu to set the date that must be used for the
transactions for the current run of the program.
Transaction Date
The transaction date defaults to the current system date, if you selected the option: Set accounting date
to system date (Operator Maintenance). The transaction date is used as the journal start date and the
inventory movement date.
For example, if the transaction extends over two days (e.g. the processing of the transaction begins before
midnight and ends after midnight) then the actual date of posting is used instead of the date on which the
program was loaded. In this example, the date after midnight is used as the transaction date.
Note:
We recommend that you exercise caution when setting the transaction date.
A number of programs provide the facility to change the date that must be used for the transaction.
If you change the transaction date manually, then the entered date is used regardless of the actual
date on which the transaction is posted.
Regardless of the date you enter, however, the transaction is posted to the General Ledger period
that matches the period of the module at the time the transaction is posted (i.e. posting to the
General Ledger is period-driven, not date-driven).
Because reports are date-driven, changes to the transaction date can affect the information that is
included in the report.
Inventory Movements
This screen is displayed when you select the Change Date option from the Options menu.
Field
Values
Description
Transaction date
OK
Select this to set the transaction date to the date you entered.
Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without changing

the transaction date.
Receipts
You use the Receipts option to record the receipt of items into stock from your suppliers, usually where a
purchase order has not been raised in advance.
If FIFO costing is required for the company or the warehouse into which the receipt is being processed
(Inventory Setup), then processing a receipt automatically creates a new FIFO bucket.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse against which you want to

process the transaction.
Transaction
details
Field
Values
Description
Note:
If you have configured a default warehouse at
operator or company level, then it is displayed here
automatically. The operator default takes precedence.
Stock code
This indicates the item against which you want to process the
transaction.
Description
This indicates the description defined against the stock code

Long description
This indicates the long description defined against the stock

code (Stock Code Maintenance). It enables you to verify that
you entered the correct stock code.
Quantity
This indicates the quantity of items that you are receiving into
stock. You can specify a negative quantity (i.e. to indicate a
reversal of a previous receipt) providing there is enough on
hand stock available.
If your Costing method is set to Average and you selected the
option: Do not calculate average cost on negative receipt
(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the average cost of the
stock item is not recalculated when you process a negative
receipt. In this case, the variance between the current average
cost and the cost entered is posted to the Warehouse variance
account defined against the warehouse to which the stock item
belongs (see Inventory Warehouses).
If your Costing method is set to FIFO and you selected the
option: Use zero cost bucket for returns (Inventory Setup Options tab), and you are processing a negative receipt, then if
the FIFO bucket selected by the program has a zero cost, the
returned quantity is added to the FIFO bucket but no change
is made to the unit cost of the bucket. If the option: Use zero
cost bucket for returns is not selected, then a new FIFO
bucket is created with the returned quantity and the current
warehouse cost.
If your Costing method is set to FIFO, then when you process
a negative receipt and you do not enter a Unit Cost and when
prompted 'Do you want to adjust a specific Bin' you select
'No', then the transaction value on the inventory document is
calculated as QTY * unit price from the First FIFO bin.
If you are using FIFO/LIFO costing and you enter a negative
quantity, you are given the opportunity to process the
transaction into a specific FIFO/LIFO bucket (see Adjust
Specific Bucket).
Stocking uom
This indicates the stocking unit of measure for the stock item.
Revision
This field enables you to indicate the specific revision to use of

the stock item.
You will be unable to change the revision of serialized ECC
items once you have allocated the serial numbers.
Field
Values
Description
This field is only enabled if the stock item is defined as ECC
controlled (Stock Code Maintenance).
Release
This field enables you to indicate the specific release to use of

the item.
You will be unable to change the release of serialized ECC
Receipt cost
This indicates the cost associated with the receipt of the item
into stock.
Cost uom
This indicates the cost unit of measure for the receipt cost.
Cost basis
This enables you to indicate the basis for the receipt cost.
Note:
The receipt cost is always entered as a Unit cost when
receipting an item into a warehouse that uses standard
costing.
Unit
Select this to indicate that the receipt cost relates to a single

unit of the stock item.
Total
Select this to indicate that the receipt cost relates to the total
value of items received into stock.
Bin location
This indicates the bin location into which the items will be
received.
You can enter a single bin or assign items to multiple bins
using the Multiple Bins option.
Note:
Items can be assigned to a maximum of 50 bins per

transaction.
You can only access the Bin location field if the
option: Multiple bins is selected (Inventory Setup)
and multiple bins are used in the warehouse
entered (Inventory Warehouses).
If you indicated that you require on-line documents
(Inventory Setup) then you can only enter a single
bin.
For a positive receipt, you must specify the bin
location in which you are going to store the item.
If the bin already exists, the receipt quantity is
added to the existing quantity in the bin. If the
bin does not exist, it is automatically created
providing the option: Allow creation of bins when
processing inventory transactions (Inventory
Setup - Options tab) is selected. If this option is not
selected, you must either enter an existing bin or
use the Inventory Bin Maintenance program to
create a new bin.
Field
Values
Description
For a negative receipt, you can only select a single
bin. In addition, you must enter an existing bin as
a bin is not automatically created irrespective of
your selection at the option: Allow creation of
bins when processing inventory transactions
Multiple bins
This option enables you to enter multiple bins against the

receipt.
You can only select this option if the option: Multiple bins
in use (Inventory Warehouses) is selected against the
warehouse for which you are processing the transaction.
This option is not available when processing a negative receipt.
For a negative receipt, you can only select a single bin.
Note:
A maximum of 50 multiple bin locations can be

entered per transaction.
This option is not available if you are printing
inventory documents online (Inventory Setup).
The reason is that in online document only a single
line is printed, but if you enter multiple bins, a
document record is created for each bin entered.
If you therefore entered more than one bin, the
document printed would be incorrect.
Lot
This indicates the lot to which you want to assign the item.
You will be unable to receipt the item into an expired lot if the
activity: Allow receipts against expired lots is set to Denied
against your operator code (Operators - Security tab).
You can only access the Lot field if:
The item is defined as traceable (Stock Code Maintenance

- Tracking tab).
You have not selected the option: Automatic lot
numbering (Lot Traceability Setup).
You selected the option: Automatic lot numbering (Lot
Traceability Setup) and you are processing a negative
receipt.
Note:
If you selected the option: Lot number to be equal

to job number (Lot Traceability Setup) and job
numbers are defined as numeric (Company Setup Key Types tab), then the lot number you enter must
be numeric.
If you selected the option: Same lot to be used
on multiple stock codes (Lot Traceability
Setup), then you can reuse the same lot number for
different stock codes when processing a receipt.
Field
Values
Description
Concession
This indicates the concession number associated with the lot.

A concession number is typically required for traceable stock
items and indicates the customer's acceptance of an item that
deviates from the original specification, but which is still fit for
purpose.
Note:
If you need to record a concession number against
a lot, then ensure that you enter it during the receipt
process as you will be unable to capture it later.
You can select the preference: Give warning about
blank concession number entered to display a
warning message when you do not enter a concession
number.
This field is disabled when processing a negative receipt.
Lot expiry date
This indicates the expiry date of the lot.

This field is disabled when processing a negative receipt.
Serial numbers
This option enables you to capture manual and batch serial

numbers for any serialized items being received into stock
using the Serial Entry for Receipts program.
Note:
A maximum of 1000 serial numbers per receipt can be
receipted against a single stock code.
Use single ABC

type elements
Select this to include pre-production elements in the calculation

of costs. These costs are added to the receipt cost entered.
Only pre-production elements of cost defined with a calculation
method of single are applied.
Note:
You can select this option only if you have configured
your Bill of Material options to include activity based
costing.
Non-merchandise
details
Reference
This enables you to enter a journal reference that is associated

with the transaction and which is printed on the Inventory
Journal Report.
Notation
This enables you to enter a notation associated with the

transaction and which is printed on the Inventory Journal
Report.
These options enable you to distribute non-merchandise costs
related to an inventory receipt.
This option is only enabled if:
the option: Apply cost multiplier when processing

receipts is selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab)
Field
Values
Description
a cost multiplier greater then one is defined against the
warehouse for the stock item being receipted (Warehouses
for Stock Code)
the option: Apply cost multiplier is selected (Receipts
screen)
Apply cost
multiplier
Select Yes if you want to apply a cost multiplier to the

transaction. This enables you to indicate what portion of the
transaction value comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g.
freight, duty, tax, etc).
Note:
You can only select this option if you have

configured your Inventory Setup options to apply
a cost multiplier when processing receipts and if
a cost multiplier value greater than 1 has been
assigned to the stock item (Warehouses for Stock
Code).
the Last cost of the item only includes the cost
multiplier value if you selected the option: Include
non-merchandise costs in last cost (Inventory
Setup - General tab)
Refer to Cost Multiplier Calculations for additional

information.
Cost multiplier
This defaults to the cost multiplier defined against the

warehouse for the stock item being receipted (Warehouses for
Stock Code), but can be changed.
This indicates what portion of the transaction value of the stock
item comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g. freight, duty, tax,
etc.).
information.
Enter nonmerchandise cost
Select Yes if you want to enter the actual non-merchandise

value, rather than using the value in the cost multiplier field.
Non-merchandise
cost
You use this field to enter the actual non-merchandise amount

to apply to the transaction.
This field is only enabled when you selected Yes at the Enter
non-merchandise cost field.
Non-merchandise
distribution
Select this option to distribute the non-merchandise cost

to specific General Ledger codes (see Non-merchandise
Distribution).
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger account that will be credited with the
receipt.
G/L Details
Note:
Field
Values
Description
You can only access this field if Inventory is linked
to the General Ledger and you have configured your
Inventory options to request the ledger code for these
transactions (Ledger Code Options).
Ledger code
description
This indicates the description defined against the ledger code.
Multiple Bins
You use the Multiple Bins option to distribute the receipt quantity to multiple bins within the warehouse
selected.
You can only select the Multiple Bins option if:
the option: Multiple bins in use (Inventory Warehouses) is selected against the warehouse for which
you are processing the transaction
you have not selected to print receipt documents online (Inventory Setup - Documents tab)
you are not processing a negative receipt
you are not printing inventory documents online (Inventory Setup). The reason is that in online
document only a single line is printed, but if you enter multiple bins, a document record is created for
each bin entered. If you therefore entered more than one bin, the document printed would be incorrect.
Note:
A maximum of 50 multiple bin locations can be entered per transaction.
Field
Values
Description
Delete
Select this to remove the highlighted entry from the list of bins
allocated.
Save and Close

Close
Apply
Undistributed
Select this to apply the difference between the total receipt

quantity and the total of the quantities already allocated to bins
to the current bin.
Bin
You use this field to enter the bin location to which you want to
assign the item.
If the bin does not exist, it is automatically created providing
you are processing a positive receipt and the option: Allow
creation of bins when processing inventory transactions
(Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. If this option is
not selected, you must either enter an existing bin or use the
Inventory Bin Maintenance program to create a new bin. Bins
are not automatically created for negative receipts.
Quantity
You use this field to enter the quantity of the item you want to
assign to the bin location.
Adjustments
You use the Adjustments option to adjust the on hand quantity of an item either positively or negatively.
A positive adjustment quantity increases the item's on hand quantity, while a negative adjustment amount
decreases the item's on hand quantity. This option does not affect the unit cost of the item.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse

Transaction
details
Note:
Stock code
transaction.
Description

Long description

Quantity
This indicates the quantity of the stock item that you want to
adjust. You can specify a negative quantity (i.e. to indicate a
reversal of a previous receipt) providing there is enough on
hand stock available.
Specific Bucket).
Stocking uom
This indicates the stocking unit of measure for the stock item.
Revision

the stock item.
Release

the item.
Bin location
This indicates the bin location of the item for which you want to
adjust quantities.
If you are processing a positive adjustment and the bin does
not exist, it is automatically created providing the option: Allow
creation of bins when processing inventory transactions
Field
Values
Description
(Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. If this option is
not selected, you must either enter an existing bin or use the
Inventory Bin Maintenance program to create a new bin.
If you are processing a negative adjustment, you need to enter
an existing bin, as the bin cannot be automatically created.
Note:
Lot
You can only access the Bin location field if the

warehouse is configured to use multiple bins
(Inventory Warehouses).
This indicates the lot number of the item for which you want to
adjust quantities.
Note:
You can only access the Lot field if the stock item is
defined as a traceable item (Stock Code Maintenance
- Tracking tab).
If you selected the option: Same lot to be used on multiple
stock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then the same lot
number could be allocated to different stock codes.
Serial Numbers
This option enables you to capture manual and batch serial

numbers for any serialized items being received into stock
using the Serial Entry for Receipts program.
You can only adjust an existing serial number (i.e. you will
be unable to create a new serial to which to process an
adjustment).
You can only process a positive adjustment against a Manual
serialized item if a negative adjustment was previously
processed for the item and the item has not yet been sold.
Note:
A maximum of 1000 serial numbers per receipt can be
receipted against a single stock code.
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger account to which the adjustment

amount must be posted. If you process a negative adjustment
(reduce stock), then this account is debited. If you process
a positive adjustment (increase stock) then this account is
credited.
G/L Details
Note:
Field
Values
Description
Ledger code
description
Cost Changes
You use the Cost Changes option to change the cost of a stock item.
If you selected the setup option: FIFO valuation (Inventory Setup - General tab), then when you select
the Post option, you are prompted to update either the warehouse cost or a specific FIFO bucket with the
new cost (see FIFO Valuation).
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse

Transaction
details
Note:
Stock code
transaction.
Description

Long description

New cost
This indicates the new cost for the item based on either the unit
cost or the total cost of items held on file.
Cost uom
This indicates the costing unit of measure for the item.
Cost basis
Unit
Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable to

each unit of the item held on hand.
For example: If you enter a new cost of 50, then the unit cost of
each item on hand is set to 50.
Total
Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable to the

total number of items held on hand.
For example: If you enter a new cost of 50 then SYSPRO
divides this amount by the quantity of the item on hand and
updates the unit cost of the item accordingly. Rounding errors
are indicated on the Inventory Journal Report.
Field
Values
Description
Update last cost

with new cost
Select Yes this if you want to update the last cost with the new
cost entered.
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger account to which the adjustment

amount must be posted. If you reduce the cost value against
the stock item, then this account is debited. If you increase the
cost value against the stock item, then this account is credited.
G/L Details
Note:
Ledger code
description
FIFO Valuation
When you process a cost change for an item and you selected the setup option: FIFO valuation
(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the following is displayed:
Field
Values
Do you wish to
adjust the cost in
a specific bin?
Description
This option enables you to update the warehouse cost or the
FIFO bucket cost with the cost change.
Note:
If you want to update the cost in both the warehouse
and the FIFO bucket, then you need to process two
transactions and select Yes for one transaction and No
for the other (duplicate) transaction.
Yes
Select this to use the FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code

program to update the cost of a specific FIFO bucket.
Note:
The warehouse value is not affected by the value of
the cost change. No inventory journal is created. A
FIFO journal is created, but this does not affect your
inventory valuation or your General Ledger inventory
control accounts.
No
Select this if you want to update the warehouse cost and not
the FIFO bucket with the cost change. An inventory journal
is created for the transaction and your inventory valuation is
affected by the cost change.
Field
Values
Cancel
Description
You would select this option if, for example, you receipted
stock into a warehouse at the incorrect cost and now want to
adjust the cost of that stock in that warehouse.
Select this to return to the previous screen without adjusting
either the warehouse cost or a FIFO bucket.
Cost Modifications
You use the Cost Modifications option to adjust the inventory cost of a specific quantity of items (e.g.
to change the cost of a batch of items received into stock where the cost was incorrectly entered). The
system applies the total change of the entered items to the quantity on hand.
You would normally use this option when you wanted to adjust the cost of a specific number of items that
were received into stock.
Note:
You will be unable to process cost modifications if your company inventory costing method is set to
FIFO or Standard, or you selected FIFO valuation (Inventory Setup).
If you selected Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab) and you have not
selected FIFO valuation, then the Cost Modifications option is enabled, but you will be unable
to perform a cost modification against a warehouse with a costing method defined as Standard
(Inventory Warehouses).
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse

Transaction
details
Note:
Stock code
transaction.
Description

Long description

Quantity
This indicates the specific quantity of items for which you want
to modify the costs.
Stocking uom
This indicates the stocking unit of measure for the item.
Previous cost
This indicates the current unit cost of the item.
Cost uom
This indicates the cost unit of measure for the item.
New cost
This indicates the new cost you want to assign to the quantity
of the item specified.
Field
Values
Description
Cost basis
Unit
Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable to

each unit of the item held on hand.
For example: If you enter a new cost of 50, then the unit cost of
each item on hand is set to 50.
Total
Select to indicate that the entered new cost is applicable to the

total number of items held on hand.
For example: If you enter a new cost of 50 then SYSPRO
divides this amount by the quantity of the item on hand and
updates the unit cost of the item accordingly. Rounding errors
are indicated on the Inventory Journal Report.
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger account to which the total value of the
cost modification must be posted.
G/L Details
Note:
Ledger code
description
Transfers OUT
You use the Transfers OUT option to transfer a stock item out of a source warehouse.
Stock on hand is decreased at the source warehouse, while stock is placed in transit for the target
warehouse.
The item remains in transit until you record the transfer into the destination warehouse using the Transfers
IN option.
If you selected the option: Use full goods in transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup) then:
a transfer OUT from a warehouse creates goods in transit records indicating that stock was transferred
from the source warehouse to the target warehouse. These records include any lots, bins or serials
involved in the transfer.
each goods in transit transfer is identified by a reference number which is generated according to your
numbering method specified within the Inventory Setup options.
an operator preference allows you to print, on a single document, all goods in transit transfers OUT
per reference number. The document is printed when you select the option indicating the last transfer
before printing.
you can select to append lines to an existing GIT reference number provided that it is for the same run
of the program (see Goods in Transit Reference).
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
You use this field to indicate the warehouse out of which the
item must be transferred.
Transaction
details
If you have configured a default warehouse at operator level

(Operators) or at company level (Company Setup), then it
is displayed here automatically. The operator default takes
precedence.
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the item you want to transfer.
Description

Long description

code.
Quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity of the stock item you
want to transfer out of the selected warehouse.
The number of decimals for the quantity is defined against the
stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - General tab).
Stocking uom
This indicates the stocking unit of measure defined against the

stock code.
Revision
This enables you to indicate the specific revision of the item

that you want to transfer.
You will be unable to change the revision of a serialized ECC
item once you have allocated the serial numbers.
This field is only enabled for items defined as ECC controlled
(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).
Release
This enables you to indicate the specific release of the item

You will be unable to change the release of a serialized ECC
Bin location
You use this field to indicate the bin location of the item being
transferred.
You must indicate the bin location of the warehouse from
which stock is being transferred if that warehouse is defined as
having multiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).
Note:
You can only transfer items from one bin at a time.
For example: If you wanted to record the transfer of
100 items from bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123
Field
Values
Description
and 456 in warehouse BB, you would have to record
the transfer as two transactions.
Lot
You use this field to indicate the lot number of a traceable item
being transferred.
Note:
You will be unable to transfer traceable items using the
Out (no destination) option.
number could have been allocated to different stock codes.
To be able to allocate a lot that is on hold when processing a
GIT Transfer OUT transaction, the following must apply:
The activity: GIT transfer of lots on hold must be set to

allowed against your operator code.
You must select the preference: Give warning if lot is on
hold.
Note:
Lots on hold cannot be allocated if automatic
depletion is applied (Inventory Setup - Depletion
tab).
The hold status of a lot that is transferred between
warehouses when you process a GIT Transfer In
is retained (i.e. if the lot Transferred In is On Hold
in the source warehouse it is marked as On Hold in
the target warehouse).
New warehouse
You use this field to indicate the warehouse into which the item
must be transferred (i.e. the destination warehouse).
Serial numbers
Select this to use the Serial Entry for Receipts program to

define the serial number(s) of the item you are transferring.
This option is only enabled when serial tracking is required
for the item you are transferring (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking tab).
Reference
This is the journal reference that is associated with the

transaction and which is printed on theInventory Journal
Report.
If you are using the full goods in transit system and you set
Goods in transit reference to Manual (Inventory Setup Numbering tab), then you are prompted to enter a reference
when you save the transaction.
If the Goods in transit reference option is not set to Manual,
then the system generates the reference number.
Notation
You use this field to enter a journal notation that is associated

Journal Report.
Field
Values
Description
GIT Query
Select this to use the Browse on GIT References program to

view details held against goods in transit reference numbers.
This option is only available if you selected the setup option:
Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup
- General tab).
G/L Details
Ledger code
This indicates the General Ledger account that will be debited

with the transfer value for transfers out and credited with the
transfer value for transfers in.
This ledger account would typically be the clearing account for
stock transfers.
Note:
Ledger code
description
Goods in Transit Reference

If you selected the option: Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup - General tab),
then when you process more than one goods in transit Transfer OUT to the same warehouse during the
same run of the program, the following options are displayed when you select the Post option:
Field
Append to
existing reference
Values
Description
Select this if you want to add the details of the current transfer
Out transaction to an existing goods in transit transfer out
reference for the same warehouses.
If you do not select this option, then a new goods in transit
reference is created for the current transfer out transaction.
Goods in transit
reference
You use this field to enter a reference number for the goods in
transit document for the current transaction.
This field is only enabled if you selected to number goods in
transit references manually (Inventory Setup - Numbering
tab).
Last transfer
before printing
This option is only enabled when you select the Preference:

Print multiple lines per GIT document. The preference
enables you to print one transfers out document that contains
multiple lines processed against a GIT reference for the current
run of the program.
You select this option to indicate that the current transfer out
transaction is the last transaction you are processing for the
warehouse combination during the current run of the program
and that you want to generate the transfer document.
Field
Values
Print multiple
lines per GIT
document
Description
Select this if you want to be able to print one transfers out
document that contains multiple lines processed against a GIT
reference for the current run of the program. The document
is printed when you select the Last transfer before printing
option that is displayed when you select to post the transaction.
If you do not select this option, then a separate transfers out
document is printed for each transaction processed against a
GIT reference for the current run of the program.
Note:
You will be unable to access the Goods in Transit
transfer out fields if the full Goods in Transit transfers
facility is not installed (Inventory Setup).
This facility applies only if you have indicated that you
require Transfers out documents to be printed on-line
(Inventory Setup).
GIT Query
You use this option to view details held against goods in transit
reference numbers using the Browse on GIT References
program.
Post
Select this to process the transaction and optionally print an

inventory transfer document using the Inventory Document
Print program.
Cancel
Transfers IN
You use the Transfers IN option to record that items in transit are being received into the destination
warehouse.
The Transfers IN facility varies depending on whether or not you are using the full good in transit facility
(Inventory Setup - General tab).
The following fields are displayed in the Transfers IN pane if you have NOT selected the option: Use full
Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup - General tab):
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
Transaction
details

precedence.
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the item you want to transfer in.
The item must currently be in transit.
Description

Field
Values
Description
Long description

code.
Quantity
want to transfer into the selected warehouse.
Stocking uom

stock code.
Revision

Release

Bin location
transferred.
You must indicate the bin location of the warehouse into which
stock is being transferred if that warehouse is defined as
You will only be able to supply a bin that does not exist if the
option: Allow creation of bins when processing inventory
transactions is selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab) and
the transfer quantity is positive.
Note:
You can only transfer items from one bin at a time. For
example: If you wanted to record the transfer of 100
items from bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123 and
456 in warehouse BB, you would have to record the
transfer as two transactions.
Lot
being transferred.
Note:
warehouses when you process a Transfer IN is
Field
Values
Description
retained (i.e. if the lot transferred out is On Hold in
the source warehouse it is marked as On Hold in the
destination warehouse.
Serial numbers

define the serial number(s) of the item you are transferring in.
This option is only enabled when serial tracking is required for
the item you are transferring in (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking tab).
Reference
This indicates the journal reference that is associated with

the transaction and which is printed on theInventory Journal
Report.
Notation

Journal Report.
Ledger code

G/L details

stock transfers.
Note:
Ledger code
description
Transfers IN (GIT)
If you selected the option: Use full goods in transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup) then you need to
select the GIT transfers to process from a review of outstanding transfers.
The record of outstanding transfers controls the transfer in process.
You can select to receipt the total quantities transferred, or you can change the receipt quantity to effect a
partial receipt.
For a partial receipt, the transfer line can be completed by updating the source warehouse with the
difference in stock quantity and posting an adjustment transaction, or by writing off the stock and posting
an expense transaction.
If the target warehouse is defined as transfer supplied (Inventory Warehouses) then the system
establishes whether any lead time and/or cost multiplier exists between the two warehouses. Lead
time and/or cost multiplier entries defined against a specific stock code/warehouse combination take
precedence. If these entries are not defined at stock code level, then the program uses entries defined at
warehouse level (Warehouse Move Matrix). If entries are not located in the matrix then a lead time of zero
(0) and a cost multiplier of one (1) is used.
Each goods in transit transfer is identified by a reference number which is generated according to your
numbering method specified within the Inventory Setup options.
If you selected the Preference: Update originating order with GIT receipt details and the stock item was
linked to a sales order using the Back Order Review program, then the backorder quantity is moved to the
shipped quantity field on the sales order when the supply chain transfer is transferred in.
When you process a Transfer In for an SCT created in the Sales Order Entry program and you are using
the EC VAT system (Tax Options), an EC VAT arrivals recorded if the source warehouse belongs to an
EC VAT company (i.e. when an SCT transfer is transacted from an EC warehouse to a local warehouse
within the EU). Note that this only applies to SCTs and not to normal warehouse GITs in.
Normal Transfer journals are created.
Warehouse Transfers In
The following options enable you to select the transfer references you want to display in the review:
Field
Values
Description
Start Review
Select this to review the selected transactions.
Close
GIT transfer
selection
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse for which you want to review the
transfers in.
Notation

Report.
Inventory
Select this if you want to review warehouse transfers.
Supply chain
Select this if you want to review supply chain transfers.
GIT reference
selection
This enables you to indicate the goods in transit reference

numbers you want to include in the review.
Transfer type
selection
GIT references
Source
warehouses
Source warehouse This enables you to indicate the source warehouse(s) you want
selection
to include in the review.
Stock codes
Stock code
selection
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to

include in the review.
Creation date
selection
This enables you to indicate the creation date(s) you want to

Creation dates
Due dates
Due date selection This enables you to indicate the due date(s) you want to
Field
Values
Description
Product class
selection
This enables you to indicate the product class(es) you want to

Product class
Selection Filtering Options

The following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include:
Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
Select this to include all the items from the selection.
Range

include.
Single
Select this to indicate a single item from the selection to

include.
From
If you indicated that you want to include only a single item
from the selection, then you use this field to enter that item.
This applies where no field is displayed in which to specify the
single item.
To
Transfers in for Warehouse Listview

When you select the Start Review option, the transactions you selected are displayed in a listview.
Note:
GIT transactions which are flagged as being 'In process' are not included in the listview.
If you experienced a problem whilst processing a GIT transfer, you can run the Balance function of
the Inventory Period End program and select the option: Balance goods in transit to clear the 'in
process' flag. The GITs will then be displayed in the listview.
The following information is included in the listview:
Selected
You use this column to select/deselect the GIT references you want to include/exclude as part of the
transfer.
The number of lines you selected to process are displayed at the bottom of the listview.
You can typically use your right mouse button from anywhere in the listview pane to select one of the
following options:
Change Quantity
Select this to change the receipt quantity to effect a partial receipt (see Change Quantity for Line).
Select All Lines
Select this to mark all lines displayed as selected.
You select this option if you want to transfer all displayed lines into the selected warehouse.
Deselect All Lines
Select this to deselect all lines displayed.
You typically select this option if you previously selected all lines, but now only want to include a few
lines in the Transfers IN transaction.
Reference
This indicates the journal reference number associated with the transaction.
Stock code (see Inventory Query)
Description
This indicates the description for the stock code.

Type
This indicates whether the line is an inventory or a supply chain transfer.

Source
This indicates the warehouse from which the item is being transferred.
Qty transferred
This indicates the quantity which was transferred out of the source warehouse.
Qty received
This indicates the quantity transferred in to the destination warehouse to date.

Qty outstanding
This indicates the difference between the quantity transferred and the quantity received.
Uom
This indicates the unit of measure for the transfer.

Due date
Creation date
This indicates the date on which the transfer out was created.
Product class
This indicates the product class to use for the transaction.

Line
Extracted
Change Quantity for Line

The following options are displayed when you select the Change quantity option from the Line Details
pane or you use your mouse button to select the Change Quantity option from within the listview:
Field
Accept and Close
Values
Description
If you changed the quantity for a serialized or a lot traceable
item, then when you select the Post option from the main
Inventory Movements screen, the GIT Lots and Serials
Query/select program is displayed. The GIT Lots and Serials
Field
Values
Cancel
Description
Query/select program is not displayed when you receipt in the
full quantity.
Quantity change
details
Warehouse
This displays the warehouse into which the item must be

transferred.
Source warehouse This displays the warehouse from which the item was
transferred.
Stock code
This displays the stock code for which you are changing the
quantity.
Description

Long description

code (Stock Code Maintenance).
Quantity
outstanding
This displays the quantity still outstanding against the transfer

in (i.e. the quantity of the item which is currently in transit).
If you have not processed any transfers in, then this field
displays the quantity originally transferred out from the source
warehouse. If you have processed partial receipts for the item,
then this field displays the difference between the quantity
originally transferred out and the quantity already transferred
in.
Quantity
You use this field to enter the quantity you want to transfer in.
You will be unable to process an over receipt into the target
warehouse and adjust the quantity in the source warehouse if
this would cause a negative quantity in the source warehouse
and the option: Stock on hand allowed to go negative is set
to No for the source warehouse (Inventory Setup - General
tab).
If you have been denied access to the operator activity: GIT
under-receipt of GIT transfers (Operators - Security Activities), then you will be unable to mark the transaction
as complete if the receipt quantity is less than the quantity
outstanding.
Similarly, if you have been denied access to the operator
activity: GIT over-receipt of GIT transfers (Operators Security - Activities), then you will be unable to mark the
transaction as complete if the receipt quantity is more than the
quantity outstanding.
Bin location
You use this field to specify a single bin the location into which
the stock must be receipted in the target warehouse. This is
required if the warehouse into which you have transferred
Field
Values
Description
the item is defined as having multiple bins (Inventory
Warehouses).
You can only transfer items from one bin at a time. For
example: If you wanted to record the transfer of 100 items from
bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123 and 456 in warehouse
BB, you would have to record the transfer as two transactions.
If the Preference: Use default warehouse bin location
is selected, then the bin defined against the stock code's
warehouse is the default bin location, but this can be
overwritten. If you this preference is not selected, then you
must supply a bin location to be used by default. Again, this
can be overwritten when processing the transfer in transaction.
The bin you ultimately supply must exist unless the Preference:
Create bin location if not on file is selected.
Note:
Your selection at the option: Allow creation of bins
when processing inventory transactions (Inventory
Setup) does not apply in this case.
Notation
You use this field to enter a narration relevant to the quantity

change.
Transfer complete
You use this option to indicate whether or not the transfer is

complete.
If you receipt the total quantity outstanding then the transfer
is marked as complete. The in transit quantity for the target
warehouse is reduced and the on hand quantity is increased by
the receipt quantity.
If you have been denied access to the operator activities:
Inventory stock adjustments and Inventory expense issues
(Operators - Security tab - Activities), then you will be unable
to access this field.
Action back to
source
These options are only available if you process a partial receipt

and you select the option: Transfer complete (i.e. the quantity
transferred in to the destination warehouse is less than the
quantity transferred out of the source warehouse.
Because the transfer is marked as complete, you will not
transfer additional quantities in to the destination warehouse for
this transaction. These options enable you to specify what to
do with the balance of the quantity you have not transferred in
to the destination warehouse.
Source transaction
Adjustment
Select this if you want to transfer the balance of the quantity

not transferred in to the destination warehouse back in to the
source warehouse.
Expense issue
Select this if you want to expense the balance of the quantity.

Inventory is reduced by the balance of the quantity and its
value.
Field
Values
Description
You would typically expense the balance of the quantity if the
items were damaged in transit and the cost of returning them to
the source warehouse exceeds their value or if the items were
sent to the destination warehouse to be used as samples.
Ledger code
You use this field to enter the General Ledger code to which
the expense issue amount must be debited.
This field is only enabled if you selected the option: Expense
issue.
Ledger code
description
Transfer IN Cost Multiplier

The following options are displayed if a transfer cost multiplier is defined for transfers between the
warehouses you are processing (see Warehouse Move Matrix).
Field
Values
Processing
Description
The following fields are displayed for information purposes:
Reference
This indicates the GIT reference you are processing.
Line
This indicates the line number on the GIT you are processing.
Stock code
This indicates the stock code you are transferring in.
Source warehouse This indicates the warehouse that initiated the transfer.
Apply transfer
cost multiplier
Select this if you want to apply the transfer cost multiplier to the
selected line transfer.
Transfer cost
multiplier
This defaults to the transfer multiplier defined in the warehouse

move matrix for transfers between the selected source and
target warehouses (see Warehouse Move Matrix), but can be
changed.
Select Yes if you want to change the transfer cost calculated

by the system.
If you select this option then you can override the default cost
displayed in the Non-merchandise cost field.
Non-merchandise
cost
This indicates the transfer cost amount to be processed against

the item.
Non-merchandise costs are only included in the Last cost of
the item if you selected the option: Include non-merchandise
costs in last cost (Inventory Setup - General tab).
information.
Save
Select this to proceed to the non-merchandise distribution

screen.
Skip Item
Select this if you do not want to process any transfer amount

against this item.
Non-merchandise Distribution
This screen is displayed when you select to apply a transfer cost multiplier.
This enables you to process the transfer costs to the appropriate general ledger code(s).
You will be unable to process the transfer amount(s) to the selected ledger code(s) until the distribution
amount is zero.
Refer to Cost Multiplier Calculations for additional information.
Field
Value
Description
Delete
Select this to delete the

distribution line currently
highlighted in the listview.
Save and Close
Select this to save the information

and to return to the previous
screen.
Close
Select tis to return to the previous

screen.
Apply Undistributed
Select this to apply the

undistributed value to the
Amount field of the currently
highlighted line.
Reference
This indicates the GIT reference

against which the transfer cost
must be processed.
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger code to

which the transfer cost must be
processed.
This defaults to the ledger
code defined against the GIT
warehouse in the GIT warehouse
matrix (see GIT Receipt with
Apportionment), but can be
changed.
Amount
This field indicates the transfer

amount to be processed to this
ledger code.
Line Details
The details displayed in this pane relate to the Goods in Transit line currently highlighted in the listview.
The following information is included in this pane:
Header Details
GIT reference (see Browse on GIT References)

Date
Operator
This indicates the code of the SYSPRO operator who processed the Transfer OUT.
Transfer type
This indicates whether the line is an inventory warehouse or a supply chain transfer.
Source warehouse
This indicates the warehouse from which the item was transferred.
Target warehouse
This indicates the warehouse into which the item must be transferred.
Line Details
Document
Line completed
Stock code
Revision
Release
Due date
Product class
Stocking uom
Original quantity
This indicates the quantity of the item which was originally transferred out of the source warehouse.
Received quantity
This indicates the quantity of the item currently received into the destination warehouse.
Outstanding quantity
This indicates the quantity of the item currently still in transit (i.e. transferred out of the source
warehouse, but not yet transferred into the destination warehouse).
Original value
Received value
Outstanding value
Change quantity
Select this to change the receipt quantity to effect a partial receipt (see Change Quantity for Line).
Lot/Serials (see GIT Lots and Serials Query/select)
FIFO/LIFO buckets (see Inventory Query of LIFO/FIFO Bins)
Transactions (see GIT Transactions)
Immediate Transfers
You use the Immediate Transfers option to transfer items out of the source warehouse and into the
destination warehouse in one transaction.
You would use this option when the transportation time between the warehouses is short; the transfer has
already been completed; or if the destination warehouse does not have the facility to record the receipt of
the transfer.
During immediate transfers, the 'date of last cost change' is updated to the transaction date only if there is
a cost difference in the receiving warehouse.
Note:
If multiple bins is installed (Inventory Setup) and you are not using the full goods in transit
transfer facility (Inventory Setup) then you must use this option to transfer ECC items and/or
traceable items.
Immediate transfers ignore cost multipliers defined against the warehouse (see Warehouses for
Stock Code).
Field
Values
Description
Transaction
details
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
precedence.
Stock code
Description

Long description

code.
Quantity
Stocking uom

stock code.
Revision

Release

Bin location
You use this field to indicate the bin location in the source
warehouse from which the item is being transferred.
This is required if the source warehouse is defined as having
multiple bins (Inventory Warehouses).
Note:
You can only transfer items from one bin at a time.
For example: If you wanted to record the transfer of
100 items from bin ABC in warehouse AA, to bins 123
Field
Values
Description
and 456 in warehouse BB, you would have to record
the transfer as two transactions.
Lot
being transferred.
To be able to allocate a lot that is on hold when processing a
Transfer Out transaction, the following must apply:
The activity: GIT transfer of lots on hold must be set to

allowed against your operator code.
You must select the preference: Give warning if lot is on
hold.
Note:
Lots on hold cannot be allocated if automatic
depletion is applied (Inventory Setup - Depletion
tab).
warehouses when you process a GIT Transfer In
is retained (i.e. if the lot Transferred In is On Hold
in the source warehouse it is marked as On Hold in
the target warehouse).
New warehouse
New bin location
You use this field to indicate the bin into which the item must
be transferred in the destination warehouse.
This is required if the destination warehouse is defined as
Serial numbers

Reference
You use this field to enter a journal reference that is associated

with the transaction and which is printed on theInventory
Journal Report.
Notation

Journal Report.
Field
Values
Description
GIT Query

- General tab).
G/L Details
Ledger code

stock transfers.
Note:
Ledger code
description
No Destination Transfers
You use the No Destination Transfers option to transfer stock out of a source warehouse, without
specifying the destination warehouse details for the item(s) being transferred. This decreases the stock
held in the source warehouse.
This can be used to record stock shrinkage, breakage, theft, etc.
Note:
You cannot use this option for items defined as traceable (Stock Code Maintenance).
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
Transaction
details

precedence.
Stock code
Description

Long description

code.
Quantity
Field
Values
Description
Stocking uom

stock code.
Revision

Release

Bin location
transferred.
You must indicate the bin location of the warehouse from
which stock is being transferred if that warehouse is defined as
Serial numbers

Reference
You use this field to enter a journal reference that is associated

with the transaction and which is printed on theInventory
Journal Report.
Notation

Journal Report.
GIT Query

- General tab).
G/L Details
Field
Values
Description
Ledger code

stock transfers.
Note:
Ledger code
description
Physical Counts
You use the Physical Counts option to change the quantity of stock on hand to a counted amount.
The system replaces the quantity on hand with the new quantity counted. Any variance is recorded in the
movement file as a stock adjustment.
Note:
You will be unable to select Physical Counts if the following applies:
the selected warehouse is configured for multiple bins (Inventory Setup).
In that case, you must use the Stock Take System to record any physical changes.
the item is traceable (Stock Code Maintenance).
you selected Previous month 1 or Previous month 2 from the Change Period menu.
If you need to adjust the stock on hand position for a previous month, you must use the
Adjustments option.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse

Transaction
details
If you defined a default warehouse at operator or company

level, then it is displayed here automatically. The operator
default takes precedence.
Note:
Multiple bins cannot be in use in this warehouse
(Inventory Setup).
Stock code
transaction.
Description

Field
Values
Description
Long description

Quantity
This indicates the number of items on hand that you have

counted.
The system replaces the quantity on hand with the new
quantity entered. Any variance is recorded in the Inventory
Movement file as a stock adjustment.
Stocking uom
Bin location
You use this field to indicate the bin location in which the item
was counted.
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger account to which the stock count

adjustment value is posted. If the stock quantity is reduced
then this account is debited. If stock quantity is increased, then
this account is credited.
G/L Details
Note:
Ledger code
description
Bin Transfers
You use the Bin Transfers option to record the transfer of items from one bin to another.
Note:
You will be unable to process bin transfers if you have not indicated that multiple bins is required
(Inventory Setup).
The system does not view bin transfers as an inventory movement. Therefore, unless you
selected the option: Record movements for bin transfers (Inventory Setup - Options tab),
details are recorded only in the journal file (i.e. details are not recorded in the movement file).
You will be prevented from processing a bin transfer transaction when either the From bin or
To bin is on hold unless you selected the Preference: Warn if transferring bin on hold. In that
case, a warning message is displayed if a bin is on hold, but you can elect to continue with the
transfer.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse

Transaction
details
Note:
Stock code
transaction.
Description

Long description

Quantity
This indicates the quantity of items you want to transfer

between bins.
Note:
You will be unable to post a bin transfer transaction if
this will cause the bin quantity to go negative and stock
is not permitted to go negative (Inventory Setup).
Stocking uom
Revision

the stock item.
Release

the item.
From bin
This indicates the bin from which you want to transfer items.
This bin must already exist on file.
Lot
This indicates the lot number of the stock item that is being
transferred.
Field
Values
Description
Note:
The Lot field is displayed only if the item being
transferred is defined as a traceable item (Stock Code
Maintenance).
If you want to process a bin transfer when the same
lot number is stored in two separate bins, but the
expiry date against the lot number is different in each
bin, then you must select the preference: Warn if
transferring lots with different dates. If this option
is not selected, then you will be unable to process the
transfer.
To bin
This indicates the bin to which you want to transfer items.

If the bin does not exist, it is automatically created providing the
transactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. If
this option is not selected, you must either enter an existing bin
or use the Inventory Bin Maintenance program to create a
new bin.
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Expense Issues
You use the Expense Issues option to record the issue of items from inventory for miscellaneous
purposes.
The quantity entered is subtracted from the quantity on hand and costed at the current inventory cost.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse

Transaction
details
Note:
Stock code
transaction.
Description

Field
Values
Description
Long description

Quantity
This indicates the quantity of items that you want to issue as an

expense transaction.
If you enter a negative issue quantity (to reverse a previously
issued amount) the negative issue quantity is valued at the
current warehouse cost and not at the original issue cost.
Specific Bucket).
Stocking uom
Revision

the stock item.
Release

the item.
Bin location
This indicates the bin from which you want to issue the item as
an expense transaction.
For a positive issue, you must indicate the bin from which you
are going to issue the quantity of the item. You will only be able
to supply a bin that does not exist if the option: Allow creation
of bins when processing inventory transactions (Inventory
Setup - Options tab) is selected and stock is allowed to go
negative in the warehouse. This is not applicable to traceable,
ECC controlled or serialized items as these may never go
negative.
For a negative issue, if the bin does not exist, it is not
automatically created, so you must either enter an existing bin
new bin.
Lot
You use this field to enter the lot number from which the item
being issued as an expense transaction must be taken.
You can only access this field if the item is defined as traceable
Field
Values
Description
number can be used for different stock codes.
Serial Numbers
This option enables you to use the Serial Entry for Receipts
program to capture manual and batch serial numbers for any
serialized items being processed.
Note:
A maximum of 1000 serial numbers per transaction can
be processed against a single stock code.
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger account that will be debited with the
value of the expense issue. This ledger code would typically be
of an expense account type.
G/L Details
Note:
Ledger code
description
Adjust Specific Bucket

This screen is displayed when you process a negative expense issue, a negative receipt or a negative
adjustment (i.e. you enter a negative value in the Quantity field) and you are using FIFO or LIFO costing
at company level (Inventory Setup) or you are using FIFO costing in the specific warehouse in which the
transaction is being processed (Warehouse Maintenance).
Field
Values
Description
Yes
Select this to use the FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code

program to select the FIFO/LIFO bucket into which the quantity
must be reversed.
Do you wish
to adjust the
quantity in a
specific bucket?
This enables you to reverse the issue in the FIFO/LIFO bucket

from which it was issued.
No
Select this if you do not want to specify a specif FIFO/LIFO

bucket for the reversal.
Field
Values
Description
If you select this option, then the latest FIFO/LIFO bucket is
updated by default.
Cancel
Backflushing
You use the Backflushing option to record the manufacture of items without using a Work in Progress job.
The system uses the manufactured item's bill of materials (see Structures and Routings) to determine
the material and labor charges to be included.
Backflushing enables you, in one process, to issue the materials from inventory, apply standard labor
costs, and receive the finished good back into stock. This option is particularly relevant in situations
where the benefits derived from creating a job to track the activity on the job floor do not justify the cost of
processing all the data normally required for a job.
By default, components are issued from the warehouse to use defined against the Bill of Material structure
(Structures and Routings).
Before performing the Backflushing transactions, you need to indicate which warehouse you want to issue
the components from when backflushing and the level of backflushing you require.
Note:
Backflushing does not support Manufacturing Units of Measure. Backflushing always uses the
Field
Values
Description
Issue from
'warehouse to use'
Select this if you want the system to issue the components

from the warehouse to use assigned to the component (Stock
Warehouse for
Components
If you do not select this option, then you can use the field to
define the warehouse from which the component must be
issued when backflushing.
Note:
Warehouse to
issue from
If you select this option, then you must select

the option: Ignore warehouses defined on
structure record. If you select only the option:
Issue from 'warehouse to use' and a warehouse
is defined against the bill of materials structure for
the component (Structures and Routings), then
that warehouse is used.
If you have defined a floorstock warehouse (WIP
Setup) then this warehouse is used only if you
select this option.
You use this field to indicate the specific warehouse from which
you require components to be issued.
If you selected the option: Multiple binsin use against the
warehouse (Inventory Warehouses), then the components
are issued from the default bin location defined against the
specific warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code) you enter
Field
Values
Description
here. If insufficient stock is available in that bin, a message is
displayed. If stock is available in other bins, then you need to
perform a Bin Transfer to transfer the available stock to the
default bin defined against the warehouse to issue from.
Note:
If you enter a warehouse to issue from, then

you must select the option: Ignore warehouses
defined on structure record. If you do not select
the option: Ignore warehouses defined on
structure record and a warehouse is defined
against the bill of materials structure for the
component (Structures and Routings), then that
warehouse is used.
Ignore warehouses Select this if you do not want to issue the components from the
defined on
warehouse to use defined against the bill of materials structure
structure record
for the component (Structures and Routings).
If you do not select this option, then the components are issued
from the warehouse to use defined against the bill of materials
structure for the component (Structures and Routings),
irrespective of any other Warehouse for components options
you selected.
Backflush level
All
Select this to process all levels in the bill of material.
First
Select this to issue components only from the first level of the
bill of material, regardless of the number of levels in the bill.
Exclude comps/
ops against a
bought out part
Select this option to ignore components and operations held

against a bought out item.
Depending on your manufacturing process, you may require
bought out items to be made in, in which case you could assign
components and/or operations to the bought out item.
This option enables you to indicate whether you want to
process these components and operations at the time of
backflushing.
Note:
If you select this option and you have stock on hand
for the bought out parent item, it will not backflush the
components attached to the bought out item.
OK
Select this to accept the information you entered and to

proceed to the next screen to define the options you require for
the receipting of the finished item into stock.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any selections you made and return to the
previous screen.
Backflushing
When you post a backflushing transaction:
The cost is calculated using the materials and labor issued for the backflush.
For labor postings to be generated, the Work in Progress module must be installed. If the Work in
Progress module is not installed, then the value of operations (both subcontract and internal) is
accumulated, together with material costs to calculate the transaction value for the receipt of the parent
item. This is the value posted against the receipt journal against the parent item. However, because
WIP is not installed, no contra entry (issue journal) for labor can be posted for the operations as the
labor journal is not created and the work center efficiency files are not updated.
If the Work in Progress module is installed, then labor journals are created within the Work in Progress
system if any operations are held against the parent item being backflushed.
If you are using AB Costing, then when performing a multi-level backflush, the system only issues ABC
elements against the parent part or the final part not the components. Therefore the ABC elements
need to be associated with bringing the element into stock. The system assumes that the cost of the
component item has the relative ABC elements against it and does not recalculate it when the parent
part is brought back into stock. When a backflush is performed, the system looks at the component
requirements based on the sub-assembly requirements and then issues the required components
based on this. It does not first carry out the sub-assembly issue and then the parent part issue.
Therefore if there are any ABC Elements attached to the sub-assembly these will not be issued when
backflushing is carried out.
Inventory journals are created for each material issue.
If a by-product is included as a negative material allocation in a parent item, the by-product is receipted
into stock as a negative issue transaction.
Irrespective of your selection at the setup option: Stock on hand allowed to go negative (Inventory
Setup - General tab), items defined as Floorstock (Stock Code Maintenance) which are stocked
in the floorstock warehouse (WIP Setup) will always be allowed to go negative when backflushing,
regardless of your warehouse settings or costing method.
If you are using FIFO/LIFO costing and you enter a negative quantity, you are given the opportunity to
process the transaction into a specific FIFO/LIFO bucket (see Adjust Specific Bucket).
If you selected Backflush level - All and backflushing finds no stock for a sub-assembly, then it
explodes through to the sub-assembly's components to issue (i.e. the sub-assembly is treated as a
phantom part). That is, the component of the sub-assembly is issued during backflushing (all levels) if
there is no stock of the sub assembly.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in to which the parent part must

be receipted.
Transaction
details
Note:
Stock code
This indicates the finished part or sub-assembly that you want

to backflush (receive into stock).
Note:
You will be unable to backflush a stock code that

is configured with a Part category of: Kit part or
Planning bill (Stock Code Maintenance).
You can only backflush a bought out item if you
enabled the option: Allow backflush of bought out
items (Inventory Setup).
Field
Values
Description
You cannot backflush a stock item which is on Full hold and
you are warned if on Partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance).
The latter gives you the option to stop or continue with the
transaction.
Description

Long description

Quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity of the item you want
to backflush.
If the system encounters sufficient quantity of the components
to manufacture the parent item, then it reduces stock by the
required amount according to the bill of material structure.
Similarly, if stock on hand is allowed to go negative in the
warehouse(s) from which the backflush is processed, the
components are issued and stock is reduced by the required
amount according to the bill of material structure.
If there is an insufficient quantity of an item and stock on hand
is not allowed to go negative in the warehouse(s) from which
the backflush is processed, then the backflushing transaction
cannot be completed.
If there is insufficient quantity available of a sub-assembled
item to manufacture the item and you selected to backflush
All levels of the bill, then the system issues the quantity that
is available and continues with the next level of the bill of
material. It issues enough of the components of the subassembled item to make up the required quantity of the subassembled item. If you selected to backflush only the First
level of the bill of materials and insufficient stock exists for the
backflush, then the transaction cannot be completed, unless
stock on hand is allowed to go negative (the remainder of the
levels is not checked).
Specific Bucket).
Stocking uom
Revision

the stock item.
Release

the item.
Field
Values
Description
Current cost
This field displays the current cost per unit of the item.
This field cannot be changed when backflushing as it is
automatically calculated using the cost of material and labor
issued for the backflush.
Cost uom
This indicates the costing unit of measure for the item.
Bin location
You use this field to indicate the bin location into which the
parent item must be received.
If the bin does not exist, it is automatically created providing the
transactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected. If
this option is not selected, you must either enter an existing bin
new bin.
If the default bin against a component is not defined, then the
bin is assumed to be the same as the warehouse code.
If multiple bins are not in use for the warehouse from which
the backflush is being processed, then this field defaults to the
default bin for the warehouse and cannot be changed.
When processing a negative backflush quantity, the bin
location must exist against the parent item (i.e. the item must
have been issued against the parent item for that specific bin
location).
Lot
You use this field to enter the lot number from which the item
must be backflushed.
You can only access the Lot field if:
The item is defined as traceable (Stock Code Maintenance

- Tracking tab).
You have not selected the option: Automatic lot
numbering (Lot Traceability Setup).
You are processing a negative backflushing transaction.

number can be used for different stock codes.
Concession
A concession is usually required if you selected a traceable

stock item. If you do not enter a concession in association with
a specific lot number, the system prompts you to either enter a
concession number or continue without one.
Note:
If you need to record a concession number against
a lot, then ensure that you enter it during the
Field
Values
Description
backflushing process as you will be unable to capture it
later.
You can select the preference: Give warning about
blank concession number entered to display a
warning message when you do not enter a concession
number.
Lot expiry date
This indicates the expiry date of the lot.
Serial Numbers
Select this to capture manual and batch serial numbers for

any serialized items being received into stock using the Serial
Entry for Receipts program.
Use single ABC

type elements
Select this to include pre-production elements in the calculation

of costs. These costs are added to the receipt cost entered.
Only pre-production elements of cost defined with a calculation
method of single are applied.
Note:
You can only select this option if you enabled the
option: Activity based costing required (Bill of
Materials Setup).
Reference

Journal Report.
Notation

Report.
Apply cost
multiplier
Select Yes if you want to apply a cost multiplier to the

transaction. This enables you to indicate what portion of the
transaction value comprises non-merchandise costs (e.g.
Freight, duty, tax, etc). See Backflushing Cost Multiplier.
Non-merchandise
details
Note:
You can only select this option if you have configured
your Inventory Setup options to apply a cost multiplier
when processing receipts and if a cost multiplier value
greater than 1 has been assigned to the stock item
(Warehouses for Stock Code).
G/L Details
Ledger code
You use this field to indicate the ledger account to which the
backflushing transaction must be posted.
Note:
Inventory options (Ledger Code Options) to request
the ledger code backflushing for transactions.
Field
Values
Description
Ledger code
description
Backflushing Options
This screen is displayed when you select the Post option.
Field
Values
Options
Description
You use these options to indicate whether to add the value of
set-up time, startup time or teardown time to the backflushing
value. This is useful if you backflush an item several times in a
day, but you only require these times to be calculated once.
Note:
Irrespective of whether or not you select to include

the set-up, startup and teardown times when
backflushing, the run time and the fixed and variable
overheads are posted to the General Ledger.
The ledger accounts are determined by the General
Ledger integration codes defined against the work
centers linked to the operation(s).
Fixed and variable overheads are calculated using
the run time and the times selected at this option.
Fixed overheads are calculated as:
Fixed rate x (Run time + Set-up time + Startup time
+ Teardown time).
Therefore, if you do not select any of these options,
then the Fixed overheads are calculated as: Fixed
rate x (Run time).
Similarly, if you select only set-up time, then the
Fixed overheads are calculated as: Fixed rate x
(Run time + Set-up time).
The variable overheads are calculated in the same

manner, but using the variable overhead rate.
A labor journal is always created, even if the
calculated times are all zero.
Include set-up time Select this to add the value of set-up time to your backflushing
value.
Job number
Include startup
time
Select this to add the value of startup time to your backflushing

value.
Include teardown
time
Select this to add the value of teardown time to your

backflushing value.
If the stock item you are backflushing is defined as traceable
(Stock Code Maintenance), then you must make an entry in
this field. The entry made is not validated as it is a user defined
job reference field.
An entry can only be made here if the item being backflushed
is defined as traceable.
Field
Values
Alternate routing
required
Description
Select this to indicate a different routing to be used for the
issue of materials and operations.
Note:
You can only access this field if you enabled the option:
Alternate routings required (Bill of Materials Setup).
OK
Select this to continue processing.

If labor operations are included in the bill of material structure
of the sub-assembly (and the Work in Progress module is
installed) then the cost of these operations is included in the
cost of the backflushed item.
If the Work in Progress module is not installed then labor
journals are not created and work center efficiency files are not
updated.
If Work in Progress is installed then labor journals are created if
any operations are held against the part being backflushed, or
if a shortage of a sub-assembly (against which operations are
held) occurs.
A labor journal is always created, even if the calculated times
are all zero.
Cancel
Backflushing Cost Multiplier

The Cost Multiplier screen is displayed if a cost multiplier value greater than 1 is assigned to the stock item
and you selected Yes at the option: Apply cost multiplier field.
Field
Values
Description
Cost multiplier
This defaults to the cost multiplier value defined against the

item but can be changed.
Select this if you want to change the cost multiplier value

calculated by the system.
If you select this option then you can override the default value
displayed in the Non-merchandise cost field.
Non-merchandise
cost
You use this field to enter the non-merchandise value you want
to apply to the transaction.
You can only enter a value in this field if you selected the
option: Enter non-merchandise cost.
Refer to Non-merchandise Distribution.
OK
Select this to apply the calculated or entered non-merchandise

value to the transaction.
Cancel
Select this to exit the Cost Multiplier screen without applying

the non-merchandise value.
Danger:
Field
Values
Description
If you select this option, then the following message is
displayed:
Inventory journals have already been posted. If
you cancel now, non-merchandise distribution
will not be posted. Do you still wish to cancel this
transaction?
If you select Yes, (i.e. you cancel out of the Cost
Multiplier screen) then the cost multiplier is applied
to the cost of the item in inventory, but the nonmerchandise entry for the cost multiplier value is
not posted to the General Ledger. This results in a
difference between the item's value in the Inventory
module and its value in the Inventory control account in
the General Ledger. This difference must be manually
journalized using the GL Journal Entry program.
Stock Information
This window indicates stock information that is displayed while you enter transaction details for an item.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the transaction is being processed.

Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item being processed.

Stocking uom
This indicates the stocking unit of measure of the stock item.

Stock on hand
Quantity physically in the warehouse.

Stock available
Quantity on hand less allocated to sales orders.
Allocated to sales orders is quantity on back order + sales order to ship quantity. These quantities
exclude unallocated Scheduled Order back order and ship quantities.
Stock free
Quantity on hand - sales order ship quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated Scheduled Order ship
quantities.
In transit
Outstanding non-immediate warehouse transfers.

Allocated
Quantity on back order + sales order ship quantity + outstanding materials to be issued to jobs (this
includes allocations to both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs).
On order
Quantity of outstanding purchase orders and jobs.

On back order
Sales order back order quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated Scheduled Order back order
quantities.
In inspection
Quantity of purchased items awaiting inspection (i.e. receipted into inspection but not receipted into
stock).
Cost uom
This indicates the cost unit of measure of the stock item.

Current cost
This indicates the current cost of the stock item.
Recap Totals
The totals displayed in this pane are updated each time you post a transaction.
Session details
Transaction date
This indicates the date on which the transactions were posted.
Posting period
This indicates the inventory period in which the transactions were posted.
Hash quantity
This indicates the total number of items processed in all transactions during the current run of the
program, regardless of the unit of measure (e.g. if 12 units and 13 boxes were processed, then the
value shown here would be 25.
Receipts
Receipts posted
This indicates the number of receipt transactions posted.

Receipts value
This indicates the total value of receipt transactions posted.

Adjustments
Adjustments posted
This indicates the number of adjustment transactions posted.

Adjustments value
This indicates the total value of adjustment transactions posted.

Expense issues
Issues posted
This indicates the number of expense issue transactions posted.

Issues value
This indicates the total value of expense issue transactions posted.

Transfers IN
Transfers in posted
This indicates the number of transfers in transactions posted.

Transfers in value
This indicates the total value of transfers in transactions posted.

Transfers OUT
Transfers out posted
This indicates the number of transfers out transactions posted.

Transfers out value
This indicates the total value of transfers out transactions posted.

Cost changes
Cost changes posted
This indicates the number of cost change transactions posted.

Cost changes value
This indicates the total value of cost change transactions posted.

Physical counts
Physical counts posted
This indicates the number of physical count transactions posted.

Physical counts value
This indicates the total value of physical count transactions posted.

Cost modifications
Cost modifications posted
This indicates the number of cost modification transactions posted.

Cost modifications value
This indicates the total value of cost modification transactions posted.
List of Journals
This listview displays journal header information for the transactions posted during the current run of the
program.
Journal
This indicates the journal number created for the transaction.

Journal date
This indicates the date on which the transaction was processed.

Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the transaction was processed.

Operator
This indicates the operator who processed the transaction for the journal.
Journal Entries
This listview displays the journal lines for the journal selected in the list of Journals pane.
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item used for the transaction.
Transaction
This indicates the transaction type.

Quantity
This indicates the transaction quantity.

Value
This indicates the transaction value.

Inventory Transaction Types
The table lists the transaction types which occur in the Inventory module.
These transaction types are stored in the Inventory Movement files/tables and are printed on the Inventory
Journal and Distribution Reports.
REC
R - Receipt
ADJ
A - Adjustment
ISS
I - Issue
PHY
P - Physical count
CHG
C - Change
MOD
M - Modification
TRF
T - Transfer
REC
G - GRN (Goods Received Note)
REC
g - Cost multiplier non-merchandise variance
REC
c - GRN cost multiplier entry
BFL
B - Backflushing variance
TOT
t - TOTAL variance entry
VAR
s - Variance caused by standard cost transfer
VAR
v - Variance caused by standard cost transfer
VAR
a - Variance caused by average cost calculation
ABC
X - ABC journal record
ABC
x - ABC variance journal
VAR
w - WIP automatic write-off variance
GTR
z - GIT cost multiplier
GTR
z - GIT cost multiplier non-merchandise variance
BIN
b - Bin transfer for multiple bins (journal and

movement only)
INS
W - WIP inspection
SCR
S - WIP inspection scrap
REW
O - WIP inspection rework
DSP
d - Dispatch note issue
DSP
D - Dispatch note reversal
VAR
f - FIFO rounding
Inventory Journal Status

Following are the possible statuses for inventory journals:
Status 0 - Not printed

Status 1 - Journal printed
* - Journal in process
Cost Multiplier Calculations

When you select the option: Include non-merchandise costs in last cost (Inventory Setup - Options
tab), then you can add the calculated cost multiplier value to the receipt cost of an item when using the
Inventory Movements program to process a Receipt or a GIT Transfer In.
If you are using the full goods in transit facility (GIT Transfers) and you want to apply a cost multiplier
for items which are transfer supplied, then you must also select the option: Apply cost multiplier when
processing receipts (Inventory Setup - Options tab). This enables you to specify the portion of the
transaction value that comprises non-merchandise costs and to store these values in nominated ledger
accounts.
The cost multiplier is defined against a stock item using the Warehouses for Stock Code program.
The values calculated using a cost multiplier depend on the costing method you defined for Inventory
Using a costing method other than Standard:

Total Transaction value = Quantity x New Cost x Cost Multiplier
Total Merchandise Value = Quantity x New Cost
Total Non-merchandise value = Transaction Value - Merchandise Value

Using Standard Costing:
Total Transaction Value = Quantity x Standard cost
Total Merchandise Value = (Quantity x Standard Cost) / Cost Multiplier
Total Non-merchandise value = Transaction Value - Merchandise Value
Actual Cost Allocation

You use the Actual Cost Allocation program to indicate the cost buckets from which you want to issue
lots and/or serials when you are using Actual costing (Inventory Setup - General tab).
This program applies when more than one FIFO bucket is associated with a lot or serialized item.
If you selected to auto deplete cost buckets (Inventory Setup - General tab), then system applies buckets
in FIFO sequence. However, you may still be required to indicate the bucket to use for certain transactions
(e.g. a negative backflush).
When only one FIFO bucket is associated with a lot or serialized item, that bucket is automatically used
and the Actual Cost Allocation program is not loaded.
The following types of transactions cause this program to be loaded:
positive and negative issues

positive and negative adjustments
negative receipts
positive dispatch notes
reducing dispatch notes
Actual Cost Allocation

Field
Values
Description
Delete
Select this to delete the allocation line currently highlighted in

the Actual Costing Allocation Details listview.
Save and Close
Select this to save the allocations in the listview and to exit the
program.
Field
Values
Description
The full quantity issued for the lot/serial is validated against
the actual cost buckets allocated. If the correct quantity has
been allocated, then the actual cost buckets are updated. The
quantity on hand is adjusted according to the transaction and
the last issue date is updated for issues.
When processing a negative issue/dispatch note to a specific
bucket, the receipt back into stock cannot exceed the original
quantity received.
Close
Select this to exit the program without saving any details.

A warning message is displayed indicating that the allocation
of lot/serial buckets is incomplete. If you select to ignore the
message then any actual cost buckets already updated are
reversed.
Stock Information
Stock code
This indicates the code of the item to be issued.
Description
This displays the description of the stock code.
Long description
This displays the long description of the stock code.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse from which the item must be

issued.
Rev/Rel
This indicates the revision/release of the item if it is ECC

Lot
This indicates the lot from which the item will be issued. You
can select this to display the Traceability Query program.
Bin
This indicates the bin from which the item will be issued.
Actual Costing Allocation Details

You use this editable listview to indicate thee actual cost buckets from which you want to issue lots and/
serials.
Field
Actual cost
bucket
Values
Description
You use this field to indicate the cost bucket from which you
want to issue the item. You can select the Browse icon to
display the FIFO buckets available for the selected lot/serial
(see FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code).
If you are processing a negative receipt, then the bucket you
select here must be the bucket into which the original receipt
was processed. Similarly, when reversing a positive allocation
in Job Issues, only the actual cost bucket(s) used in the
positive issue can be reversed.
Date received
This indicates the date on which the item was received into the
cost bucket.
Quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity you want to issue
from the selected cost bucket.
Field
Values
Unit cost
Description
This indicates the unit cost of the item in the selected cost
bucket. This is the actual unit cost at which the items will be
issued.
Serial Entry for Receipts

You use the Serial Entry for Receipts program to assign serial numbers to stock items that are defined as
serialized (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).
Manual serial numbers or batch serial numbers are captured, depending on the method of serial tracking
defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).
The Serial Numbers function is available either at the time of processing the receipt of a serialized item
using the Inventory Movements program, or when capturing an order for a serialized item. This depends
on your selection at the Record serial numbers field against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking).
Serial Number Capture

Field
Values
Description
Accept and Close
Select this to accept the serial numbers you entered, allocate

them to the items and exit the program.
Cancel
Manual Serials Capture

Field
Values
Description
New
Select this to add a new serial number.
Add
Select this to add the serial number you entered to the list of
serial numbers to allocate to the items.
Note:
If the serial number already exists against another
stock code, an error message is displayed unless the
option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes
is selected(Inventory Setup - Options tab).
Delete
Select this to remove the serial number currently highlighted

in the List of Manual Serials listview from the list of serial
numbers to allocate.
Range
Select this to allocate a range of serial numbers to receipt.

This function only applies if the serial tracking method for
the stock item is set to Manual (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking).
Remaining serials
This indicates the number of items to which serial numbers

have not yet been allocated.
Remaining serials
in inspection
This indicates the number of items in inspection to which serial

numbers have not yet been allocated.
Field
Serial number
Values
Description
You use this field to indicate the serial number you want to
assign to the transaction.
You cannot use the same serial number in two different
warehouses for a manual serial item, irrespective of the options
governing serial tracking.
If you are entering a series of serial numbers and you want
to clear this field after each entry, then you must select the
preference: Clear serial number field after entry (Inventory
Movements - Preferences). This clears the field after you
select the Add function. If this preference is not selected, then
the previous serial number you entered remains displayed in
the Serial number field.
Capture into
inspection
Select this if you want to capture all or part of the receipt

quantity into inspection.
This option is only enabled for items requiring inspection
(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking) and if you are
receipting all or part of the item into inspection (Job Receipts).
Expiry date
You use this field to indicate the expiry date you want to
allocate to the serial number you entered. If you use the Enter
Range function, then the expiry date you supply here is applied
to each of the serials in the range.
The expiry date is checked when any of these serial numbers
is sold or issued and you will be prevented from allocating any
serial number that has expired.
Location
You use this field to indicate where the serialized items must
be stored.
If you use the Enter Range function, then the location you
supply here is applied to each of the serials in the range.
If multiple bins are installed in a warehouse (Inventory
Warehouses) and only a single bin location is entered against
the transaction, then this becomes the default location for the
serial number.
If a stock item is either traceable or requires inspection, then
when you use the Purchase Order Receipts or Shipment
Receipt (Legacy) program to accept the item into inspection,
then this field is disabled. You enter the required location when
you receipt the item into stock from inspection.
Serial Range Entry

You use the Range function to allocate a range of serial numbers to receipt.
If you enabled Manual serial number tracking (Inventory Setup - Numbering tab), then you can create
sequential ranges of manual serial numbers either at company or stock code level. These serial numbers
are created by combining the values in the Prefix and Next suffix fields defined either at company or stock
code level.
Field
Values
Description
Quantity to
receive
This indicates the number of items for which you want to

generate serial numbers.
Prefix
This indicates the character(s) that must be attached to the

beginning of the serial number.
The prefix can only be entered if you defined your serial
numbers to be alphanumeric (Company Setup - Key Types
tab).
Although you can enter 15 characters at the prefix field, the
total number of characters for the serial number cannot exceed
20.
If you enabled Manual serial number tracking (Inventory
Setup - Numbering tab), then this field defaults to the value
defined in the Prefix field against either the Company or the
stock code, but can be changed.
Suffix
This indicates the character(s) that must be attached to the end

of the serial number.
The suffix can only be entered if you defined your serial
numbers to be alphanumeric (Company Setup - Key Types
tab).
The number of numeric characters entered for the suffix must
allow for the total number of serial numbers specified at the
Quantity to receive field.
For example: You will be unable to enter a prefix of ABC; a
suffix of 1 and a quantity to receive of 11, since only 10 serial
numbers could be added.
Although you can enter 15 characters at the suffix field, the
total number of characters for the prefix and suffix fields
combined cannot exceed 20.
If you enabled Manual serial number tracking (Inventory
Setup - Numbering tab), then this field defaults to the value
defined in the Next suffix field against either the Company or
the stock code, but can be changed.
The system automatically increments the Next suffix for
each new serial number created in the range, providing the
number was created using the prefix defined in the Prefix field
(Inventory Setup or Stock Code Maintenance).
Starting serial
number
This indicates the first number that must be used for this range
of serial numbers.
This field can only be accessed if you are using numeric serial
numbers (Company Setup - Key Types tab).
OK

Cancel
Select this to return to the previous screen without saving any

information you entered.
List of Manual Serials

Details of the serial numbers you allocated to the items are displayed in this listview. The details change
each time you select the Add or Delete function from the Manual Serials Capture pane.
Serial number
Expiry date
Location
Inspection
Count
This is displayed at the bottom of the listview and indicates the number of serials currently displayed in
the listview.
Batch Serials Capture

Field
Values
Description
New
Select this to enter a new serial number.
Add
Select this to add the serial number you entered to the list of
serial numbers to allocate to the items.
Note:
A warning is displayed if the serial number supplied
already exists in the current warehouse but you can
continue.
If the serial number only currently exists in another
warehouse, then an error message is displayed unless
the option: Multiple batch serial receipts allowed is
selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab).
If the serial number already exists against another stock
code, then an error message is displayed unless the option:
Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes is selected
Delete
Select this to remove the serial number currently highlighted in

the List of Batch Serials listview from the list of serial numbers
allocated.
Remaining
quantity
This indicates the number of items to which serial numbers

have not yet been allocated.
Remaining
quantity in
inspection
This indicates the quantity of serial numbers still in inspection.
Serial number
This indicates the serial number that must be allocated to the

batch quantity of the items you are receipting.
Quantity
This indicates the quantity of items to which you want to

allocate the serial number entered in the previous field.
You can distribute quantities over several serial numbers until
the Remaining batch quantity reaches zero.
Field
Values
Capture quantity
into inspection
Description
Select this if you want to capture all or part of the receipt
quantity into inspection.
This option is only enabled for items requiring inspection
(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking) and if you are
receipting all or part of the item into inspection.
Quantity in
inspection
You use this field to indicate the quantity of the item which you
want to receipt into inspection.
This field is only enabled when you select the Capture quantity
into inspection option.
This defaults to the quantity entered in the Inspection quantity
field (Job Receipts), but can be changed.
Expiry date
This indicates the expiry date you want to allocate to the serial
number entered.
The expiry date is checked when any of these serial numbers
is sold or issued and you will be prevented from allocating any
serial number that has expired.
Location
You use this field to indicate where the serialized items must
be stored.
If multiple bins are installed in a warehouse (Inventory
Warehouses) and only a single bin location is entered against
the transaction, then this becomes the default location for the
serial number.
If a stock item is either traceable or requires inspection, then
when you use the Purchase Order Receipts or Shipment
Receipt (Legacy) program to accept the item into inspection,
then this field is disabled. You enter the required location when
you receipt the item into stock from inspection.
List of Batch Serials

Details of the serial numbers you allocated to the items are displayed in this listview. The details change
each time you select the Add or Delete function from the Batch Serials Capture pane.
Serial number
Quantity
Expiry date
Location
Inspection
Effect of Serial Numbers on Transactions

The following tables indicate how transactions are affected when using manual and batch serial numbers.
Transactions affected by Manual serial numbers

Receipts
If you have not selected the setup option:

Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes
(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then, for a positive
receipt, the serial number must not exist on file. You
must enter whole numbers.
For a negative receipt, the serial number must exist
in the relevant warehouse so that it can be credited
with the stock (i.e. to credit a serial number that
has already been sold, it must be processed as a
negative receipt).
Adjustments

(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then, for a positive
adjustment to increase the quantity of stock on
hand, the serial number must not already exist (i.e.
a unique serial number must be entered ).
Positive adjustments cannot be made to manually
serialised items, as by default, each manual serial
item can only be for a quantity of one.
For a negative adjustment to reduce the quantity of
stock on hand, the serial number must already exist
in the serial number file. Negative adjustments can
be made to both batch and manual serial numbers.
Backflushing
For a positive backflush of a serialized item, you

must enter the serial numbers for each of the
backflushed items. If one of the components of
a backflushed item is serialized then you must
indicate the quantity to issue from a batch and the
batch serial number.
The serial number of the component must exist in
the serial number file.
If the stock on hand quantity will become negative,
you can either abort or continue the backflush.
For a negative backflush of a serialized item, you
must enter the serial numbers of the backflushed
item and the serial numbers of the components.
The serial number of the backflushed items must
exist in the serial tracking file. The serial numbers of
the components must exist with a zero quantity on
hand.
Transfers
For a transfer out the serial number must exist and

must be on hand in the warehouse from which it is
being transferred.
For a transfer in, the serial number must exist and
be in transit.
Physical Count
This function does not update serial numbers. To

update serial numbers you must use the Serial
Number Maintenance program.
Issues
For a positive issue to decrease the quantity of

stock on hand, the serial number must already exist
in the serial number file.
(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then, for a
negative issue to increase the quantity of stock on
hand, the serial number cannot already exist in the
serial number file.
Transactions affected by Batch serial numbers

Receipts
For a positive receipt, where the batch number

exists, the quantity received is added to the total
batch quantity available against that number.
For a negative receipt the serial number must exist
in the relevant warehouse so that it can be credited
with the stock.
Adjustments
For a positive or negative adjustment you can only

adjust one batch serial number at a time, and the
batch serial number must exist in the warehouse
that you are adjusting.
Backflushing
For a positive backflush of a serialized item, you

must enter the serial numbers for each of the
backflushed items. If one of the components of
a backflushed item is serialized then you must
indicate the quantity to issue from a batch and
the batch serial number. The serial number of the
component must exist in the serial number file. If
the stock on hand quantity will become negative,
you can either abort or continue the backflush.
For a negative backflush of a serialized item, you
must enter the serial numbers of the backflushed
item and the serial numbers of the components.
The serial number of the backflushed item and the
components must exist in the serial number file.
Transfers
For a transfer out you can only transfer items from

one batch serial number at a time. The batch serial
number must exist in the warehouse from which
you are transferring items.
For a transfer in you can only transfer items into
one batch at a time. The batch number does not
have to exist. If the batch number exists in the
destination warehouse, the items are added to
the existing quantity. You do not have to transfer
an item in with the same batch number that you
transferred it out.
Physical Count
The Physical Count function does not update serial

numbers. To update serial numbers you must use
the Serial Number Maintenance program.
Issues
For a positive or negative issue you can only issue

one batch serial number at a time, and the batch
serial number must exist in the warehouse from
which you are issuing items.
Inventory Document Print

You use the Inventory Document Print program to produce supporting documentation in batch mode for
inventory transactions processed using the Inventory Movements program and purchase order receipts
processed using the Purchase Order Receipts program.
These documents can either accompany the inventory items in transit or be retained for your own records.
Note:
You will be unable to print documents if you have not defined a document format for the type of
document you want to print. The Define Format function enables you to take on these formats.
You will be unable to print documents for any transaction type against which you have indicated
that no document is required (Inventory Setup - Documents tab).
In addition, if you printed the document on-line (Inventory Movements) then this program will
only allow you to reprint that document.
Printed inventory documents are deleted when you run the Purge function of the Inventory
Period End program, if they have been held on file for at least the number of months entered at
the Number of months to retain - Documents field.
Inventory Document Print

Field
Print
Values
Description
Select this to print the inventory document selected.
If you enabled the option: Generate next document number
(Inventory Document Format) then the next document
number is generated automatically when you print the
document for the first time (i.e. Not a reprint). If this option
is not enabled, then no document number is assigned. For
Purchase order receipts, the document number is the GRN
number, or the purchase order number if the GRN system is
not installed.
If you enabled the option: New page per transaction (Inventory
Document Format) then each transaction is treated as a new
document. If this option is not selected, then a new page is
generated as follows:
for stock receipts and issues, a new page is generated upon

change of the warehouse.
for transfers out, a new page is generated upon change of
the destination warehouse.
for purchase order receipts, a new page is generated upon
change of the GRN number or the purchase order number.
when printing purchase order receipt documents online, a new document is printed for each line receipted in,
Field
Values
Description
regardless of your selection at the option: New page per
transaction (Inventory Document Format).
the transaction type for stock receipts will include inspection
items if this has been configured (Inventory Setup).
If you have not enabled Windows printing and you selected to
Preview documents before printing them (see Printing), then
you can select the E-mail function from the Preview screen
(see Send Email).
Alignment
Select this to print the selected document type using test

characters. This enables you to check whether the stationery
is correctly aligned on your printer before printing the actual
document.
Printer
Preferences
Select this to optionally assign a separate printer for the on-line

printing of each of your inventory documents.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Document type
This option enables you to indicate the type of document you

want to generate.
Stock receipts
Select this to print stock receipt documents for transactions

involving the receipt of items into stock.
Issues
Select this to print stock issue documents for transactions

involving the issue of items from stock.
Transfers out
Select this to print transfers out documents for transactions

involving the transfer of stock to a different warehouse.
P/order receipts
Select this to print purchase order receipt documents for

transactions involving the receipt of items on a purchase order.
Format
You use this field to indicate the format you want to apply to the
document that is printed.
Define format
Select this to configure the inventory format applicable to the

printing of your inventory documents using the Inventory
Document Format program.
Reprint
Select this to reprint inventory documents according to a range

of selection criteria.
Documents
Reprint options
Field
Values
Description
Month
You use this field to indicate the inventory month for which you
want to reprint your inventory documents.
Year
You use this field to indicate the inventory year for which you
want to reprint your inventory documents.
Immediate and
no destination
transfers
This option is only enabled if you selected to reprint Transfers

out document types.
Include
Select this to include transactions for immediate warehouse

transfers and for transfers out with no destination when
reprinting inventory documents.
Exclude
Select this to exclude transactions for immediate warehouse

transfers and for transfers out with no destination when
reprinting inventory documents.
Only
Select this to reprint inventory documents only for all immediate

warehouse transfers and all transfers out with no destination.
If you select this option, then you can use the Document
number selection option to define the range of GIT transfer
documents you want to include in the reprint.
Document number
selection
You use this field to indicate the document number(s) for which
you want to reprint the documents.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you selected
the option: Generate next document number
(Inventory Document Format).
Stock codes
Stock code
selection
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you
want to print transaction documents.
Warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you

want to print transaction documents.
Journal selection
This enables you to indicate the Inventory journal(s) for which

you want to print transaction documents.
Operator selection
This enables you to indicate the operator(s) for which you want
to print transaction documents.
Job selection
This enables you to indicate the job(s) for which you want to
print the documents.
Warehouses
Journals
Operators
Jobs
Purchase orders
Field
Values
Description
Purchase order
selection
This enables you to indicate the purchase order(s) for which

you want to print the documents.
Note:
This field is displayed only if you selected the option: P/
order receipts at the Document type field.
Suppliers
Supplier selection
This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for which you want
to print the documents.
Note:
This field is displayed only if you selected the option: P/
order receipts at the Document type field.
GRNs
GRN selection
This enables you to indicate the GRN(s) for which you want to
print the documents.
Note:
GRN suspense system required (Purchase Orders
Setup) and you selected the option: P/order receipts at
the Document type field.
Destination
warehouses
Destination
warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the destination warehouse(s) for

which you want to print the documents.
Note:
This field is displayed only if you selected the option:
Transfers out at the Document type field.
GIT references
GIT reference
selection
This enables you to indicate the GIT reference(s) for which you
want to print the documents.
Note:
This field is displayed only if you selected the option:
Transfers out at the Document type field.
After processing
complete

Inventory Print Totals output pane.
Inventory Print Totals

The information in this report pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select
the option: After processing completed > Close this application.
No. of documents printed

This indicates the total number of documents generated in the batch (i.e. for the current run of the
program).
If you are printing one document per page then this corresponds to the number of pages printed.
With standard printing, the page breaks can be controlled by SYSPRO and the number of pages can
therefore be determined. With SRS however, the information is passed to the report and the report
formats it accordingly, so SYSPRO cannot determine the number of page breaks. The count is always
be based on the paging rules in the format and not the paging that SRS finally produces.
Hash total quantity
This is the total number of items printed on all documents, regardless of the unit of measure (e.g. if 12
apples and 13 oranges were include on the documents the value shown here would be 25).
Total value
This is the total value of the items printed on the documents.

Total mass
This is the total weight of items on the documents printed.
This is determined by the sum of the values defined against each item's Mass per stocking unit (Stock
Code Maintenance).
Total volume
This is the total volume occupied by all items on the documents printed.
This is determined by the sum of the values defined against each item's Volume per stocking unit
Total merchandise value
For purchase orders this field displays the total value (price x quantity), excluding cost multiplier costs,
of the documents printed.
For the inventory transactions: receipts, issues and warehouse transfers, this field displays the total
cost x quantity of the documents printed.
Total non merchandise value
This field displays the total value of cost multiplier costs, if any, of the documents printed.
Inventory On-line Document

This screen is displayed when you select the post function from the Inventory Movements and Purchase
Order Receipts programs. It enables you to print an inventory document online.
You indicate the types of inventory documents you want to print on-line on the Documents tab of the
Note:
When printing documents online, a document is generated for each transaction line processed.
Field
Values
Description
Document type
This field displays the type of document which will be printed

online.
Document format
You use this field to select the format you want to apply to the
document that is printed.
Preview
Document
Field
Values
Description
Test Alignment
This function enables you to print the selected document type

using test characters. This enables you to check whether the
stationery is correctly aligned on your printer before printing the
actual document.
Define Format
Select this to use the Inventory Document Format program to

define a document format.
Document
number allocated
You use this field to enter the document number required for
the document you are printing.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you have
enabled the option: Generate next document number
(Inventory Document Format).
Printer
Preferences
You use this function to optionally assign a separate printer for

the on-line printing of each of your inventory documents.
E-mail
Select this to use the Send Email program to email the

document.
Print
Select this to print the document online.
Close
Select this to return to the previous screen without printing the

document.
Default printer Destinations

This screen is displayed when you select the Printer Preferences function.
Note:
The description {Current Print} refers to the default printer that is configured within SYSPRO. To
establish what the current printer is, press Shift+F6 from within SYSPRO. The highlighted printer is
your current printer.
Field
Values
Description
Stock receipts set

to
This indicates the default printer assigned to the printing of

stock receipt documents.
Issue documents
set to

your stock issue documents.
Transfer
documents set to

stock transfer documents.
Purchase order
receipts set to

purchase order receipt documents.
Default printer
destinations
Set
Select this to indicate that the printer currently defined as the

default printer must be used to print the document on-line.
Clear
Select this to remove details of the printer previously assigned

to the printing of the document and to use the current printer
instead (i.e. The printer configured within SYSPRO).
Field
Values
Close
Description
Select this to accept your preferences and to return to the
previous screen.
Price-Cost Percentage Change

You use the Price-Cost Percentage Change program to make global changes to either the selling price or
the inventory cost of your stock items.
You can use the Price History Report program to print an audit trail of changes made using this program.
Note:
This program ignores any items that use Actual costing (Inventory Setup - General tab) when
processing a cost change or when processing a price change based on cost.
Price/Cost Percentage Change

Field
Values
Start Processing
Description
Select this to make the price changes according to your
selections in the Price/Cost Percentage Change Criteria pane.
You are prompted to enter missing information that the
program requires to complete processing.
In addition, you are prompted to confirm that you want to
process the changes.
Change Criteria
Select this to change the criteria indicated in the Price/Cost

Percentage Change Criteria pane.
Price/Cost Percentage Change Criteria

Field
Values
Description
Change function
Percentage based
on
Price code
Note:
The option you select here determines which other
criteria are made available in this pane.
Select this to change prices for existing price codes by a
specific percentage.
Another price code Select this to change prices held against price codes based on
a percentage of another price code.
Cost
Select this to change prices associated with a price code by

adding a percentage to the unit cost of a stock item.
Note:
All warehouses with a costing method of FIFO or
LIFO are ignored (Inventory Setup or Inventory
Warehouses).
Items in warehouses using FIFO or LIFO costing will
therefore not be updated.
Field
Values
Description
Inventory cost
Select this to make global changes to your inventory costs

Note:
All warehouses with a costing method of FIFO or

LIFO are ignored (Inventory Setup or Inventory
Warehouses).
Items in warehouses using FIFO or LIFO costing will
therefore not be updated.
If Inventory is linked to General Ledger in summary
or detail (General Ledger Integration) then details
of the ledger codes involved in each cost change
transaction are printed.
Any changes to the inventory unit costs are
recorded in the inventory journal file. In addition,
for each stock code against which you are retaining
stock movements (Stock Code Maintenance)
changes are recorded in the stock movement file.
Rounding method
options
Rounding method
0-5 decimals
Select this to indicate that you want the new price/cost to be

rounded according to a specific number of decimals.
Specified value
Select this to enter a specific value according to which you

want the new prices/costs to be rounded.
No. of decimals
Select the number of decimals required for rounding. An entry

of 0 (zero) indicates that you want the new price to be rounded
to a whole integer, while entries of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 indicate the
decimal to which you want the new prices/costs to be rounded.
Value
You use this field to indicate the specific value according to

which you want the new prices/costs to be rounded.
List changes on
printer
Select this to print a list of all stock codes that were changed
during processing within the current run of the program.
Print options
Note:
You can print an audit trail of any changes made to
either the price of stocked items or the pricing basis
of stocked items using the Price History Report
program.
Print prices without Select this if you want to view the effect of the price changes
updating
you entered without actually updating the prices.
When you select this option, the option: List prices on printer is
automatically selected and a report of your intended changes is
produced.
If, after you have checked the report, you are satisfied with the
results, you can re-enter the changes and update the prices.
Field
Values
Description
Percentage
change
You use this field to indicate the percentage by which the price
held against prices codes must change.
Percentage
information
If you selected Percentage based on - Another price code, then

an entry of 0.00 here, enables you to copy a price code without
changing the actual price.
If you selected Percentage based on - Cost, then an entry of
0.00 here enables you to make the price equal to the unit cost.
Increase/decrease
This enables you to indicate whether you want to increase or

decrease the price.
Increase
Select this to increase prices by the percentage specified.
Decrease
Select this to decrease the price by the percentage specified.
Price codes to
change
Price code
selection
All
Select this to apply the price changes for all price codes held
on file.
List
Select this to apply the price changes to a selective list of

prices codes.
Price code list
Select this to enter a list of price codes for which you want to
change prices.
Basic price code
You use this field to indicate the price code from which the
price change must be calculated.
Price code to be
updated
You use this field to indicate the price code to which the price
change must be made.
Prince change
based on another
price code
Note:
A new price code entry is not created if a zero value
is held against the price code from which the change
must be calculated.
Create price code
if not on file
Select this to create a new price code if your entry at the Price
code to be updated field is not defined for any of the selected
stock codes.
Commission
code for changed
price code
Change code
selection
Field
Values
Description
No code change
Select this to indicate that no commission is applicable to the

price code being changed.
Change code
Select this to assign a new commission code to the changed

price code.
Commission code
You use this field to indicate the commission code that you
want to assign to the changed price code.
Warehouse to use
for cost
You use this field to indicate the warehouse from which the
cost of the stock item will be extracted to update prices.
Warehouse
description
This indicates the description of the warehouse code you

selected.
Cost change
journal reference
Select this to optionally enter a reference for the cost change

that you want to print on the Inventory Journal Report report.
This reference defaults to 'cost-chg'.
Period month
This indicates the Inventory period to which entries will be

posted.
Period year
This indicates the Inventory year (within for the period) to which
entries will be posted.
Stock code
selection
want to change the price assigned to price codes.
Warehouse
selection

want to change the price assigned to price codes.
Warehouse for
cost
Inventory cost
percentage
change
Posting
information
Stock codes
Warehouses
Note:
You can only access the Warehouse selection
field if you selected the Inventory cost option at the
Percentage change function field.
Product classes
Product class
selection
This enables you to indicate the product class(es) for which

you want to change the price assigned to price codes.
Supplier selection
This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for whom you want
to change the price assigned to price codes.
Suppliers
After processing
complete
These options relate to the information displayed in the Price/

Cost Percentage Change Review output pane.
Field
Values
Description
Price/Cost Percentage Change Review

The information in this pane is displayed once processing is complete, providing you did not select the
option: After processing completed > Close this application.
The results of processing the function you selected are displayed.
Minimum Quantity Calculation

You use the Minimum Quantity Calculation program to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock code
required and to optionally update the Minimum quantity field held against the warehouse record.
Note:
The minimum quantity field held against the warehouse record is only updated if a Lead time is
defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance ).
You can optionally produce a report listing those items where the minimum quantity exceeds the maximum
quantity against the warehouse record.
In principle, the calculation establishes the average quantity of a stock item sold over the last 12 months
and then multiplies this figure by the number of months required for an order of the stock item to be
supplied.
Minimum Quantity Calculation

Field
Start Processing
Values
Description
Select this to begin the calculation process.
Note:
The calculation performed by this program is

applicable only to stock codes with a usage history
of two months or more.
The calculation is not performed for stock items
where the current inventory cost is zero.
The results produced by this program will be
inaccurate if there have been fluctuations in the
costing of your stock items over the year.
Change Criteria
Select this to change the criteria in the Information pane.
Print

Report output pane.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Information
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
selection
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to

include in the minimum quantity calculation.
Warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which

you want to include stock codes in the minimum quantity
calculation.
Product class
selection

calculation.
Cycle count
selection
This enables you to indicate the cycle count(s) for which

calculation.
Stock code
Warehouse
Product class
Cycle count
Action where
minimum >
maximum
This enables you to indicate what action must be taken if the

minimum quantity is greater than the maximum quantity against
a selected stock item.
Select action
Update
Select this to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock item

required and update the Minimum quantity field against the
warehouse.
Note:
The minimum quantity field held against the warehouse
record is only updated if a Lead time is defined against
the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).
Update and Report Select this to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock item
required, and update the Minimum quantity field against the
warehouse. In addition, a report is produced indicating those
items where the minimum quantity exceeds the maximum
quantity for the warehouse.
Report only
Select this to calculate the minimum quantity of a stock item

required and to update the Minimum quantity field against the
warehouse if this will not make the minimum quantity more
than the maximum quantity. I.e. If the minimum quantity is not
greater than the maximum quantity, then the update takes
place.
A report is produced which lists those items where the
minimum quantity would exceed the maximum quantity for the
warehouse.
After processing
complete
These options relate to the information displayed in the Report

output pane.
Field
Values
Description
Report
Calculation Formula
The minimum quantity calculation is performed as follows:
((Annual usage value / Unit cost) / Number of months' history) x (Lead time / 30)
The annual usage value is divided by the unit cost to obtain the Annual usage quantity (i.e. Usage
quantity = Annual usage value / unit cost).
The Annual usage quantity is divided by the number of months history to establish an average monthly
usage (i.e. Average monthly usage = Usage quantity / number of months history).
Note:
The number of months' history is stored against the warehouse in which the item is stocked.
From the time of capturing the item, this number is incremented by 1 after each Inventory month
end, until it reaches a value of 12. This enables the calculation to cater for items that have been
stocked for less than 12 months.
The lead time held against the stock item is divided by 30 and multiplied by the Average monthly usage
(i.e. Inventory minimum quantity = (Lead time / 30) x Average monthly usage).
| Stock Take System | 263
Stock Take System

Stock Take System
You use the Stock Take System to selectively count the number of items you have on hand in your
Inventory system and to update the live inventory file with these captured quantities.
Note:
Although you can continue processing transactions while the stock take is in progress (i.e.
performing a stock take does not disrupt the normal daily transaction processing in a company), this
is not recommended.
It is important to note that when you process transactions whilst a stock take is in progress, the
quantities captured using the Stock Take Selection program do not change. If items are physically
issued or receipted, or their cost is changed, then the reconciliation of the Inventory Stock Take
Variance Report report becomes more complicated.
You can capture stock count details using any of the following methods:
by stock code
by bin location
by stock take ticket number
by importing a stock count file
Stock Take Query

You use the Stock Take Query program to view details of Inventory stock take information.
Stock take information can be viewed for any warehouse in which a stock take is currently in progress.
Stock Take Query

Field
Values
Description
Exit
File
Include
Items not captured Select this to only display stock items for which no captured
quantity has been entered (i.e. no stock take quantities have
been entered for the item using the Inventory Stock Take
Capture or Stock Take Import programs).
You can use the Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities
program to generate a report of these items.
Exceptions only
Select this to display only items where the Captured quantity

differs from the Original quantity on hand, by the stock take
percentage or quantity variance specified (Inventory Setup Options tab).
Note:
If you entered zero in the Maximum permitted field
(Inventory Setup - Options tab), then no items are
Field
Values
Warehouse
Description
displayed in the Stock Codes listview as the variance
check is not performed.
to display the stock take information.
The warehouse you enter must have a stock take currently
in progress (i.e. you need to have used the Stock Take
Selection program to select stock items from that warehouse
for a stock take).
Warehouse Details
This pane displays information for the Warehouse you selected to query.
The following information is included:
Warehouse
This indicates the code of the warehouse for which the information is being displayed.
This indicates the description for the warehouse code.

Next stock take ticket number
This indicates the next ticket number to use when next you perform a stock take using tickets. This is
defined against the warehouse (see Warehouse Maintenance).
Nationality
This indicates the nationality code for the country in which the warehouse is located. This is defined
against the warehouse (Warehouse Maintenance) and only applies if you selected the option: EC VAT
system required (Tax Options - General tab).
Negative stock allowed
This indicates whether negative stock is allowed against the warehouse.

Multiple bins in use
This indicates whether multiple bins are applicable for the warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab Warehouses).
Tickets
Select this to use the Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Ticket Number program to view a list of all
the captured quantities for the warehouse, in ticket number sequence.
This only applies if you generated ticket numbers and selected to capture counted stock quantities by
entering the ticket number (Inventory Stock Take Capture).
Stock Codes
This indicates either all stock items included in the stock take or only the exceptions according to your
selection at the Include menu option.
Stock code

Bin
This indicates the bin location for the stock item.

Original quantity
This indicates the Inventory value for the stock item at the time the Stock Take Selection program was
run.
Captured quantity
This indicates the counted quantity captured against the stock item.
Product class
This indicates the product class defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).
Unit of measure
This indicates the unit of measure for the count quantity.

Reference
This indicates the reference entered for the stock count capture.
Number of times captured
This indicates the number of times a captured quantity was entered against the stock item.
Stock Code Line Details

The information in this pane relates to the line (i.e. the stock code/bin combination) currently highlighted in
the Stock Codes listview.
In addition to the information derived from the stock code (Stock Code Maintenance) the following
information is included in this pane:
Date of last stock count
This indicates the date on which the last stock take was confirmed for the warehouse, providing the
stock take was not confirmed into a prior period.
Unit cost
This indicates the current unit warehouse cost for the item.
Stock take unit cost
This indicates the unit cost of the item as at the time the Stock Take Selection program was run.
Quantities
Saved quantity
This indicates the inventory quantity of the item as at the time the Stock Take Selection program
was run.
Captured quantity
This indicates the counted quantity captured against the stock item.
Variance quantity
This indicates the difference between the Saved quantity and the Captured quantity.
Stock take values
Stock take saved value

This indicates the total inventory value of the item as at the time the Stock Take Selection program
was run.
This is calculated as the Saved quantity multiplied by Stock take unit cost.
Stock take captured value
This indicates the total captured value of the item.
This is calculated as the Captured quantity multiplied by Stock take unit cost.
Stock take variance value
This indicates the difference between the Stock take saved value and the Stock take captured value.
Warehouse values
Warehouse saved value
This indicates the current warehouse value of the item.

Warehouse captured value
This indicates the warehouse value for the captured quantity.

Warehouse variance value
This indicates the difference between the Warehouse saved value and the Warehouse captured
value.
Stock Take Selection

You use the Stock Take Selection program to select the stock codes that you want to include in a stock
take count.
The selection of stock items to count is the first step in the stock take process.
Note:
If you want to take stock of items that are lot traceable or serialized or if you are using multiple
bins, then you should run the Balance function of the Inventory Period End program before
using the Stock Take Selection program. This is especially necessary if you have encountered
errors during the processing of lot traceable or serialized items.
In addition, if you intend counting serial numbers and using the serials as the basis of the stock
take, then you should first run the Serial File Balance Report to identify any discrepancies
between the on hand quantity for a stock code within the serial tracking system and the on hand
quantity within the warehouse file. This should be done even if no errors have occurred during
the processing of serialized items. The discrepancies need to be resolved before processing a
stock take.
Stock codes that have been placed on Full or Partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance), are still
included in the selection.
Stock items with a Part category of G - Phantom part or N - Notional part (Stock Code
Maintenance) - Descriptive tab) are excluded from the stock take selection.
After using the Stock Take Selection program to select items for a stock take, you would typically use
the Stock Take Forms program to print a stock take form that enables you to manually enter the quantity
of each item that is counted. Alternatively, if you select to generate ticket numbers, then you use the
Inventory Stock Take Tickets program to print stock take tickets for a selected range of items you are
counting within a warehouse.

Field
Start processing
Values
Description
Select this to apply your selections and to begin the stock take.
This function takes a snapshot of the selected inventory at the
current time (i.e. the costs and quantities for the selected stock
items are saved). Inventory movements processed against
the selected stock items after you have run the Stock take
selection are not reflected against the saved quantity.
Print

Selected Stock Codes Report output pane.
Field
Values
Save Form
Values
Description
mode.
See Design Mode.

Field
Values
Description
Function
Select stock codes This indicates that you are processing a stock take selection.
for stock take
Warehouses
Warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse in which you want

to perform a stock take.
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the single warehouse for which you
want to perform the selection.
Warehouse
description
This displays the description of the warehouse you selected.
List of warehouses This enables you to indicate a list of warehouses in which you
want to perform a stock take.
Note:
Although you can count stock in more than one
warehouse at a time, the system treats each
warehouse as a separate stock count (i.e. you will
need to confirm the stock count in each warehouse
separately).
Options
Include zero
quantities on hand
Select this if you want to include stock codes that have a zero
quantity on hand in the stock take.
Stock code
selection
This enables you to indicate the stock codes you want to

include in the stock take.
Stock codes
Note:
A stock item defined as a kit type K (Kit type) or S (Sub
type) (Stock Code Maintenance) is ignored from the
stock take.
In addition, any traceable item residing in the
inspection warehouse is ignored from the stock take.
Supplier
Field
Values
Description
Supplier selection
This enables you to indicate the suppliers for whom you want
to include stock codes in the stock take.
Stock codes are selected for inclusion in the stock take
according to the supplier code defined against the stock code
Bin location
Bin location
selection
This enables you to indicate the bin location(s) for which you
want to include stock codes in the stock take.
Note:
If you have enabled the option: Multiple bins
(Inventory Setup) and the stock item is serialized then
your bin selection made here is ignored.
Product class
option
Product class
selection

you want to include stock items in the stock take.
Cycle count
selection
You use this field to indicate the stock items you want to
include in the stock take, based on the cycle count defined
against the item. You specify the number of times you want to
count a stock item at the Quantity cycle count field in the Stock
Code Maintenance program.
Unit of measure
selection
This enables you to indicate the units of measures for which

you want to include stock codes in the stock take.
Warehouse ABC
class selection
You use this field to indicate whether the ABC class must be
used to select stock codes for the stock take.
Cycle count
option
Unit of measure
option
Warehouse ABC
classes
Note:
The Stock Take Selection program selects stock
items for the specific warehouse being counted. If
you want items to be selected based on the ABC
classification, then you must ensure that:
1. The option: ABC analysis required (Stock Code
Maintenance) is selected against the stock items.
2. The ABC Analysis report is processed for each
specific warehouse against which a stock take is
required.
All classes
Select this to include all stock items irrespective of their ABC

classification in the stock take.
Field
Values
Description
Selected classes
Select this to indicate specific classes of stock items to include

in the stock take.
'A' items
Select this to indicate that 'A' class items must be selected for
the stock take.
'B' items
Select this to indicate that 'B' class items must be selected for
the stock take.
'C' items
Select this to indicate that 'C' class items must be selected for
the stock take.
'D' items
Select this to indicate that 'D' class items must be selected for
the stock take.
After processing
complete

Selected Stock Codes Report

The results of the stock take selection are displayed.
Stock Take Update

You use the Stock Take Update program to update items selected in a stock take (using the Stock Take
Selection program) with the latest costs and on hand quantities stored in the inventory warehouse file/
table.
Note:
If your costing method is set to FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup or Inventory Warehouses),
then the last cost is used. For all other costing methods, the unit costis used (Warehouses for
Stock Code).
The update may cause exceptions where none existed before, especially if quantities were
already captured against items. The original quantity on hand could be reduced. You use the
Inventory Stock Take Variance Report program to print a list of exceptions.
Stock Take Update

Field
Start Processing
Values
Description
Select this to update the costs and quantities according to the
selections you made.
The serial numbers that are no longer in the warehouse(s)
selected for stock take are removed from the stock take
selection. If a quantity was captured against such a serial
number (see Inventory Stock Take Capture), then the
captured quantity is removed from the first available bin with
sufficient quantity. This ensures that the quantity captured
balances to the number of serial numbers captured. A report is
Field
Values
Description
printed to indicate the deleted serial numbers and the bins from
which serial numbers were removed.
The costs and quantities for lot numbers are updated according
to the bins. If you are not using multiple bins (Inventory Setup
- General tab), then all costs and quantities for lot numbers and
serial numbers are updated.
Note:
The update may cause exceptions where none existed
before, especially if quantities were already captured
against items. The original quantity on hand could be
reduced. You use the Inventory Stock Take Variance
Report program to print a list of exceptions.
Print

Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Stock Take Update Quantities and Costs

Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
selection
This enables you to select the warehouse(s) for which you

want to update the quantities and costs of the items already
selected for stock take.
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the single warehouse for which you
want to perform the selection.
Warehouse
description
This displays the description of the warehouse you selected.
Multiple Bins
selection
This enables you to select the bin(s) for which you want to
update the quantities and costs of items selected for stock
take.
Warehouse
option
Multiple bins
This option is only enabled if you selected the setup option:

Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).
All bins
Select this to update the costs and quantities of stock take

items in all bins that existed when the stock take selection was
made as well as bins added after the stock take selection.
Field
Values
Description
Selected bins
Select this to update the costs and quantities of stock take

items in bins which existed when the stock take selection was
made. Bins added after the stock take selection are ignored.
Note:
Irrespective of whether you select this option, all bins
for serialized items are always selected and updated.
This is because serial numbers are not associated with
bins.
After processing
complete

Selected Stock Codes Report

The results of the stock take update are displayed.
Inventory Stock Take Tickets

You use the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program to print stock take tickets for a selected range of
items you are counting within a warehouse.
If you select to generate ticket numbers, then this enables you to capture stock by entering the ticket
number. You can define the next ticket number to use using the Inventory Warehouses program.
Before using this program, you must use the Stock Take Selection program to select the stock items you
want to include in the stock take.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
to print stock take tickets.
Stock code
selection
You use this field to indicate the stock codes for which you
want to print stock take tickets.
Product class
selection
You use this field to indicate the product class(es) to use to

select stock codes for printing stock take tickets.
Bin location
selection
You use this field to indicate the bin location(s) to use to select
stock codes for printing stock take tickets.
U/m selection
You use this field to indicate the units of measure to use to

select stock codes for printing stock take tickets.
Reprint
Reprint
Select this to reprint the tickets or labels.
Field
Values
Description
Note:
You cannot select this option if you selected the
Generate ticket numbers option.
Generate ticket
numbers
Select this to capture stock by ticket number without having to

enter actual stock codes.
Note:
You must select this option if you want to capture count
quantities by ticket number using the Inventory Stock
Take Capture program.
Print options
Number of tickets
per bin
You use this field to indicate how many tickets you want to
print for each bin. Your entry within the Inventory Stock Take
Ticket Format program is used as the default, but can be
changed here.
Number of copies
of each ticket
You use this field to indicate how many copies of each ticket
you want to print. Your entry within the Inventory Stock Take
Ticket Format program is used as the default, but can be
changed here.
Alignment
Select this to print a test document to verify that the information

will be aligned correctly on the paper.
Print
Select this to apply your selections and begin printing stock

take tickets.
The first ticket number that is printed is extracted from the
warehouse record (Warehouse Setup) and each subsequent
ticket that is printed increments this number by one.
Close
Select this to exit the program without printing the tickets.
Stock Take Forms

You use the Stock Take Forms program to print a stock take form that enables you to manually enter the
quantity of each item that is counted.
Before you use this program, you must use the Stock Take Selection program to select the stock codes
that you want to include in the stock take count.
Once you have manually entered the counted quantity for each item on the stock take form, you use the
Inventory Stock Take Capture program to enter these counted quantities into the system.
Report Options
The following report options can be selected on this tab page:
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this to print the report in stock code sequence.
Bin location
Select this to print the report in bin location sequence.
Report sequence
Field
Values
Warehouse
Description
to print the stock take form.
Include in report
Not yet printed
Select this to only print stock codes on the report that have not
yet been printed.
Note:
If you have already used the Inventory Stock Take
Tickets program to print stock take tickets, then you
must select the option: All stock codes, when you print
the Stock Take Forms for the first time.
All stock codes
Select this to print all stock codes, regardless of whether they

have been printed before.
You select this option if you have previously printed a Stock
Take Form or Stock Take Tickets.
Selections
In addition to the report options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined:
Stock code selection
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) that must be selected for printing on the stock take form.
Product class selection
This enables you to indicate the product class(es).

Bin location selection
This enables you to indicate the bin location(s) for which stock items must be included for printing on
the stock take form
Unit of measure selection
This enables you to indicate the unit(s) of measure for which you want to include stock codes in the
report.
Common Filtering Options

The following options enable you to specify which items from a selection you want to include when
generating the report.
Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
Select this to include all the items from the selection in the
report.
Range

include in the report.
Single
Select this to indicate a single item from the selection to include

in the report.
Field
Values
List
Description
When defining the list, you use the Add function to add items to
the list. These items are then displayed in a listview. Incorrectly
added items can be removed from the list by highlighting them
and selecting the Remove function.
From
selected item to include in the report.
If you indicated that you want to include only a single item from
the selection, then you use this field to enter that item. This
applies where no field is displayed in which to indicate the
single item.
To
Output Options
This tab page is displayed for all reports generated using SYSPRO Reporting Services.
Refer to SRS Output Options for details.
Inventory Stock Take Capture

You use the Inventory Stock Take Capture program to record the results of a stock count performed on a
selected range of inventory items.
Once you have captured the counted quantities using this program, you can use the Stock Take by Ticket
program (if you used the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program) to view the differences between the
quantities saved by the Stock Take Selection program and the counted quantities.
Alternatively, if you used the Stock Take Forms program, then you can use the Inventory Stock Take
Variance Report program to view the differences between the saved and counted quantities.
Stock Take Capture

Field
Values
Description
Start Capture
Select this to start the capture process.
Import
Select this to use the Stock Take Import program to

import stock count data that was captured using a 3rd party
application software system.
Exit
File
Import
Select this to use the Stock Take Import program to

import stock count data that was captured using a 3rd party
Field
Values
Description
Start Capture
Select this to start the capture process.
Close
Stock Take
Capture
The options on this screen enable you to indicate the

preferences you require for capturing the stock take count
quantities.
Stock take
capture options
These options enable you to indicate your preferences for

capturing stock count information. The options you select here
are saved against your operator code.
Capture quantity
by
This enables you to indicate how you want to capture the

counted quantities.
Stock code
Select this if you want to capture quantities according to a

specific stock code that is entered.
Ticket number

specific ticket number that is entered.
Note:
You need to have used the Inventory Stock Take
Tickets program together with the report option:
Generate ticket numbers before you can capture count
quantities by ticket number.
Bin

specific bin location that is entered.
bins in SYSPRO.
Capture ticket
numbers
Select this if you want to record a stock take ticket number for
each stock quantity captured.
Note:
You will be unable to access this option if you selected
to capture quantities by ticket number.
Default capture
method
This enables you to indicate how the system must interpret the
count quantities you enter.
Increase
Select this if you prefer the program to add any new quantity
counted for an item to the quantity previously counted for the
item.
Replace
Select this if you prefer the program to replace any previously

counted quantity for an item, with the new quantity counted.
Note:
If you are using ticket numbers, and you want to
recapture a counted quantity (i.e. you have done a
second count of an item), then you must enter the
original ticket number for the second and subsequent
counts, to replace the previously counted quantity. If
you use a different ticket number, then the quantity you
enter is added to the quantity already captured.
Field
Values
Description
Apply reference
Select this if you want to use the comment entered in the

Capture reference field as the reference for the stock take
capture transactions.
Reference
options
If you select this preference, then you must enter a reference in

the Capture reference field.
Capture reference
You use this field to enter the default reference you require for
the stock take capture transactions.
This reference is printed on the Inventory Journal Report
report and can be viewed in transaction queries for serial and
lot numbers.
You must enter a reference in this field if you selected the
option: Apply reference.
The reference entered in this field can be overridden when you
capture the count quantity for each stock item.
Default uom for

stock take capture
You use this field to indicate the default unit of measure in

which you want to count stock items. The units of measure are
defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance Descriptive tab).
Stock quantities are stored in the stock take capture file in the
captured unit of measure. Serialized or traceable items can be
captured in a unit of measure other than stocked. The captured
quantity is stored in the unit of measure being used, which is
converted back to the stocking unit of measure at the time of
confirming details of the stock take capture process using the
Stock Take Confirmation program.
Note:
All stock take reports that include the unit of measure
as a selection criterion, will print the stocking unit of
measure regardless of the selection made at this field.
Stocking
Select this if you want to default to counting items based on the

stocking unit of measure defined against the stock code.
Alternate
Select this if you want to default to counting items using the

alternate unit of measure that is defined against the stock code.
Other
Select this if you want to default to counting items using the

other unit of measure that is defined against the stock code
Browse on
selected stock
codes
This option enables you to indicate which stock items are

displayed when you select to browse on stock items on the
Stock Take Capture screen.
Select this if you want to display only the stock items currently
included in the stock take when you browse on stock codes
(see Stock Codes in Stock Take).
Field
Values
Description
If you do not select this option, then all stock items currently
defined are displayed when you browse on stock codes (see
Stock Codes).
Batch quantity
validation
Select this if you want to enter a batch control total for the stock
take.
Quantity
validation
If the total quantity captured does not match the batch total
entered here, then a warning message is displayed to indicate
the variance when you exit the stock take.
Batch quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity that you want to use
as your batch control total.
This control total is specified in either the stocking, alternate
or other unit of measure, depending on you selection at the
Default uom for stock take capture option.
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Stock Code

This screen is displayed if you selected to capture the count quantities by Stock code.
Field
Values
Description
New
Select this to enter a new warehouse for which to capture stock

count details.
Post
Select this to post the quantity that was entered.

Any serial number selected with a capture quantity of 1 will be
reset to zero. If the capture quantity is zero, then this will be
updated to 1.
Warehouse
to capture the counted quantities.
View
View Captured
Quantities
When you select this option, the details of the quantities

currently captured for the stock take are displayed in
a separate listview pane. See Captured Quantity for
Warehouse - Stock Codes.
Note:
The information in this listview is updated each time
you select the Post option.
Therefore, if you are capturing the count quantities
for a large number of items, you may want to deselect
this option (to close this listview pane) to speed up the
capture process.
Captured
Quantities by
Stock
Select this to view the quantities captured for the stock count
by stock code (see Captured Quantity for Warehouse Stock code)
Field
Values
Description
Captured
Quantities by
Ticket
by ticket number (see Captured Quantity for Warehouse Ticket Number).
Captured Quantity
by Bin
Select this to view the quantities captured for the stock

count by bin (see Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Bin
Number).
Stock code
to capture the counted quantity.
You can use the browse icon to view stock codes. The stock
codes are displayed according to your selection at the option:
Browse on selected stock codes (see Stock Codes in Stock
Take or Stock Code Maintenance).
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Stk Code

Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
This field displays the warehouse for which you are currently
capturing the stock quantities.
Warehouse
description
This field displays the description for the warehouse code in

the previous field.
Stock code
This field displays the stock code for which you are currently
capturing the count details.
Stock code
description
This field displays the description for the stock code in the
previous field.
Bin
You use this field to indicate the bin location of the stock item
for which you are capturing a stock count.
Stock take
quantity capture
If you enter a bin location that is not held on file, then you will
be able to indicate that the bin must be created, providing the
setup option: Allow creation of bins when processing inventory
transactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab). The bin will be
created once you have confirmed the stock take using the
Stock Take Confirmation program. If this setup option is not
selected, then you must either enter an existing bin or use the
For example: You count 100 of an item physically in Bin 2, but
when you ran the Stock Take Selection program, the 100
were in Bin 1 on SYSPRO. You enter 100 for Bin 2 and when
you select the Stock Take Confirmation program, the system
creates Bin 2 (if it does not already exist.), and puts the 100
counted into Bin 2.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you

disabled the option: Multiple bins (Inventory
Setup).
Field
Values
Description
You will be unable to access this field when you
capture count quantities by ticket number, as the
system has already assigned the bin to the ticket
number.
Ticket number
You use this field to indicate the ticket number applicable to the
selected stock code or bin in this stock take.
Note:
Capture ticket numbers on the main stock take capture
window.
Reference
You use this field to indicate a reference that you want to

assign to this transaction. This reference is printed on the
Inventory Journal Report report and can be viewed in
transaction queries for serial and lot numbers.
This field defaults to the text you entered at the Reference field
of the Stock Take Capture screen.
Unit of measure
This indicates the unit of measure in which you are capturing

details of the stock count for the item. The alternate unit of
measure can be selected here if one is configured against the
item (Stock Code Maintenance).
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if the stock code
is defined as traceable or serialized (Stock Code
Maintenance) as the unit of measure defaults to the
Quantity
You use this field to enter the quantity counted of the stock
item.
Capturing method
This defaults to your selection on the Stock Take Capture

screen, but can be changed.
Increase
Select this to add the quantity entered in the Quantity field to

any count quantity previously captured for the item.
Replace
Select this to replace any count quantity previously captured for

the item with the quantity entered in the Quantity field.
Revision
You use this field to enter the revision number for the stock
item to which the quantity entered in the Quantity field refers.
This field is only enabled if the item is defined as ECC
controlled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).
Release
You use this field to enter the release number for the stock item
to which the quantity entered in the Quantity field refers. This
field is only enabled if the item is defined as ECC controlled
(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).
Lot
You use this field to indicate the lot number of the item for
which you are capturing stock count details.
Field
Values
Description
If you enter a lot number that is not held on file, then you will
be able to indicate that the lot must be created, together with
an expiry date. The lot will be created once you have confirmed
the stock take using the Stock Take Confirmation program.
stock codes (Lot Traceability Setup), then you can reuse the
same lot number for different stock codes.
You can use the Lot Maintenance program to create lot
records as well as view and change details for existing lots.
Lot expiry date
This indicates the expiry date for the lot number entered.
Serial number
You use this field to indicate the serial number of the item for
If you enter a serial number that is not held on file, then you will
be able to indicate that the serial must be created. The serial
will be created once you have confirmed the stock take using
the Stock Take Confirmation program.
You can use the Capture manual serial numbers option to
update the count quantities of manually serialized items (see
Multiple Serial Number Selection).
You can use the Serial Number Maintenance program to
change header information for serialized items that are held on
file as well as view and change details for existing serials.
Capture manual
serial numbers
Select this to view and update quantities for multiple serial

numbers.
See Multiple Serial Number Selection.
Note:
This option is enabled only for stock codes defined as
manual serialized items (Stock Code Maintenance)
and enables you to indicate several serial numbers that
must be updated.
If the stock item is both traceable and serialized, then
the program only displays serial numbers for the lot
number entered.
Captured total
Total captured
quantity
This indicates the quantity of the item currently captured in the

stock count.
View captured lots
Select this to view the captured quantities for lot numbers (see
Captured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/
Revision and Releases).
Captured
quantities
Note:
This option is enabled only if the stock item is defined
as a traceable item (Stock Code Maintenance).
Field
Values
Description
View captured
serial numbers
Select this to view all captured quantities of serial numbers

for the warehouse/stock code combination (see Captured
Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and
Releases).
Note:
as a serialized item (Stock Code Maintenance).
View captured
Revision/Release
Select this to view all captured quantities of ECC controlled

items for the warehouse/stock code combination (see
Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Stock Codes

The details of the quantities currently captured for the stock take are displayed in this listview.
Note:
The information in this listview is updated each time you select the Post option.
Therefore, if you are capturing the count quantities for a large number of items, you may want to
close this listview pane to speed up the capture process.
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item against which the quantity was captured.
Bin
This indicates the bin location against which the quantity was captured.
Captured quantity
This indicates the quantity captured against the stock item.

Unit of measure

Reference
No. of times captured
This indicates the number of times a captured quantity was entered against the stock item.
Multiple Serial Number Selection

This screen is displayed when you select the Capture manual serial numbers option option.
It enables you to view and update multiple serial numbers.
Note:
This option is enabled only for stock codes defined as manual serialized items (Stock Code
Maintenance) and enables you to indicate several serial numbers that must be updated.
If the stock item is both traceable and serialized, then only the serial numbers for the lot number
entered are displayed.
Field
Post
Values
Description
Select this to post a count quantity of 1 against each serial
number you selected.
Once you have posted a selection, you can deselect the
item(s) you previously selected and use the Post option to
post a quantity of zero against each selected serial. (i.e. by
selecting and posting and deselecting and posting you can
toggle between capturing a count quantity of 1 or 0 against the
serials).
Select All
You use this function to select all serials displayed.
Deselect All
You use this function to deselect all serials displayed.
Captured
Select this to select the serial or serial/lot number combination

for update.
Serial number
This indicates the serial number added.
Lot
This indicates the lot number added.
Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Stock code

This listview is displayed when you select the Captured Quantities by Stock option from the View menu.
It enables you to view a list of all the captured quantities for the warehouse, in stock code sequence.
Stock code
Bin
Captured quantity

Unit of measure

Reference
Captured
A tick in this column indicates that a count quantity was captured against the stock item.
Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Ticket Number

This listview is displayed when you select the Captured Quantities by Ticket option from the View menu.
It enables you to view a list of all the captured quantities for the warehouse, in ticket number sequence.
Ticket number
This indicates the ticket number against which the count quantity was captured.
Stock code
Bin
Ticket quantity
This indicates the total quantity captured against the ticket number.
Captured quantity
This indicates the total quantity currently captured against the stock item.
Unit of measure

Reference
Captured
Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Bin Number

This listview is displayed when you select the Captured Quantities by Bin option from the View menu.
It enables you to view a list of all the captured quantities for the warehouse, in Bin number sequence.
Bin
Stock code
Captured quantity

Unit of measure

Reference
Captured
Refer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiple bins in SYSPRO.

Captured Quantities for Serial Numbers/Lot Numbers/Revision and Releases
This listview is displayed when you select the View Captured Serial, View Captured Lots or View Captured
Rev/Rel option.
It enables you to view the captured quantities for serial numbers/lot numbers/revisions/releases for the
warehouse/stock code combination.
Serial
This indicates the serial number for which the count was captured for the stock item.
Lot
This indicates the lot number for which the count was captured for the stock item.
Rev/Rel
This indicates the revision/release for which the count was captured for the stock item.
Bin
This indicates the bin number for which the count was captured for the stock item.
Captured quantity
This indicates the count quantity captured for the stock item.
Reference
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Ticket

This screen is displayed if you selected to capture the count quantities by Ticket Number.
Note:
You need to have used the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program together with the report option:
Generate ticket numbers before you can capture count quantities by ticket number.
Field
Values
Description
New

count details.
Post

updated to 1.
Warehouse
to capture the count quantities.
View
View Captured
Quantities

Warehouse - Ticket Numbers.
Note:
capture process.
Ticket number
Captured
Quantities by
Stock
Captured
Quantities by
Ticket
Captured Quantity
by Bin

Number).
You use this field to enter the ticket number for which you want
to capture the count quantity details.
Field
Values
Next
Description
You can use the Browse icon to view existing ticket numbers
generated for the stock code for the selected warehouse (see
Ticket Numbers for Warehouse).
Select this to navigate to the next ticket number, without having
to enter the ticket number.
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Ticket

Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse for which you are currently

Warehouse
description
Ticket number
This indicates the ticket number for which you are capturing the
count quantity.
Reference

Stock take
quantity capture
Unit of measure

Note:
Quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity counted of the stock
item.
Capturing method
Increase

Replace

Revision
Release
Field
Values
Description
Lot
Lot expiry date
Serial number
You can use the Serial option to capture the count quantities
of manually serialized items (see Multiple Serial Number
Selection).
Captured total
Stock code
This indicates the stock item for which you are capturing the
count quantity.
Stock code
description
This indicates the description for the stock code displayed in

the previous field.
Bin
This indicates the bin location of the stock item for which you
are capturing the count quantity.
When you capture the quantities by ticket number, the ticket is
already allocated to a specific bin. The system automatically
links the ticket number, stock code and bin number to the
quantity you capture. You are therefore not able to enter a bin
number.
Total captured
quantity
This indicates the total quantity currently captured against the

item.
Captured
quantities
Field
Values
Description
View captured lots
Note:
View captured
serial numbers

Releases).
Note:
View captured
Revision/Release

Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Ticket Numbers

Note:
Ticket number
this indicates the ticket number against which the count quantity was captured.
Stock code
Bin
Ticket quantity
This indicates the quantity captured against the ticket.

Captured quantity

Unit of measure

Reference
Stock Take Quantity Capture by Bin

This screen is displayed if you selected to capture the count quantities by Bin.
Field
Values
Description
New

count details.
Post

updated to 1.
Warehouse
to capture the count quantities.
View
View Captured
Quantities

Warehouse - Bins.
Note:
capture process.
Bin
Captured
Quantities by
Stock
Captured
Quantities by
Ticket
Captured Quantity
by Bin

Number).
You use this field to indicate the bin for which you want to
capture the count quantities.
If you enter a bin location that is not held on file, then you will
be able to indicate that the bin must be created, providing the
setup option: Allow creation of bins when processing inventory
transactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab). The bin will be
created once you have confirmed the stock take using the
Stock Take Confirmation program. If this setup option is not
selected, then you must either enter an existing bin or use the
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you

disabled the option: Multiple bins (Inventory
Setup).
You will be unable to access this field when you
capture count quantities by ticket number, as the
Field
Values
Description
system has already assigned the bin to the ticket
number.
You can use the browse icon to view stock codes. The
stock codes are displayed according to your selection at
the Preference: Stock code browse type - Selected stock
codes (see Stock Codes in Stock Take or Stock Code
Maintenance).
Next
Select this to display the next bin number without having to

manually enter it.
Stock take Quantity Capture by Bin

Field
Values
Serials
Description
You use this option to view quantities for multiple serial
numbers (see Multiple Serial Number Selection).
Note:
Manual serialized items (Stock Code Maintenance)
must be updated.
number entered.
Stock take
quantity capture
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse for which you are currently

Warehouse
description
Bin
This indicates the bin number for which you are currently
capturing the count quantities.
Ticket number
You use this field to indicate the ticket number applicable to the
selected stock code or bin in this stock take.
Note:
Capture ticket numbers on the main stock take capture
window.
Reference

Unit of measure

Field
Values
Description
Note:
Quantity
You use this field to indicate the quantity counted of the stock
item.
Capturing method
Increase

Replace

Revision
Release
Lot
Lot expiry date
Serial number
You can use the Serial option to capture the count quantities
of manually serialized items (see Multiple Serial Number
Selection).
Field
Values
Description
Capture manual
serial numbers
Select this to view and update quantities for multiple serial

numbers.
See Multiple Serial Number Selection.
Note:
manual serialized items (Stock Code Maintenance)
must be updated.
number entered.
Captured total
Stock code
This indicates the stock item for which you are capturing the
count quantity.
Stock code
description

the previous field.
Total captured
quantity
This indicates the quantity of the item captured in the stock

count.
View captured lots
Captured
quantities
Note:
View captured
serial numbers

Releases).
Note:
View captured
Revision/Release

Captured Quantity for Warehouse - Bins

Note:
Bin
Stock code
Quantity captured
Unit of measure
Reference
Stock Codes in Stock Take

You use the Stock Codes in Stock Take program to view details of stock items currently selected in a
stock take.
Stock items are selected for a stock take using the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.
The Stock Codes in Stock Take listview is displayed when you select the browse icon at the Stock code
field of the Inventory Stock Take Capture program, if you selected the option: Browse on selected stock
codes in the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.
Stock Codes in Stock Take for Warehouse

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start At
Exit
File
Listview
When you access the Stock Codes in Stock Take program, details of all stock items currently selected for
a stock take in the selected warehouse are displayed in a listview.
Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item included in the stock take.
Stock code description
This indicates the description for the stock item.

Bin
This indicates the bin number against which the count quantity was captured.
Captured quantity
This indicates the counted quantity captured against the stock item for the stock take.
Number of times captured
This indicates the number of time a count quantity was captured against the stock item.
Unit of measure
Ticket Numbers for Warehouse

You use the Ticket Numbers for Warehouse program to view details of ticket numbers currently selected
in a stock take.
Ticket numbers for a stock take are created using the Inventory Stock Take Tickets program, if you
select the report option: Generate ticket numbers.
The Ticket Numbers for Warehouse listview is displayed when you select the browse icon at the Ticket
number field of the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.
Ticket Numbers for Warehouse

Listview
The following information is included in the listview for existing ticket numbers generated for the stock code
for the selected warehouse:
Ticket number
This indicates the existing ticket number.

Stock code
This indicates the code of the stock item for the ticket number.
This indicates the description defined against the stock item.

Bin
This indicates the bin number for the stock item.

Quantity
This indicates the count quantity captured for the stock code ticket number combination.
No of times captured
This indicates the number of times a quantity was captured against the stock code ticket number
combination.
Unit of measure
Stock Take Import

You use the Stock Take Import program to import stock count data that was captured using a 3rd party
The Stock Take Import program can also be accessed by selecting the Import function from the
Inventory Stock Take Capture program.
Stock Take Import

Field
Start Import
Values
Description
Select this to import the flat ASCII file. Data is extracted from
the import file to the stock take file for the warehouse. The
Field
Values
Validate Import
Description
import file is validated before being imported and the program
aborts if any errors are encountered.
Select this to validate the contents of the import file without
actually perform the import.
Note:
If you selected the option: Validate returns all records
but not the option: Show output in report option, then
the entire contents of the import file is displayed in
the Stock Take Import Report - HTML pane. The error
messages are displayed in the Stock Take Import
Report pane.
List Import File
Select this to list the contents of the import file. The list is
displayed in the in the Stock take Import Report pane if you did
not select the Show output in report option. You can customize
the design used to render this information using the Browser
Queries and Themes program.
If you selected the Show output in report option, then the file
contents are printed to the printer.
Alternatively, you can select the option: Show output in report
option, to output the contents of the import file to a printer.
Print

Stock Take Import Report output pane.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Stock Take Import Selection

Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
You use this field to indicate the warehouse into which you
want to import stock code quantities.
Import selection
Note:
You can only perform the import if a stock take is
currently in progress for the warehouse.
Warehouse
description
This indicates the description for the warehouse code you

entered.
Import file name
You use this field to indicate the file that you want to import,
including the full pathname.
Options
Field
Values
Description
Create nonexistent bins
Select this if you want the program to create a bin automatically

if a stock code/bin number combination specified in the import
file does not exist.
Note:
Create nonexistent serial
You need to ensure that the setup option: Allow

creation of bins when processing inventory
transactions (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is
selected. If this setup option is not selected, then
bins cannot be created automatically.
This option is disabled if you have not enabled the
option: Multiple bins (Inventory Setup).
The default bin location assigned to the stock code
is not overridden.
Select this if you want the program to create serial numbers

automatically if the stock code/serial number combination
specified in the import file does not exist.
Note:
This option is only enabled if you selected the option:
Serial tracking system required (Inventory Setup).
Show output in
report
Select this if you want to output the contents of the import file to
a printer instead of displaying this on the screen.
Create nonexistent lot
Select this if you want the program to create lot numbers

automatically if a stock code/lot number combination specified
in the import file does not exist.
Note:
This option is only enabled if the Lot Traceability
module is installed as part of your license agreement.
Validate returns all Select this if you want to produce a listing of the import file
records
(including error messages) when you select the Validate Import
function. Otherwise the system merely indicates the number of
records read and the number of errors found.
This listing is rendered in a browser window by default, but
you can select the Show output in report option to output the
contents of the file to a printer destination of your choice.
Ignore records
from other
warehouses
Select this if you want the program to ignore any line in the
import file that contains a warehouse code other than the
warehouse for which the stock take capture is being performed.
This option is selected by default.
If you deselect this option and the warehouse code in the
import file is blank, or is different to the warehouse code
for which the stock take is being performed, the import fails
validation and the records are not imported.
You would typically deselect this option if you had an import file
with counted quantities for a single warehouse and you wanted
Field
Values
Description
to ensure that the warehouse field on the import file contained
only the code for that warehouse.
Add ECC entry for

new warehouse
Select this if you want to be able to import revisions/releases

not previously transacted in the warehouse for which you are
importing the capture. This applies only to ECC controlled
items.
This option is only enabled if Engineering Change Control is
installed and Lot Traceability is not installed. If you are using
the Lot Traceability module, then you use the option: Create
non-existent lots to enable the same functionality of importing
new revisions/releases into a warehouse.
Default capture
method
Increase
Select this if you want to add the quantity imported for an item
to any quantity previously counted/imported for the item.
Replace
Select this to replace any previously counted/imported quantity

for an item, with the quantity imported.
After processing
complete

output panes.
Stock Take Import Report

Messages relating to the import are displayed. When you select to list or validate the import file, error
messages relating to errors found in the file are displayed.
Stock Take Import Report - HTML

Information relevant to the successful import is displayed. This includes the journal number and the
number of records imported.
In addition, when you select to list or validate the import file, the file contents are displayed in this pane,
providing you did not select the option Show output in report.
File Layout
The following table indicates the format of the import file that you must define to import stock take
quantities.
Note:
When you import quantities for serialized stock items, you must create one line in the import file
for each serial number of the stock item.
Lines are ignored in the import file under the following conditions:
two or more lines in the import file are for the same manual serialized stock item; the same
serial number has been specified against the lines; the import option: Create non-existent
serials is selected. The subsequent lines are ignored.
two or more lines in the import file are for the same ECC controlled/lot traceable stock item;
the lot number against the lines is the same but the revision/release numbers are different;
and the import option: Create non-existent lots is selected. The subsequent lines are
ignored.
If lines are ignored for either of the above reasons, then a List Ignored Lines function is
available on the Import Complete window. This enables you to print a report indicating which
lines were ignored.
File structure for importing stock take quantities

Field
Start Position
Field Length
Notes
Line type
This must be the

character S to indicate a
stocked line.
Warehouse
This indicates the

warehouse in which
the stock code has
been counted. If
blank, it defaults to the
warehouse entered in
the Inventory Stock
Take Capture program.
Otherwise, it must match
the warehouse selected
for the stock take.
Note: If the option:
Ignore records from
other warehouses is
selected and the import
file contains stock take
quantities for multiple
warehouses, then if this
field is left blank, the
quantities are added
to each warehouse for
which you perform the
stock take capture.
Stock code
30
(Mandatory) This
indicates the stock
code. If the stock item
is held in cases and
pieces, then the quantity
counted must only refer
to whole cases (i.e.
no decimals must be
specified).
Quantity counted
34
12
(Mandatory) This
indicates the quantity
that has been counted.
This quantity must be

positive or zero.
If the Unit of measure
field is left blank, then
it is assumed that the
Counted quantity is
in the stocking unit of
measure.
If you enter a unit of
measure in the Unit
of measure field, then
the Quantity counted
is converted into the
stocking unit of measure
using that entry.
Bin location
46
If a bin exists against

the selected warehouse,
then the bin number
must be entered.
Reference
52
This can be blank.
Serial number
61
20
If the stock item is

serialized, then the
serial number must be
entered.
Pieces
81
This indicates the

number of broken units.
This applies to stock
items for which Unit
quantity processing is
required (Stock Code
Maintenance - General
tab). For example, if you
counted 10 full boxes
and 3 loose pieces, you
enter 10 in the Quantity
counted field and 3 in
this field.
It is possible to enter
more pieces than is
contained in one unit.
For example if one box
contains 10 units and
you enter 203 in this
field, then the system
converts this to 2 boxes
and 3 loose pieces.
Lot
88
10
This indicates the lot

number.
If you selected the
option: Same lot to be
used on multiple stock

codes (Lot Traceability
Setup), then you can
reuse the same lot
number for different
stock codes.
Lot expiry
98
This indicates the Lot

number expiry date in
the format CCYYMMDD.
This date is only used
and validated if an expiry
date does not exist
against the lot. This date
is not validated if an
expiry date is already
defined against the lot
(Lot Maintenance)
Version
106
This indicates the ECC

version number.
Release
109
This indicates the ECC

release number.
Unit of measure
112
This indicates the unit of

measure for the Quantity
counted.
You typically enter the
unit of measure if the
Quantity counted is not
in the stocking unit of
measure.
When this is left blank,
the program assumes
that the Quantity
counted is in the
Stock Take by Ticket

You use the Stock Take by Ticket program to print a report of the stock that was counted for each ticket
number captured.
Note:
Before running this program, you should print the Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities report
to establish whether there are any outstanding stock codes still to be counted.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
to generate the report.
Tickets by stock
code
Select this if you want to print columns on the report indicating

the total number of tickets captured for the stock code, the total
saved quantity and the variance quantity.
Selections
Ticket number
This enables you to indicate the ticket number(s) you want to use to select stock codes for inclusion in
the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
If you enabled the option: Generate ticket numbers (Inventory Stock Take Tickets) then all stock codes
are printed on the report, including those with a zero captured quantity.
Inventory Stock Take Report By Stock Code

You use the Inventory Stock Take Report By Stock Code program to print a list of all stock codes that
are to be counted (or which have been counted).
Report Options
The following report options can be selected:
Field
Values
Warehouse
Description
to print the report.
Value stock at
Current cost
Select this to value stock at the unit cost currently held against
the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code).
Note:
If the Costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup
or Inventory Warehouses) then the unit cost used is
the last cost of the item when it was receipted.
Original cost
Only print
exception lines
Select this to value stock in the stock take file at the unit
cost prevailing at the time the stock take selection was run,
regardless of any cost changes that may have occurred since
the stock take was selected.
Select this if you want to print stock codes only where the
captured quantity differs from the original quantity on hand by
a specific variance as configured within the Inventory Setup
program.
Selections
You use this field to indicate the stock code(s) that must be selected for printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate the bin location(s) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate the unit(s) of measure to use to select stock codes for printing on the
report.
You use this field to indicate the product class(es) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.
Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
If the Costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup or Inventory Warehouses) then the values printed
in the Unit cost column are the last costs of the item when it was receipted. For all other costing methods,
the unit cost is the unit cost currently held against the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code).
Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities

You use the Stock Take Uncaptured Stock Quantities program to print a list of stock codes that have
not yet been captured. These are items for which no stock take quantities have been entered using the
Inventory Stock Take Capture or Stock Take Import programs.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
Include zero
saved quantity
Select this to include stock codes with an on hand quantity of

zero at the time of running the stock take selection.
Selections
You use this field to indicate the stock code(s) that must be selected for printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate the bin location(s) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate the product class(es) to use to select stock codes for printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate the unit(s) of measure to use to select stock codes for printing on the
report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

Field
Values
From
Description
single item.
To
Output Options
Inventory Stock Take Variance Report

You use the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report program to generate a list of stock codes indicating
the variance between the captured and counted quantities.
Before using this program you will have used the Inventory Stock Take Capture program to capture the
counted quantities.
You need to print the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report immediately prior to using the Stock
Take Confirmation program to be able to identify the stock items responsible for the variance value which
is ultimately posted to the general ledger.
Note:
If you did not generate the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report immediately prior to
using the Stock Take Confirmation program, you can use the Inventory Movement Report
report and select to print only the Adjustment transactions types for the date on which the stock
take was confirmed. However, the Inventory Movement Report report will also include any other
adjustments which may have been processed on that date.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this to print the report in stock code sequence.
Bin location
Select this to print the report in bin location sequence.
Report sequence

bins in SYSPRO.
Field
Values
Warehouse
Description
Value stock at
Cost on
warehouse file
Select this to value stock at the unit cost currently held against
the warehouse.
Note:
If you enabled the option: FIFO at the Costing method
field (Inventory Setup - General tab or ) then the unit
cost is the last cost.
If you selected Costing per warehouse (Inventory
Setup - General tab) and your costing method is set to
FIFO or LIFO then the last cost is used. For all other
costing methods against warehouses, the unit cost is
used (Warehouses for Stock Code).
Cost on stock take

file
Select this to value stock in the stock take file at the unit
cost prevailing at the time the stock take selection was run,
regardless of any cost changes that may have occurred since
the stock take was selected.
If your costing method is set to FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup
or Inventory Warehouses), then the last cost will have been
used when the Stock Take Selection program was run. For all
other costing methods, the unit cost will have been used.
Options
Print stock
descriptions
Select this if you want to print stock descriptions for each stock
code.
Only print
exception lines
Select this if you want to print stock codes only where the
captured quantity differs from the original quantity on hand by
a specific variance as configured within the Inventory Setup
program.
Note:
If you select this option, but the setup option: Stock
take variance is set to zero (Inventory Setup - Options
tab), then nothing is printed on the report.
Print lots / Rev/Rel
Select this if you want to print lot numbers on the report as well
as revision and release information for ECC-controlled items
Exclude zero lots /

Rev/Rel
Select this to exclude the following from the report:
lots that had a zero balance when you ran the Stock Take
Selection program and currently have a zero balance (i.e. a
zero quantity was captured against those lots)
revisions/releases that had a zero balance when you ran the
Stock Take Selection program and currently have a zero
balance (i.e. a zero quantity was captured against those
revisions/releases)
Field
Values
Description
Include if saved
quantity is zero
Select this to include stock codes with an on hand quantity of

zero at the time of running the stock take selection.
Include if quantity
not captured
Select this to include stock codes that have not had a quantity
captured.
Print batch serial

numbers
Select this if you want to print the batch serial number on the
report for each batch serialized item printed.
Print manual serial

numbers
Select this if you want to print the serial numbers on the report
for each manual serialized item printed.
Exclude zero serial Select this to exclude serials that had a zero balance when you
numbers
ran the Stock Take Selection program and currently have a
zero balance (i.e. a zero quantity was captured against those
serials)
Print FIFO total
value
Select this to project the variance value in terms of FIFO

valuation.
FIFO valuation (Inventory Setup).
This option is only available in the SRS version of this report.
Selections
You use this field to indicate the stock codes that must be selected for printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate whether the product class must be used to select stock codes for printing
on the report.
You use this field to indicate whether the unit of measure must be used to select stock codes for
printing on the report.
You use this field to indicate whether the bin location must be used to select stock codes for printing on
the report.
Refer to Multiple bins for additional information on multiple bins in SYSPRO.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Field
Values
Single
Description
in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
The variance value printed at the end of the report represents the difference between the inventory value
for the selected stock items at the time the Stock Take Selection program was run and the value of
these stock items at the current time. If you run the Stock Take Confirmation program immediately after
running the Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report, then this variance is the amount posted to the
general ledger code defined against the Adjustment field of the Inventory Ledger Interface program. If the
variance value is negative, then this represents a stock loss. Similarly if the value is positive, it represents a
stock gain.
If you selected the option: Only print exception lines above, but the setup option: Stock take variance is set
to zero (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then nothing is printed on the report.
Stock Take Confirmation

You use the Stock Take Confirmation program to confirm details of the stock take capture process and to
update the live inventory file with the captured quantities.
Note:
Regardless of whether stock is allowed to go negative, the stock take confirmation is aborted if it
will result in a negative on hand quantity for an ECC-controlled item.
Irrespective of the whether a stock item is on full or partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance), it
is updated by the Stock Take Confirmation program (i.e. This program ignores the hold status
placed on stock items).
Stock Take Confirmation

Field
Start Processing
Values
Description
Select this to process the stock take confirmation.
Note:
If any errors are encountered, then the entire
confirmation process is cancelled (i.e. none of the stock
items are updated).
If you selected the option: Abort confirmation if exception lines
exist, then the confirmation fails if the difference between the
saved and the counted (captured) quantity is greater than the
permissible variance defined against the Stock take variance
option (Inventory Setup - Options tab). The error: 'Quantity
captured is outside the acceptable variance' is printed on the
Stock take Confirmation Error Report.
If you are using FIFO or LIFO costing (Inventory Setup) and
the FIFO/LIFO bucket select by the system has a zero cost,
then the Stock Take Confirmation program updates the FIFO/
LIFO buckets as follows:
if you selected the option: Use zero cost bucket for returns
(Inventory Setup), then the returned quantity is put into that
bucket and no change is made to the unit cost of the bucket.
if you have not selected the option: Use zero cost bucket
for returns (Inventory Setup), then a new FIFO/LIFO
bucket is created with the returned quantity and the current
warehouse cost.
If you have not allowed stock on hand to go negative

(Inventory Setup - General tab), then the confirmation
fails if the update would cause the stock on hand value to
become negative. If the Available quantity in Inventory Query
- Warehouse values is less than or equal to zero, then the
Stock Take Confirmation program cannot confirm a negative
adjustment as this would cause the stock to go negative. If
the Available quantity is less than or equal to zero but the
Quantity on hand is greater than zero, then it means that stock
is allocated to sales orders or incomplete WIP jobs.
An example of this is as follows:
You process a sales order for a quantity of 20. According to the
system, you have 20 available, so the entire quantity is placed
into the ship field on the order. You perform a stock take, and
you count and capture a quantity of 15. When you attempt to
confirm the stock take, the error: 'Quantity will go negative' is
printed on the report and the confirmation is cancelled.
When you process a sales order, the stock on hand is only
reduced when the invoice is generated. When you do a stock
take confirmation, the stock on hand is updated immediately.
The system does not allow you to sell stock that you do not
Field
Values
Description
have (i.e. you are trying to sell 20, but only physically have
15 in stock). To solve this problem, you need to maintain the
sales order and either place 5 on back order, or the entire 20
on backorder. The stock take confirmation will then update the
stock to 15 as counted and captured.
Print
Select this to print the information currently displayed in

the Stock Take Confirmation Error Report and Stock take
Confirmation Report output panes.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
The confirmation routine

The first phase of the program scans the stock take master file/table to verify that the stock update can be
performed.
The process aborts if:
there are missing ledger interface entries

there are missing warehouse records
there are missing bins
stock will go negative as a result of the update but negative stock is not allowed
the difference between the saved and the counted (captured) quantity is greater than the permissible
variance defined against the Stock take variance option (Inventory Setup - Options tab).
The second phase is the update phase, in which the Inventory warehouse file is adjusted, and the
difference between the saved and the captured quantities is added to the month-to-date adjustment field.
The current inventory on hand quantity is updated with the difference between the counted stock and the
original on hand quantity (stored when the stock take was started) as follows:
If you selected the capture method Increase (Stock Take Confirmation), then the inventory on hand
quantity is adjusted by the difference between the stock on hand at the time of registering the stock take
and the actual quantity counted.
If you selected the capture method Replace, then the inventory on hand quantity is replaced by the
counted (captured) quantity.
If the quantity counted is greater than the original quantity on hand, a positive inventory adjustment is
performed. If the quantity counted is less than the original quantity on hand, a negative adjustment is
performed. These are treated as inventory adjustments.
FIFO records are updated for warehouses where the costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory
Warehouses).
If Inventory is linked to General Ledger (General Ledger Integration) then a journal record is created.
In addition, the records pertaining to the stock take master file are deleted (including any ticket number
records) and the warehouse control record is updated to indicate that a stock take is no longer in progress.
Confirmation Options
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
to confirm details of the stock take capture process.
Abort if exception
lines exist
Select this to abort the confirmation process if a variance

between the captured quantity and the saved quantity exceeds
a specified value or percentage. This value or percentage is
configured within the Inventory Setup program.
Warehouse
information
Option
Note:
You can only select this option if a non-zero value is
entered at the Maximum permitted field of the Stock
take variance option (Inventory Setup).
Posting
information
Current month
This indicates the period into which the confirmation will be

processed.
Current year
This indicates the year into which the confirmation will be

processed.
Change Period
Select this to use the Change Posting Period program to post

to a previous posting period. This can be used to confirm a
stock take for a previous period, providing that the period is
open. This means that if you perform a stock take over a month
end and confirm the stock take after running the Inventory
Period End program, you can use the Change Period function
to confirm the stock take for the previous month.
The Inventory module must be linked to the General Ledger
in either detail or summary (General Ledger Integration General Ledger tab) if you want to change the period in which
the stock take is confirmed.
Note:
If you confirm a stock take into a previous period,
then the closing inventory balance for that period is
changed, which changes the opening balance for the
following period. This is assuming that a stock take
variance exists. There will therefore be a difference
in the balances on inventory reports (such as the
Inventory Valuation and Inventory Aged Valuation),
printed before and after the stock take confirmation
was processed.
The current unit cost (Warehouse cost) is used to
process the confirmation. When you generate the
Inventory Stock Take Variance Report report, you
can use the options: Cost on stock take file and Cost
on warehouse file to view the differences between
the costs of the items at the time the stock take was
Field
Values
Description
selected and the costs of the items at the time the
stock take was confirmed.
Posting period
This indicates the period into which the confirmation will be

processed.
After processing
complete
These options relate to the information displayed in the Stock

Take Confirmation Error Report and Stock take Confirmation
Report output panes.
Stock take Confirmation Error Report

Errors encountered during the stock take confirmation process are displayed.
The following columns are included on the error report:
Note:
The report only displays the items, bins or lots which cause the stock take confirmation to fail.
For example, if an item has two bins, one of which causes the stock take confirmation to fail, then
only the details for that bin is included on the report. The same applies to lots.
Stock code

Description
This indicates the description of the stock item.

Bin
This indicates the bin location of the item.

Saved quantity
This indicates the quantity on hand according to the system at the time the Stock Take Selection was
generated.
Captured quantity
This indicates the quantity counted and entered using the Inventory Stock Take Capture program.
Current free quantity
This is the quantity on hand less quantity allocated plus quantity on backorder.
New quantity on hand
This is the quantity that would now be the on hand quantity for the bin or the lot or the stock code if the
stock take confirmation had run without errors.
Error message
The details of any errors encountered in the confirmation of the item are displayed in this column.
Stock Take Confirmation Report

The details of the journal created for the confirmation are displayed. A message indicating that the
confirmation was completed for the select warehouse is also displayed.
If any errors were encountered during the stock take confirmation, then nothing is displayed in this pane.
Stock Take Cancellation

You use the Stock Take Cancellation program to cancel a stock take which is in progress for a specific
warehouse.
Stock Take Cancellation

Field
Values
Description
Close
Select this to exit the program without cancelling a stock take.
Start Processing
Select this to cancel the stock take for the warehouse

specified.
All stock take master records pertaining to the specified
warehouse are removed, including any lots and/or serial
numbers.
Warehouse
to cancel a stock take.
Warehouse Information
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse code you indicated, in which the

stock take must be cancelled.
Warehouse
description
This indicates the description of the warehouse code.
Warehouse
information
| Serial Tracking System | 313
Serial Tracking System

Serial Tracking System
You use the Serial Number Tracking System to capture and maintain serial numbers for existing stock
items held in the Inventory Control system.
Serial numbers are held on file against each warehouse and can be defined as either a manual or batch
number. A manual serial number must be unique for each individual item, while a batch serial number can
describe the batch quantity of an item (e.g. 10 000 tablets).
A product defined with batch serial numbering allows the same serial number to be allocated to more than
one individual item per stock code and warehouse.
Serial Number Header Maintenance

You use the Serial Number Header Maintenance program to maintain header information for serialized
items currently defined.
The Serial Number Maintenance listview displays details of header information for serialized items.
You use the Serial Number Take-On program to capture serial numbers for existing stock items.
Serial Number Header Maintenance

Field
Values
Description
Exit
File
Save
Serial
This indicates the serial number for which you are maintaining
the header details.
Edit Multimedia
Select this to use the Multimedia program to assign

multimedia objects to the serial header currently displayed.
Serial Number
Header
Maintenance
Only the Description, Expiry date and Scrap date can be

maintained. All other fields are displayed for information
purposes only.
Serial number
This indicates the serial number for which you are maintaining
the header details.
Serial type
This indicates the serial type - Manual or Batch.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the serialized item is

stored.
Wh description
Stock code
This indicates the stock code to which the serial number is

allocated.
Stock description
This indicates the description for the stock code.
Location
This indicates where the serialized item is stored.
Field
Values
Description
Customer
This indicates the customer who purchased stock items

associated with the selected serial number.
Due date
Depending on the current status of the serial, this represents

the date for one of the following transactions:
Unit status
Unit in for service

Unit returned to customer
Unit loaned to customer
Unit returned by customer
Warranty details
Unit sent to service depot
Unit received back from service depot
This indicates the current status of the serial.

The status can be one of the following:
In service
On loan
At depot
Description
This indicates the description of the stock item that has been
assigned to the serial number selected.
Expiry date
This indicates the date on which the stock item will expire.
Note:
When a serial is sold or issued, any expiry and/or scrap
dates entered against the serial number are checked.
You will not be able to allocate the serial number if it
has expired or been scrapped.
Scrap date
This indicates the date on which the stock item must be

scrapped.
Note:
Serial Number Take-On

You use the Serial Number Take-On program to capture serial numbers for existing stock items, as well
as to create sales transactions for serial numbers that have already been sold.
Note:
If you selected the setup option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes (Inventory Setup Options tab), then you can capture the same serial number for different stock codes.
Serial Number Take-on
Field
Values
Description
Save
Save and Close

Close
New
Select this to add a new serial number for the selected stock
code.
File
Edit
New
Select this icon to add a new serial number for the selected
stock code.
Save
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the serialized item for which you
want to capture serial numbers or create sales transactions.
The stock code entered must be defined as a either a batch or
manual serialized item and cannot be a Notional part (Stock
Code Maintenance).
Warehouse
You use this field to indicate the warehouse in which the

serialized item is stored.
Note:
For a batch serial number you can assign the same
serial number to different warehouses.
Take-on Header
Field
Values
Description
Stock Code
This indicates the stock code for which you are adding serial
numbers.
Description
This indicates the stock code description.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the stock code resides.
Description
This indicates the description of the warehouse.
Serial method
This indicates the serial tracking method defined against the

stock code (Stock Code Maintenance).
Serial number
You use this field to enter the serial number you want to assign
to a specified quantity of the stock item.
Description
This defaults to the description held against the stock item but
you can enter your own description for the serial number here.
Revision
This indicates the current revision of the stock item. This only
applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (Stock Code
Maintenance).
Field
Values
Description
Release
This indicates the current release of the stock item. This only
applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (Stock Code
Maintenance).
Location
Expiry date
This indicates the date on which the serial number expires.
Scrap date
This indicates the date on which the serial number must be

scrapped.
Note:
Quantity on hand
This indicates the quantity of items on hand for the serial

number.
For manual serial numbers this quantity must be 1 or 0.
Note:
If you enter a value greater than zero here, then you
can optionally create sales transactions for the serial
number.
Customer
This indicates the customer who purchased stock items

associated with the selected serial number.
Note:
You can only access the Customer field if you are
capturing a manual serial number and quantity of zero
is entered at the Qty on hand field.
Customer name
This indicates the customer's name.
Notation
You use this to enter a journal notation for the transaction

which can be printed on the Serial Tracking Report.
Take-on Transaction
You can optionally create sales transactions for serial numbers if you use the Serial Number Take-On
program and enter an On hand quantity that is greater than 0.
Field
Values
Description
Save
Select this icon to save the transaction details you entered.
Customer
This indicates the customer who purchased the serial item and
against whom you are creating the sales transaction.
Name
This indicates the name of the customer who purchased the

serialized item.
Note:
Field
Values
Description
You can only access the this field if the customer
specified is not held on file.
Sales date
This indicates the date on which the transaction took place.
Quantity
This indicates the quantity of serialized items that were sold to

the customer. This cannot exceed the quantity available.
Invoice
This indicates the invoice number that you issued to the

customer for this sales transaction.
Amount
This indicates the value of the sales transaction processed.
Transaction Posting
You use the Transaction Posting program to post transactions against specific serial numbers. You can
post a miscellaneous transaction or a standard transaction selected from a table of standard codes.
If you selected the setup option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes (Inventory Setup Options tab), then the same serial number can be allocated to different stock codes. In this case, when
you enter a serial number which has been allocated to more than one stock code, the Serial Number
Maintenance listview is displayed. This enables you to select the serial number/stock code combination for
which you want to maintain transactions.
If you enter a serial number which exists in a warehouse to which you do not have access (Operators),
then the message: "Serial number not on file or access has been denied" is displayed and you are
prompted to enter a different serial number.
Serial Tracking Transaction Posting

Field
Values
Description
Close
New
Select this to enter a new transaction. When you select this

option, all fields in the Transaction Details and Serial Details
panes are cleared.
File
Edit
New
Select this to enter a new transaction. When you select this

option, all fields in the Transaction Details and Serial Details
panes are cleared.
Transaction type
Standard
Select this to indicate that you want to post a standard

transaction (i.e. one catered for by the system) against a
serialized item.
Miscellaneous
Select this to post miscellaneous transactions which do not

relate to any of the standard transaction types provided,
against serial numbers.
The transaction quantity entered does not affect the on hand
quantity against the serial number or the stock code.
Field
Values
Function
Description
This option only applies if you selected to process a Standard
transaction type. It enables you to indicate the type of standard
transaction you want to process.
Take on sales
transactions
You use this to assign a serial number to an item that was

previously sold to a customer, but where the sale has not yet
been recorded against the serial number.
This function reduces the serial quantity on hand and quantity
available, but does not affect the Inventory quantity on hand
and available quantities.
The transaction code for this process is SALES.
Maintenance
Select this to record changes or service work performed on a

serialized item or a batch of serialized items.
This function does not affect Inventory on hand quantities.
The transaction code for this process is MAINT.
Customer unit in
for service
Select this to record that a customer has returned a serialized

item to be serviced.
This function can only be used for Manual serial items.
While a customer unit is in for a service, you will be unable to
perform the following transactions:
SALES (Take on sales transactions)

LOAN (Unit loaned to a customer)
RETURN (Unit returned by customer)
TRA (Transfer between warehouses)
REC (Receive goods in)
MOVE (Change location within warehouse)
ISS (Issue to Work in Progress)
PHY (Adjust quantity on hand)
The transaction code for this process is SRVIN.

Unit returned to
customer
Select this to record the return to a customer of a unit that was

sent in for a service.
This function can only be used for manual serial items.
The transaction code for this process is SRVRET.
Unit loaned to a
customer
Select this to record that a serialized item has been loaned to a

customer.
While a unit is on loan to a customer, you will be unable to

SRVIN (Customer unit in for service)
DEPOT (Unit sent to service depot)
DEPRET (Received back from depot)
Field
Values
Description
The transaction code for this process is LOAN.
Unit returned by
customer
Select this to record that a unit on loan to a customer has been

returned.
The transaction code for this process is RETURN.
Transfer between
warehouses
Select this to record the transfer of serialized items between

warehouses.
You would typically use this function to record the transfer
of items if this has not previously been recorded using the
Inventory Movements program.
This function affects the serial on hand and available
quantities, but not the Inventory on hand and available
quantities.
Note:
If you require inventory quantities to be affected by the
transfer of serialized items between warehouses, then
you must use the Warehouse Transfers function of the
Inventory Movements program to perform this task.
The transaction code for this process is TRA.
Receive goods in
Select this to receipt a quantity against the entered serial

number.
This function does not affect Inventory quantities, but it does
affect the on hand and available quantities against the serial
number.
The transaction code for this process is REC.
Additional notes
Select this to assign a comment against a serialized item.

You can delete any additional notes entered against serial
items using the Serial File Purge program. This is done by
indicating that you only want to delete serial transactions of the
type NOTE.
The transaction code for this process is NOTE.
Warranty details
Select this to record any maintenance that has been performed

on an item that is included under the item's warranty.
The transaction code for this process is WARR.
Change location
within warehouse
Select this to record that an item has been moved to a new

location within the same warehouse.
The on hand quantity of all items with the entered serial
number is moved to the new location.
Field
Values
Description
The transaction code for this process is MOVE.
Unit sent to service Select this to record that you have sent the serial item to the
depot
service depot for maintenance.
While a unit is at the service depot, you will be unable to

SRVIN (Customer unit in for service)
LOAN (Unit loaned to a customer)
MOVE (Change location within warehouse)
The transaction code for this process is DEPOT.

Received back
from depot
Select this to record that a serial item has been returned from
the service depot.
This function can only be used for manual serial items that are
currently residing at the service depot.
The transaction code for this process is DEPRET.
Issue to work in
progress
Select this to record the issue of a serial item to a job.

This function does not affect Inventory quantities or the job
value, but it does affect the on hand and available quantities for
the serial item.
The transaction code for this process is ISS.
Adjust quantity on
hand
Select this to correct discrepancies between the inventory

quantity on hand and the serial quantity on hand for an item.
This function does not affect Inventory quantities, but it does
affect the on hand and available quantities for the serial item.
The transaction code for this process is PHY.
Post
Transaction Details
Note:
Only the fields applicable to the Transaction type and the Function you selected are enabled.
Field
Values
Description
Function
This indicates the Function you selected and only applies to

Standard transaction types.
Transaction code
This indicates the code that will be assigned to the transaction

selected.
Field
Values
Description
Note:
You can only access this field when you select to
process a Miscellaneous transaction type.
Serial number
which you want to post the transaction.
Serial method
This indicates whether the serial entered is a Manual or a

Batch serial.
Warehouse
You use this field to indicate the warehouse in which the

serialized item resides.
Note:
You can only access this field for batch serial numbers.
This enables you to post a transaction against the
warehouse in which a specific portion of the batch is
stocked.
Wh description
This indicates the description of the warehouse code.
Stock code
This indicates the stock item associated with the serial number
specified.
Stock description
This indicates the description of the stock item.
Location
This indicates the physical location of the item.
Customer
This indicates the customer associated with the last transaction

posted against the serial.
Total receipt qty
This indicates the total quantity of stock items assigned to the

serial number when it was received into stock.
On hand qty
This indicates the quantity of the stock on hand for the serial
number/stock code combination.
Available qty
This indicates the quantity of the serial number/stock code

combination that is available to use.
Due date
This indicates the date when the service is expected to be

completed.
Unit status
This indicates the current status of the serial.

For a Warranty details transaction, this will indicate either "At
service depot" or "Out on loan"
For a Unit sent to service depot and Received back from depot
transactions, this will indicate either "In for service" or "At
service depot" or "Out on loan".
For a transaction, this will indicate either
Warning
This indicates additional information relative to the transaction.
Serial Details
Note:
Only the fields applicable to the Transaction type and the Function you selected are enabled.
Field
Values
Description
Transaction date
You use this field to indicate the date of the transaction. This
defaults to the current system date.
Reference
You use this field to indicate a journal reference that you want
to assign to the transaction. This reference can be printed on
the Serial Tracking Report.
Quantity
You use this field to indicate the transaction quantity you want
to post.
For a batch serial number you can enter any quantity, providing
it does not exceed the quantity available for the batch.
For a manual serial number the value can only be 1 or -1.
Customer
You use this field to indicate the code of the customer involved
in the transaction.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you specified a
job number at the Job field.
Name
This indicates the name of the customer specified. If the

customer supplied is not on file, then this field is enabled to
allow the customer's name to be entered.
Supplier
You use this field to indicate the code of the supplier involved
in the transaction.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you specified a
job number at the Job field.
Supplier name
This indicates the name of the supplier specified. If the supplier

supplied is not on file, then this field is enabled to allow the
supplier's name to be entered.
Job
You use this field to indicate the job number associated with
the transaction or to which you want to issue the serialized
item.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you specified
a supplier at the Supplier field or if you specified a
customer at the Customer field.
Notation
You use this field to indicate the journal notation that you want
to assign to the transaction. This notation is printed on the
Serial Tracking Report.
Revision
You use this field to indicate the revision level of the unit
maintained or serviced. This notation is printed on the Serial
Tracking Report.
New location
You use this field to indicate the new location for the item.
Target warehouse
You use this field to indicate the warehouse to which you want
to transfer the item.
Field
Values
Description
Target wh
description
This indicates the description of the target warehouse.
Value
You use this field to indicate the total value of the transaction.
Due date
You use this field to indicate the date on which the service
must be complete so that the unit can be returned to the
customer or the date when the customer must return the item
or the date when the unit will be returned from the depot.
New expiry date
You use this field to indicate a new expiry date for a manual
serial number.
Serial File Purge

You use the Serial File Purge program to delete serial numbers and/or serial number transactions from
the serial number file.
Serial File Purge

Field
Start Processing
Values
Description
Select this to begin the purge process.
If you select to purge Transactions only, then serials with the
following characteristics are bypassed and their transactions
are not purged:
If a lot number exists against the serial, then its transactions

are not purged unless the lot has been archived.
If the serial is allocated to an active dispatch note then its
transactions are not purged.
ECC controlled items use the lot traceable framework even
if they are not lot traceable. Dummy lots are created using
the revision/release and all transactions performed are done
against that dummy lot number.
Therefore, you need to archive the dummy lot numbers
using the Purge and Archiveprogram before you can purge
the serial numbers.
Once a valid serial is found, its transactions are purged

provided they match the transaction type being purged (if
defined) and the transaction falls within any transaction date
supplied.
If you select to purge Serial numbers and transactions, then
the following checks are made against the serial before it is
purged:
that the on hand quantity is zero

that the available quantity is zero
that the quantity in transit is zero if Goods in Transit is
installed
if it is a manual serial number, it is not in for a service, on
loan or at the service depot.
Field
Values
Description
if a date has been supplied in the field: Purge serials
created before, then the creation date of the serial must be
earlier than this date.
if a lot number exists against the serial, then it must have
been archived
that the serial is not allocated to an active dispatch note
Print

Report output pane.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Information
Field
Values
Description
Function
This enables you to indicate the processing function you want

to perform.
Transaction purge
only
Select this if you want to purge serial transactions, but not

serial numbers.
Serial numbers
and transactions
Select this if you want to purge serial transactions as well as

serial numbers.
Purge serials
created before
You use this field to indicate the cut-off date according to which
you want to purge serial numbers.
Serial number
selection
This enables you to indicate the serial number(s) for which you
want to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.
Stock code
selection
Warehouse
selection

Expiry date
selection
This enables you to indicate the serial expiry date(s) for which
you want to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.
Processing
options
Serial numbers
Stock codes
Warehouses
Expiry dates
Scrap dates
Field
Values
Description
Scrap date
selection
This enables you to indicate the serial scrap date(s) for which
you want to purge serial transactions and/or serial numbers.
Transaction types
These options are disabled when the function: Serial numbers

and transactions is selected.
Transaction type
selection
This enables you to indicate specific transaction type for which

you want to purge serial transactions.
All
Select this to delete all transactions types.
Single
miscellaneous
Select this to delete a specific transaction code. You indicate

this code in the Transaction code field.
Single standard
Select this to view a list of standard transaction types and to

select the standard transaction type you want to enter in the
Type field.
Std transaction
codes
This enables you to indicate the specific standard transaction

code for which you want to purge serial transactions.
You can use the dropdown to view and select the standard
transaction code you require.
This field is enabled when you select the Single standard
option.
Transaction code
You use this field to indicate the specific miscellaneous

transaction type for which you want to purge serial
transactions.
This field is enabled when you select the Single miscellaneous
option.
Transaction dates
These options are disabled when the function: Serial numbers

and transactions is selected.
Transaction date
selection
After processing
complete
This enables you to indicate the transaction date(s) for which

you want to purge serial transactions.
output pane.
Report
Serial Number Maintenance

You use the Serial Number Maintenance program to view header details of serialized items currently
defined.
Header details for serialized items are maintained using the Serial Number Header Maintenance
program.
Serial Numbers
Field
Values
Description
Select

Start at
Find

Play

in the listview.
Exit
Change
Select this to use the Serial Number Header Maintenance

program to maintain the entry currently highlighted in the
listview.
View Transactions
Select this to use the Browse on Serial Number

Transactions program to view details of transactions
processed against the highlighted serial number.
View Reserved
Allocations
Select this to use the Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock

Code program to view reserved serials for the highlighted
allocation.
Options
Select this to indicate selection criteria according to which you

want to display serial numbers in the listview.
Preferences
Select this to indicate preferences according to which you want

to display serial numbers in the listview (see Preferences).
File
Edit
Functions
Options
Sequence
This option enables you to define the order in which you want
to view the information in the listview.
You can select to view information in the listview in one of the
following sequences:
Serial number
Stock code, Warehouse
Stock code, Receipt Date
You can indicate the default sequence you require on the

Preferences screen.
When the Serial Number Maintenance program is accessed
from a program where the stock code already has been
entered (e.g. Inventory Query), the sequence for Serial
Field
Values
Description
Number Maintenance is set to Stock Code, Warehouse.
When you run the Serial Number Maintenance program
and simply browse on serials, all the sequencing options are
available, but if you have already entered a stock code, then
the sequence options are disabled.
Select

Start at Serial
Number / Stock
Code
You use this field to enter the serial number or stock code to
which you want to navigate in the listview. The description for
this field changes according to you selection at the Sequence
menu.
Play

in the listview.
Options
You use the Options option from the Options menu to indicate selection criteria according to which you
want to display serial numbers in the listview.
Field
Values
Description
Apply Options
Select this to return to the listview, to display information

according to the options you indicated.
Close

the listview. The information in the listview remains unchanged.
Stock codes
Stock code
selection
want to display the information in the listview.
Warehouse
selection

want to include stock items in the listview.
Warehouses
Revision and
Release
This option applies only to ECC controlled stock items (Stock

Code Maintenance). This option is therefore only enabled
when the stock codes you selected to include are ECC
controlled.
Revision and
Release selection
This enables you to indicate the revision and release for which
you want to include stock items in the listview.
Preferences
This screen is displayed when you select the Preferences option from the Options menu.
Field
Values
Quantity
selection
Description
You can only select one of the following options:
Include if on hand
zero
Select this if you want to include serial numbers with zero stock
on hand.
Field
Values
Description
Only show quantity Select this if you want to display only serial numbers that have
free
a quantity available.
The quantity free is calculated as: Quantity on hand less
Quantity shipped less Quantity reserved.
You would typically select this option if you needed to reserve
serials, as only serials available to reserve would be displayed
in the listview.
Service options
Unit in service only Select this to display only serialized items that are being
serviced.
Unit on loan only
Select this to display only serialized items that are on loan.
Unit at depot only
Select this to display only serialized items that are at the depot.
Transfer date
Return last transfer Select this if you want to display the date on which the serial
date
number was last transferred into the current warehouse from
another warehouse.
You would typically want to view this information in cases
where you want to sell the serialized item from a specific
warehouse based on the date on which it arrived into that
warehouse rather than the date on which it was manufactured/
purchased.
Sequence
This enables you to indicate the default order in which you

want to display the information in the listview. This is saved
against your operator code.
You can still change the sequence for the run of the program
using the Sequence option.
Save
Select this to return to the listview, to display information

according to the preferences you indicated.
Cancel

the listview.
Serial Numbers Listview

When you select the Serial Number Maintenance program, the header information for serialized items
currently defined is displayed in a listview.
Serial number.
This indicates the serial number assigned to the stock item.

Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the serialized item is stored.

Stock code
Quantity on hand
This indicates the quantity of items on hand for the serial number.
Quantity available
Type
Description
This indicates the description of the stock item that has been assigned to the serial number selected.
Receipt date
Expiry date
This indicates the date on which the stock item will expire.
Scrap date
This indicates the date on which the stock item must be scrapped.
Location

Quantity received
Lot
Service details
Due date
Customer
This indicates the customer who purchased stock items associated with the selected serial number.
Customer name
This indicates the name of the customer who purchased the serialized item.
Previous warehouse
Revision
Release
Transfer date
This indicates the date on which the serial number was last transferred into the current warehouse from
another warehouse.
This is useful in cases where you want to sell the serialized item from a specific warehouse based on
the date on which it arrived into that warehouse rather than the date on which it was manufactured/
purchased.
This is only displayed if you selected the preference: Transfer date >Return last transfer date (Serial
Number Maintenance).
Browse on Serial Number Transactions

You use the Browse on Serial Number Transactions program to view details of transactions processed
against a serial number.
You use the Transaction Posting program to post transactions against specific serial numbers.
The Browse on Serial Number Transactions program can be accessed from the Serial Number
If you selected the setup option: Same serial to be used for multiple stock codes (Inventory Setup
- Options tab), then the same serial number could have been allocated to different stock codes.
Transactions are displayed for each unique stock code/serial number combination.
If you selected the setup option: Require component to parent serial tracking (WIP Setup - Lots and
Serials tab), then you can typically use your right mouse button on a highlighted line and select the option:
View Parent Serials. This displays the listview of the Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query
program.
Transactions for Serial Number

Field
Values
Description
Start at
Exit
File
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at date
You use this field to enter the date to which you want to
OK
Select this to navigate to the date you entered in the previous

field.
Cancel

different entry.
Listview
When you select the Browse on Serial Number Transactions program, the currently defined transactions
for the serial number are displayed in a listview.
Date
This indicates the date of the transaction.

Type
This indicates the transaction type (see Transaction Posting)

Notation
This indicates the journal notation assigned to the transaction

Revision level
This indicates the revision level of the unit maintained or serviced. This notation is printed on the Serial
Tracking Report.
Reference
This indicates the journal reference assigned to the transaction.

Quantity

Value
This indicates the total transaction value.
Values are only displayed if you are allowed access to the field: Show costs Inventory/WIP queries
(Operators - Security tab) and the following preference is selected and saved against your operator
code: Display costs (Inventory Query - Preferences).
Wh
This indicates the warehouse in which the item resides.

Source Wh
This indicates the warehouse from which the item was transferred.
Job
This indicates the job number associated with the transaction.

Purchase order
Customer/Supplier name
This indicates the customer or supplier associated with the transaction.

Location
This indicates the physical location of the item.
Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query

You use the Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query program to view all parent serials that a
component serial was issued to.
This program can be called from the Browse on Serial Number Transactions or Serial Query for
Material Issues programs.
Component to Parent Serial Tracking Query

You need to indicate the parent stock code for which you want to view the component information. Once
indicated, you change this information using the Function menu.
Field
Values
Description
Exit
Change Stock
Code/Wh
Select this to indicate a different stock code, warehouse

and serial number for which to display the information in the
listview.
File
Function
Stock code
You use this field to enter the stock code for which you want to
view the information.
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse for which you want to
view the information.
Serial number
You use this field to enter the serial number for which you want
to view the information.
Component to Parent Details

This pane displays the details of the parent stock code for which the component to parent serial information
is being displayed.
Component to Parent Serial Information

The parent serials that a component serial was issued to are displayed in this listview.
Serial number
This displays the serial number of the component

Stock code
This displays the component stock code.
Warehouse
This displays the warehouse from which the component stock code was issued to the job for the parent
part.
Job
This indicates the job number to which the component was issued.
Quantity
This indicates the quantity of the component issued to make the parent part.
Parent stock code
This indicates the parent part into which the component was taken.
Parent warehouse
This displays the warehouse into which the parent item was receipted
Lot
This indicates the lot number of the parent item.

Revision
This displays the revision number of the parent item if the parent item is defined as ECC controlled
Release
This displays the release number of the parent item if the parent item is defined as ECC controlled
Issue date
This indicates the date on which the component was issued to the job for the parent part.
Issue line
This indicates the transaction line.
Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code

You use the Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code program to view serials reserved for
component parts.
You reserve serials using the Parent/Lot Serial Reservation program.
The Reserved Serial Allocations for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the View
Reserved Allocations option from the Functions menu of the Serial Number Maintenance program.

Field
Values
Description
Start at
Select this option to enter a job number for which you want to
view serial reservation information.
Exit
File
Include
These options enable you to define the serial information you

want to include in the listview.
Show Positive
Reservations
Select this to view only positive reservations for allocations in

the listview.
Field
Values
Description
Show Negative
Reservations
Select this to view only negative reservations for allocations in

the listview.
Negative allocations are typically associated with by-products.
Complete
Reservations
Select this if you want to display serials that are complete.

A reserved serial for a component is set to complete when the
reserved quantity is equal to the quantity issued to the job.

Job
This indicates the job number to which the component item is allocated.
Line
This indicates the line number for the allocation within the bill of materials.
Quantity reserved
This indicates the quantity reserved for the item.

Quantity issued
This indicates the component quantity issued to the job.

Expiry date
This indicates the expiry date for the serial.

Location
This indicates the location defined against the serial.

Lot
This indicates the lot number.

Revision
This indicates the revision number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECC
controlled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking tab).
Release
This indicates the release number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECC
Stock code
This indicates the component stock code.

Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the serial is reserved.

Serial number
This indicates the serial number reserved for the component.

Type
This indicates the Serial tracking method defined against the parent item (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking tab).
Component to Parent Tracking Query

You use the Component to Parent Tracking Query program to trace a serial or lot from the time it was
purchased or manufactured, through to its issue to a job. This enables you to establish the parent item in
which the component was used.
The program can also be accessed from the WIP Query, WIP Inspection Maintenance and Job
Receipts programs.
Component to Parent Tracking Query

This screen enables you to select the component you want to track and to select whether you want to track
the serial or lot number of the component back to the parent item.
Field
Values
Description
Exit
Change Stock
Code/Wh
Select this to change your tracking selections.
Serials
Select this to trace a serialized component back to the parent

part to which it was issued.
Lots
Select this to trace a lot traceable component back to the

parent part to which it was issued.
File
Function
Tracking option
Warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse from which the
component was issued to the job for parent part.
Non stocked
Select this to trace lot information for a non-stocked item.

When you select this option, the Warehouse field is disabled.
This option is only enabled when you select Lots at the
Tracking option.
Stock code
You use this field to enter the stock code for the component
you want to trace.
Serial number
You use this field to enter the serial number of the component
you want to trace.
This option is only enabled when you select Serials at the
Tracking option.
You can use the Browse icon to display the listview of the
Serial Number Maintenance program to select the serial
number you require.
Lot number
You use this field to enter the lot number from which the
component was issued to the job for the parent part.
This field is only enabled when you select Lots at the Tracking
option.
You can use the Browse icon to display the listview of the Lot
Maintenance program to select the lot number you require.
Serial Tracking
The information for the component is displayed in this pane in a Tracking treeview and a Serial information
listview. The information displayed in the listview is dependent on the node you select in the treeview.
Tracking
The following nodes are displayed in the Tracking treeview:
Root node - displays the component serial number.

When selected, the information is displayed in the Serial Information listview.
Description
This column displays the description of the component

Type
This column displays the serial tracking method defined against the component. This is displayed as
either Batch or Manual.
Receipts - relates to receipt transactions for the component.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Receipts for Serial listview.
Actual cost
This indicates the actual cost at which the receipt was processed.
This only applies if you are using Actual costing for batch serialized items (Inventory Setup General tab).
FIFO bucket
This indicates the FIFO bucket into which the receipt was processed
Issues - relates to issues of the component to jobs.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Issues for Serial listview.
Actual cost
This indicates the actual cost at which the issue was processed.
FIFO bucket
This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the issue was processed
Sales - relates to sales transactions for the component.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Sales for Serial listview.
Actual cost
This indicates the actual cost at which the sale was processed.
FIFO bucket
This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the sale was processed
Tracked to Job - relates to the job to which the component was issued to manufacture the parent part.
All jobs to which the component was issued are displayed.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Parent Tracking Details for Component Serial
listview.
For each job, the details of the parent serial are displayed. For each parent serial, you can view you
details of Receipts, Issues and Sales.
Lot Tracking
The information for the component is displayed in a Tracking pane treeview and a Lot Information listview.
The information displayed in the listview is dependent on the node you select in the treeview.
Tracking
The following nodes are displayed in the Tracking treeview:
Root node - displays the component lot number.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Lot Information listview.

Bin - relates to the component bin of the component lot. This node is only displayed if you selected the
setup option: Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).
When selected, the information is displayed in the Lot Information listview.

Receipts - relates to receipt transactions for the component lot.
When selected, the following information is displayed in the Receipts for Lot listview.
Actual cost
This indicates the actual cost at which the receipt was processed.
This only applies if you are using Actual costing for lot traceable items (Inventory Setup - General
tab).
FIFO bucket
This indicates the FIFO bucket into which the receipt was processed
tab).
Issues - relates to issues of the component lot to jobs.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Issues for Lot listview.
Actual cost
This indicates the actual cost at which the issue was processed.
tab).
FIFO bucket
This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the issue was processed
tab).
Sales - relates to sales transactions for the component lot.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Sales for Lot listview.
Actual cost
This indicates the actual cost at which the sale was processed.
tab).
FIFO bucket
This indicates the FIFO bucket from which the sale was processed
tab).
Tracked to Job - relates to the job to which the component lot was issued to manufacture the parent
part.
All jobs to which the component was issued are displayed.
When selected, the information is displayed in the Parent Tracking Details for Component Lot listview.
For each job, the details of the parent lot are displayed. For each parent lot, you can view you details of
Receipts, Issues and Sales.
Serial File Balance Report

You use the Serial File Balance Report program to print a report listing any discrepancy between the
on hand quantity for a stock code within the serial tracking system and the on hand quantity within the
warehouse file.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Options
Include serials with Select this to include serial numbers where the on hand
zero on hand
quantity is zero.
Include stock
items previously
serialized
Select this to include previously serialized items which are no

longer serialized.
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to generate the report.
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which stock codes must be included on the report.

Note:
Field
All
Values
Description
report.
Field
Values
Range
Description
Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Serial Tracking Report

You use the Serial Tracking Report program to print a report listing details of serialized items held on file.
You can use this report to track the transactions in which specific serial numbers were used.
Report Options
Field
Values
Report title
Description
You use this field to indicate the title you want to print on the
report. This defaults to Serial Tracking Report but can be
changed.
Report type
Detail
Select this to print a detailed report of all transactions

processed against each serialized item selected for printing.
Field
Values
Description
When you select this option, only those serials that have
transactions processed against them (such as receipts) are
printed.
1 line summary
Select this to print a single line of details for each serialized

item selected for printing.
If you select this option, then all serials are listed irrespective of
whether transactions exist against them.
You would typically select this option to easily determine which
serials are both available and on hand, as it is possible to
create serials without physically having these serials in stock.
2 line summary
Select this to print a two line summary for each serialized item
selected for printing.
If you select this option, then all serials are listed irrespective of
whether transactions exist against them.
Report
sequences
Primary
Your selection here enables you to indicate how you want

information to be printed on the report.
For example: If your Primary sequence is Stock code, then all
the information on your report is grouped per stock code.
Secondary
Your selection here determines what information is listed below

each primary sequence on the report.
For example: If your Primary sequence is Stock code and your
Secondary sequence is Serial number, then all the information
on your report is grouped per serial number under each stock
code.
Selections

This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to include details of serialized items
on the report.
Rev/Rel.
You use this field to indicate the specific revision and release of the single stock item or which you
want to include details of serialized items on the report.
This option is only enabled if the item is ECC controlled.

Serial number selection
This enables you to indicate the serial number(s) for which you want to print details.
Customer selection
This enables you to indicate the customer(s) for which you want to select serialized items for inclusion
on the report.
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to select serialized items for inclusion
on the report.
Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Additional Options
The options on this tab page enable you to indicate selectively which serialized items you want to print on
the report based on various print options and a range of locations, expiry dates and scrap dates.
Field
Values
Description
Subtotals for each

stock code
Select this if you want to print separate subtotals for each stock
code.
Print options
New page for each Select this to print details for each stock code on a new page.
stock code
Field
Values
Description
Include W/h values Select this to include the warehouse values of the on hand
of stock on hand
stock on your report.
Include serials with Select this to include serial numbers that have zero stock on
zero on hand
hand.
Print batch serials
for selected
customers
Select this if you want to print batch serials for selected

customers.
Note:
You will be unable to access this field if you selected to
print All customers at the Customer selection field.
Selections
In addition to the options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined:
Location selection
This enables you to indicate the location(s) according to which you want to select serialized items for
inclusion on the report.
Expiry date selection
This enables you to indicate the expiry date(s) according to which you want to select serialized items for
Scrap date selection
This enables you to indicate the scrap date(s) according to which you want to select serialized items for
Service Options
the report based on a range of due dates for items that are in service, on loan or at a service depot.
Field
Values
Description
Items in service
Select this if you want to select only those serialized items that
are in for a service for the range of due dates specified.
Items on loan
are on loan for the range of due dates specified.
Items at service
depot
are at the service depot for the range of due dates specified.
Report only
options
Selections
Due date selection

This enables you to indicate the due date(s) according to which you want to select serials that are in
service, on loan or at a service depot for inclusion on the report.
Transaction Options
the report, based on the transaction type and a range of transaction dates. You can also specify whether
you want to print transaction values and totals on the report.
Note:
You can only access the options and selections on this tab page if you selected Report type -Detaill
on the Report Options tab page.
Field
Values
Description
Show transaction
values
Select this if you want to print transaction values on the report.
Show transaction
totals
Select this if you want to print transaction totals on the report.
Transaction type
selection
This enables you to indicate the transaction type(s) you want to

include on the report.
All
Select this to include serials for all transaction types.
Single
Select this to include serials for a single transaction type.
Type
You use this field to indicate the specific transaction type you
want to use to select serialized items for printing on the report.
Standard
Select this to include standard transaction types.
Miscellaneous
Select this to include miscellaneous transaction types.
Std Type
You use this option to indicate the specific transaction type

from the available list of standard transactions catered for
within SYSPRO.
One of the following standard transaction types can be
selected:
Misc type
Sales - Sales
Maint - Maintenance
Srvin - Customer unit in for service
Srvet - Unit returned to customer
Loan - Unit loaned to a customer
Return - Unit returned by customer
Tra - Transfer between warehouses
Rec - Receive goods in
Note - Additional notes
Warr - Warranty details
Move - Change location within warehouse
Depot - Unit sent to service depot
Depret - Received back from depot
Iss - Issue to work in progress
Phy - Adjust quantity on hand
You use this option to indicate the specific miscellaneous

transaction type.
You can configure your own transaction types using the
Transaction Posting program.
Field
Values
Description
Include all
subsequent
transactions
Select this if you want to print all transactions posted against

the selected serial numbers with the transaction type specified.
Note:
You can only select this option if you specify a single
transaction type according to which serialized items
must be printed.
Selections
Transaction date selection

This enables you to indicate the transaction due dates according to which you want to select serialized
items for inclusion on the report.
Output Options
| GL Integration | 344
GL Integration
Inventory GL Integration
You use the Inventory GL Integration program to create General Ledger journals from the transaction
journals which affect Inventory.
While the transaction journals are created automatically when you successfully process a transaction
which affects Inventory, the corresponding General Ledger journal is created and posted according to your
selections on the General Ledger tab of the General Ledger Integration program. Refer to .
The Inventory GL Integration program can only be accessed if Inventory is linked to the General Ledger
either in detail or in summary (General Ledger Integration).
If a General Ledger account used in this program requires General Ledger analysis (Ledger Code
Maintenance or General Ledger Structure Definition), then the GL Analysis program is displayed when
you post the transaction, enabling you to enter the analysis details or to select to enter them later (see
General Ledger Integration). General Ledger analysis entries are always distributed in the local currency,
irrespective of the currency in which the original transaction is processed.
Inventory GL Integration Update

Field
Start Processing
Values
Description
Select this to begin processing according to the Journal options
you selected.
If you did not select the option: Create GL journal for Inventory
(General Ledger Integration), then the journals for the
General Ledger are created from the Inventory transaction
journals.
Note:
When errors are detected during the creation of

the General Ledger journals from the sub-module
transaction journals, the journal may or may not be
created depending on the type of error.
Refer to General Ledger Integration Error
Handling for additional details.
You can use the Inventory Journals program to
identify the transaction journals for which ledger
journals have not yet been created.
If, for Inventory, you did not select the option: Create GL
journal, but you did select the option: Post GL journal (General
Ledger Integration), then once the journals are created they
are automatically posted into the General Ledger. You use
the GL Journal Report program to generate a report of these
journals.
If you did not select the Post GL journal option, then you need
to use the GL Journal Entry program to post the journals once
they are created.
Field
Values
Description
Print

Report pane.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Missing Ledger Codes

When the Inventory GL Integration program attempts to create General Ledger journals from the
Inventory transaction journals and there are missing ledger codes, the following applies:
When the detail ledger code is missing, the program uses the ledger account defined in Inventory
Ledger Interface. A message is written to the job logging (Job Logging) to indicate that this ledger
account was used.
If the interface ledger account is not defined in Inventory Ledger Interface and you are manually
running the Inventory GL Integration program, then an error message is displayed and a "missing
ledger code" entry is written to Job Logging. If you are running the program in automatic mode, then
the error is merely written to Job Logging (no error message is displayed). The journal posting fails.
When the sub contract ledger code is missing, the program uses the Subcontract operations account
defined in General Ledger Integration - Inventory tab. A message is written to Job Logging to
indicate that this ledger account was used.
If the Subcontract operations account is not defined in General Ledger Integration and you are
manually running the Inventory GL Integration program, then an error message is displayed and a
"missing ledger code" entry is written to Job Logging. If you are running the program in automatic
mode, then the error is merely written to Job Logging (no error message is displayed). The journal
posting fails.
Information
Field
Values
Description
Select single
journal
Select this to process a single journal.
Ledger year
You use this field to indicate the year for which you want to
process the journal.
Ledger month
You use this field to indicate the period for which you want to
process the journal.
Journal
You use this field to indicate the Inventory transaction journal

for which you want to create, or to create and post, the General
Ledger journal.
Journal options
If you do not select this option, then all Inventory journals are
created, or created and posted.
You can select the browse icon to use the Inventory Journals
program to select the transaction journal you want to process.
Field
Values
After processing
complete
Description
output pane.
Report
The details of the General Ledger journal(s) created are displayed. These details include:
the year and period of the journal

the General Ledger journal number created for the transaction
Inventory Journals
You use the Inventory Journals program to view details of transaction journals created for postings made
which affect Inventory.
Transaction journals are created automatically whenever you successfully process a transaction which
affects Inventory. The corresponding ledger journal is created and posted according to your selections for
Inventory on the General Ledger tab of the General Ledger Integration program. Refer to .
This program can be accessed by selecting the Browse icon from the Journal field of the Inventory GL
Integration program.
Inventory Journals
Field
Values
Description
Select

Exit
File
Select

Year
You use this field to indicate the financial year for which you
want to display journals.
Period
You use this field to indicate the period(s) within the financial
year indicated for which you want to display journals.
You can select to display all journals for the selected year, a
range of periods or a single period.
From period
You use this field to indicate the first period in a range of

periods for which you want to display journals.
If you selected Single at the Period field, then you use this field
to indicate the single period which you want to display journals.
This field is not enabled when you select All at the Period field.
Field
To period
Values
Description
You use this field to indicate the last period in a range of
periods for which you want to display journals.
This field is only enabled when you select Range at the Period
field.
Include posted
Select this to display transaction journals for which ledger

journals currently exist (i.e. for which ledger journals were
created in the General Ledger module).
Go (arrow icon)
Select this arrow to display the journals according to your

selections.
Listview
When you select the Inventory Journals program, the transaction journals are displayed in a listview.
By default, only the transaction journals for which no corresponding GL journals have been created are
displayed. You use the Include posted option to display all transaction journals.
Year
This indicates the Inventory year into which the transaction was processed.
Month
This indicates the Inventory month into which the transaction was processed.
Journal
This indicates the Inventory transaction journal number.

Journal date
This indicates the date on which the Inventory transaction journal was created.
Warehouse
This indicates the code of the warehouse for which the transaction was processed.
This indicates the description of the warehouse for which the transaction was processed.
Goods in transit journal
This indicates whether the transaction relates to a goods in transit transaction.

Posted
This indicates whether a ledger journal exists (i.e. was created) for the transaction journal.
It is possible that the word "Yes" is indicated in this column, but that the GL year, GL period and GL
journal columns contain only zeroes. This means that the system attempted to create a GL journal for
the transaction, but that no GL journal was required (for example, the transaction journal was zero and
the system does not create zero GL journals).
GL year
This indicates the General Ledger year for the ledger journal.
Zeroes indicate that the General Ledger journal has not yet been created.
GL period
This indicates the General Ledger period for the ledger journal.
Zeroes indicate that the General Ledger journal has not yet been created.
GL journal
This indicates the General Ledger journal number created for the transaction journal.
Zeroes indicate that the General Ledger journal has not yet been created. You need to use the
Inventory GL Integration program to create the General Ledger journal.
A GL journal number does not indicate that the journal was posted into the General Ledger. It only
indicates the ledger journal number that was created from the transaction journal and passed to the
General Ledger module for processing. Ledger journals are posted according to your selections on the
General Ledger tab of the General Ledger Integration program. Refer to .
Inventory Journal Report

You use Inventory Journal Report program to generate a report of journals created from transactions
processed which affect Inventory.
Inventory journals are created by the Inventory GL Integration program.
The Inventory Journal Report serves as an audit trail of transactions posted from within the following
programs:
Inventory Movements
Inventory Stock Take Capture
Job Issues
Price-Cost Percentage Change
Transfer BOM Costs to Wh Costs
Purchase Order Inspection
PO Receipts With Apportionment
Shipment Receipt (Legacy)
Calculate New Landed Cost
This report can be generated at any time and as often as required.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Print summary
journal
Select this to print an additional page summarizing all

transactions posted for the journal.
Report options
Print new page per Select this to print journals on separate pages.
journal
This option cannot be deselected if you selected the Print
summary journal option.
Print multiple bin
transfer
Select this to list all Bin transfer transactions posted in the

Note:
This option is only applicable if you selected the
Multiple bins option is selected (Inventory Setup General tab).
Reprint
Select this to reprint journals that were previously printed.

You can only reprint Inventory journals for as long as you are
retaining Inventory journals (Inventory Setup - History tab).
Field
Values
Journal print
options
Description
Inventory journals are deleted as part of the Purge function of
the Inventory Period End program.
These options are only enabled when you reprint the report.
Show
This enables you to indicate the types of journals you want to

Both
Select this to reprint both FIFO journals and standard Inventory

journals.
FIFO
Select this to reprint FIFO journals only.

FIFO or LIFO journals are printed only if you selected the
options: FIFO valuation and Print FIFO Journals (Inventory
Setup).
Standard
Select this to reprint standard Inventory journals only.
Selections
In addition to the report options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined when
you select to reprint the report:
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include journals in the reprinted
report.
Period selection
This enables you to indicate the
Month
This enables you to indicate the period, within the year indicated, for which you want to reprint
journals.
Year
This enables you to indicate the year for which you want to reprint journals.
Journal selection
This enables you to indicate the transaction journal(s) you want to reprint.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Field
Values
Single
Description
in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
If you selected the options: FIFO valuation and Print FIFO Journals (Inventory Setup), then two journals
are generated for each transaction; one being the standard journal and the other the FIFO journal. This is
irrespective of whether the warehouse in which the transaction occurred uses FIFO costing.
Note:
Issue or Receipt transaction entries for non-stocked items are indicated by two asterisks (**).
A value is printed in the report column: Value Lost Due To Total Entries if rounding errors have
occurred for Receipts or Transfers In transaction types (as a result of entering a cost with a
basis of Total).
A value is printed in the report column: Value Lost Due To Average Costing if rounding errors
have occurred with average costing in use (as a result of entering a cost with a basis of Total).
A value is printed in the report column: Value Lost Due To Transfers if standard costing is in use.
This value reflects an averaged out cost of any stock that is already in transit.
A value is printed in the report column: Cost of Goods Sold Adjustment if receipts were entered
when the quantity on hand was negative. This value reflects the new cost subtracted from the
previous cost and multiplied by the previous quantity on hand.
A warning is printed in the report column: EXCP if a non-zero cost variance percentage has
been defined (Inventory Setup) and a receipt was processed where the percentage change
between the old and new cost exceeds this cost variance.
In addition, if the stock code had any quantity on backorder, then the one of following messages
is printed in the EXCP report column:
BO: the stock code has a quantity on back order

COST: the difference in percentage terms between the old and new cost has exceeded the
cost variance defined
BO/C: both the above exceptions apply
The costing method defined against the warehouse is printed in the heading of each journal.
No detail Inventory journals are created for transactions processed using the WIP Inspection Variance
Closure program. In addition, the Summary Inventory journal page reflects zero values. The reason is
that these transactions are for variance values only and therefore do not affect inventory quantities. The
variance values are reflected on the General Ledger Distribution report and are posted to the General
Ledger.
Inventory GL Distribution
You use the Inventory GL Distribution program to generate a report of General Ledger entries created
for transactions processed which affect Inventory.
This report is generated from the General Ledger journals created by the Inventory GL Integration
program.
Note:
The Inventory GL Distribution report cannot be generated if your Inventory integration method is
defined as Not linked to G/L - no distribution report (General Ledger Integration).
If you have posted all your Inventory ledger journals to the General Ledger, then you can use this report
as an audit trail of entries posted to the General Ledger and possibly to assist in balancing Inventory to the
General Ledger when discrepancies exist.
This report can be run at any time and as often as required.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Report type
This enables you to indicate the type of report you want to

generate.
Detail
Select this to print a list (in ledger code sequence) of all

transactions posted against each ledger code.
Report options
Totals are printed for each ledger code with a distribution total
printed at the end of the report.
If Inventory is integrated to General Ledger in summary
(General Ledger Integration - General Ledger tab ), then you
should print this report in detail for reconciliation purposes.
Summary
Select this to print only the total values for each ledger code.
A distribution total is printed at the end of the report.
Reprint
Select this to reprint Inventory GL Distribution reports

previously printed.
Field
Values
Description
When you select this option, you can define a range of
selection criteria according to which you want to reprint the
report.
Note:
The number of periods for which you can reprint
distribution entries depends on the number of
periods for which you are retaining Inventory journals
Entry selection
Journal
Select this to reprint the report for a specific range of General

Ledger journal numbers.
Entries group
Select this to reprint the report for a specific range of

distribution entry groups.
Note:
This only applies if you want to reprint ledger
distribution entries created prior to SYSPRO 6.1.
Prior to SYSPRO 6.1, a new entries group was created
in the General Ledger entries file/table for each
distribution report printed.
This option enables you to reprint these entries groups.
Current GL
period
This is displayed for information purposes only and cannot be

changed.
Period
This indicates the period that your Inventory module is currently

in.
Year
This displays the year that your Inventory module is currently

in.
Selections
In addition to the report options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined when
you select to reprint the report:
Period selection
You can reprint Inventory distribution entries for as long you are retaining Inventory journals (Inventory
Setup - History tab).
Period
This enables you to indicate the period(s), within the year(s) indicated, for which you want to reprint
the report.
Year
This enables you to indicate the year(s) for which you want to reprint the report.
GL journal selection
This enables you to indicate the ledger journal number(s) you want to reprint.
This selection is only enabled when your Entry selection is by Journal.

Ledger entries group selection
This enables you to indicate the entry group(s), within the selected periods and years, for which you
want to reprint the distribution report.
This selection is only enabled when your Entry selection is by Entries group.
Ledger code selection
This enables you to indicate the General Ledger code(s) for which the report must be reprinted.
Only those entries for the General Ledger code(s) you select are printed.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
The distribution report reflects details of the sub-module transactions posted to the GL Journal and are
grouped by the GL journal number.
The term *Multiple* in place of a GL code indicates that, in the sub ledger, a single journal was referenced
to more than one control record.
The following transactions types may be listed in the Transaction type column of the report:
REC
Receipt
ADJ
Adjustment
PHY
Physical
CHG
Cost Change
ISS
Issue
MOD
Cost Modification
TRN
Transfer
BFL
Backflushing variance between the receipt value

and the calculated backflushing value
VAR
Variance caused by average costing calculation, or

by transfers using standard costing
ABC
ABC Costing
TOT
Variance arising during processing of a receipt

where rounding errors have occurred from entering
a cost with a basis of 'total'
Trn typ is blank but Reference is C.G.S
This indicates a cost of sales adjustment which

occurs when:
you are using Average costing

stock on hand is allowed to go negative
you process the receipt of an item into a
warehouse in which the item has a negative
quantity on hand
For example:
You sell an item you do not have (stock on hand
allowed to go negative) that has a cost of 100.
When you receive stock of the item, the cost of the
item is now 120.
This in effect means that the cost of sales for
the item you sold is understated by 20 (i.e.
new cost less old cost = 120 -100 = 20). The
system allocates this 20 to the Cost of goods sold
adjustment account. The reference for this entry on
the Inventory Journal Report report is C.G.S.
| Period End Processing | 355
Period End Processing

Inventory Period End
You use the Inventory Period End program to maintain the integrity of the data held in your Inventory
module, to close the current month and open up a new month for processing your inventory transactions
and to delete inventory information that is no longer required from the system.
This is achieved through the following functions:
Balance
Month end
Year end
Purge
Reset in-process journal & GIT flags
Balance lots (report only)
Note:
It is advisable to take a backup of your data before processing a Month end, a Year end or a Purge.
If the Work in Progress module is installed, then you will be unable to process the following transactions if
the Inventory and Work in Progress modules are not in the same month and year:
Job Receipts (Job Receipts)

Backflushing in Inventory movements (Inventory Movements)
Job/Kit Issues (Job Issues)
WIP issue floor stock allocations (WIP Issue Floor Stock Allocations)
WIP Inspection - Accept into stock (WIP Inspection Maintenance)
WIP Inspection - Scrap (WIP Inspection Maintenance)
WIP Inspection - Rework (WIP Inspection Maintenance)
You will be unable to process invoices for customers using the following programs if the Inventory module
is in an earlier period than the Accounts Receivable module, or the current period of the Inventory and
Accounts Receivable modules differ by more than one month:
Sales Order Entry

Document Print
Dispatch Note Consolidation
Inventory Period End

Field
Values
Description
Start Processing
Select this to begin processing the function you selected.
Print

Report, Warehouse Balance Report, Inventory Balance Report
and the GIT Balance Report output panes.
Save Form
Values

mode.
Field
Values
Description
See Design Mode.
Values
Description
Current month
number
This indicates the current month number of your Inventory

module.
Period end date
This indicates the period end date for the current month as
defined on the Periods tab of the Inventory Setup program.
Last period end

date
This indicates the date on which the previous period end was
processed.
Function
This enables you to indicate the processing function you want

to perform.
Balance
Select this to maintain the integrity of data held in your

Inventory module.
Information
Field
Control details
Processing
options
You use the Balance function to perform the following tasks:
Print a report by warehouse summarizing the total on-hand

inventory values and hash quantities.
Verify that the quantity on hand held against each bin
agrees with the total quantity on hand by warehouse (if you
are using FIFO costing or multiple bins).
Ensure that at least one FIFO bucket exists for each stock
code/warehouse combination (if you have changed your
costing method to FIFO).
Verify that the total on hand quantity of lots agrees with the
total on hand quantity of bins and the total quantity on hand
by warehouse (if you are using multiple bins and lots).
Note:
Month end only
If your inventory files are shared and you are not

in the shared company, then you will be unable
to run the Balance function.
If you selected the option: Use full goods in
transit facility (Inventory Setup - General
tab) and a goods in transit transaction is in
progress, you will be unable to run a Balance
function if a Requirements Planning Calculation
(Requirements Calculation) is currently in
progress.
Select this to close the current month and open up a new

month for processing your inventory transactions.
Note:
Field
Values
Description
If your inventory files are shared and you are not in the
shared company, then you will be unable to run the
Month end function.
Month end and

purge
Select this to close the current month and open up a new

month for processing your inventory transactions and delete
inventory information that is no longer required from the
system.
Year end only
Select this to perform the final month end of the year and start
a new financial year in the Inventory module.
Note:
If your inventory files are shared and you are not in the
shared company, then you will be unable to run the
year end function.
Year end and

purge
Select this to perform the final month end of the year, start a
new financial year in the Inventory module and delete inventory
information that is no longer required from the system.
Purge
Select this function to delete inventory information that is no

longer required from the system.
Note:
If your inventory files are shared, then inventory
movements, inspection information and temporary
stock codes are only considered for deletion if you are
running this function from the 'holding' company.
Reset
Select this to reset journal, GIT in transit and stock take

confirmation flags.
Refer to the Reset options section for details.
Balance lots
(report only)
Select this to review lot quantity adjustments recommended

by the system, before allowing the system to update your live
system.
Typically, when you run the Balance function and
discrepancies are detected between quantities across lots,
warehouses, multiple bins or FIFO buckets, the lot quantities
are assumed to be correct and the other records are adjusted
accordingly.
This function, however, enables you to view a report of the
proposed changes before actually implementing them.
Reset options
These options are only enabled when you select to process a

Balance or a Reset function.
Reset lowest
unprocessed
journal
Select this to locate the earliest Inventory and GRN journals

that have not been posted.
The Inventory GL Integration program creates and/or posts
General Ledger journals from Inventory transaction journals
according to your General Ledger Integration settings.
The Inventory GL Integration program uses the lowest
Field
Values
Description
unprocessed Inventory journal number as a starting point to
create/post these General Ledger journals.
Similarly, the Inventory GRN GL Integration program creates
and/or posts General Ledger journals from GRN transaction
journals according to your General Ledger Integration
settings. The Inventory GRN GL Integration program uses
the lowest unprocessed GRN journal number as a starting
point to create/post these General Ledger journals.
Selecting this option therefore ensures that no Inventory and/
or GRN journals are skipped when the General Ledger journals
are created/posted for Inventory and GRNs.
This option is only available when you select to process a
Balance function.
Note:
This function can also be performed using the GL
Integration Utility program.
Reset in-process
journal
Select this to restore in-process journals to a status that

enables you to print them.
You typically use this function if a power failure occurred during
the processing of your inventory journals. This would cause
the journals to be placed in an in-process status(*) and prevent
you from printing them. The Reset in-process journals function
effectively resets these in-process journals to a status of 0,
allowing you to print them.
This is automatically done as part of the Balance function and
is therefore not available when you select to process a Balance
function.
Reset GIT details
Select this to reset Goods in Transit flags.

If the GIT Structure Change flag is set to 'P' (in process), then
it is reset to 'Y' (structure validation required). If your inventory
is shared (Company Setup - Options tab), then this flag is only
checked when the Inventory Period End program is run from
the company that owns the inventory table/files.
function.
Reset stock take

confirmation
Select this to reset the stock take confirmation in process flag

on the warehouse control table/file.
The stock take confirmation in process flag is set when
the Stock Take Confirmation program is used to confirm
a stock take for a warehouse. This prevents multiple
operators simultaneously confirming a stock take for the same
warehouse. If the Stock Take Confirmation program is not
successfully completed, it is possible that this flag is not reset.
This prevents various other stock take functions from being
performed for the warehouse.
Field
Values
Description
function.
Warehouses
Warehouse
selection
Note:
If you enabled the option: Disallow single warehouse
selection during period end (Inventory Setup) then
this will disable the Warehouse selection field and
processing will occur for all warehouses.
All
Select this to indicate that you want processing to occur for all
warehouses.
Single
Select this to indicate that you want processing to occur for a

specific warehouse.
This option is only enabled when you select either the Balance
or Month end only options.
Note:
If you select to process a specific warehouse when
processing a month end, then the current month on the
Inventory Warehouse Control record is incremented
for the specified warehouse. However, the current
month number on the Inventory Control record is
not incremented (i.e. to finalize your month end and
increment your current month number, you must select
to process all warehouses).
Warehouse code
You use this field to indicate the specific warehouse for which
you want processing to occur.
FIFO valuation
Select this to value your inventory according to FIFO bins

instead of the current unit cost. You can only select this option
if you indicated that FIFO valuation is required (Inventory
Setup or Inventory Warehouses).
Recalc. current
cost from FIFO
buckets
Select this to recalculate FIFO costs. The cost is recalculated

by taking the total value of stock at FIFO value and dividing this
by the total quantity. The result is used to update the Unit cost
field on the stock warehouse record. This does not affect the
General Ledger.
Period end
options
You select this option only if you indicated that FIFO costing
is required in at least one warehouse (Inventory Setup or
Inventory Warehouses) and the option: Recalculate current
cost from FIFO buckets (Inventory Setup) is selected. If you
have only selected the option: FIFO valuation (Inventory
Setup), but no warehouse is set to use FIFO costing, then
selecting this option does nothing.
Field
Values
Description
Note:
You need to select this option before switching from
FIFO to average costing (Inventory Setup).
This option only affects the value of the current cost field on the
inventory warehouse record (UnitCost on InvWarehouse) for a
warehouse with FIFO costing.
The unit cost field on the warehouse where FIFO costing
is in use is the average cost (i.e. it is calculated for a FIFO
warehouse as if the warehouse was using average costing). It
is recalculated each time a receipt is processed for an item, but
not when the item is issued.
The value of the inventory is based on the FIFO buckets, not
the current unit cost held in the warehouse. If you want to get
an indication of the value of the warehouse from the unit cost,
then you need to select this option. This option allows you to
recalculate the unit cost field on the warehouse based on the
actual buckets you have in your FIFO warehouse.
For example:
Unit cost is calculated using the average costing method.
Say you have the following quantities on hand at the unit costs
shown:
1 at 10 = 10
2 at 15 = 30
3 at 16 = 48
Total FIFO cost is 88 and quantity 6. Therefore the average
cost is 14.66667.
You sell 2, so you now have:
1 at 15 = 15
3 at 16 = 48
Average cost is not recalculated on a sale or issue, so you now
have a total cost of 63 for 4 items, with an average of 15.75.
Therefore, your average cost in the warehouse does not reflect
the average of the actual FIFO buckets you have. To adjust
this, you select this option to recalculate your warehouse cost
based on buckets.
You will be unable to select this option if you have been denied
access to the activity: Inventory recalc current cost (FIFO)
(Operators).
Recalc. actual cost If you select this option, then the warehouse cost is
from FIFO buckets recalculated for each actual costing item by adding up all FIFO
costs and dividing by the quantity on hand in the warehouse.
The result is used to update the Unit cost field on the stock
warehouse record. This does not affect the General Ledger.
Field
Values
Description
This option only affects the value of the current cost field on the
inventory warehouse record (UnitCost on InvWarehouse) for a
stock item which uses Actual costing.
This option only applies if you are using Actual costing
(Inventory Setup - General tab) and works in a similar fashion
to the Recalc. current cost from FIFO buckets option.
Recalc. actual cost Select this to recalculate and adjust the actual cost bucket
original receipt qty original receipt quantities for all Adjustment transactions
previously processed in the Inventory Movements program.
This option only applies when using Actual costing (Inventory
Setup - General tab) and running the Balance function.
Remove bins with
zero quantity
Select this if you want to delete bins containing a zero quantity.

A bin is only removed if the bin quantity was zero for the past
three months.
You can only access this field if the option: If the option:
Multiple bins in use is selected against the warehouse(s)
selected (Inventory Warehouses).
This option is never enabled when you select the Balance
function.
Delete temporary
stock codes
Select this to delete temporary stock codes that meet all criteria
for deletion (see Purge).
This option is only enabled when you select the Purge function.
Balance goods in
transit
This option is available only if the full goods in transit system is

installed (Inventory Setup). In addition, you can only access
this option if you selected the Balance function.
This option enables you to indicate whether you want to include
the goods in transit details in the balancing routine.
Selecting this resets GIT transactions which are flagged
as being In process and ensures they are displayed in the
Inventory Movements program. This is useful if an operator
experienced a system problem whilst processing a GIT and the
GIT is still flagged as being 'In process.'
This option is selected automatically when running the month
end or year end functions, but is deselected automatically if
you select the Ignore balance function option.
Ignore balance
function
Select this if you want to bypass the balance function that is

normally run when performing a month end or year end.
If you select the option to ignore the balance function, then the
Balance goods in transit option is deselected automatically.
Danger:
Because the balance function is used to correct an outof-balance condition detected by the system, bypassing
Field
Values
Description
this function may result in inaccurate inventory values
being printed on the month end and year end reports.
Exclude
warehouse totals
from report
This option is only available if you selected the option: Ignore

balance function.
After processing
complete
Select this if you do not want the system to calculate the

inventory value and hash quantity for each warehouse you
selected to process. If you select this option, then the time to
process the month or year end is reduced, but the warehouse
totals are not printed on the report.
These options relate to the information displayed in the Report,
Warehouse Balance Report, Inventory Balance Report and the
GIT Balance Report output panes.
Note:
By default, all output panes are selected for printing.
You can, however, selectively indicate the individual
output panes for which you want to generate reports.
Similarly, you can selectively indicate the individual
output panes for which you want to email these reports.
Purge details
These fields are displayed for information purposes if you

selected the Purge only, Month end and purge or Year end and
purge functions.
Refer to Purge for additional information.
Report
Messages relating to the function you selected are displayed.
Warehouse Balance Report

The Warehouse Balance Report is a summary of the total on-hand inventory values and hash quantities by
warehouse.
The results of the Balance lots (report only) function are also displayed in this pane.
The error message 'Some stock codes were processed where the corresponding warehouse control did
not exist' occurs when there is a record on the InvWarehouse file/table that does not have a corresponding
record on the InvWhControl file/table. These warehouses will not have a description against them on
the report produced by the Inventory Period End program. To rectify this, you will need to identify the
stock items that belong to that warehouse and change the warehouse code. It is unlikely that this will be
problematic, as the on hand quantity for items in that warehouse should be zero. The situation generally
only arises when data has been converted from older versions of Encore / Award where all the records
were not necessarily removed when a warehouse was deleted.
Inventory Balance Report

Errors encountered during the Balance function are displayed in this pane.
GIT Balance Report

If you selected the Balance goods in transit option, then GIT errors encountered during the Balance
function are displayed in this pane.
If you selected the setup option: Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory Setup - General
tab), then when you run the Balance function, the report produced may contain lines with a GIT reference
number and the comment "Master updated." This occurs if the balance of the Master record for the GIT
reference does not equal the total values of the Detail records for that GIT reference. The Master record
balance is then updated.
Period End Reporting

You perform your Month end and Year end reporting after you have completed posting transactions for the
previous month.
Under normal circumstances you will have already started processing information for the current month
before you print your month end reports.
Transactions posted to the current month do not affect reports for previous months. To prevent
transactions from being posted to previous months while printing your month end reports, you can set the
previous month's status to closed (Inventory Setup) This does not stop you from reporting on the previous
month. You can re-open and close previous months as often as required.
Balance
The system performs the following routine for a Balance:
If you selected the Aged inventory valuation option (Inventory Setup) then the total quantity of the
aged valuation buckets is compared to the total on hand quantity for each warehouse. If these figures
do not balance, the aged valuation buckets are adjusted to match the on hand quantity, commencing
from the current year.
The on hand quantity and value for each warehouse is added to the totals printed at the end of the
report.
If FIFO costing is installed:
Any bucket with a zero on hand quantity in the current and previous two periods is deleted.
Any bucket with a negative on hand quantity is set to zero.
If you selected the FIFO valuation option, then the warehouse totals are updated by the value and
quantity of the FIFO buckets, and not those of the warehouse.
The FIFO buckets are renumbered
If no FIFO buckets are held on file, a FIFO bucket is created with a bucket number of zero; the
current on hand quantity and cost from the warehouse; and the current system date as the last
receipt date.
If the total on hand quantity of the FIFO buckets for a warehouse does not agree with the on
hand quantity stored against the warehouse, an error line is printed showing the warehouse on
hand quantity; the total FIFO buckets on hand quantity; and the difference between the two. The
warehouse on hand quantity is updated to match the total of the FIFO buckets.
If you selected to recalculate the current cost from FIFO buckets, then the total value and quantity of
the FIFO buckets are accumulated and used to calculate a new unit cost for each inventory item.
If LIFO costing is installed:
Any bucket with a zero on hand quantity is deleted.

Any bucket with a negative on hand quantity, is set to zero.
The warehouse totals are updated from the value and quantity of the LIFO buckets, and not those of
the warehouse.
The LIFO buckets are renumbered.
If no LIFO buckets are held on file, a LIFO bucket is created with a bucket number of zero; the
current on hand quantity and cost from the warehouse; and the current system date as the last
receipt date.
If the total on hand quantity of the LIFO buckets for a warehouse does not match the on hand
quantity stored against the warehouse, an error line is printed showing the warehouse on hand
quantity; the total LIFO buckets on hand quantity; and the difference between the two. The
warehouse on hand quantity is updated to match the total of the LIFO buckets.
If Multiple bins is installed:
If no bins exist for a stock code, a default bin is created. The entire quantity on hand for the stock
code/warehouse is allocated to the default bin and the current system date is set to the last receipt
date.
If multiple bins are installed in the warehouse and a bin location is defined against the stock code's
warehouse, then this bin location is used to generate the default bin. Otherwise, the warehouse code
becomes the bin location.
If the total on hand quantity of the bins for a warehouse does not match the on hand quantity stored
against the warehouse, then the bins are adjusted to equal the on hand quantity stored against the
warehouse.
If multiple bins are installed in the warehouse, then an 'adjust' bin is created for the adjustment
quantity. Otherwise, the adjustment is processed against the default bin.

If Multiple bins and Lot Traceability is installed:
If no bins exist for a stock code then a default bin is created. The entire quantity on hand for the
stock code/warehouse is allocated to the default bin and the current system date is set to the last
receipt date.
If a bin location is defined against the stock code's warehouse, then this bin location is used to
generate the default bin. Otherwise, the warehouse code becomes the bin location.
If the total on hand quantity of lots for a warehouse matches the on hand quantity of the bins, but
does not match the total on hand quantity stored against the warehouse, then the total on hand
quantity for the warehouse is updated and an adjustment entry is posted to the journal file and
movement file.
If the total on hand quantity of lots for a warehouse does not match the total on hand quantity of
either the bins or the total on hand quantity stored against the warehouse, then the quantity stored
against the bins is set to zero and replaced by the lot quantity. The total on hand quantity for the
warehouse is updated and an adjustment entry is posted to the journal file and movement file.
You can run the Balance lots (report only) function to review lot quantity adjustments recommended
by the system before updating your live system.
If Serial Number Tracking is installed
If the Sales Order module is not installed then the quantity allocated field (held against each
warehouse) is set to zero and recalculated from any serial numbers in stock that are on loan, in for a
service, or at the service depot.
If Engineering Change Control (ECC) is used
An ECC item is treated in exactly the same manner as a lot traceable item, regardless of whether
Lot Traceability (Lot Traceability Setup) is installed.
The LotDetail record is the only place that the stock level of a specific ECC revision/release is held.
Therefore the report indicates an 'Out of balance lot adjustment', the adjustment is made from the
LotDetail record when updating the warehouse(s) to the total of the individual revisions/releases.
Actual costing
If Actual costing for Lot traceable items is selected (Inventory Setup - General tab), then the balancing
of lots is done by balancing to multiple bins if they exist. Bins are updated to match the lot total. Each
lot is balanced to its FIFO buckets and if there is a variance, the FIFO buckets are updated and a FIFO
journal is created. Adjustments are processed to the first or last FIFO bucket according to the FIFO/
LIFO options selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab).
For each stock code, the lot total is checked against the warehouse total and the warehouse total
is adjusted to match the lot total if a variance exists. If there are FIFO adjustments, then a normal
journal is created indicating the total value of the FIFO adjustments and the quantity of the warehouse
adjustment.
Goods in Transit detail lines are set to 'complete' if the full quantity transferred has been received and
the GIT line was not set to 'complete' at the time of receipt.
The 'In process' flag against GITs are cleared if the option: Balance goods in transit is selected.
If you have NOT selected the setup option: Retain last 12 months' opening stock balances (Inventory
Setup - History tab), then any opening balances and costs retained for the last months are deleted.
Month End
The system performs the following routine for a Month end:
For each warehouse, the number of months' usage is increased by 1 (the year-to-date usage is used
to establish an items' ABC category). If the year-to-date usage value against each warehouse now
represents 13 months, then the value is annualized to represent 12 months' usage. If the quantity sold
or issued for the last 12 months does not exceed zero, then the usage value is set to zero.
The warehouse total quantities and values are updated as outlined in the balance function.
The monthly sales history buckets are rolled one month. The total month-to-date sales and/or issues
are moved to the first history bucket, depending on your selection at the Sales history qty's to include
field (Inventory Setup).
All month-to-date fields for each warehouse are set to zero.
The opening balance quantity for each warehouse is set to the current on hand quantity.
If you enabled the option: Retain last 12 months opening stock balances (Inventory Setup), then the
monthly quantity and cost buckets are rolled 1 month. The first quantity bucket is set to the current on
hand quantity for the warehouse, and the first cost bucket is set to the current cost for the warehouse. If
you are using FIFO or LIFO costing, the first cost bucket is calculated as the total value in the buckets
divided by the on hand quantity for the warehouse.
If you are using multiple bins and you select the Remove bins with zero quantity field, then bins with a
zero on hand quantity and zero sales order quantity to ship are deleted. The default bin created by the
system is never removed.
If you selected to process a specific warehouse, then the current financial month for the selected
warehouse is incremented by one. You will be unable to select a specific warehouse if you have
disallowed the selection of a single warehouse for processing during a period end (Inventory Setup).
If you selected to process all warehouses, then the inventory control record is updated as follows:
If you enabled the option: Close previous month automatically (Company Setup) then the current
month is set to a status of closed. Otherwise the second previous month is set to a status of closed.
The current system date is moved to the month end date for the current financial month.
The current financial month number is incremented by one.
The current financial month is set to a status of open.
The current financial month and year for all warehouses are set to the current financial month and
year on the inventory control record.
Year End
The system performs the following routine for a Year end:
All the steps outlined in the Month end function are processed.
If you selected the Aged inventory valuation option (Inventory Setup) then the aged valuation buckets
are rolled.
The year-to-date sales value is moved to the previous year-to-date sales value.
The total year-to-date quantity sold and/or issued are moved to the previous year-to-date quantity sold,
depending on your selection at the Sales history qty's to include field (Inventory Setup).
All year-to-date fields for each warehouse are set to zero.
The inventory control record is updated as follows:
The current financial month number is reset to 1.

The current financial year is incremented by 1.
The current year's next journal number; month end dates; and open/closed flags are moved to the
previous year.
The next journal number for the current year is set to 1.
The current year's month end dates are all set to zero.
The first month of the year (which is now the current month) is set to a status of open.
The last three year end dates are rolled.
The current system date is moved to the first year end date.
If multiple companies are sharing the same inventory files (Company Setup) all journal numbers for
the shared companies are reset as part of the year end function in the company that is being shared.
Purge
A purge can be run together with either a month end or year end, or as a separate process.
The system performs the following routine when doing a Purge:
If Inventory is linked to General Ledger in summary or detail (General Ledger Integration), then
inventory and GRN distribution entries are deleted if:
the General Ledger journals for the transactions have been created (Inventory GL Integration)
they have been posted to the General Ledger (GL Journal Entry)
the ledger year and period against the distribution entry is earlier than the calculated cut-off month
and year, which is based on your entry at the Number of months to retain - Inventory journals field
If Inventory is not linked to the General Ledger, then all inventory and GRN distribution entries that have
been printed are deleted.
If the Full goods in transit facility is in use (Inventory Setup - General tab), then completed goods in
transit detail lines are deleted if the period and year in which the transfer was completed is earlier than
the calculated cut-off month and year, which is based on your entry at the Number of G/L periods to
retain - Goods in transit entries (Inventory Setup - History tab).
If the Inventory Period End option: Delete temporary stock codes is selected, then temporary stock
codes are deleted when all of the following conditions are met:
the stock code is not on full or partial hold (Stock Code Maintenance)
the stock code is on full or partial hold, but the option: Define Delete Options - On partial or full hold
(Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected
no Blanket purchase order contracts exist for the stock code
the stock code is defined as a kit type S or K item and no sales orders exist against it
no Bill of Landed Costs exists for the stock code
Bill of Landed Costs exist for the stock code, but the option: Define Delete Options - Part of a bill of
Landed cost tracking (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected
no components exist against the stock code
no operations exist against the stock code
the stock code is not in use in a Bill of Materials
no build schedules exist for the stock code
no forecasts exist for the stock code
the stock code is a co-product, but is not used in a Bill of Materials or a job
the stock code is a notional part, but no co-products are attached to it
no customer/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code
customer/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code, but the option: Define Delete
Options - Customer/stock code cross reference (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected
no supplier/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code
supplier/stock code cross-references exist against the stock code, but the option: Define Delete
Options - Supplier/stock code cross reference (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected
no movement has occurred during the current period, previous period 1 or previous period 2 in a
warehouse in which the stock code is stocked
the stock code has not been used in a configuration
the stock has been used in a configuration, but the option: Define Delete Options - Used in a
configuration (Inventory Setup - Options tab) is selected
the stock is not used in a sales order or purchase order
the stock is used in a sales order or purchase order, but the option: Define Delete Options Temporary stock code has sales order details and/or purchase order details (Inventory Setup Options tab) is selected, provided there is no outstanding quantity against the order.
the following quantities are zero against all warehouses in which the item is stocked:
On order quantity
On hand quantity
Quantity allocated to sales orders
Backorder quantity
Quantity allocated to Work in Progress
Quantity in transit
Quantity dispatched but not invoiced
the opening balance in Previous period 1 and Previous period 2 is zero against all warehouses in
which the item is stocked
no stock take is in progress against a warehouse in which the item is stocked
Inventory movements are deleted according to the number of records you are retaining (or the age of
records) for each stock code/warehouse combination.
If you select to retain records by date (Inventory Setup - History tab), then the number of days
between the current company date and the transaction date against each movement is compared to the
maximum number of days you are retaining records. If a movement record is older than the maximum
number of days, it is removed.
If you select to retain records by number (Inventory Setup - History tab), then the number of movement
records is counted for each stock code/warehouse combination. If the number of records exceeds the
maximum number of records you are retaining, then the excess records (starting from the oldest) are
deleted.
Inventory inspection records are deleted when all of the following conditions are met:
the record is not for a traceable stock code.

there is zero quantity off-site.
the quantity counted is complete.
the quantity counted is equal to the total of the quantity accepted and scrapped.
Inventory journals that meet all of the following conditions are deleted:
the General Ledger journals for the transactions have been created (Inventory GL Integration)
The journal was posted in a financial month and year prior to the cut-off month and year (GL
Journal Entry).
If the Interface module is installed and you selected the Exports required option (Interface System
Setup), then the journal must either have been exported, or the age of the journal (compared to
the current company date) must exceed the number of days that you are retaining records before
automatic deletion (Interface System Setup)
Printed inventory documents are deleted if the transaction posting year and month is earlier than the
calculated cut-off month and year (see Inventory Setup - History tab).
Price history is deleted if the date of the price change is earlier than the calculated cut-off date. The cutoff date is calculated as the current company date less the number of days or months to Retain history
of price changes (Inventory Setup - History tab).
FIFO buckets are deleted if they have a zero quantity and the number of days between the current
company date and the bucket's last issue date is greater than the days or months specified at the No of
days to retain buckets with zero quantity option (Inventory Setup - History tab).
A report containing a summary of the following for each file processed:
the number of ledger distribution entries deleted

the number of movements deleted
the number of inspection items deleted
the number of inventory document transaction items deleted
the number of inventory journals deleted
the number of goods in transit entries deleted
the number of inventory price history items deleted
the number of temporary stock codes deleted
| Queries | 369
Queries
Inventory Query
You use the Inventory Query program to view static details held on file against your stock items, as well
as any transactions that have been processed against them.
This program can be run at any time.
Note:
You can prevent the unauthorized viewing of stock item costs by denying operators access to the
field: Show costs in Inventory/WIP queries (Operators).
Be careful that you do not deny an operator access to the viewing of costs in this program, while
allowing the same operator the facility to maintain stock codes. In this scenario, the operator would
still be able to view details of BOM costs held against the item.
The number of decimals displayed in this query depend on your entry at the following fields:
Edit quantities using decimals associated with item (Company Setup - Options tab)
Maximum number of decimals (Stock Code Maintenance)
If you are new to this query, then the following information will help you achieve the best results:
The information shown is always up to date (i.e. the query will reflect the latest information for stock
items that have been captured or maintained).
If you know the stock code, then you can enter it directly and press the Tab or Enter key to view the
information.
If you do not know the stock code, then you can use the browse function to locate the code.
You can personalize this query in a number of ways. These include:
setting preferences that affect what information is displayed. These settings can be retained for
future use
configuring property sheets (e.g. the section headed Stock Code Details). This includes being able
to sequence items by dragging them up or down, to show important items first
configuring the Warehouse Values, Warehouse History and Movements listviews. This includes
being able to sequence columns by dragging them left or right, sorting columns and changing
column widths
configuring the layout of the panes on the screen, including hiding or displaying panes
Inventory Query
Field
Values
Description
Exit
Multiple Bins
Select this to view bins for the stock item (see Multiple Bins
for Stock Code).
File
Query
Note:
This function is available only if you enabled the option:
Multiple bins (Inventory Setup).
| Queries | 370
Field
Values
Description
bins in SYSPRO.
FIFO/LIFO
Buckets
Select this to view FIFO or LIFO buckets for this item (see
FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code).
Note:
This function is available only you enabled the option:
FIFO valuation at the FIFO Valuation field, or you
selected FIFO at the Costing method field (Inventory
Setup or Inventory Warehouses).
or
You enabled the option: LIFO costing at the Costing
method field (Inventory Setup).
Lots
Select this to view lot traceability details for the stock item (see
Lot Maintenance).
Note:
This function is available only if the stock code
is defined as a traceable item (Stock Code
Maintenance).
Reserved Parent
Lots
Select this to use the Parent Lot Reservations for Stock

Code program to view reserved lot information for the stock
item.
Note:
This option is only enabled if the stock code is
defined as a lot traceable parent item (Stock Code
Serial Tracking
Select this to use the Serial Number Maintenance program to

view serial number tracking information for the stock item.
Note:
This option is only enabled if the stock code is defined
as a serialized item (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking).
Reserved Parent
Serials
Select this to use the Parent Serial Reservations for Stock

Code program to view reserved serial information for the stock
item.
Note:
This option is only enabled if the stock code is defined
as a serialized parent item (Stock Code Maintenance
- Tracking).
Alternate Stock
Codes
Select this to view and maintain alternate stock codes that

have been assigned to the stock item (see Alternate Stock
Codes).
| Queries | 371
Field
Values
Description
Goods in Transit
Select this to use the Goods in Transit Details for Stock

Code program to view the Goods in Transit details for the
selected stock item.
Note:
This option is available only if you enabled the option:
Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory
Setup).
Movements
Select this to view a detailed history of sales and inventory

movements processed against the stock item (see Inventory
Movements for Stock Code).
Customer Stock X- Select this to view and maintain any stock code interchange
Ref
details held on file for a specific customer, or all customers.
You establish an interchange using the Customer Stock
Codes program (Accounts Receivable).
This enables you to selectively link customers to specific
SYSPRO stock codes. When the customer's stock code is
entered during processing within the Sales Order Entry
program, the system automatically extracts the SYSPRO stock
code.
Note:
Against the customer you must enable the option:
Stock code interchange required (AR Customer
Maintenance).
Supplier Stock
Code X-Ref
Select this to view and maintain a cross-reference between a

SYSPRO stock code and a supplier catalogue number.
ATP
Select this to view the available to promise details for a

particular stock code/warehouse combination.
You can view details of the individual supply and demand that
affects the available to promise for the stock item, as well as
time fence calculations that were performed (see Inventory
ATP Query and ATP Calculation Examples).
Cost Analysis
Select this to view costs in a specific unit of measure.

Cumulative costs can be viewed by value, percentage markup,
or percent profit margin.
Return
Merchandise
Select this to view RMA transaction details processed against

the stock item (see RMA for Stock Code).
Sales
Sales Orders
Select this to view outstanding customer orders that have been

placed for the stock item.
Forecast
Select this to view and maintain forecasts for the stock item.
Dispatch
Select this to browse on dispatch notes for an order (see

Dispatch Notes).
| Queries | 372
Field
Values
Description
Pricing
Select this to view and maintain the price codes and prices
assigned to the stock item.
Quantity Breaks
Select this to view and maintain the quantity discount breaks

assigned to the stock item.
Note:
This function is available only if the pricing method
defined for the stock item is defined as quantity
discounted (Stock Code Maintenance).
Goods in Transit
(Sales)
Select this to view the Goods in Transit details for the selected
stock item.
Note:
This option is available only if you enabled the option:
Use full Goods in Transit transfers facility (Inventory
Setup).
Purchasing
Purchase Orders
Select this to view purchase orders that have been placed

Blanket P/Orders
Select this to view blanket purchase orders that have been

placed against the stock item (see Inventory Browse on BPO
by Stock Code).
Requisitions
Select this to view requisition details captured for the stock item
using the Requisition Query for Stock Code program.
Inspection
Select this to use the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code

program to view inspection details for this item.
Note:
This function is available only if the item has been
defined as requiring inspection (Stock Code
Maintenance).
Foreign Prices
Select this to view and maintain foreign price details for the
stock item.
Alternate Suppliers Select this to view and maintain alternate supplier details for
the stock item.
LCT Routes
Select this to view all the shipping routes defined for the item.
Production
Work in Progress
Select this to view information regarding work in progress jobs

for the stock item.
Although completed jobs are excluded from this function by
default, you can use the Include menu to indicate that you want
to view details for completed jobs.
Allocations
Select this to view material allocations of the stock item to jobs.
| Queries | 373
Field
Values
Description
Although completed allocations for jobs are excluded from this
function by default, you can use the Include menu to indicate
that you want to view details for completed allocations.
ECC Quantities
Select this to view quantities per revision/release per

warehouse for the stock item (see Browse on ECC Rev/Rel).
This function is available only for ECC-controlled items where
the stock control level is set to Revision or Release (Bill of
Materials Setup).
Note:
The description Revision/Release is the default
description assigned to this function. You can change
the wording of these fields from the User defined tab
section of the Bill of Materials Setup program.
ECC History
Select this to display all the revisions/releases for the stock

item you are querying (see ECC Revision/Releases).
Select View Stock Information from the Function menu to view
stock information for each revision/release.
This function is available only for ECC-controlled items where
the stock control level is set to Revision or Release (Bill of
Materials Setup).
Where Used
Select this to query where a specific component stock item

is used in the manufacturing process (see Browse on
Component Where-used).
If you have enabled the option: Alternate routings required (Bill
of Materials Setup), then you can change the route.
Structure &
Routing
Select this to view all operations and materials attached to the

stock item (see Structures and Routings).
Structure
Select this to view all materials attached to the stock item (see
Browse on Structures).
Routing
Select this to view all operations attached to the stock item

(see Browse on Operations).
Co-products
Select this to use the BOM Co-products program to view and

maintain co-products attached to a notional part.
This option is only enabled when the item you are querying is
defined as a Notional part (Stock Code Maintenance).
Build Schedule
Select this to view and maintain build schedules for the stock
item.
Note:
This function is available only for MPS and Statistical
items.
WIP Inspection
Select this to view details of items that are in WIP inspection

using the WIP Inspection Maintenance program.
| Queries | 374
Field
Values
Description
Work in Progress inspection required (WIP Setup - General
1 tab) and the stock item you are querying is made-in and
defined as traceable or inspection required (Stock Code
Material
Requirements
Select this to use the Requirements Planning Query program

to view the results of the Requirements Calculation for the
stock item.
Company
Calendar
Select this to view and maintain the company calendar (see

Company Calendar).
Stock code
You use this field to enter the stock code you want to query.
Find
Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate an item

according to search criteria.
Play
You use this function to view any multimedia objects that have
been assigned to the item.
Edit
You use this function to maintain multimedia objects for the

item (see Multimedia ).
Bitmaps
Select this to view bitmap images assigned to your stock items.
Notes
Select this to view and maintain various text notations against

the stock item. A tick alongside any of the notations indicates
that text has been assigned to the item.
Notations are stored in the Inventory Narrations Detail file
(INVNAD - CISAM/InvNarrations - SQL) and can be included
on a report defined using the Create Report program.
The text is determined by the narration class as follows:
T - Technical spec
S - S/order additional text
P - P/order additional text
W - Job narrations
I - Inspection text
D - Dangerous goods handling
Note:
You can prevent the unauthorized editing of these
notational fields using the Fields function located on the
Security tab of the Operators program.
Technical
Specification

information text.
This text can be printed on the GRN documents, inspection
documents and factory documents.
Sales Order Add

Text

information text that can be retrieved onto a sales order and
printed on sales order documents.
| Queries | 375
Field
Values
Description
P/Order Add Text

information text that can be retrieved into a purchase order and
printed on purchase order documents.
Job Narrations

information text that can be printed on factory documentation
and viewed using the WIP Query program.
Inspection Text

Dangerous Goods
Handling

information text that can be retrieved into a sales order/
purchase order and printed on sales order/purchase order
documents.
In addition, you can be notified during Sales Order Entry
when dangerous goods text is held against a stock item being
processed.
Note:
The facility to be notified of dangerous goods text held
against a stock item does not apply to credit notes,
debit notes or quick entry orders. In addition, this does
not apply to components generated from kit sales or to
items generated using the Product Configurator.
Notation List
Select this to selectively print stock code notes assigned to the

stock code (see Notation List).
Stock Code Details

Details that can be viewed in this pane include the following:
Stock code
Stock Code Quick View

Stock Code Setup (see Stock Code Maintenance)
Multimedia
Description
This describes the stock code and is displayed throughout the system whenever the stock code is
entered. You can use it to verify that the correct item has been entered.
Long description
This is an additional description assigned to a stock code which can be printed on reports and inventory
documents.
Date of supersession
If the stock code's supercession date is before the current system date, then the supercession date is
displayed in red.
Units of measure:
This is only displayed if the stock item is not set to use Unit quantity processing (Stock Code
Maintenance). The Other unit of measure cannot be defined if Unit quantity processing is required.
Cost unit of measure (see Cost Unit of Measure)
| Queries | 376
Product class (see Product Classes)

If you define product classes using the Product Classes program, without defining a branch code for
the product class, then the product class description is displayed. If, however, you selected to view
product classes by branch and defined the product class against a specific branch, then the product
class description is not displayed. The reason is that you could define different descriptions for a single
product class in the different branches.
The product class description is retrieved from the SALPDS file/table.

ABC classification
This is displayed if you selected the option: ABC analysis required (Stock Code Maintenance) and
you processed ABC Analysis report for ALL warehouses. This classification therefore indicates the
classification for the stock item based on the usage of the stock item in all warehouses (i.e. across the
entire company).
Queries
The following queries can be selected from this option:
Movements (see Inventory Movements for Stock Code)

Customer stock x-ref (see Customer Stock Codes)
Supplier stock x-ref (see Supplier/Stock Code Details)
ATP (see Inventory ATP Query)
Cost analysis
Approved manufacturers (see Approved Manufacturers Parts)
Multiple bins (see Multiple Bins for Stock Code)
FIFO/LIFO Buckets (see FIFO/LIFO Bins for Stock Code)
Lots (see Lot Maintenance)
Reserved parent lots (see Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code)
Serials (see Serial Number Maintenance)
Reserved parent serials (see Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code)
Goods in transit (see Goods in Transit Details for Stock Code)
Alternate stock codes (see Alternate Stock Codes)
Customer price query (see Customer Price Query)
Distribution
Tax information:
Tax code (see Tax Codes)

Supplier
Query (see Supplier Query)

Supplier Setup (see Stock Code Maintenance)
Service charges (see Service Charges)
If a service charge is attached to this stock item, then you can use the Service Charge Maintenance
program to query the details of the service charge.
Queries
Forecast - see Forecast Maintenance.

Dispatch Query - see Dispatch Notes.
Quantity breaks - see Stock Code Quantity Discounts.
Goods in Transit (Sales) - see Goods in Transit Details for Stock Code.
RMA Query - see RMA for Stock Code.
Blanket Purchase Order - see Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code.
| Queries | 377
Requisitions - see Requisition Query for Stock Code.

Inspection - see Goods in Inspection for Stock Code.
Sales orders
This enables you to use the Sales Orders for Stock Code program to view details of customer
orders for the stock item.
Purchase Orders - see Purchase Orders for Stock Code.
Pricing - see Pricing for a Stock Code.
Foreign Prices - see Foreign Purchase Prices.
Alternate Suppliers - see Alternate Suppliers.
LCT Routes - see LCT Route Query.
Supplier's Contracts - see Blanket P/O Browse on Contracts.
Production
Work in Progress (see Work in Progress for Stock Code)

Structure & routing (see Structures and Routings)
Allocations (see Allocations for Stock Code)
Quotations (see Quotation Query by Stock Code)
Warehouse to use:
Warehouse (seeInventory Warehouses)

Bill of materials:
These costs are updated when you change the costs associated with the specific item (manual cost) or
when the cost implosion is run and changes in the cost of an item are rolled up to the parent part.
Sub contract cost
Sub contract costs are only displayed separately from material costs if you selected the option: Split
subcontract operation costs from material costs (Bill of Materials Setup - General tab).
Low level code
This indicates the low level code for the stock item and is calculated when the Low Level Code
Calculation program is run.
The level code for a parent item is 0, for the sub-assembly it is 1 and for the component it is 2. This
numbering is recursive down to a maximum of 15 levels.
If the item is a top level parent or the Low Level Code Calculation has not yet been run, then no
information is displayed in this field.
Queries
Note:
You will be unable to access the Where Used, Structure and Routing queries if you have not
been granted access to the activity: BOM Access to Structure and Routings (Operators Security tab).
ECC Quantities - see Browse on ECC Rev/Rel.

ECC History - see ECC Revision/Releases.
Where Used - see Browse on Component Where-used.
Structure - see Browse on Structures.
Routing - see Browse on Operations.
Build Schedules - see Build Schedule Maintenance.
WIP Inspection - see WIP Inspection Maintenance.
Material requirements - see Requirements Planning Query.
| Queries | 378
Warehouse Values
You use the options in the Warehouse Values Selection pane to indicate your preferences for this tab (see
Warehouse Values Selection).
You can switch the Smart Link on the listviews on and off by pressing Alt + Shift + F7.
Details that can be viewed in this listview include the following:
Available
The quantity available is the quantity on hand less the quantity allocated to sales orders for the item
in the selected warehouse. The quantity allocated to sales orders is the order quantity and includes
quantities on backorder.
Note:
Unallocated
Calculated as: (quantity on hand - allocated to sales orders - allocated to work in progress)
On hand
This indicates the quantity of the item physically in the warehouse. This includes quantities on hold.
In inspection
This indicates the quantity of purchased items awaiting inspection (i.e. receipted into inspection but not
receipted into stock).
In transit
This indicates the outstanding non-immediate warehouse transfers shown against the target
warehouse.
On order
This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers.
Allocated to sales orders
Calculated as: (quantity on back order + sales order ship quantity).
These quantities exclude unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities.
Note that the ship quantities for credit notes are NOT included in the sales order ship quantity. Credit
note quantities are never included in the allocations as these quantities are only available once the
credit has been fully processed.
On back order
This indicates the sales order back order quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated scheduled order
back order quantities.
Allocated to WIP
This indicates the outstanding materials to be issued to jobs.
This includes allocations to both confirmed and unconfirmed jobs.

Future free
Calculated as: (quantity on hand + quantity in inspection + quantity in transit + quantity on order allocated to sales orders - allocated to work in progress).
ABC class
This is displayed if you selected the option: ABC analysis required (Stock Code Maintenance) and you
processed ABC Analysis report for this specific warehouse. This classification therefore indicates the
classification for the stock item based on the usage of the stock item in this specific warehouse only.
| Queries | 379
Dispatched not invoiced
This indicates goods delivered on a dispatch note, but not yet invoiced.
Landed cost multiplier
This indicates the value of the cost multiplier defined against the warehouse for this stock item
(Warehouses for Stock Code).
RMA inspection
This indicates the total quantity currently in inspection as a result of RMA receipts.
YTD usage value
This is an annualized figure and is always based on the last 12 periods usage. It is not cleared at year
end.
The YTD usage value is increased in the period by all sales as the invoices are processed (i.e. at the
cost used at the time the invoice was processed). Similarly issues update this value at the time of the
issue.
Thus, during a month this figure is the last calculated usage from the month-end process plus any
movements that have taken place during the month.
The year to date usage value is updated perpetually. It is updated during the month by programs such
as Document Print, which takes the cost value of the stocked lines as they are invoiced, and adds this
to the YtdUsageValue field.
It is updated for each warehouse as follows when the Month end or Year end function of the Inventory
Period End program is run:
The number of months usage field is increased by 1

If the year to date usage value against the warehouse now represents 13 months, then the value is
annualized to represent 12 months usage.
If the quantity sold or issued for the last 12 months is less than zero, then the usage value is set to
zero.
At the Inventory month end you will now have a figure that represents 13 months information, as it is
multiplied by 13 and divided by 12 to give the annualized value
The ABC Analysis program uses the usage value to classify stock items into A, B, C or D class items.
An example starting with a new stock code is as follows:
Month 1
Sales = 100
Total = 100
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 100 / 1 * 12 =
1200
Month 2
Sales = 120
Total = 220
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 220 / 2 * 12 =
1320
Month 3
Sales = 120
Total = 340
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 340 / 3 * 12 =
1360
Month 4
Sales = 110
Total = 450
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 450 / 4 * 12 =
1350
Month 5
Sales = 120
Total = 570
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 570 / 5 * 12 =
1368
| Queries | 380
Month 6
Sales = 120
Total = 690
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 690 / 6 * 12 =
1380
Month 7
Sales = 110
Total = 800
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 800 / 7 * 12 =
1371
Month 8
Sales = 120
Total = 920
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 920 / 8 * 12 =
1380
Month 9
Sales = 120
Total = 1040
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 1040 /9 * 12 =
1387
Month 10
Sales = 130
Total = 1170
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 1170 / 10 * 12 =
1404
Month 11
Sales = 120
Total = 1290
Month end - no
action
ABC report calcs

as 1290 / 11 * 12 =
1407
Month 12
Sales = 100
Total = 1390
Month end - no
action
ABC report uses

1390
Month 1 of the
next year
Sales = 150
Total = 1540
Month end
ABC report uses
calculation - 1540 / 1422
13 * 12 = 1422
Month 2 of the
next year
Sales = 110
Total = 1650
Month end
ABC report uses
calculation - 1650 / 1523
13 * 12 = 1523
Year end - no
action
The Annual usage value = Usage brought forward from previous period end plus ((quantity issued x
cost) + (quantity sold x cost) for the current period to date). The cost at the time the transaction was
processed is used, not the current cost.
The annual usage value of a stock item is used to determine its classification. This value is the total
cost of sales and issues of an item over the past 12 months.
The program calculates the total inventory usage value by accumulating the annual usage value for
each warehouse. It then calculates the annual usage value for each stock item.
The annual usage value (A.u.v) is increased in a period by the sales values as invoices are processed.
The cost used at the time that the invoice was processed is used. Similarly, the total inventory usage is
updated when the item is issued. Therefore, during a specific period, the YTD usage is the usage as at
the previous period end, plus the usage from movements that have occurred during the current period.
For each month end after the 12th month, the usage value is annualized by dividing the value by 13 and
multiplying by 12. If the annual usage value of a stock item is based on less than 12 months history,
then the value is divided by the number of months that the item has been held on file, and multiplied by
12 to give an annual usage value.
Warehouse Value Details
The information displayed in this pane relates to the currently highlighted line in the Warehouse Values
listview.
| Queries | 381
Qty on hand
This indicates the quantity of the item physically in the warehouse. This includes quantities on hold.
Qty on backorder
This indicates the sales order back order quantity. This quantity excludes unallocated scheduled order
back order quantities.
Qty allocated to S/O
Calculated as: (quantity on back order + sales order ship quantity).
These quantities exclude unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities.
Note that the ship quantities for credit notes are NOT included in the sales order ship quantity. Credit
note quantities are never included in the allocations as these quantities are only available once the
credit has been fully processed.
Qty available
The quantity available is the quantity on hand less the quantity allocated to sales orders for the item
in the selected warehouse. The quantity allocated to sales orders is the order quantity and includes
quantities on backorder.
Note:
Qty in inspection
This indicates the quantity of purchased items awaiting inspection (i.e. receipted into inspection but not
receipted into stock).
Qty on order
This indicates the quantity of outstanding purchase orders, made-in jobs and supply chain transfers.
Qty allocated to WIP
This indicates the quantity of materials (components) and labor allocated to the job. This is displayed
regardless of whether the job is confirmed or not.
Future free
Calculated as: (quantity on hand + quantity in inspection + quantity in transit + quantity on order allocated to sales orders - allocated to work in progress).
Quantity dispatched not invoiced
This indicates goods delivered on a dispatch note, but not yet invoiced.
Graphs (see Graphs)
Sales History Graph
Select this to graphically represent a history of sales/issues of the item for a specific warehouse.
Closing Balances Graph
Select this to graphically represent a history of closing balance figures for the item for a specific
warehouse.
Costs
Method
This indicates the costing method defined against the warehouse (if costing is defined by
warehouse) or against the company (see Inventory Setup - General tab)
Last cost entered
| Queries | 382
This indicates the last cost at which the item was received into the selected warehouse. This
includes non-merchandise costs if you selected the option: Include non-merchandise costs in last
cost (Inventory Setup - Options tab and/or Purchase Orders Setup - General tab).
Current
This indicates the current unit cost of the item in the selected warehouse. This cost includes nonmerchandise costs if you selected the option: Include non-merchandise costs in last cost (Inventory
Setup - Options tab and/or Purchase Orders Setup - General tab).
Last non-merchandise
This indicates the unit non-merchandise value of the last receipt for the item.
Company
This indicates the company for which the values are being displayed.
This is only displayed if you selected the Multiple Company Values option.
Warehouse Values Selection

The options in this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for the listview on the Warehouse Values
tab.
Field
Values
Refresh
Warehouse
Values
Description
Select this to redisplay the information on the Warehouse
Values tab to reflect changes you made to the options in this
pane.
This function is only enabled when you make a change to the
selections.
Autoload Values
Load Previous
Form Values
Select this to set all selections as they were when last you ran
this program. This option overrides any default form values.
Save Form Values

as Default
Select this to save your selections in this pane as your default

preferences for your operator code for all companies to which
you have access.
Save Form Values

for this Company
Select this to save your selections in this pane as the default

preferences for the current SYSPRO company only.
Remove Default
Form Values
Select this to remove all settings you applied to your operator

code (for all companies) when you used the Save Form Values
as Default option.
All selections in the pane are restored to the form's default
preference selections.
This option is only enabled once you select the Save Form
Values as Default option.
Remove Company
Form Values
Select this to remove all settings you applied to the SYSPRO

company when you used the Save Form Values for this
Company option.
| Queries | 383
Field
Values
Description
Values for this Company option.
Combine
warehouses
Select this to accumulate the values held in all selected

warehouses for the stock item.
Warehouses
Note:
This option applies to the Warehouse Values tab only.
Warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate which warehouse(s) you want to

view as well as the specific information you want to display.
List of warehouses Select this to define a list of warehouses for which you want to
display the information.
Multiple Company
Values
Select this to view Warehouse Values for multiple companies.

Include
you selected the option: Show warehouse values for

multiple companies (Inventory Setup - Browse tab) AND
your inventory is shared (Company Setup - Options tab)
This enables you to select the items you want to view in the
query based on various criteria related to the items.
Items with the following criteria can be selected/deselected for
inclusion in the query:
On hand > zero

Zero on hand
On hand < zero
On hand < safety
On hand < re-order
On hand < minimum
On hand > maximum
Stock in inspection
Stock on order
Zero stock on order
Stock in transit
Future free > maximum
Future free < minimum
Only those items that meet the criteria you selected are
displayed in the query.
Warehouse History
You use the options in the Warehouse History Selection pane to indicate your preferences for this tab (see
Warehouse History Selection).
Warehouse History - Listview
Details that can be viewed in this pane relate to the currently highlighted line in the Warehouse History
listview and include the following:
| Queries | 384
Company
This indicates the company for which the values are being displayed.
This is only displayed if you selected the Multiple Company Values option.
Warehouse (see Inventory Warehouses)
Graphs (see Graphs)
Sales History Graph
Select this to graphically represent a history of sales/issues of the item for a specific warehouse.
Closing Balances Graph
Select this to graphically represent a history of closing balance figures for the item for a specific
warehouse.
Warehouse History Selection

The options in this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for the listview on the Warehouse History
tab.
Field
Values
Refresh
Warehouse
History
Description
Select this to redisplay the information on the Warehouse
History tab to reflect changes you made to the options in this
pane.
selections.
Autoload Values
Load Previous
Form Values
Save Form Values

as Default

preferences for your operator code.
Save Form Values

for this Company

preferences for the current SYSPRO company.
Remove Default
Form Values

code when you used the Save Form Values as Default option.
Remove Company
Form Values

Company option.
Warehouses
| Queries | 385
Field
Values
Description
Combine
warehouses
Select this to accumulate the values held in all selected

warehouses for the stock item.
Note:
This option applies to the Warehouse History tab only.
Warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate which warehouse(s) you want to

view as well as the specific information you want to display.
List of warehouses Select this to define a list of warehouses for which you want to
display the information.
Multiple company
values
Select this to view Warehouse History for multiple companies.

you selected the option: Show warehouse values for

multiple companies (Inventory Setup - Browse tab) AND
your inventory is shared (Company Setup - Options tab)
Movements
You use the options in the Movements Selection pane to indicate your preferences for this tab (see
Movements Selection).
Movements are displayed within each warehouse. This is irrespective of your selection at the Combine
warehouses option (see Warehouse Values Selection and Warehouse History Selection).
Field
Values
More lines
Description
Select this to display the next set of lines as per your selection
at the Rows option.
This option is not enabled when you select to display all rows.
View journals
Select this to view information on the inventory journals for the

line currently highlighted in the Movements listview.
Rows
You use this option to indicate the number of rows you want to
display in the listview.
Movements Listview
Date
For Purchase Order receipts, this reflects the calendar date of the movement and not the start date
when the Purchase Order Receipts program was loaded to process the receipt, unless the operator
manually changed the date when processing the receipt.
Unit cost
This indicates the cost that was used to post the transaction, except when FIFO costing is used. In this
case, the cost is not displayed as more than one FIFO bucket may have been used for the transaction.
Unit price/New cost
The Unit price is the price expressed in terms of the stocking unit of measure for the item.
The New cost is the warehouse cost after the transaction was processed. For Standard costing, the
Unit cost and the New cost will be the same. For other costing methods, these two values may or may
not differ
| Queries | 386
New wh
This column displays the destination warehouse for GIT (Goods in Transit) transfers.
Movements Selection
The options in this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for the listview on the Movements tab.
Field
Values
Refresh
Movements
Description
Select this to redisplay the information on the Movements tab
to reflect changes you made to the options in this pane.
selections.
Autoload Values
Load Previous
Form Values
Save Form Values

as Default

Save Form Values

for this Company

Remove Default
Form Values

Remove Company
Form Values

Company option.
Movements
selection
Movements display These options refer to the warehouse order in which the
movements are displayed in the Movements listview.
Irrespective of the order you select the movements are
displayed within each warehouse in the following order:
Earliest year, then earliest period, then earliest transaction date
and lastly earliest transaction time.
Earliest
movements first
Select this to view the stock movements from the first

warehouse to the last warehouse in altphabetic/numeric
sequence.
| Queries | 387
Field
Values
Description
Latest movements
first
Select this to view the stock movements in reverse key

sequence, which is from the last warehouse to the first
warehouse in altphabetic/numeric sequence.
If you restricted the number of rows to display, the highest
warehouse in alphabetica/numerical order is displayed first.
Only by selecting the More Lines option will the additional
movements be displayed.
Warehouses
Warehouse
selection
Movement dates

want to display information in the Movements tab listview.
This enables you to indicate the date(s) for which you want to
display movements in the Movements tab listview.
One of the following options can be selected:
From movement
date
All
Today
Today & yesterday
This week
Range
Single
You use this field to indicate the first date in a range of dates
for which you want to display movements.
If you selected to display movements for a single day then you
enter that day in this field.
When you select to display movements for Today, Today and
Yesterday or This week, then you can optionally change the
default date displayed.
To movement date You use this field to indicate the last date in a range of dates
for which you want to display movements.
When you select to display movements for Today, Today and
Yesterday or This week, then you can optionally change the
default date displayed.
Inventory
transaction
values
Transaction value
selection
This enables you to indicate the value(s) for which you want to
display movements in the Movements tab listview.
From transaction
value
You use this field to indicate the lowest (or the single) value in
a range of values for which you want to display movements.
To transaction
value
You use this field to indicate the highest value in a range of

values for which you want to display movements.
Customer
You use this field to indicate a single customer for whom you
want to display movements.
Options
| Queries | 388
Field
Sales movements
Values
Description
Supplier
You use this field to indicate a single supplier for whom you
Salesperson
You use this field to indicate a single salesperson for whom

you want to display movements.
Purchase order
You use this field to indicate a single purchase order for which
you want to display movements.
Sales order
You use this field to indicate a single sales order for which you
This option enables you to select the types of sales movements
you want to view for each item in the Stock Movements listview
of the query.
The following types of sales movements can be selected/
deselected for inclusion in the query:
Inventory
movements
Credit notes
Debit notes
Invoices
Dispatch notes
This option enables you to select the types of inventory

movements you want to view for each item in the Stock
Movements listview of the query.
inventory movements are processed using the Inventory
Movements program.
The following types of inventory movements can be selected/
deselected for inclusion in the query:
Issues
Transfers
Receipts
Physical
Adjustments
Changes
Modifications
Bin transfers
Only those inventory movements selected are displayed in the

query.
Notes
The first three lines of each Note type are displayed in this section. You can view and edit the notes by
typically using your right mouse button to select the first line of text.
User Defined
Details of your user defined fields are displayed in this pane. See User Defined.
| Queries | 389
Custom Form
This pane displays view details of any custom form data that has been assigned to the item (Custom
Form Design).
Custom Form Data Entry

Select this to use the Custom Form Entry program to enter custom form data against the stock item.
Goods in Inspection for Stock Code

You use the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code program to view inspection transactions processed for
stock items defined as requiring inspection (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).
You can access the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code program from the Inventory Query program by
selecting the Inspection option from the P/O Line Information pane.
Goods in Inspection for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start At
Find
Select this to locate items according to extensive search

criteria.
Exit
Options
Select this to indicate the items you want to include in the

listview.
Inspection
Complete
Select this to include information on items where the inspection

phase is complete.
File
Options
Include
Counted Complete Select this to include information on items where the count
phase is complete.
Zero Qty in
Inspection
Select this to include information on items where there is a zero

quantity in inspection.
GRN Numbers
Select this to display the information in the listview in GRN

number sequence.
Warehouse
Select this to display the information in the listview in

Warehouse code sequence.
Matched Codes
Select this to display only those GRNs that were found when
you used the Find option from the File menu.
Sequence
This option is only enabled when you successfully used the

Find option to list GRNs matching a specific pattern.
| Queries | 390
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at GRN/
warehouse
You use this field to enter the GRN number or warehouse to

which you want to navigate in the listview. This depends on
your selection at the sequence menu.
OK
Select this to navigate to the GRN or warehouse you entered in

the previous field.
Cancel

different entry.
Options
This screen is displayed when you select the Options option from the Options menu.
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
selection

want to display Goods in Inspection details in the listview.
Revision/Release
You use this option to indicate the revisions/release for which

you want to view information for the stock item.
This option is only enabled if the stock item is ECC-controlled
(Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking) and the stock control
level is set to Revision or Release (Bill of Materials Setup Engineering Change Control tab).
The wording for this option defaults to the text defined against
the User defined fields on the Engineering Change Control tab
of the Bill of Materials Setup program.
Rev/Rel
This indicates the single revision/release for which you want to

include transactions in the listview.
OK

listview.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any selections you changed and to return

to the listview.
Listview
When you select the Goods in Inspection for Stock Code program, the inspection transactions currently
defined for the selected stock code are displayed in a listview.
GRN
Wh
Lot
Supplier
Exp date
Rec date
On hold
P/order
Delivery note
| Queries | 391
On-site qty
Off-site qty
Qty advised
Qty counted
Cnt comp
Qty inspected
Ins comp
Qty accepted
Qty scrapped
Certificate
Narration
Rev
Rel
Rejected qty
Inspection Transactions for GRN

You can view the specific transactions that were processed against the item in inspection by highlighting
the line and typically using your right mouse button to select the Transaction option.
This information displayed in this listview will have been captured using the Purchase Order Inspection
program.
The following transaction information can be viewed:
GRN
This indicates the Goods Received Note number.

Lot

Transaction date
This indicates the date of the transaction.

Type
This indicates the transaction type.
Advised - indicates that the item was receipted into inspection.
Counted - indicates that the item was counted.
Inspected - indicates that the item was inspected.
Accepted - indicates that the item was receipted into stock.
Rejected - indicates that the item was rejected.
Scrapped - indicates that the item was scrapped.

Qty

Concession
This indicates the concession number if entered against the transaction.

Document
This indicates the document number entered for the transaction.

Scrap code
This indicates the scrap code.

Narration
| Queries | 392
This displays the narration attached to the transaction.
Hold
You can place a specific GRN on hold by highlighting the GRN line and typically using your right mouse
button to select the option: Hold GRN.
If you defined a password against the option: Inventory Place GRN on hold when in Inspection (Password
Setup), then you are requested to enter the password before continuing.
Field
Values
OK
Description
Select this to place the GRN on hold.
This prevents the item from being accepted into stock using the
Purchase Order Inspection program.
Cancel
Select this to return to the listview without placing the GRN on

hold.
Allocations for Stock Code

You use the Allocations for Stock Code program to view all material allocations of the stock codes to
jobs.
The program can be accessed by selecting the Allocations option from the Production pane of the
Allocations for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Start At
Exit
Options
Select this to indicate additional options according to which you

want to display information in the listview.
Completed
Allocations
Completed jobs or completed allocations for jobs are excluded

from the listview by default.
File
Options
Include
Select this to include details of completed allocations in the

listview.
Query
Job Query
Select this to use the WIP Query program to view detailed

information for the job currently highlighted in the listview.
Warehouse
Select this to display the information in the listview in

warehouse sequence.
Sequence
| Queries | 393
Field
Values
Description
Job
Select this to display the information in the listview in job

number sequence.
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at job
You use this field to enter the job number to which you want to
OK
Select this to navigate to the job number you entered in the

previous field.
Cancel

different entry.
Options
Field
Values
Revision/Release
Description
This enables you to view information for all or a single revision/
release of the stock item. The options are available only if
the item is ECC-controlled and the stock control level is by
Revision or Release (Bill of Materials Setup - Engineering
Change Control tab).
The wording for these fields defaults to the text defined against
the User-defined fields in Bill of Materials Setup.
All
Select this to include details for all revisions/releases for the

stock item.
Single
Select this to include details for a single revision/release of the

stock item.
Rev
You use this field to enter the revision for which you want to
view the details.
This field is only enabled if you select to include details for a
single revision/release.
Rel
You use this field to enter the revision for which you want to
view the details.
OK
Select this to accept your selections. The listview displays

details for the stock item based on the revision/release you
selected.
Cancel

the listview.
Listview
When you select the Allocations for Stock Code program, the currently defined are displayed in a
listview.
| Queries | 394
Job
Wh
Cost
You will be unable to view costs if the field: Show costs in Inventory/WIP is set to Denied (Operators Security tab).
Quantity required
Quantity issued
Completed job
Date required
This indicates the date by which the material is required for the manufacture of the parent part. This is
based either on the operation to which it is assigned, or a number of days before the delivery date of
the job.
Rev
Rel
RMA for Stock Code

You use the RMA for Stock Code program to view RMA information for a selected stock item.
The RMA for Stock Code program can be selected from the Inventory Query program by selecting
Return Merchandise from the Query menu.
RMA for Stock Code

You can typically use you right mouse button to select an RMA line and then select the Query option to
view additional RMA information using the RMA Query program.
The information displayed in this listview includes:
RMA number
This indicates the RMA number for the returned item.

Line number
This indicates the RMA line number within the RMA number.
Type
This indicates the RMA type for the line.
With the exception of the Defective out of warranty type, these RMA types are for documentation
purposes only, and can be printed on the RMA Document Print and Outstanding Authorizations
programs.
Tax code
This indicates the tax code defined against the RMA line.
Status
This indicates the status of the RMA (see RMA Statuses).

Action
This indicates the action associated with the receipt process.
Refer to Receipt Actions and Associated Effects for additional information on the effects of the
various receipt actions.
Problem code
This indicates the problem code associated with the RMA line. It enables you to identify recurring
problems with items returned by a customer.
| Queries | 395
Uom
This indicates the unit of measure to which the quantity received relates.
Quantity authorized
This indicates the original quantity entered at the time of capturing the RMA Issue.
Quantity received
This indicates the quantity of the stock item returned by the customer.
Receiving warehouse
This indicates the code of the warehouse into which the returned item was received.
Receiving price
This indicates the price at which the returned item was received.
Purchase date
This indicates the date on which the item was purchased.

Issue date
This indicates the date on which the RMA was issued.

Received date
This indicates the date on which the item was received.

Return date
This indicates the date by which the goods should be returned.

Cross shipment
This indicates whether or not a cross shipment exists for the item against this RMA.
Original warehouse
This indicates the original warehouse in which the item was stocked.
Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code

You use the Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code program to view blanket purchase orders that
have been placed against a stock item.
All contracts and detail lines are displayed for the stock code.
The Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Purchasing >
Blanket P/Orders option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.
Blanket Purchase Orders for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start At
Exit
File
Start
| Queries | 396
Field
Values
Description
Start at contract
You use this field to enter the contract to which you want to
OK
Select this to navigate to the contract you entered in the

previous field.
Cancel

different entry.
Listview
When you select the Inventory Browse on BPO by Stock Code program, the blanket purchase orders
currently defined against the stock item are displayed in a listview.
Contract
This indicates the contract reference captured against the contract using the Blanket P/O Contract
Supplier
This indicates the code of the supplier associated with the contract.
Line
This indicates the contract line number.

Wh
Minimum quantity
Total quantity
Ordered quantity
Received quantity
Uom
Last receipt date
Price
Price uom
Pcl
Complete
This column indicates whether or not the contract line is complete.
A BPO contract line is automatically marked as complete when the total contract quantity has been
both ordered and received. Alternatively, a BPO contract line can manually be set to complete using the
Blanket P/O Contract Maintenance program.
Requisition Query for Stock Code

You use the Requisition Query for Stock Code program to view purchase order requisition information
for a selected stock item.
You can also view additional information for any requisition line displayed in the listview of the Requisition
Query for Stock Code program, by highlighting the required requisition line and typically using your right
mouse button to display and select the Zoom option (see Requisition Query Details).
The Requisition Query for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Purchasing >
Requisitions option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.
| Queries | 397
Requisitions
Field
Values
Description
Exit
Preferences
Select this to configure default options you want to apply when

viewing requisition information in the listview.
Options
Select this to indicate the requisitions you want to display in the

listview according to the originator, holder and/or warehouse.
Routings
Select this to use the Requisition Query Details program

to view additional requisition information for the currently
highlighted purchase order requisition line.
File
Options
Functions
Preferences
Field
View requisitions
in status
Values
Description
This enables you to selectively indicate the requisitions you
want to view based on their status.
For example, if you do not want to include cancelled
requisitions in the listview, you would deselect the Cancelled
option.
The following statuses can be selected/deselected:
Normal
Approved
Cancelled
Purchase order created
Received into stock and acknowledged
Received into stock but not acknowledged
Received into inspection and acknowledged
Received into inspection bit not acknowledged
On hold
Select All
Select this if you want to view requisitions in all statuses listed.
Deselect All
Select this to deselect all requisition statuses listed.
Save
Select this to save your selections against you operator code.

The preferences you selected are saved until the next time you
change them.
Close
Select this to save the preferences for the current run of the
program only.
| Queries | 398
Options
Field
Values
Description
Originator
selection
This enables you to indicate the requisition originator(s) for

whom you want to display requisitions in the listview.
Holder selection
This enables you to indicate the requisition holder(s) for whom

you want to display requisitions in the listview.
Warehouse
selection

want to display requisitions in the listview.
OK

listview.
The listview displays those requisitions for the options you
selected.
Cancel

the listview.
Listview
When you select the Requisition Query for Stock Code program, the purchase order requisition currently
defined against the stock item are displayed in a listview.
You can sort the listview by any of these columns by typically using your right mouse button to click on the
column heading.
Requisition
This indicates the requisition number.

Line
This indicates the requisition line number.

Status
This indicates the current status of the requisition (see Statuses).

Description
Supplier
This indicates the supplier entered against the requisition line.

User name
This indicates the name of the originator who originated the requisition.
Date due
This indicates the date on which the items are required.

Quantity
This indicates the requisition quantity for the line.

Price
This indicates the unit price of the item.

Extended value
Stock code
This indicates the stock code on the requisition line.

| Queries | 399
This field indicates the default stock code description, if a valid stock code was entered.
For non-stocked items, the description is entered manually.
The following columns can be added to the listview by typically using your right mouse button in any
column header and selecting the Field Chooser option:
Bpo
This indicates whether a blanket purchase order was used to approve the requisition.
Capex number
This indicates the capex number relevant to the item.

Catalogue number
This indicates the supplier's catalogue number or stock code reference.

Date raised
This indicates the date on which the requisition was created.

Discount
This indicates the discount applicable to the requisition line.

Hier
Hierarchy
Holder
This indicates the requisition user who is currently holding the requisition line.
Job
This indicates the job number if the requisition line relates to a Work in Progress job.
Ledger code
This indicates the General Ledger code for a non-stocked item

Ledger code description

Operation
This indicates the sub-contract operation for the item. This only applies if the requisition line is for a
non-stocked item and the item relates to a Work in Progress job.
Order uom
This indicates the unit of measure for the order quantity.
This defaults from the stock code setup (Stock Code Maintenance). This can be the stocking or
alternate unit of measure as defined against the stock code.
Originator
This indicates the requisition user code of the person who originated the requisition.
Price uom

Product class
This indicates the product class relevant to the item.

Purchase order
This indicates the purchase order number.

Purchase order line
This indicates the purchase order line number.

Reason
This indicates the reason entered against the requisition line.
| Queries | 400
Routing narrative
This indicates the route note entered against the requisition line.
User def 1
User def 2
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse for which the item is being requisitioned.
Requisition Query Details

You use the Requisition Query Details program to view information for a specific purchase order
requisition line.
The Requisition Query Details program can be accessed from the Routing field of the Requisition
Query program or by selecting the Requisition option from the Functions menu of the PO Browse on PO
Lines program.
Requisition Query Details

Field
Values
Description
Close
File
Details
The following information is included for the selected requisition line:
Stock code
Description
Rev/Rel
Due date
Order qty
Order uom
Warehouse
Reason
Supplier
Price
Price uom
Discount
Status
Job
Operation
Product class
Ledger code
Ledger description
Commitments
Select this to use the program GL Commitment Status Query to view commitment value information.
This function is only enabled if you are querying a non-stocked item and the setup option: Commitment
account required is selected (General Ledger Setup - Commitments tab).
Capex number
Extended value
| Queries | 401
This is the Quantity multiplied by the Price less the discount(s).

Asset capex
Asset capex line
Routings
Routed to
This indicates the requisition user to whom the requisition line was routed.
Route note
This indicates the route note added to the requisition line when it was routed using the Requisition
Entry program.
Last receipt/routed to date
This indicates the date on which the requisition line was last routed.
Qty received to date
This indicates the quantity received to date against the purchase order created from the requisition line.
Qty outstanding
This indicates the quantity which is still outstanding against the purchase order for the requisition line.
This is calculated as the difference between the quantity ordered and the quantity received on the
purchase order line.
Routing operator
This indicates the operator name of the requisition user who routed the line.
Routing user
This indicates the requisition user who routed the line.

Approving operator
This indicates the operator name of the requisition user who approved the requisition
GL Commitment Status Query

You use the GL Commitment Status Query program to view the current available budget for a selected
general ledger code.
Commitment values can be viewed by selecting the Commitments option from the Requisition Entry,
Purchase Order Entry and Requisition Query Details programs.
Note:
Commitment accounting relates to services and non-stocked items only.
Commitment Values
Field
Values
Description
Ledger code
This indicates the ledger code and ledger code description to

which the values displayed relate.
Transaction
This indicates information for the current transaction type.

Typically the transaction type (Purchase Order or Requisition),
the transaction period and transaction date are displayed.
Unallocated
This indicates the value for the transaction that could not be
allocated against a particular period.
| Queries | 402
Field
Values
Description
Typically, this would occur when a due date is entered for a
non-stocked item which is later than the end of the following
financial year. The system is then unable to allocate the value
to a particular period as the date is too far into the future. When
the year end function of the GL Period End program is run, the
system will attempt to allocate the values to a particular period
providing that their due dates are not beyond the following
financial year end.
The text for this field defaults to 'Unallocated,' but is replaced
by whatever text you define against the setup option:
Unallocated text (General Ledger Setup - Commitments tab).
Commitment
status
The following values are displayed for the current period, for
the Year to date and for the entire year (Annual).
Uncommitted
This indicates the uncommitted values for the ledger code.

These values typically come from unapproved requisitions.
Committed
This indicates the committed values for the ledger code.

These values typically come from purchase orders and
approved requisitions.
Total commitment
This field displays the sum of the values displayed in the

Uncommitted and Committed fields.
Actual
This field displays the actual balances held against the ledger
code. These balance can also be viewed using the GL Query
program.
Total
This indicates the sum of the values displayed in the Total

commitment and Actual fields.
Budget
This indicates the budget values defined against the ledger

code (see Ledger Code Maintenance).
Available
This indicates the difference between the Budget value and the
Actual value.
Close
Notation List
You use the Notation List program to selectively print stock code notes assigned to a specific stock code.
Alternatively, a report of inventory notations can be generated using the Inventory Notations program.
You can access the Notation List program by selecting the Notation List option from the Notes menu of
the Inventory Query program.
Notation List
Field
Values
Description
Notation types
| Queries | 403
Field
Values
Description
Dangerous goods
handling text
Select this to print dangerous goods handling text held against

the stock item.
Inspection text
Select this to print inspection text held against the stock item.
Purchase order
additional text
Select this to print purchase order additional text held against

the stock item.
Technical
specification
Select this to print technical specification text held against the

stock item.
Job narrations
Select this to print job narrations text held against the stock
item.
Select All
Select this function to print the text for all notation types held
Deselect All
Select this function to deselect all notation types held against

the stock item.
Print
Select this function to commence printing.
Close
Sales Orders for Stock Code

You use the Sales Orders for Stock Code program to view customer orders that have been placed for a
stock item.
The browse on sales orders by stock code can be run from within the following SYSPRO programs:
Inventory Query
Sales Order Entry
Quick Entry
Quotation Entry
Blanket P/O Create Purchase Orders
Sales Orders for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Exit
Change Company
Select this to view sales orders for a different company.
File
Options
Note:
This option is enabled only if multiple companies are

sharing the same inventory files (Company Setup Options tab).
You will be unable to view any lot numbers, serial
numbers, dispatch notes or bins when viewing sales
orders for a different company.
| Queries | 404
Field
Values
Description
Any operator security access defined against
warehouses or Accounts Receivable branches
(where browses are being filtered) is applied when
viewing sales orders for another company.
Lot Numbers
Select this to use the Lot, Bin, Serial Allocations program to

view any lot allocations made for the currently highlighted sales
order line.
Functions
Note:
This option is disabled if you are viewing sales orders
for a different company.
Serial Numbers

view any serial number allocations for the currently highlighted
sales order line
Note:
Dispatch Notes
This option is disabled if you are viewing sales

orders for a different company
This option is disabled if the stock item is traceable,
as the serials are inextricably linked to the lot
number and are therefore queried via the lot
number.
You will be unable to view serial information against
a completed sales order. The reason is that the
serials are now defined against the invoice, and no
longer against the sales order.
Select this to use the Dispatch Notes program to view any

dispatch notes created for the currently highlighted sales order
line.
Note:
This option is disabled if you are viewing sales orders
for a different company.
Bins

view any bin allocations for the currently highlighted sales order
line
Note:
Reserved
Allocations
This option is disabled if you are viewing sales

orders for a different company.
This option is disabled if the stock item is traceable,
as the bins are inextricably linked to the lot number
and are therefore queried via the lot number.

view any lots, bins and serials allocated to reserved stock.
Stock is placed in reserve using the Sales Order Entry
program. If lot, bin and serial information was entered at that
| Queries | 405
Field
Values
Description
time (see S/O Reserve or Ship Stock), then that information is
displayed.
Change Company
This screen is displayed when you select the Change Company option from the Options menu,
Note:
You will be unable to view any lot numbers, serial numbers, dispatch notes or bins when viewing
sales orders for a different company.
Any operator security access defined against warehouses or Accounts Receivable branches (where
browses are being filtered) is applied when viewing sales orders for another company.
Field
Values
Description
Display sales
orders for
company
You use this to indicate the company for which you want to
view sales orders for the selected stock code.
OK
Select this to accept the company you entered and to return to

the listview.
Cancel
Select this to return to the listview without changing the

company.
Sales Orders
Note:
The options in the Sales Order Selection pane enable you to indicate your preferences for
displaying sales orders in the Sales Orders listview (see Sales Order Selection).
Field
Values
More lines
Description
Select this to display the next set of rows according to the
number of rows you selected to display at the Rows option.
This function is only enabled when there are more rows to
display and is not enabled when you select to display All rows.
Rows
This enables you to indicate the number of rows you want to

display in the listview.
This is useful if you have a large amount of data. Filtering the
number of rows to display, as opposed displaying all rows,
means that the data is loaded more quickly in the listview.
Listview
When you select the Sales Orders for Stock Code program, the sales orders currently defined are
Sales order
This indicates the sales order number.

Status
This indicates the current status of the sales order (see Status Codes).
| Queries | 406
Ship date
Order quantity
This indicates the quantity of the stock item ordered.

Unit of measure
This indicates the unit of measure for the order quantity.

Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse from which the item must be shipped.
Ship quantity
This indicates the quantity of the stock item shipped.

Backorder quantity
This indicates the quantity of the stock item currently on backorder.

Customer
This indicates the code of the customer for the sales order.
Customer name
This indicates the name of the customer for the sales order.
Purchase order number
This indicates the Purchase Order number created for insufficient stock (see Insufficient Stock/Back
Order).
This is only displayed until the Purchase Order is receipted. Once the purchase order receipt has been
completed and the order updated, there is no longer a link from the sales order to the purchase order.
Price
This indicates the price of the item.

Price unit of measure

Allocated
This indicates whether the Inventory module has raised allocations to reserve stock for the transaction.
When sales orders are created, Inventory allocations are done to reserve stock. Items with no
allocations are:
Unallocated scheduled order back order and ship quantities

Forward orders
Bom kit type
Rev
This indicates the revision of the item. This only applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (Stock
Code Maintenance).
Rel
This indicates the release of the item. This only applies if the item is defined as ECC controlled (Stock
Code Maintenance).
Request date
This indicates when the customer expects delivery of the merchandise

Date entered
This represents the date on which the order was processed in SYSPRO.
Date ordered
This represents the date on which the customer placed the order.
| Queries | 407
Sales Order Selection

The options on this pane enable you to indicate your preferences for displaying sales orders in the Sales
Orders listview.
Field
Values
Refresh Sales
Orders
Description
Select this to redisplay the information in the Sales Orders
listview to reflect changes you made to the options in this pane.
selections.
Autoload Values
Load Previous
Form Values
Save Form Values

as Default

Save Form Values

for this Company

Remove Default
Form Values

Remove Company
Form Values

Company option.
Customers
Customer selection This enables you to display orders for all customers or a
specific customer.
You will be unable to access the Customer selection field if
viewing sales orders for a different company or if you selected
to view supply chain transfers only.
Display options
Supply chain
transfers only
Select this if you want to display only orders that were

generated from supply chain transfers.
Include completed
sales order lines
Select this to view completed order lines for sales orders that
are not yet complete (i.e. Excluding orders in a status of <9>).
Include completed
sales orders
Select this to include order lines for orders that are complete
(i.e. Orders that are in a status of <9>).
| Queries | 408
Field
Values
Description
ECC selection
This enables you to indicate whether you want to display sales

orders for all or a single revision/release of the stock item.
Engineering
change controls
This is available only if the item is ECC-controlled and the

stock control level is by Revision or Release (Bill of Materials
Setup - Engineering Change Control tab).
The wording displayed for these fields defaults to Revision/
Release, but is replaced by whatever wording you have
assigned to these user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup).
Revision
You use this field to indicate the single revision for which you
want to display sales orders in the listview.
Release
You use this field to indicate the single release for which you
want to display sales orders in the listview.
Purchase Orders for Stock Code

You use the Purchase Orders for Stock Code program to view outstanding purchase orders that have
been placed for the stock item.
The browse on purchase orders by stock code can be run from within the following SYSPRO programs:
Inventory Query
Sales Order Entry
Quick Entry
Quotation Entry
Job Issues
LCT Consignment Maintenance
Purchase Orders for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select
Select this to use the currently highlighted purchase order in

the order field of another program.
Start At
Zoom
Select this to view Landed Cost Tracking details for the

purchase order.
File
This option is only enabled when the purchase order line is

linked to the Landed Cost Tracking system.
Exit
Options
| Queries | 409
Field
Values
Description
Options
Select this to define listview display options.
Change Company
Select this to change the company for which you are viewing
purchase order lines for stock codes.
History
Select this to use the P/O Browse on Order Lines History

program to view any receipt history for the highlighted order
line.
Functions
Note:
This option is disabled if you are viewing orders for a
different company.
Requisitions
This enables you to view any requisitions processed for the

highlighted order line using the Requisition Query Details
program.
Note:
This option is disabled if you are viewing orders for a
different company.
Start
The Start screen is displayed when you select the Start at option from the File menu.
Field
Values
Description
Start at purchase
order
You use this field to enter the purchase order you want to
navigate to in the listview.
OK
Select this to navigate to the purchase order code entered in

the previous field.
Cancel

different purchase order.
Zoom on LCT Details

The Zoom on LCT Details screen is displayed when you select the Zoom option from the File menu if the
purchase order line is linked to the Landed Cost Tracking system.
The following details are displayed on this screen:
Vessel
Departure date
Estimated arrival date
Route
Shipment reference
You use the Close function to return to the previous screen.

Options
The Options screen is displayed when you select Options from the Options menu.
| Queries | 410
Field
Values
Supplier
selection
Description
You will be unable to access the Supplier selection field if
viewing orders for a different company.
All
Select this to display all supplier orders.
Single
Select this to display orders for a single supplier.

You indicate this supplier in the Supplier field below.
Supplier
This indicates the single supplier for whom you want to view
the purchase orders.
This field is only enabled if you selected to view orders for a
single supplier.
Include zero
quantity
outstanding lines
Select this if you want to display order lines with a zero quantity
outstanding.
Include
completed p/
order lines
Select this if you want to display completed purchase order

lines (i.e. Lines for orders that are in status <9>).
Revision/Release
You can view information for a single revision/release of the

stock item.
You can only include completed purchase order lines if you

selected the option to include zero quantity outstanding lines.

All
Select this to view information for all revisions and releases.
Single
Select this to view information for a single revision/release.

You indicate this revision/release in the Rev/Rel field below.
Rev/Rel

view the purchase orders.
This field is only enabled if you selected to view orders for a
single revision/release.
OK

listview.
Cancel
Change Company
Accessed from the Options menu, this enables you to view orders for a different company.
Note:
| Queries | 411
This option is enabled only if multiple companies are sharing the same inventory files (Company
Setup - Options tab).
You will be unable to view any history or requisition details when viewing orders for a different
company.
Any operator security access defined against warehouses or Accounts Payable branches (where
browses are being filtered) is applied when viewing orders for another company.
Field
Values
Description
Display p/orders
for company
view purchase orders for the selected stock code.
OK
Select this to accept the company you entered.
Cancel

the company.
Purchase Orders for Stock Code Listview

Purchase order
This indicates the purchase order number.

Status
This indicates the current status of the purchase order. Refer to Status Codes for a list of possible
order statuses.
Due date
This indicates the latest due date of the line.

Date entered
O/s quantity
This indicates the quantity outstanding against the purchase order line.
If you have not selected the options: Include zero quantity outstanding lines and Include completed p/
order lines, and there is a quantity in this column for completed purchase orders, then you need to use
the Purchase Order Purge program and only select the option: Validate inventory on order quantity.
This will validate quantities on order by resetting the fields to zero and updating them with quantities
held against your purchase order records.
P/o quantity
This indicates the original purchase order quantity.

Uom
This indicates the unit of measure applicable to the quantity ordered.

Wh
This indicates the warehouse for which the purchase order line was raised.
Job
This indicates the job number associated with the purchase order line, if applicable.
Req
This indicates the purchase order requisition number for the purchase order.
LCT
Price
This indicates the unit price of the item.

Price uom
| Queries | 412
This indicates the unit of measure applicable to the price.

Supplier
This indicates the supplier code against which the order was raised.
Supplier name
This indicates the supplier name against which the order was raised.
Memo
Foreign price
Currency
This indicates the currency for the order line. This is the currency defined against the supplier (AP
Supplier Maintenance).
Rev
This indicates the revision number for an ECC-controlled stock item.

Rel
This indicates the release number for an ECC-controlled stock item.

Line
This indicates the purchase order line number.

Supplier's catalogue
This indicates the supplier's catalogue number (as defined within the Supplier/Stock Code Details
program).
Original due date
This indicates the original due date of the line.

MRP change date
This indicates whether MRP can reschedule the due date of the order.
Date of last receipt
This indicates the date on which a purchase order receipt was last processed against the order line.
Received qty
This indicates the quantity of the line received to date.

Discount
This indicates the discount value applicable to the order line.

Order value - local
Order value - foreign
Outstanding value - local
Outstanding value - foreign
Browse on ECC Rev/Rel

You use the Browse on ECC Rev/Rel program to view the quantities for the revisions and/or releases for
the stock item you are querying.
The Browse on ECC Rev/Rel program can be accessed from the Inventory Query program by selecting
the Production > ECC Quantities option from the Query menu and then selecting the Revision/Release
option. You can only access the Revision/Release option for items defined as ECC controlled (Stock Code
Note:
| Queries | 413
The words: Rev, Rel, Revision and Release are the default words used throughout the Browse on
ECC Rev/Rel program. These words are replaced by whatever wording you have assigned to these
user defined fields (see Bill of Materials Setup - Control tab).
Revision/Release for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start at
Exit
Show Zero
Quantities
Select this to display the revisions/releases with zero quantities

in the listview.
File
Options
This option is deselected by default.

Functions
View Transactions
Select this to use the Browse on Lot Transactions program

to view the transactions for the currently highlighted revision/
release.
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at
warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse code to which you
want to navigate in the listview.
Start at revision
You use this field to enter the revision number to which you
OK
Select this to navigate to the warehouse/revision you entered.
Cancel

different entry.
Listview
When you select the Browse on ECC Rev/Rel program, the revisions/releases for the selected stock item
are displayed in a listview.
Revision
Release
Current
Wh
Bin
On hand
Quantity free
| Queries | 414
Ship quantity
In transit
Last transaction
Date received
P/O Browse on Order Lines History

You use the P/O Browse on Order Lines History program to view purchase order receipt history for a
specific purchase order line.
This program can be accessed by selecting the History option from the Functions menu of the Purchase
Orders for Stock Code or PO Browse on PO Lines programs.
Detailed History for Purchase Order

Field
Values
Description
Exit
File
Detailed History for Purchase Order

The following information is displayed in the listview:
Journal

Journal date

Quantity received
This indicates the quantity received against the purchase order line.
Date received
This indicates the date on which the quantity was received.

Reference
This indicates the reference for the receipt.

Reject
This applies if a negative receipt was processed. It indicates the reason code for reversing the receipt.
Exchange rate
This indicates the rate of exchange used to convert the purchase order to the local currency.
Delivery method
This indicates the method used to deliver the items to you and is used in Inventory Optimisation.
Work in Progress for Stock Code

You use the Work in Progress for Stock Code program to view work in progress jobs for the stock item.
This inventory browse on work in progress for stock code can be run from within the following SYSPRO
programs:
Inventory Query
Sales Order Entry
Quick Entry
| Queries | 415
Quotation Entry
Job Issues
Estimates
Structures and Routings
ECC Change Orders (Where Used function)

The following information is displayed in this listview:
Field
Values
Description
Start at
Exit
Options
Select this to configure listview display options.
Change Company
Select this to change the company for which the jobs are
displayed.
File
Options
Include
This option enables you to indicate the jobs to include or from

the listview.
Completed Jobs
Select this if you want to include information for completed jobs

in the listview.
Notional Jobs
Select this if you want to include information for notional jobs in

the listview.
This option is not enabled if the stock item is a co-product
which only exists as a parent part for a notional item.
Co-products Jobs
Select this if you want to include information for co-product jobs

in the listview.
This option is not enabled if the stock item is a co-product
which exists only as a parent item for a made-in job.
If the stock item is a co-product and it exists as both a parent
part for a notional item and as the parent part for a made-in
job on a different route, then both the Notional Jobs and Coproduct Jobs options are enabled for selection.
Query
Job Query
Select this to use the WIP Query program to view additional

information on the jobs.
Note:
This option is disabled if you are viewing work in
progress jobs for a different company.
Start
This screen is displayed when you select the Start at option from the File menu.
| Queries | 416
Field
Values
Description
Start at job
You use this field to enter the job to which you want to navigate
in the listview.
OK
Select this to navigate to the job you selected.
Cancel
Select this to return to the listview without navigating to another

job.
Options
This screen is displayed when you select Options from the Options menu.
Field
Values
Revision/Release
Description
All
Select this to view information for all revisions and releases
Single
Select this to view information for a single revision/release.

You indicate this revision/release in the Rev/Rel field below.
Rev/Rel

view the work in progress information.
This field is only enabled if you selected to view information for
a single revision/release.
OK

listview.
Cancel
Change Company
This screen is displayed when you select the Change Company option from the options menu.
This enables you to view work in progress jobs for a different company.
Note:
This option is enabled only if multiple companies are sharing the same inventory files (Company
Setup - Options tab).
You will be unable to access the job query function when viewing work in progress jobs for a
different company.
Any operator security access defined against Accounts Receivable branches (where browses are
being filtered) is applied when viewing jobs for another company.
Any operator security access defined against warehouses or job classifications (where browses are
being filtered) is applied when viewing jobs for another company.
| Queries | 417
Field
Values
Description
Display WIP for

company
view work in progress information for the selected stock code.
OK
Select this to accept the company you entered.
Cancel

the company.

When you select the Work in Progress for Stock Code program, jobs for the selected stock code are
By default, only active jobs are displayed. You use the Include > Completed Jobs option to display details
of completed jobs.
Job
Wh
Outstanding quantity
Start date
Delivery date
Complete
Rev
Rel
Scheduled start date
Scheduled start time
Scheduled end date
Scheduled end time
Scheduled flag
Inventory Movements for Stock Code

You use the Inventory Movements for Stock Code program to view a detailed history of sales and/or
inventory movements processed against a stock item.
This program can be accessed by selecting the Movements option from the Query menu of the Inventory
Query program.
Inventory Movements for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Start At
Find
Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate items in

the listview based on extensive search criteria.
Exit
File
Options
| Queries | 418
Field
Values
Description
Options
Select this to indicate a specific supplier or customer for which

you want to display movements in the listview.
Include
.
Include
Select this to indicate which Sales or Inventory movements you

want to include in the listview.
By default, all Inventory movements and all Sales movements
are included.
Sequence
Select this to display the movements in the listview in financial
period within financial year sequence.
Select this to display the movements in the listview in
transaction date sequence.
Select this to display the movements in the listview starting
from the earliest date.
Select this to display the movements in the listview starting
from the latest date.
Start Financial Period/Month
These options are displayed when you select the Start At option from the File menu, if you selected the
Sequence: Financial prd/year.
Field
Values
Description
Period
You use this field to enter the year and period for which you
want to navigate to movements in the listview.
Establish Period/
Year by Date
Select this to enter a date and allow the system to establish the
relative year and period for you.
OK
Select this to navigate to the movements for the year and

period selected.
Cancel

different entry.
Start Transaction Date

This screen is displayed when you select the Establish Period/Year by Date option from the Start Financial
Period/Month screen or if you selected the sequence: Transaction date.
Field
Values
Description
Start at date
You use this field to enter the date for which you want
to navigate to movements in the listview. The system
automatically calculates the relevant year and period for the
entered date.
OK
Select this to return to the Start Financial Period/Month

screen. The year and period relative to the date you entered is
displayed in the Period field.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any date you entered and to return to the
previous screen.
| Queries | 419
Find
This screen is displayed when you select the Find option from the File menu.
Field
Values
Description
Inventory
movements
Select this to search Inventory movements for the item you

want to locate.
Sales movements
Select this to search Sales movements for the item you want to
locate.
Find selection
OK
Select this to use the Generic Find program to locate items in

the listview based on extensive search criteria.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any changes you and and to return to the
previous screen.
Options
Field
Values
Description
All
Select this to display Inventory movements for all suppliers in

the listview.
Single
Select this to display Inventory movements for a single supplier

in the listview.
Supplier
You use this field to indicate the single supplier for whom you
want to display Inventory movements in the listview.
All
Select this to display Sales movements for all customers in the

listview.
Single
Select this to display Sales movements for a single customer in

the listview.
Customer
You use this field to indicate the single customer for whom you
want to display Sales movements in the listview.
Supplier
selection
Customer
selection
OK
Select this to return to the listview and only display movements

for the selected customer/supplier.
Cancel

the listview.
Movements for Stock Code

The following details can be viewed in the listview:
Date

Type
This indicates whether the transaction movement is sales-related or inventory-related.
| Queries | 420
Wh
This indicates the warehouse for which the transaction was processed.
Period
This indicates the financial period in which the transaction was processed.
Ref/invoice
This indicates the reference defined against the transaction.

Trn type
This indicates the specific type of sales or inventory transaction processed.
Table 3: Sales-related transactions
Deb
Debit note
Cre
Credit note
Inv
Invoice
IBT
Inter-branch transfer
DsP
Movements generated via Dispatch Notes
DsI
IBT movements generated via Dispatch Notes
Table 4: Inventory-related transactions

Iss
Issues
Tra
Transfers
Rec
Receipts
Phy
Physical
Adj
Adjustments
Chg
Changes
Mod
Modifications
BFL
Backflushing
Bin Tra
Bin Transfer
Quantity

Transaction value
This indiactes the value of the transaction.

Customer/supplier
This indicates the code of the supplier or customer for whom the transaction was processed.
Name
This indicates the name of the supplier or customer for whom the transaction was processed.
Customer purchase order
This indicates the code of the customer's purchase order number for the transaction.
Job/p/order
This indicates the job or purchase order associated with the transaction.
Branch
| Queries | 421
This indicates the Accounts Receivable branch for a sales movement transaction.
Salesperson
This indicates the salesperson associated with a sales movement transaction.

Area
This indicates the geographic area associated with a sales movement transaction.
Unit cost
No values are displayed in this column if the Costing method defined against the warehouse is FIFO
(Inventory Warehouses), or if you have not selected Costing per warehouse and the Costing method
defined against the company is FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Unit price/New cost
No values are displayed in this column if the Costing method defined against the warehouse is FIFO
(Inventory Warehouses), or if you have not selected Costing per warehouse and the Costing method
defined against the company is FIFO or LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).
New wh
This indicates the warehouse into which the item was transferred. This is displayed for an Inventory
transfer type movement.
Sale amount
This indicates the sale amount for a sales movement transaction.

Bin location
This indicates the bin location for the transaction.

Dsp note/Doc no
This indicates the dispatch note number or the Inventory document generated for the transaction.
Order type
This indicates the sales order type used for a sales movement transaction. See Order Types.
Sales order
This indicates the sales order number for a sales movement transaction.
Jnl/Reg no.
This indicates the journal or register number generated by the transaction.

Ledger code
This indicates the General Ledger code used for the transaction.
Revision
This indicates the revision number of an ECC controlled item processed in the transaction.
Release
This indicates the release number of an ECC controlled item processed in the transaction.
From bin
Note:
You can prevent the unauthorized viewing of transaction values by denying operators access to
the field: Show costs in Inventory/WIP queries (Operators).
Bin transfer transactions are only displayed if the option: Record movements for bin transfers is
selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab).
Quotation Query by Stock Code

You use the Quotation Query by Stock Code program to view quotation information for a selected stock
item.
| Queries | 422
The program can be accessed by selecting the Quotations option from the Production pane of the
Quotation Query by Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Exit
File
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the stock code for which you want
to view the quotation information.
Listview
When you select the Quotation Query by Stock Code program, the quotations currently defined for the
selected stock code are displayed in a listview.
ECC Revision/Releases
You use the ECC Revision/Releases program to view revision and release information for ECC controlled
items.
You can access this program by:
selecting the Production option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program and selecting
the ECC History option
selecting the Change Rev/Rel option from the Forecast Maintenance program
selecting the Revision or Release option from the Material Allocation Maintenance program
Note:
Revision/Release is the default wording, but this is replaced by whatever wording you assigned to
these user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup - Control tab).
Engineering change control tracking information (revisions/releases) for an item is only retained from the
time the item is set to be ECC controlled (Stock Code Maintenance - Tracking).
Revision/Release for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start At
Exit
View Stock
Information
Select this to view stock information for the currently

highlighted revision/release line using the ECC Stock
Quantities program.
File
Function
| Queries | 423
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at revision
You use this field to enter the revision to which you want to
OK
Select this to navigate to the revision you entered in the

previous field.
Cancel

different entry.
Listview
When you select the ECC Revision/Releases program, the revisoons/release for the selected stock code
Revision
Release
Current
Date
ECO
Jobs held
Purchases held
Sales held
Material allocs held
ECC Stock Quantities

You use the ECC Stock Quantities program to view stock information for a specific release of an ECC
controlled item.
You access this program by selecting the View Stock Information option from the Function menu of the
ECC Revision/Releases program.
Note:
Revision/Release and Rev/Rel is the default wording, but this is replaced by whatever wording you
assigned to these user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup - Control tab).
Stock Information for Rev/Rel

Field
Values
Close
Description
Stock Information for Rev/Rel

Warehouse
Available
Unallocated
Quantity on hand
| Queries | 424
Quantity on order
Allocated to sales orders
Quantity on back order
Allocated to WIP
GIT quantity
Dispatched not invoiced
Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code

You use the Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code program view serial reservation information for a
serialized parent in item.
You use the Parent/Lot Serial Reservation program to reserve serials for parent parts.
The Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Reserved
Parent Serials option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.
Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Start At
Exit
File
Include
Include Completed Select this to include details for completed serials in the
Serials
listview.
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at
warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse to which you want to
OK
Select this to navigate to the warehouse you entered in the

previous field.
Cancel

different entry.
Listview
When you select the Parent Serial Reservations for Stock Code program, the serials currently reserved
for the stock item are displayed in a listview.
Job
This indicates the job number for the parent item.

Serial
This indicates the serial number reserved for the parent item.
Expiry date
| Queries | 425
This indicates the expiry date for the serial.

Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the serial is reserved.

Location
This indicates the location defined against the serial.

Lot

Inspection
This indicates the quantity in inspection for the parent item for the serial.
Scrapped
This indicates the quantity scrapped for the parent item for the serial.
Reworked
This indicates the quantity reworked for the parent item for the serial.
Received
This indicates the quantity receipted for the parent item for the serial.
Stock code
This indicates the stock code of the parent item.

Co-product line
Revision
This indicates the revision number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECC
Release
This indicates the release number of the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECC
Serial type
This indicates the Serial tracking method defined against the parent item (Stock Code Maintenance Tracking tab).
Complete
This indicates whether the reserved serial is complete.
A reserved serial for a parent part is set to complete when the quantity receipted into stock plus the
quantity scrapped plus the quantity reworked is equal to the quantity reserved.
Quantity reserved
Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code

You use the Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code program to view lot reservation information for a lot
traceable parent item.
You use the Parent/Lot Serial Reservation program to reserve lots for parent parts.
The Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Reserved
Parent Lots option from the Query menu of the Inventory Query program.
Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code

| Queries | 426
Field
Values
Description
Start At
Exit
Complete Lots
Select this if you want to display details of completed lots in the

listview.
File
Include
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at
warehouse
You use this field to enter the warehouse in which the lot you
want to view is reserved.
OK
Select this to display the lots for the warehouse you entered in
the previous field.
Cancel

different entry.
Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code Listview

Job
This indicates the job number for the parent item against which the lot is reserved.
Lot
This indicates the lot number that is reserved.

Concession
This indicates the concession number defined against the lot.

Expiry date
This indicates the expiry date for the lot.

Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the lot is reserved.

Quantity reserved

Inspection
This indicates the quantity of the item currently in inspection.

Scrapped
This indicates the quantity of the item currently scrapped.

Reworked
This indicates the quantity of the item currently being reworked.

Received
This indicates the quantity of the item currently receipted into stock.
Lot exists
A 'Y' in this column indicates that the lot number exists in the Lot Master table/file.
| Queries | 427
If this column is blank, it indicates that the lot was created as a reservation only.
Stock code
This displays the stock code of the parent item.

Co-product line
Revision
This indicates the revision number for the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECC
Release
This indicates the release number for the item. This is only displayed for items defined as ECC
Complete
This indicates whether the lot is complete.
Inventory Journal Zoom

You use the Inventory Journal Zoom program to view information relating to an inventory journal.
Inventory journals are created to record inventory transactions created in the Inventory Control, Work in
Progress or Purchase Order modules.
Zoom on Inventory Journal

You can use the Zoom icon from the Inventory Journal Zoom program to view the details for the selected
journal line entry.
Inventory Journal Details
The following information is included in this pane by default:
Journal number
Journal date
Stock code
Warehouse
Description
Reference
Quantity
Unit of measure
Journal ledger code
Product class
Transaction
Notation
Transaction value
Previous unit cost
New unit cost
Inventory Journal Zoom

You use the Inventory Journal Zoom program to view information relating to inventory journals.
Inventory journals are created to record inventory transactions created in the Inventory Control, Work in
Progress or Purchase Order modules.
| Queries | 428
You can access the Inventory Journal Zoom program by selecting the View Journals option from the
Movements listview of the Inventory Query program. Alternatively, you can use your left mouse button
on an Inventory related transaction line in the Details listview of the GL Query program and select the
Inventory Journal option.
Inventory Journal Summary Details

Journal number

Journal date

Month number
This indicates the period and year in which the transaction was processed.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse in which the transaction was processed.

Operator
This indicates the operator who processed the transaction for the journal.
Ledger codes
Warehouse control
Non-stocked control
Cost of goods sold control
Sub-contract operations control
Warehouse variance control
Purchase price variance control
Inventory Journal Summary Entries

Field
Values
Description
Zoom
Select this icon to use the Inventory Journal Zoom program

to view the details for the selected line entry.
Show Fifo
Journals
Select this to display the corresponding FIFO journal(s) for the

line(s) currently displayed in the listview.
Listview
Details of the line entries for the selected journal are displayed in this listview.
Entry
Stock Code
Transaction
Quantity
Value
FIFO journal
This indicates whether the detail line is the FIFO journal. When you select to Show FIFO Journals, then
'Yes' is displayed in this column to indicate which line is the FIFO journal line.
| Queries | 429
Browse on Operations
You use the Browse on Operations program to view routing details of operations assigned to a stock
code.
Stock Code for Operations Browse

When you select the Browse on Operations program, you need to define the parent item for which you
want to view the operation information.
Once the operation information for the selected parent item is displayed you can use the Change Stock
Code option to enter a different parent item.
Field
Values
Description
Exit
File
Stock code
You use this field to enter the stock code for which you want to
view the operations.
The following message is displayed when you enter a
stock code which is defined as a co-product (Stock Code
Maintenance - Descriptive tab) and is attached to the bill of
materials via a notional part (BOM Co-products):
"The stock code entered is a co-product. Do you wish to view
the operations for the notional part?"
If you select OK, then the operations linked to the notional part
are displayed.
If you select Cancel, then you can enter a new stock code.
Route
You use this field to indicate the specific routing for which you
want to view operation information.
When you select a route and the stock code you entered is a
co-product attached to the bill of materials via a notional part,
then you are prompted to view the operations for the notional
part.
Note:
You can only select a specific routing to view if you
have enabled the option: Alternate routings required
(Bill of Materials Setup).
Play

multimedia objects assigned to the structure.
Edit
Select this to use the Multimedia program to maintain

multimedia objects for the structure.
Graph
Select this to view a graphic representation of operations

defined for the structure.
Stock Code Details
| Queries | 430
Field
Values
Stock code
Description
This indicates the code of the item for which you are viewing
the operations.
If the stock code you entered is a co-product and you selected
to display the operations for the notional part, the code of the
co-product and not the notional part is displayed in this field.
Rev/Rel
You use this field to enter the revision and release of the parent
code for which you want to view the operations. You can only
enter this information if the parent item is ECC-controlled
Stock Code Information

The following information defined against the stock item (see Stock Code Maintenance) is included in this
pane:
Description
Long description
Economic batch quantity
Part category
Operations
Once you have entered and accepted a valid parent stock item, the operation details are displayed in a
listview.
Operation
Work center
Operation type
Queue
Run time
Setup time
Time uom
Rate
Machine
Elapsed time
ET fixed
Move
Move matrix
Milestone
Supplier
Work center description
What-if rate
Startup time
Startup quantity
Teardown time
Wait time
Capacity required
Capacity uom
Max operators
Max PU's
| Queries | 431
Std narration
No of pieces
Inspection
Minor set-up
Minor set-up time
Toolset
Toolset quantity
Toolset consumption
Narration first line
Lead time
Offsite time
Dock to stock
P/order stock code
Quantity per
P/order uom
Subcontract value
Subcontract what-if
Planner
Buyer
Revision
Release
Parent uom
Block/rate quantity
Operation yield qty
Transfer qty
Time taken
Stock run time
Stock startup qty
Stock block/rate qty
Stock operation yield qty
Stock transfer qty
Stock time taken
Dynamic move
Customer Price Query

You use the Customer Price Query program to view customer pricing information.
This query enables you to obtain the best price and alternatives for a specific stock item for a specific
customer without having to use the Sales Order Entry or Quotation Entry programs. This enables you to
improve customer service and save time.
The results of the query are displayed according to the information you enter and the preferences you
defined.
Customer Price Query

Field
Values
Description
Exit
File
| Queries | 432
Field
Values
Description
Preferences
Select this to configure options that will determine the level of

detail you want to view within the query.
Options
Customer
You use this field to enter the code of the customer for whom
you want to view pricing information.
Stock code
you want to view pricing information.
Quantity
You use this field to enter the quantity to use for the query.
This defaults to your entry at the Quantity to use field in the
Preferences, but can be changed.
The quantity you enter here is used for the current run of the
query only.
This field is only enabled after you have entered an valid
customer and stock code.
Preferences
Field
Values
Description
Price Preferences
The options on this tab enable you to define options related to

pricing.
Contract
Preferences

customer contracts.
TPM Preferences

trade promotions.
Save Preferences
Select this to save the configurations against your operator

code.
Note:
the Promotion date options (Promotions tab)are saved
for the current run of the program only.
Close
Select this to return to the previous screen. If you have not

selected the Save Preferences function, then the configurations
are saved for the current run of the program only.
Price Preferences
The following options can be selected from the Price Preferences tab:
Field
Quantity to use
Values
Description
You use this field to enter the default quantity to use for the
query.
This quantity is saved for future queries. You can however
indicate the quantity to use for individual queries in the Quantity
field on the main query screen.
This quantity cannot be negative or zero.
| Queries | 433
Field
Values
Default unit of
measure
Description
This option enables you to define the unit of measure for the
quantity to use and for the quantity for the best price.
The following units of measure can be selected:

Contract Preferences
The following options can be selected from the Contract Preferences tab:
Field
Values
Description
Include all
contracts
Select this to include all contracts in the query.
Expiry - days
before
You use this field to enter the expiry date (expiry date up to n
days before today) up to which you want to include contracts in
the listview.
Starting - days
ahead
You use this field to enter the starting date (starting date within
n days of today) from which you want to include contracts.
Days for
inclusion in
contracts
Warehouse to
use for costs
If you deselect this option, then you can enter the dates for
which contracts must be included.
This option enables you to define the warehouse from which

the cost of the item must be displayed.
The gross profit percentage for the prices are based on the
cost in the selected warehouse.
Operator default
Select this to use the default warehouse defined against your

operator code (Operators - Defaults tab).
Customer
warehouse
Select this to use the default warehouse defined against the

customer (Customers - General 2 tab).
Inventory
distribution
warehouse
Select this to use the default distribution warehouse defined

against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Descriptive
tab).
Inventory
warehouse to use
Select this to use the default warehouse to use defined against

the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales tab).
Specific
warehouse
Select this to specify the warehouse to use.
TPM Preferences
The following options can be selected from the TPM Preferences tab:
Field
Values
Description
Promotion
selections
| Queries | 434
Field
Values
Description
Include global
trade promotions
Select this to include global promotions in the query.
Include unqualified Select this to include promotions the customer did not qualify
promotions
for.
This is useful if, for example, you defined a 'Buy 5 get 1 free'
promotion. The customer orders a quantity of 4, therefore the
promotion does not apply. If you display these unqualified
promotions, then you can inform the customer that the order
would qualify for the promotion if the order quantity was
increased to 5.
Promotion date
options
This enables you to indicate the promotion start and end dates
for which you want to include promotions in the query.
If you do not define these dates, then all promotions, which
have not expired at the time of running the query, are included.
Note:
The dates you enter are saved for the current run of the
program only.
Start date
You use this field to enter the promotion start date for which
you want to include promotions in the query.
Expiry date
You use this field to enter the promotion end date for which you
want to include promotions in the query.
Best Price Details

This pane displays details of the best price for the customer/stock code combination.
Note:
Only contracts that have not yet expired are considered when calculating the best price.
Field
Values
Description
Quantity for
query
This displays the quantity entered at the Quantity to use field

defined against your Preferences. This indicates the quantity of
the stock item on which the query is based if a contract with a
Pricing method of Quantity discountbreaks (Contract Prices)
is in force or the stock code's pricing method is Quantity
discounted.
Unit of measure
for query
This indicates the unit of measure on which the query is

based. This defaults to the stocking unit of measure but can be
changed using the Preferences option from the Options menu.
Best price
This indicates the best price found for the customer/stock item
combination.
Note:
This excludes line discounts. The best price

including line discounts is displayed in the Price
after line discount field.
| Queries | 435
Field
Values
Description
This excludes Trade promotions pricing. You can
use the Show Captions option to display the Price
after TP discount and Price after TP pricing
fields, which include trade promotions.
The best price is determined as follows:
If contracts exist for the customer, the lowest contract price

is displayed as the best price.
Only contracts that have not yet expired are considered
when calculating the best price.
If there are no contracts, then the best price is determined
by applying the appropriate price and discount combination
based on the customer's automatic pricing information and
the stock code's pricing information.
The price displayed is the actual price that will be used in
the sales order. The discount information is also displayed.
It does not actually apply the discount to the price and
display the result.
If an auto price code is defined for a customer and no
contract exists, then the auto price code is used if this is the
best price.
If automatic pricing is not defined for the customer, or the
pricing information for the automatic pricing code against
the customer is not defined against the stock item, then the
list price is displayed as the best price.
The last price paid and all price codes available for the
stock item are displayed, thereby giving you the information
to make the appropriate pricing decision.
Pricing unit of
measure
This indicates the unit of measure on which the price is based.
Price code
This indicates the price code for the best price.
Price after TP
discount
This indicates the price after applying trade promotions

discounts.
This field can be displayed using the Show Captions option.
Price after TP
pricing
This indicates the price using trade promotions pricing. Note

that this is the price before discount.
Discount details
Discount value 1-3 This indicates the discount percentages applied to the price.
Discount value
Price after line

discount
This indicates the discount value less unit discount value if the
contract method is Coded. Nothing is displayed in this field for
any other types of contracts.
This indicates the best price after applying customer or price
code line discount. This excludes any Trade Promotions pricing
and is not applicable if a contract has been used as the best
price from the contract is already the net price.
| Queries | 436
Field
Values
Contract details
Description
Contracts are defined and maintained using the Contract
Prices program.
Contract number
used
This indicates the sales contract number for the best price.
Start date
This indicates the date on which the contract became effective.
Expiry date
This indicates the date on which the contract will no longer

be valid. An entry of 00/00/00 indicates that there is no expiry
date.
Pricing method
This indicates the pricing method defined against the contract.
Gross profit
percent
This indicates the gross profit percentage for the price, based
on the cost in the selected warehouse.
This is calculated as: ((Unit cost/Contract price) x 100) - 100
Stock Code Details

Field
Values
Description
Stock code
This indicates the stock code of the item you are querying.
Stock code
details
The following queries can be accessed from this field by

typically using your left mouse button:
Stock Code Quick View

Query (see Inventory Query)
Stock Code Setup (see Stock Code Maintenance)
Multimedia - select this to view multimedia objects attached
to the stock item (see Multimedia)
Description

the previous field.
Long description

code.
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse on which the costs are based.

This is the warehouse selected at the Warehouse to use for
costs preference (see Contract Preferences).
Unit cost
Warehouse Code Quick View

Warehouses (see Inventory Warehouses)
This indicates the unit cost of the item in the warehouse

selected in the Preferences.
| Queries | 437
Field
Values
Description
Costing unit of
measure
This indicates the costing unit of measure defined against the

stock item.
List price
This indicates the List price defined against the stock item
(Stock Code Maintenance - Sales Details).
List price unit of

measure
This indicates the unit of measure defined against the List price
code for the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales
Details).
Pricing category
This indicates the pricing category defined against the stock

item (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales Details).
It is only used with Extended pricing. It is used to establish the
price or discount code (depending on the pricing method) to be
applied to the stock code by finding the corresponding entry in
the customer's price category/code table.
Pricing method
This indicates the pricing method defined against the stock

item (Stock Code Maintenance - Sales Details).
Refer to Pricing and Discounts for additional information.
Customer details
Customer
This indicates the customer for whom you are processing the
query.
Customer branch
Customer Quick View

Query (see Customer Query)
Customer setup (see Customers)
to the customer (see Multimedia)
This indicates the branch defined against the customer (AR

Customer Maintenance - Customer Details).
Geographic area
Customer Branch Quick View

Query (see AR Branches)
to the customer branch (see Multimedia)
This indicates the geographic area defined against the

customer (AR Customer Maintenance - Customer Details).
Currency
Query (see Geographic Areas)

to the geographic area (see Multimedia)
This indicates the currency defined against the customer (AR

Customer Maintenance - Customer Details).
| Queries | 438
Field
Values
Description
Auto price code
Currency Quick View

Query (see Currencies)
to the currency (see Multimedia)
This indicates the auto price code defined against the customer
(AR Customer Maintenance - General Details).
It is used to establish the price (or discount code) applicable to
the sale of a specific stock code to the customer, depending on
whether the inventory pricing method is coded or discounted.
Customer
discount details
This displays the discount details defined against the customer

(AR Customer Maintenance - General Details).
Qty/Value discount This indicates whether quantity/value discounts are applicable
for the customer. These are order discount breaks assigned
when processing sales orders for the customer. These
discounts are applied to the total value or total quantity of a
sales order processed for the customer.
Invoice discount
code
This indicates the automatic discount that is applicable to each

invoice processed for the customer. A blank entry indicates that
automatic invoice discount is not required for the customer.
Product class
discount
This indicates whether product class discounts are applied to

the customer.
These discounts are applied to the order line value or order
line quantity of sales orders processed for the customer. All
common product classes for an order are accumulated; the
total of each product class is compared to the discount break
tables; and the discount applied to each line accordingly.
Line discount code This indicates the line discount code defined against the
customer.
It indicates the automatic discount applicable to each sales
order line processed for the customer. If blank, it indicates that
automatic line discount for the customer is not required.
Last Price Paid

The details in this pane are only displayed if you selected the option: Customer/stock code cross-ref.
required (AR Customer Maintenance - General Details).
The last two sales details of any stock item sold to the customer are displayed.
Price Category/Code Table

This table is defined against the customer (AR Customer Maintenance) and is used together with the
Extended pricing method. The pricing method is defined in Sales Order Setup.
| Queries | 439
Inventory Prices
The information in this listview relates to the inventory prices for the stock item. Details are only displayed
where the stock item's coded prices and quantity discount breaks are defined in the customer's currency.
Inventory price code (see Pricing for a Stock Code)
Inventory Qty Discounts

These details are only displayed for stock items which are quantity discounted.
Customer Contracts
Information is only displayed in this listview for contract customers.
Your selections on the Contract Preferences tab of the Preferences screen determine which contracts are
listed for the customer/stock code combination.
Expiry date
This indicates the expiry date of the contract. Only contracts that have not yet expired are considered
when selecting the best price.
Contract method
This indicates the Pricing method defined against the contract (see Contract Prices).
Contract Details
The information displayed in this pane relates to the currently highlighted line in the Customer Contracts
listview.
Quantity discounted
These fields are only populated if the contract method is Q - quantity discount breaks.
Up to five quantity/price code combinations defined against the contract are displayed.
Order Discounts
This tab displays the order level discount break information for the customer where these are applicable.
Type
This indicates whether the discounts are based on quantity or value.

Discount 1 - 3
This indicates the discount percentages applied.

Unit of measure
This indicates the unit of measure for a quantity type discount.
Product Class Discounts

This tab displays the product class discount details for the customer where these are applicable.
Product class
This indicates the product class to which the order discount breaks apply.
| Queries | 440
Discount 1- 3
This indicates the discount break percentages.
Service Charges
This tab displays the service charges attached to the selected stock code.
Code
This indicates the service charge code.

Description
This indicates the description for the service charge code.

Calculation type
This indicates how the service charge is calculated (see Service Charge Maintenance).
Product class
This indicates the product class to use for the service charge.
Value/Price
This indicates the value if the service charge calculation type is Fixed.
Prompt
This indicates the wording displayed for this charge code if this is a user-defined miscellaneous charge
code.
Returnable item
This indicates the returnable item's stock code for a returnable items service charge.
Quantity factor
This indicates the factor to apply to the order quantity before calculating the value of the charge line.
Method
This indicates whether the order quantity must be multiplied or divided by the Quantity factor specified.
Currency
This indicates the currency assigned to the service charge code. This only applies if you selected the
option: Foreign currency sales required (Accounts Receivable Setup - General tab).
Minimum quantity
This indicates the minimum order quantity for which the charge must be raised.
Minimum charge
This indicates the minimum service charge value to be invoiced to the customer for the service charge
code.
Maximum charge
This indicates the maximum service charge value to be invoiced to the customer for the service charge
code.
Fixed percent
This indicates the fixed percentage assign to the charge code. This only applies if the Calculation type
is Fixed percent.
Trade Promotions
This indicates trade promotions applicable to the customer/stock code combination.
The promotions included are based on the preferences you indicated.
| Queries | 441
Promotion code
This indicates the code of the promotion.

Description
This indicates the description attached to the promotion code.

Start date
This indicates the date from which the promotion can be applied.
Expiry date
This indicates the last date on which the promotion can be applied.
Promotion type
This indicates the type of promotion (see Promotion Code Maintenance).

Basis
This indicates the threshold type for the promotion.

Qualifies
This indicates whether the customer qualifies for the promotion.

Promotion value
This indicates the value applicable to the promotion.

Free goods quantity
This indicates the free goods applicable to this promotion.

Unit promotion value
This indicates the unit value of the promotion.
This is only displayed for accruals and off invoice promotion types. Free goods are excluded.
This column can be accessed from the Field Chooser.
TPM Prices
This pane displays the price breaks against Trade Promotions pricing. This is only applies if the customer
is a Trade promotions customer and Trade promotions pricing applies (AR Customer Maintenance) and
Trade promotion pricing applies to the Stock code (Stock Code Maintenance).
The quantity of the customer/stock code combination is not used in TPM pricing lookup, so all price breaks
are displayed. Only the Quantity basis is used and Mass and Volume are ignored in the search for the
price.
The order in which TPM pricing is searched is by:
Area - checked against the customer's geographic area

Product Group - although multiple buying groups may exist, only the first one against the customer is
considered.
Customer Class - checked against the customer's customer class
All - general with no specific requirements or special instructions
As soon as a price is found in one of these, it is displayed and search stops. If more than one price type is
defined against the stock code, then the price and quantity for the last one are displayed.
Inventory at a Glance
You use theInventory at a Glance program to view your current Inventory Control posting period as well
as the next document numbers and the next inventory journal number that will be used by the system.
| Queries | 442
The inventory values displayed include negative values owing to a negative on hand quantity only if you
selected the setup option: Negative quantity on hand to be included in Inventory Valuation (Inventory
Setup - Options tab). This decreases the total value of inventory.
Inventory at a Glance
Field
Values
Inventory
Valuation
Description
Select this to display your inventory warehouse values for the
current and previous two months.
Note:
You can also run an Inventory valuation using the
Inventory Valuation program.
Print

Inventory Valuation At A Glanceoutput pane.
Save Form
Values

mode.
See Design Mode.
Valuation Criteria
Field
Values
Description
Valuation option
These options enable you to indicate the basis for the inventory
valuation calculation.
FIFO
Select this to calculate the inventory values according to the

FIFO costs held in each FIFO bucket.
Valuation options
The value of the bucket is established by multiplying stock in

the bucket by the cost held within the bucket.
The value of all buckets on hand is accumulated to give the
total value for that warehouse's stock code.
This applies to all items, including Actual costing > Lot
traceable and Actual Costing > Batch serial items (Inventory
Setup - General tab).
This option is only applies if you selected the FIFO valuation
option (Inventory Setup - General tab).
LIFO
Select this to calculate the inventory values according to the

LIFO costs held in each LIFO bucket.
| Queries | 443
Field
Values
Description
This option is only available if your Costing method is set to
LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Current cost
Select this to value the inventory at the current cost.

Select this to value your inventory at the unit cost currently held
against the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code). If your
costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup or Inventory
Warehouses if you selected costing per warehouse), the unit
cost is the last cost.
Last cost
Select this to value your inventory according to the last cost

that was entered when you processed a receipt of the item into
stock.
Warehouse costing Select this to value your inventory according to costing method
method
defined against each warehouse.
If you selected Actual Costing > Lot traceable and/or Actual
costing > Batch serials (Inventory Setup - General tab), then
those items are valued using FIFO valuation, regardless of the
warehouse or company costing method.
You can only select this option if you selected the option:
Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Company costing
method
This indicates the costing method defined for the company

(Inventory Setup - General tab) and is displayed for
information purposes.
Posting month
This indicates the financial period that your Inventory module is

currently in.
Posting year
This indicates the financial year that your Inventory module is

currently in.
Current year
This indicates the next journal number that will be allocated

to inventory transactions if you process them into the current
year.
Previous year
This indicates the next journal number that will be allocated to

inventory transactions if you process them into the previous
year.
Next transfer out

document
This is the number that will be assigned to the next document

printed to record the transfer of items between warehouses
using the Inventory Movements program.
Posting period
Next inventory
journal numbers
Numbering
Note:
the next document number is enabled for your
Transfers out document format.
| Queries | 444
Field
Values
Description
Next issue
document

printed to record the issue of items for miscellaneous purposes
using the Inventory Movements program.
Note:
the next document number is enabled for your Issue
document format.
Next stock receipt

document

printed to record the receipt into stock of an item using the
Note:
the next document number is enabled for your Stock
receipts document format.
After processing
complete

Inventory Valuation At A Glance output pane.
Inventory Valuation At A Glance

The following information is displayed in this pane for each warehouse:
Warehouse
This indicates the warehouse code.

Description

Current month
This indicates the current Inventory balances for the current month to date for the warehouse.
Previous month 1
This indicates the closing Inventory balance for the previous month for the warehouse.
Previous month 2
This indicates the closing Inventory balances for the month before last for the warehouse.
Warehouse costing method
This indicates the costing method defined against the warehouse.
This is only displayed if you selected the option: Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General
tab) and you assigned different costing methods to your warehouses.
| Browses | 445
Browses
You use the Inventory Warehouses program to view information on warehouses required for your stock
items.
The Warehouse Maintenance program, accessed from the Inventory Warehouses program, enables
you to maintain these warehouses.
Once the warehouses are created, you use the Warehouses for Stock Code program to link stock items
to these warehouses.
Field
Values
Description
Select
Select this to use the currently highlighted warehouse in

the warehouse field of another program. This option is
only enabled when theInventory Warehouses program is
accessed from another program.
Start At
Select this to navigate to a specific warehouse in the listview.
List
Select this to use the List of Warehouses program to

generate a report of the warehouses currently held on file.
Exit
Add
Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance program to

add a new warehouse.
Change
Select this to use the Warehouse Maintenance program to

maintain the details of the warehouse currently highlighted in
the listview.
Delete
Select this to delete the warehouse currently highlighted in the

listview.
File
Edit

Options
Confirm Deletions
deletion of the selected warehouse. If you do not select this
option, then the selected warehouse is deleted immediately
providing no balances or outstanding transactions exist against
the warehouse.
Sequence
| Browses | 446
Field
Values
Description
Warehouse
Select this to view the warehouses in the listview according to

the warehouse code.
Description
Select this to view the warehouses in the listview according to

the description for the warehouse.
Start
Field
Values
Start at
warehouse
Description
Depending on the sequence in which you are browsing
warehouses, you will enter either the warehouse or the
warehouse description in this field.
Your entry here indicates the point from which you want to start
viewing warehouses in the listview.
OK
Select this to navigate to the warehouse you selected.
Cancel
Select this to return to the listview without navigating to another

warehouse.
Warehouses Listview
When you select the Inventory Warehouses program, the warehouses currently defined are displayed in
a listview.
Warehouse
This indicates the code allocated to the warehouse.

Description
This indicates the description for the warehouse.

Multiple bins
This indicates whether multiple bins are used in the warehouse.

Costing level
When you are using Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup), you can define the costing method to
use against each warehouse, or you can use the costing method defined against the company.
This indicates the costing level defined for the warehouse (i.e. whether the costing method against the
warehouse or the costing method against the company is used for this warehouse).
Costing method
This indicates the costing method applicable to the warehouse. This determines how the inventory is
valued for the warehouse.
The costing methods are indicated as follows:
A = average costing
S - standard costing
F - FIFO costing
I - LIFO costing
L - last cost
| Browses | 447
Suppliers for Stock Code

You use the Suppliers for Stock Code program to view the currently defined links between approved
SYSPRO suppliers and the part numbers of approved manufacturers.
The Suppliers for Stock Code program can be accessed by selecting the Add Suppliers option from the
Edit menu of the Approved Manufacturers Parts program.
You use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier Maintenance program to link approved SYSPRO
suppliers to the part numbers of approved manufacturers.
Suppliers for Stock Code

Field
Values
Description
Select

in the corresponding field of another program. This option is
only enabled when the Approved Manufacturers program is
accessed from another program.
Start at
Select this to navigate to a specific supplier in the listview.
Exit
Add
Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier

Maintenance program to add a new supplier to the part
number.
Change
Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer's Supplier

Maintenance program to maintain the details for the supplier/
part number link.
Delete

highlighted in the listview and the part number.
Confirm Deletions
deletion of a supplier/part number link. If you do not select this
option, then the link is deleted immediately.
File
Edit
Options
Start
These options are displayed when you select the Start at option from the File menu.
Field
Values
Description
Start at supplier
You use this field to enter the code of the supplier to which you
OK

field.
Cancel

different entry.
| Browses | 448
Suppliers for Stock Code Listview

When you select the Add Suppliers option from the Edit menu of the Approved Manufacturers Parts
program, a listview displays the suppliers already linked to the manufacturer's part number you highlighted
in the listview of the Approved Manufacturers Parts program.
The following information is included in the Suppliers for Stock Code listview:
Supplier
This column displays the approved SYSPRO supplier for the manufacturer's part number.
Description
This column displays the SYSPRO supplier's name.

Details
This column displays the first line of the detail notes assigned to the SYSPRO supplier of the
manufacturer 's part number.
Preferred
This column indicates whether or not the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO supplier link is the
preferred combination for purchasing purposes.
Note:
This is currently documentary only.
Approved Manufacturers
You use the Approved Manufacturers program to view details of approved manufacturers currently
defined.
Approved manufacturers are maintained using the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance program.
Approved Manufacturers
Field
Values
Description
Select
Select this to use the manufacturer currently highlighted in

the listview in the manufacturer field of another program. This
option is only enabled when the Approved Manufacturers
program is accessed from another program.
Start at
Select this to navigate to a specific manufacturer in the listview.
Play
Select this to view any multimedia objects defined against the

manufacturer currently highlighted in the listview.
Exit
Add
Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance

program to add a new manufacturer.
Change
Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Maintenance

program to maintain the details for the manufacturer currently
File
Edit
| Browses | 449
Field
Values
Description
Delete
Select this to delete the manufacturer currently highlighted in

the listview.
Confirm Deletions
deletion of a manufacturer. If you do not select this option, then
the manufacturer is deleted immediately.
Options
Start
Field
Values
Description
Manufacturer
You use this field to enter the manufacturer you want to

navigate to in the listview.
OK
Select this to navigate to the manufacturer entered in the

previous field.
Cancel

specific manufacturer.
Approved Manufacturers Listview

When you select the Approved Manufacturers program, a listview displays the approved manufacturers
already defined.
Manufacturer
This column displays the code assigned to the approved manufacturer

Manufacturer name
This column displays the name assigned to the manufacturer code.

Detail
This column displays the first line of the detail notes assigned to the manufacturer code.
Approved Manufacturers Parts

You use the Approved Manufacturers Parts program to view details of approved manufacturers' part
numbers currently defined.
You use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number Maintenance program to define details of approved
manufacturers' part numbers and to link these part numbers to your SYSPRO stock codes.
Approved Manufacturer's Part Numbers

Field
Values
Description
Select
Select this to use the manufacturer part currently highlighted

in the listview in the part field of another program. This option
is only enabled when the Approved Manufacturers Parts
File
| Browses | 450
Field
Values
Description
Start at
Select this to navigate to a specific manufacturer's part in the

listview.
Find

Exit
Add
Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number

Maintenance program to add a new manufacturer's part.
Change
Select this to use the Approved Manufacturer Part Number

Maintenance program to maintain the details for the
manufacturer's part currently highlighted in the listview.
Delete
Select this to delete the manufacturer's part currently

Add Suppliers
Select this to use the Suppliers for Stock Code program to

link the parts to SYSPRO suppliers.
Confirm Deletions
deletion of a manufacturer. If you do not select this option, then
the manufacturer is deleted immediately.
Edit
Options
Sequence
Select this to indicate the sequence in which you want to

display the information in the listview.
One of the following sequences can be selected:
Stock code (i.e. the SYSPRO stock code)

Manufacturer
Manufacturer part number
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at
stock code /
manufacturer /
manufacturer part
number
You use this field to enter the item to which you want to
navigate in the listview. You either enter the stock code or the
manufacturer or the manufacturer part number depending on
your selection at the Sequence menu.
OK

field.
Cancel

different entry.
Approved Manufacturer's Part Numbers Listview

When you select the Approved Manufacturers Parts program, a listview displays the manufacturer's part
numbers already define for each manufacturer.
The following information is included in the listview of manufacturer's part numbers:
| Browses | 451
Stock code
This column displays the SYSPRO stock code that is linked to the manufacturer's part number.
Stock code long description
Manufacturer
This column displays the manufacturer of the part number linked to the SYSPRO stock code.
Manufacturer part number
This column displays the manufacturer's part number.

Part number details
This column displays the first line of the detail notes assigned to the manufacturer 's part number.
Preferred
This column indicates whether or not the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code link is
the preferred combination for purchasing purposes.
'I' indicates that the link is inactive. 'A' indicates that the link is active.
Note:
Status
This column indicates whether or not the current manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code link is
active for purchasing purposes.
Note:

Revision number
This column displays the revision number for the manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code
combination.
Note:

Effective date
This column displays the date from which the manufacturer part number/SYSPRO stock code
combination can be used for purchasing purposes.
Note:
Cost Unit of Measure

You use the Cost Unit of Measure program to view details of currently defined unit of measure conversion
factors for stocked items where the unit of measure in which the item is stocked is not the same as the unit
of measure in which the item is costed.
Unit of measure conversion factors are maintained using the Unit of Measure Maintenance program.
Inventory Cost Unit of Measure

Field
Values
Description
File
| Browses | 452
Field
Values
Description
Select
Select this to use the unit of measure currently highlighted in

the listview in the unit of measure field of another program.
This option is only enabled when the Cost Unit of Measure
Start at
Select this to navigate to a specific unit of measure in the

listview.
List
Select this to use the List of Inventory Costs Um program

to generate a report of all inventory cost units of measure
currently defined on file.
Exit
Add
Select this to add a new cost unit of measure.
Change
Select this to maintain the currently highlighted cost unit of

measure.
Edit
Danger:
Changing the cost unit of measure affects your
Inventory valuation for those units of measure defined
against stock items. Refer to for details.
Delete
Select this to delete the currently highlighted cost unit of

measure.
Confirm Deletions

the deletion of a cost unit of measure before performing the
deletion process. If you do not select this option, then the unit
of measure is deleted immediately you select to delete it.
Options
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at stock u/m
You use this field to enter the stock unit of measure to which
you want to navigate in the listview.
Start at cost u/m
You use this field to enter the cost unit of measure to which you
OK
Select this to return to the listview at the unit of measure you

entered.
Close

specific unit of measure.
Listview
When you select the Cost Unit of Measure program, the inventory cost units of measure currently defined
Stock u/m
| Browses | 453
This indicates the stocking unit of measure.

Cost u/m
This indicates the costing unit of measure.

Conversion factor
This indicates the factor to use to convert the stocking unit of measure to the cost unit of measure.
Multiply/Divide
This indicates whether the conversion factor is multiplied or divided to convert the stocking unit of
measure to the cost unit of measure.
Pricing for a Stock Code

You use the Pricing for a Stock Code program to view details of coded prices and quantity discount
breaks assigned to selected stock items.
You use the Stock Code Price Maintenance program to maintain coded prices and quantity discount
breaks against stock items.
Pricing for Stock Code

This listview is displayed once you have entered and accepted a valid SYSPRO stock code.
Field
Values
Description
Select

Start at
Exit
Add
Select this to use the Stock Code Price Maintenance

program to add a new price for the stock item.
Change
Select this to use the Stock Code Price Maintenance

program to maintain the entry currently highlighted in the
listview.
Delete

listview.
Confirm Deletions
deletion of a when you select to delete it. If you do not select
this option, then the code is deleted without warning.
File
Edit
Options
Functions
Quantity Discounts Select this to use the Stock Code Quantity Discounts
program to assign price codes to selected stock items based
on the sale of specific quantities of that item.
Stock code
You use this field to indicate the stock code for which you want
to view and/or maintain pricing.
| Browses | 454
Start
Field
Values
Description
Start at price
code
You use this field to enter the price code to which you want to
OK
Select this to navigate to the code you entered in the previous

field.
Cancel

different entry.
Pricing for Stock Code Listview

This listview displays the price codes already defined for the selected stock code.
Price code
This indicates the price code.

Price
This indicate the selling price associated with the price code.
Uom
This indicates the unit of measure for the price basis.

Basis
This indicates the unit of measure on which the price is based.

Commission
This indicates the commission code assigned to the price code.

Currency
This indicates the currency applicable to the price.
Browse on GIT References

You use the Browse on GIT References program to view details held against goods in transit reference
numbers.
These transactions originate in the Inventory Movements program (i.e. warehouse transfers) and the
Sales Order Entry program (i.e. supply chain transfers).
You can edit the due date of a transaction line as well as drill down to the detail lines for a reference and
the transactions posted for each line.
Goods in Transit References

Field
Values
Description
Select

Start At
File
| Browses | 455
Field
Values
Description
Exit
Change Due Date
Select this to maintain the due date of the transfer. This option
is not available if the transaction is complete (see Edit Due
Date).
Edit
Sequence
Select this to indicate the order in which you want to display

the transactions in the listview. One of the following can be
selected:
Reference (i.e. the GIT reference)

Source warehouse
Target warehouse
Functions
Query Reference
Select this to use the GIT Reference Query program to

view details of the GIT reference currently highlighted on the
listview.
Select

Change
Select this to maintain the due date of the transfer. This option
is not available if the transaction is complete.
Start at
Reference /
Source
Warehouse /
Target
Warehouse
Depending on the sequence in which you are displaying the

information in the listview, you use this field to enter the GIT
reference or Source warehouse or Target warehouse to which
you want to navigate in the listview.
Once you have entered the reference or warehouse code, you
select the Start at arrow icon to navigate to that entry.
Edit Due Date

This screen is displayed when you select the Change Due Date option from the Edit menu or the Change
icon from the toolbar.
Field
Values
Description
Reference
This indicates the transaction reference associated.
Source wh
This indicates the warehouse out of which the item is being

transferred.
Target wh
This indicates the warehouse to which the item is being

transferred.
Due date
This indicates the expected delivery date, but can be changed.

The due date is calculated using the transaction date plus the
warehouse lead time defined for the item (Warehouses for
Stock Code). The lead time is the number of days it takes to
move the stock item from the source warehouse to the target
warehouse.
Complete
This indicates whether or not the transfer is complete.
Edit due date
| Browses | 456
Field
Values
Description
Save
Select this to save your change.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any change you made and to return to the
listview.
Listview
When you select the Browse on GIT References program, the currently defined GIT references are
Only the transfers you selected to include from the Goods in Transit Selection pane are displayed.
Note:
If the option: Filter reports and browses is selected (Operators - Security tab), then the GIT
references for source warehouses to which you have been denied access are not displayed. In
addition, if the option: Apply operator access control to destination warehouse on transfers OUT is
selected (Inventory Setup - Options tab), then GIT references for target warehouses to which you
have been denied are not displayed.
Reference
This indicates the reference associated with the Goods in Transit transaction.
Source warehouse
This indicates the warehouse out of which the item is being transferred.
Target warehouse
This indicates the warehouse to which the item is being transferred.

Creation Date
This indicates the date on which the initial transfer out was created.
Transfer value
This indicates the value of the item(s) being transferred.

Receipt value
This indicates the value of receipts made against the GIT reference.
Outstanding value
This indicates the value not yet receipted. This value is zero when the GIT reference is complete.
Complete
This indicates whether or not the transfer is complete. If it is complete, then the goods transferred out
were receipted in and the Outstanding value should be zero.
Transfer type
This indicates whether the transaction originated in the Inventory Movements program as a
Warehouse transfers or in the Sales Order Entry program as a Supply chain transfer.
Control account
This indicates the General Ledger account that will be debited with the transfer value for transfers out
and credited with the transfer value for transfers in.
Operator
This indicates the code of the operator who processed the transaction.
Goods in Transit Selection

This pane enables you to indicate which Goods in Transit references you want to display in the listview.
| Browses | 457
Field
Values
Refresh
References
Description
Select this to refresh the listview and to only display the
transactions you selected to view. Your selections are valid for
the current run of the program only.
This function is only available after you make a change to the
selections.
Include
Warehouse
transfers
Select this to list warehouse transfers originating from the

Inventory Movements program in the listview.
Supply chain
transfers
Select this to list supply chain transfers originating in the Sales

Order Entry program in the listview.
Completed
transfers
Select this to list completed transfers in the listview.
Source
warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the source warehouse(s) for which

you want to display transactions in the listview.
Target warehouse
selection
This enables you to indicate the target warehouse(s) for which

you want to display transactions in the listview.
Transfer values
This enables you to indicate the transfer value(s) for which you
want to display transactions in the listview.
Cancel

the listview.
| Reports | 458
Reports
SRS Output Options
Within SYSPRO, reports may be generated using SYSPRO Reporting Services (or SRS).
To enable you to produce professional-looking reports quickly and with minimal effort, Output options are
provided when you generate a report using SYSPRO Reporting Services (SRS).
Output Options
The options on this tab page enable you to define the output destination(s) of the report once it has been
compiled. Multiple output destinations can be selected for the report. For example, you may select to
simultaneously email, print and export the report.
Note:
This tab page is displayed only when you generate a report using SYSPRO Reporting Services.
Field
Values
Report Theme
Description
This option enables you to select the theme you want to apply
to the report.
A theme changes the look of the report, without changing its
contents.
Both standard and user defined themes are displayed for
selection.
You will be unable to define a report theme if the option:
Disable theme selection is selected (SYSPRO Reporting
Services).
Refer to Themes for additional information on themes.
Email report
Select this if you want to email the report.

Email Options
Select this to use the Send Email program to define the

parameters for emailing the report.
The Office Automation and Messaging module is not required
for emailing documents from SYSPRO Reporting services.
This function is only enabled when you select the Email report
option.
Export report
Select this to export (save) the currently displayed report in a

specific location.
Instead of selecting this option, you can select the Preview
report option and export the report from the Report Preview
screen.
Export Options
Select this to define the parameters for exporting/saving the

report.
This function is only enabled when you select the Export report
option.
| Reports | 459
Field
Values
Print report
Description
Select this to output the report to a printer.
Printer Options
Select this to define the parameters for printing the report.

You can define the default paper size to use for your specific
reports using the Default printing paper size option (see SRS
Options).
This function is only enabled when you select the Print report
option.
Preview report
Select this to display the report on the screen.

Note:
All output options you selected are processed before
the report preview screen is displayed.
If you selected the Print Preview option from the File menu of
SYSPRO's main menu (SYSPRO Menu System), then this
option is selected by default, but can be deselected.
Save report
options
Select this to save the options you selected on the tab pages
as the default selections for future runs of the report.
For example, if you always generate a Cash Book Print for one
specific bank only and you always want to print the report, then
you can save these selections using this option. When next
you select to generate this report, the selections on all the tab
pages default to those you saved.
Clear Form
Archive report
Select this to reset all the options on all the tab pages to the
SYSPRO default selections.
Select this to save the report in the SYSPRO Reporting Service
archive.
Reports are archived in your SYSPRO ..\base folder in the
reportarchive sub folder. This destination cannot be changed.
Archived reports can be retrieved by selecting the Report
Archive option from the View menu of the SYSPRO Reporting
Services program. Access rights for retrieving archived reports
are defined against your operator using the activities: SRS
View operator group archived items and SRS View all archived
items (Operators - Security tab - Activities).
This option is selected by default if the setup option: Always
archive report is selected (SYSPRO Reporting Services). If
the setup option: Disable archive report is selected (SYSPRO
Reporting Services) then this option is disabled.
Process
Select this to generate the report according to the report

selections you made and the output options you defined.
This function is only enabled once you select at least one
report option or if you selected the Print Preview option from
the File menu of SYSPRO's main menu (SYSPRO Menu
System).
| Reports | 460
Field
Values
Close
Description
Select this to ignore any selections you made and to exit the
program without generating the report.
Export Options
The Export Options screen is displayed when you select the Export Options function.
Field
Values
Description
Export as
This option enables you to select the format in which the report
must be exported (saved).
Export options
Export formats can be categorized as page-based formats and

record-based formats.
Depending on the format you select, the layout (object position,
object size and relationships between these attributes and
other objects) and formatting (font style, text color, text
alignment, background color, etc) may not be perfectly
preserved. Generally, page-based formats preserve these
properties as closely as possible.
With record-based formats, the emphasis is on data rather than
layout and formatting. Some record-based formats are only
data-exchange formats, for example Adobe Acrobat (PDF).
Crystal Report
(RPT)
Select this to export the report in Crystal Report (RPT) format.
Adobe Acrobat
(PDF)
Select this to export the report in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format.
This format exports (saves) your report with the current data
without modifying the original report.
This is a page-based format. The exported documents are

intended for printing and redistribution. Acrobat format will
export both layout and formatting in a manner that is consistent
with how the report looks on the Preview tab.
Acrobat format embeds the TrueType fonts that appear in the
document. (Non-TrueType fonts are not supported.)
This export format does not support Microsoft font-linking
technology, which is used to provide support for some
extended character sets such as Chinese HKCS. Therefore,
the fonts used in the report must contain all of the required
glyphs. The following URI types are supported for hyperlinks:
http:, https: and mailto:.
HTML 4.0
Select this to export the report in HTML 4.0 format.

You would typically select this option if you wanted to create a
report in SRS which you want to publish on a website or email
to a recipient. An HTML page per report page is generated in
the directory you specify. Once published or emailed, the report
can be viewed without requiring SYSPRO programs.
This is a page-based format.
This format preserves the layout and formatting of the report by
using DHTML.
| Reports | 461
Field
Values
Description
All the images in the report are saved externally and a
hyperlink is inserted in the exported HTML output. Therefore,
this export format generates more than one file in the output.
Microsoft Excel
(XLS)
Select this to export the report in Microsoft Excel (XLS) format.

This is a page-based format.
This format converts your report contents into Excel cells
on a page-by-page basis. Contents from multiple pages are
exported to the same Excel worksheet. If a worksheet becomes
full and there is more data to export, the export program
creates multiple worksheets to accommodate the data. If
a report object covers more than one cell, then the export
program merges cells to represent a report object.
Microsoft Excel has a limit of 256 columns in a worksheet;
therefore, any report object (or part thereof) that is added to
cells beyond 256 columns is not exported.
This export format retains most of the formatting, but it does
not export line and box objects from your report.
Microsoft Word
(RTF)
Select this to export the report in Microsoft Word (RTF) format.

This is a page-based, exact format that produces an RTF (Rich
Text Format) file.
The exported file contains text and drawing objects to
represent report objects. Individual objects are placed in text
frames.
This format is intended for use in applications such as fill-out
forms where the space for entering text is reserved as empty
text objects.
Almost all of the formatting is retained in this export format.
Text objects cannot, however, be placed outside the left edge
of the page. Therefore, if you have text objects in your report
that are placed before the left edge of the printable area, they
will be pushed right. (This is most noticeable in reports with
wide pages.)
Text (TXT)
Select this to export the report to a plain text file.
Export destination
You use this field to enter the location in which the report must
be saved.
You need to specify the full pathname and the file name to
which the report must be exported. The filename cannot
contain any characters that are reserved characters to XML,
such as: ' : & ' > <.
OK
Select this to save your entries and to return to the previous

screen.
Cancel
Select this to ignore any entries you made and to return to the
previous screen.
| Reports | 462
Report Preview
The Report Preview screen is displayed when you select the Preview report option.
Field
Values
Description
Email
Select this to email the report.
Stop
Select this to stop the process of displaying the report on the

screen.
Export to Excel
Select this to export the report to an Excel spreadsheet.
Export to Text
Select this to export the contents of the report as a text file.

When you select this option, the report contents are displayed
in a Notepad editor.
Select Expert
This enables you to apply a selection formula to the report

to filter the data in the report without re-running the report
from scratch. This, in effect, enables you to specify your own
selection criteria for the report.
You can use this to make the report easier to read by only
displaying certain records in the report. For example records
for a specific date.
Note:
This option is not available for archived and scheduled
reports.
Record
Select this to specify criteria for displaying records in the report.
Group
Select this to specify criteria for displaying group data in the

report.
Saved Data
This applies to reports previously exported or reports which

you designed and saved the data against using the Save data
report option.
If you select this option, then it displays the report with the
saved data. Any changes made to the database after the report
was saved do not affect the report (i.e. the program does not
refer to the database when generating the report).
Clear all selection

formulas
Refresh
Select this to clear any selection formulas you previously

specified in the current run of the program using the Select
Expert option.
Select this to re-query the database and to re-display the
report on the screen at the selected page. For example, if
you preview a report and scroll down to Page 10 and select
Refresh, then the report is refreshed and remains on Page 10.
This only applies when generating a report that extracts data
directly from a database; not when using a business object to
extract the data.
In addition, if you highlight a parameter you defined using the
Crystal 2008 Report Designer and select the Refresh icon, the
parameter prompt is displayed and can be changed.
Export to CSV
Select this to export the report to a CSV type text file. CSV is
an acronym for Comma-Separated Values.
| Reports | 463
Field
Values
Description
Each record in the file is typically a single line and each field in
the record is delimited by a specific delimiter (e.g. a comma).
See Export Report to CSV format.
A CSV file can be directly imported into most database or
spreadsheet programs.
Export Report
Select this icon to export (save) the currently displayed report

in a specific location.
The default file type created is Crystal Reports (*.rpt), but this
can be changed.
When you export a single document, the default file name
is created using the document type and the key field (e.g.
customer number, invoice number, quotation number,
purchase order number, etc). When you export a batch of
documents, the last document number or key field is used as a
reference in the file name.
Print Report
Select this icon to output the report to a printer.
Toggle Parameter
Panel
When you defined parameters against a report using the

Crystal 2008 Report Designer, you can use this option to view
the parameters and parameter values entered for the report.
Toggle Group
Tree
When you generate a grouped report (for example the

Inventory Valuation report), then you can select this icon to
display the values of the primary key sequence used in the
report in a treeview. From the treeview, you can select the item
you want to navigate to in the report.
Zoom
Select this icon to change the size of the report displayed on

the screen. This has no effect on the size in which the report is
printed.
Close Current
View (x)
Select this icon to close the currently displayed tab. This only
applies to reports that contain sub-reports and does not apply
to the Preview tab.
Export Report to CSV format

This screen is displayed when you select the Export to CSV option.
Field
Values
Description
Export to CSV
Select this to export the report to the File name specified and
according to the options you indicated.
Close
Select this to return to the previous screen without exporting

the report.
CSV export
options
Delimiter
This enables you to indicate the delimiter character to use to

wrap around each field in the record. This defaults to " (double
quotes).
| Reports | 464
Field
Values
Description
Separator
This enables you to indicate the delimiter character to use to

separate the fields or columns in a record. This defaults to ,
(comma).
Tab
Select this to use a Tab as the delimiter for separating

the fields in each record. When you select this option, the
Separator field is disabled.
Mode
Standard mode
Select this if you want to be able to indicate what to do with the

page and group sections of the report when exported.
Legacy mode
Select this to export the report to the file to resemble the rpt
format of the report.
File name
You use this field to indicate the name of the file to which you
want to export the report.
Report and page

sections
This refers the Report and Page headers and footers defined
against the report (see Design Pane).
Export
Select this to write all report headers and footers and page
headers and footers to the export file.
Do not export
Select this if you do not want to write any Report headers and
footers or Page headers and footers to the export file.
Isolate report or
page sections
Select this to write all Report headers and footers and Page
headers and footers to the export file, but to isolate them in the
file.
Report sections
This creates a bigger file and it resembles the rpt version of the
report where everything is more spaced out and easier to read.
If you don't select this option, then the Report and Page
headers and footers are included in each record of the file.
Group sections
Group sections
This refers the Group headers and footers defined against the
report (see Design Pane).
Export
Select this to write all Group headers and footers to the export
file.
Do not export
Select this if you do not want to write any Group headers and
footers to the export file.
Isolate group
sections
Select this to write all Group headers and footers to the export
file, but to isolate them in the file.
This creates a bigger file and it resembles the rpt version of the
report where everything is more spaced out and easier to read.
If you don't select this option, then the Group headers and
footers are included in each record of the file.
| Reports | 465
Inventory Valuation
You use the Inventory Valuation program to print a report indicating the value of stock held in each
warehouse and, optionally, in each bin location. This value can be based on either the current cost, the last
cost, or FIFO costs.
The report serves as the Trial Balance of the Inventory module. The Inventory Valuation report totals,
(when printed for all warehouses and stock codes), must equal the total of the Inventory control account(s)
in the General Ledger.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Current month
Select this to print the valuations as of the current month.
Previous month 1
Select this to print the valuations as of the previous month 1.
Previous month 2
Select this to print the valuations as of the previous month 2.
Valuation at:
Sequence
You use this field to indicate the sequence in which you want to
print the report. Available sequences include:
Report type
stock code
description
supplier
product class
Note:
This field is available only if you selected FIFO or LIFO
at the Valuation cost based on field.
Detail
Select this to print a detailed report that includes a cost

breakdown by bin location.
Summary
Select this to print a summary report that indicates the total

value held in each warehouse.
Current
Select this to value your inventory at the unit cost currently held
against the warehouse (Warehouses for Stock Code). If your
costing method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup or Inventory
Warehouses, if you selected costing per warehouse), then the
unit cost is the average cost of the FIFO buckets. The reason is
that different costs can exist in different FIFO buckets.
FIFO
The description for this field is FIFO if your Costing method

is set to FIFO and LIFO if your costing method is set to LIFO
(Inventory Setup - General tab).
Valuation cost
based on
Select this to value your inventory according to the FIFO/LIFO

costs held in each FIFO/LIFO bucket.
| Reports | 466
Field
Values
Description
Note:
This option is enabled only if you indicated that FIFO or
LIFO valuation is required (Inventory Setup).
Last cost
Select this to value your inventory according to the last cost

that was entered when you processed a receipt of the item into
stock.
LIFO
Select this to value your inventory according to the LIFO costs

held in each LIFO bucket.
Note:
This option is only displayed if your company Costing
method is set to LIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Warehouse cost
Select this to value your inventory according to costing method

defined against the warehouse.
You can only select this option if you selected the option:
Costing per warehouse (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Print warehouses
with zero value
If you want to print warehouses with a zero quantity only, then

you select this option and select the option: Print warehouses
with zero quantity and non-zero cost.
If you want to print only warehouses with a zero cost, then you
deselect this option and select the option: Print warehouses
with quantity on hand and zero cost.
No
Select this if you do not want to print warehouses with a zero

value.
Warehouses can have a zero value due to the cost or the
quantity or both being zero.
This option is available in the SRS version of the report.
Yes
Select this to list those warehouses that have a zero value of

the selected stock items.
Warehouses can have a zero value due to the cost or the
quantity or both being zero.
If you want to print warehouses where both the cost and the
quantity are zero, or where either the cost or the quantity are
zero, then you select this option.
This option is available in the SRS version of the report.
| Reports | 467
Field
Values
Description
Warehouses with
qty on hand and
zero cost
Select this if you want to include stock items with a non-zero

quantity on hand but with a zero unit cost in the report.
Warehouses with
zero qty and nonzero cost
Select this if you want to include stock items with a zero

quantity on hand but with a unit cost value.
This does not change the total inventory value for the
warehouse. (The total value for the warehouse is calculated
as the cost multiplied by the quantity for each stock item in the
warehouse). You would select this option if you wanted to print
these items even though they do not affect the total inventory
value for the warehouse(s) you selected.
This does not change the total inventory value for the
warehouse. (The total value for the warehouse is calculated
as the cost multiplied by the quantity for each stock item in the
warehouse). You would select this option if you wanted to print
these items even though they do not affect the total inventory
value for the warehouse(s) you selected.
Multiple bins
option
Multiple bins - print Select this if you do not want to list the totals for each individual
totals only
bin for the stock item on the report.
If a default bin is defined against the stock item, then the
default bin number is listed on the report together with one total
for the quantity on hand and one total value for all the bins. If
no default bin is defined, then the total quantity and value are
printed but no bin number is listed.
If you do not select this option, then the bin number, quantity
on hand and value for each bin defined against the stock item
is printed on the report. The total quantity and value are also
printed.
Note:
This option only applies if Multiple bins are required
for the company (Inventory Setup) or against the
warehouse(s) you selected to include in the report
(Warehouse Maintenance).
Include zero bins
Select this if you want to print details of bins with a zero

quantity on the report.
This option is only available in the SRS version of the report.
Check warehouse
for negative value
This option only applies when:
you selected the report option: Multiple bins - print totals

only
and
the setup option: Negative quantity on hand to be included
in Inventory Valuation is not selected (Inventory Setup Options tab)
| Reports | 468
Field
Values
Description
When you select this option, if the total on hand in the
warehouse is negative, then the total value of bins is zero for
the stock code/warehouse total. If you do not select this option,
then the total value of the bins for a warehouse includes only
the total of any positive bins.
Print product class

description
Select this to print the descriptions of the product classes on

the report.
You use the Product Classes program to define product
classes and their descriptions, which updates the SALPDS
file/table. The SALPDS file/table is used for the product class
descriptions in this report. If, however, you defined product
classes by branch, then the product class descriptions are not
printed on the report.
Note:
This option applies only if you selected to print the
report in product class sequence.
If you are printing the SRS version of the report and
you select to print the report in product class sequence,
then the product class description is automatically
printed.
Print mass for

warehouse
Select this if you want to print the total mass per warehouse for
the selected stock items on the report.
If you select the option: Multiple bins - print totals only, then this
option is disabled and the total mass is printed by default.
This option is not available in the SRS version of the report as
the total mass is printed by default.
Selections
This option enables you to indicate the stock codes that you want to include in the valuation.
Warehouse selection
This option enables you to indicate the range of warehouses you want to include in the valuation report.

Note:
Field
All
Values
Description
report.
| Reports | 469
Field
Values
Range
Description
Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Additional Options
The options on this tab page enable you to indicate additional options according to which you want to
generate the report.
Field
Values
Cycle count
selection
Description
You use this field
All
Select this to include all stock items in the valuation, regardless

of the number of times they have been counted.
Single
Select this to include only those stock items that have been
counted for the number of times you specify at the Cycle count
field.
Cycle count
You use tis field to enter the cycle count for which you want
to include items in the report. This field is only enabled if you
selected Single at the Cycle count selection option.
Print quantity on
hand by Rel/Rev
Select this to print only the on hand quantities of ECCcontrolled items. The on hand quantities per revision and/or
release per warehouse are printed.
Print ECC items

only
| Reports | 470
Field
Values
Description
Note:
Print zero quantity

Rel/Rev
This option is available only for ECC-controlled

items (Stock Code Maintenance) and where the
stock control level is set to Revision or Release (Bill
This option is not available if you selected FIFO at
the Valuation cost based on field.
The wording Rev/Rel is the default, but is replaced
by whatever wording you have assigned to these
user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup).
Select this to include on the report any ECC-controlled items

with a zero on hand quantity.
Note:
This option is available only for ECC-controlled

items (Stock Code Maintenance) and where the
stock control level is set to Revision or Release (Bill
This option is not available if you selected FIFO at
the Valuation cost based on field.
The wording Rev/Rel is the default, but is replaced
by whatever wording you have assigned to these
user-defined fields (Bill of Materials Setup).
Selections
Supplier selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The default
supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment
tab).
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report.
The product class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program
(Descriptive tab).
If a specific product class is entered, then only stock items belonging to that product class are included
in the valuation.
Output Options
Report Details
The Last Receipt date, Last Issue date and Total Mass are printed only if you selected the setup option:
Multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).
The value reflected at the Total mass column is calculated by multiplying the warehouse quantity on hand
of the item by the mass per stocking unit configured for the item. To obtain meaningful values, ensure that
the unit of measure configured for each item is in the appropriate weight.
| Reports | 471
If you generate the report for the same stock items in the same warehouses using Current cost and then
using FIFO cost, then the report values will differ if any issues, adjustments or transactions between receipt
transactions were processed. If only receipt transactions were processed on the stock item, then the
Current and FIFO values should be the same. The reason for this is that the Current Warehouse Cost field
is only updated when a receipt transaction is processed.
If you are using multiple bins, then there are two options for printing the quantity on hand. If you select the
option Multiple bins - print totals only, then the quantity is taken from the warehouse. If you do not select
the option Multiple bins - print totals only, then the quantity is taken from each individual bin and totalled.
The mass is always calculated from the stock warehouse as it is defined at stock code level, not at bin
level.
Balancing Inventory Valuation to the General Ledger
When the Inventory Valuation report is processed for all stock items and all warehouses and your
Inventory module is linked to the General Ledger, then the current inventory value total on the report
should equal the total of the Inventory control account(s) in your General Ledger.
If this is not the case, then you can check that:
no normal, standard or recurring journals were processed to the General Ledger inventory control
accounts. Only journals from the sub-modules should appear in these accounts. If other journal types
exist, then they need to be reversed.
If the option: Create GL journal is not selected for Inventory (General Ledger Integration), then run
the Inventory GL Integration program to ensure that all the General Ledger journals for transactions
processed are created.
If the option: Post GL journal is not selected for Inventory (General Ledger Integration), then use the
GL Journal Entry program to post the journals into the General Ledger.
one or more units of measure were not changed (Cost Unit of Measure). This only applies if your
inventory costs are held in a unit of measure other than stocked (Inventory Setup). Refer to for
additional details.
Inventory Aged Valuation

You use the Inventory Aged Valuation program to print a report indicating the value of your inventory
items aged over the last five years.
You can also define obsolescence percentages according to which you can offset the depreciation of your
stock against tax.
An accountant will want to avoid overstating assets (i.e. stock) and to reduce tax liability by accruing for
potential obsolescent stock. This report can form the basis for (and act as supporting documentation to) a
journal which would be manually entered in the General Ledger.
Note:
You can only access this program if you enabled the option: Aged inventory valuation required
(Inventory Setup).
The Balance function of the Inventory Period End program ensures that the quantity on hand is
equal to the sum of the six yearly buckets (i.e. current and five prior years).
The Inventory Initial Aged Valuation program enables you to capture balances for prior years.
If stock on hand is allowed to go negative (Inventory Setup) then only the current year's bucket
may go negative.
In addition, the current year's bucket can only go negative if all other buckets are zero.
Report Options
| Reports | 472
Field
Values
Sequence
Description
This option enables you to select the order in which the report
must be generated.
This option is only enabled if you select to print a detailed
report.
The following sequences are available:
Stock code
Description
Supplier
Product class
Warehouse
Print options
Prior years
Report option
Your selection at this option affects the number of columns

printed on the report. The total of all years and the total of the
current year are always printed.
2
Select this to print the current year's total in its individual

column and to accumulate the values for years 2, 3, 4 and 5 as
one value in the Year 2 column.
Select this to print the current and previous year's totals in

individual columns and to accumulate the values for years 3, 4
and 5 as one value in the Year 3 column.
Select this to print the current and last 2 year's totals in

individual columns and to accumulate the values for years 4
and 5 as one value in the Year 4 column.
Select this if you want to print each year's information in

individual columns.
Detail
Select this to print a report showing details of all selected stock

items, as well as a summary page of warehouse totals.
Summary
Select this to print only a summary page of warehouse totals.
Other Options
Select this to specify additional selection criteria according to

which you want to print this report.
Print
Select this to generate the report.
Close
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock codes that you want to include stock items in the valuation.
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the range of warehouses for which you want to include stock items in the
valuation report.
| Reports | 473
(Descriptive tab).
in the valuation.
Supplier selection
This enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The default supplier is
defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment tab).

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Other Options
This screen is displayed when you select the Other Options function.
| Reports | 474
Field
Values
Description
Include items with

zero quantity on
hand
Select this to include items with zero quantity on hand.
Include items with

qty on hand less
than zero
Select this to include items with a quantity on hand that is less

than zero.
Include values
Select this to print the unit cost and value of your stock items
on the report. Otherwise only the quantity of each stock item is
printed.
Report options
The unit cost that is printed is taken from the current unit cost
of the stock item, while the value of the stock item is derived
from the quantity of each column multiplied by the cost.
If FIFO costing is installed (Inventory Setup) then the costs
that are printed when selecting the Include values option are
based on the last cost.
Percentage
required for
obsolescence
You can only select this option if you selected the Include
values option. You use the Percentages function to indicate the
obsolescence percentages required.
Consolidate
warehouse
information
Select this to consolidate all warehouse values into one

warehouse. Otherwise the values for each warehouse is
printed on a separate line. The consolidated warehouse is
identified by the characters - -.
Percentages
Select this to enter obsolescence percentages for each prior

year that you selected to print an aged valuation.
Close

previous screen.
Percentages for Each Year

You use the Percentages function to enter obsolescence percentages for each prior year that you selected
to print an aged valuation.
The value printed in each column is multiplied by the percentage entered here for that year and is printed
as an obsolescence amount.
Inventory Movement Report

You use the Inventory Movement Report program to generate a report of sales and/or inventory
transactions for a selected range of stock items. Inventory movement transactions are processed using the
The amount of data available is dependent on the length of time that movement records are retained
The report can be generated to print details of selected or all sales and/or inventory transactions for:
a selected period
a single warehouse or range of warehouses
a single stock code or range of stock codes
| Reports | 475
a single supplier or range of suppliers

a single product class or a range of product classes
a single customer or range of customers
a single salesperson or range of salespersons
a single buyer or all buyers
You can also indicate a range of dates according to which transactions must be selected for printing.
Report Options
Field
Values
Sequence
Description
This enables you to indicate the sequence in which you want to
print the report.
Stock code
Description
Supplier
Product class
Print options
Print warehouse
details
Select this to print totals for individual warehouses together

with an accumulated total of all warehouses for each
stock code. If you do not select this option, then only the
accumulated warehouse totals for each stock code is printed.
Note:
If you are running on an SQL server-based system,
the optimized SQL version of the report does not print
warehouse details for which there are no movements.
Only print items

with MTD activity
Select this to print only those stock codes against which any
month-to-date activity has been recorded in at least one
warehouse.
Note:
If you select this option, then details for the stock
items selected are printed if any month-to-date activity
occurred against the selected stock item, irrespective
of the Movement Options you selected to include. This
means that the month-to-date activity is not restricted
to the movement type you selected to include.
Subtotals required
Select this option if you want to include warehouse totals, stock

totals and sales movement totals on the report.
Calculate FIFO/
LIFO unit costs
Select this option if you want the system to calculate and print
FIFO/LIFO unit costs based on the transaction value (i.e.
Dividing the value by the quantity). The new cost remains
blank.
Note:
| Reports | 476
Field
Values
Description
This option only applies if your costing method is set
to either FIFO or LIFO costing (Inventory Setup or
Inventory Warehouses).
Movement totals
required
Select this if you want to print totals for each individual

movement type you select using the Movement Options.
The total quantity and transaction value are printed for each
movement type.
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock item(s) you want to include in the report.
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock items on the report.
Supplier selection
This enables you to select stock items for printing based on the supplier of the items. The supplier for
an item is defined against the item (see Stock Code Maintenance - Replenishment tab).
This option enables you to select only those stock items that are supplied by the suppliers you select
here.
This enables you to indicate the product class(es) for which you want to include stock items on the
report.
Buyer selection
This enables you to indicate the buyer(s) for which you want to include stock items on the report.
Cycle count selection
This enables you to indicate the Cycle count(s) for which you want to include stock items on the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
| Reports | 477
Field
Values
List
Description
From
single item.
To
Movement Options
The following options can be selected on this tab page:
Field
Values
Description
Inventory
movements
Select this if you want to print inventory movements on the

report. Inventory transaction types are indicated on the report
as follows:
Movements to
print
Sales movements
Select this if you want to print sales movements on the report.

Sales transaction types are indicated on the report as follows:
Inventory
movements
REC (receipt)
ADJ (adjustment)
ISS (issue)
PHY (physical)
CHG (cost change)
MOD (cost modification)
TRA (transfer, where OUT indicates a negative transfer, and
IN indicates a positive transfer)
INV (invoice)
CR (credit note)
DR (debit note)
DSP (invoice generated via Dispatch Notes)
DSI (IBT invoice generated via Dispatch Notes)
This enables you to indicate the specific type of inventory

movements you want to print.
The following can be selected:
Receipts
| Reports | 478
Field
Values
Description
Adjustments
Issues
Physical
Cost changes
Cost modifications
You can only access this option if you selected to print
inventory movements.
Selections
In addition to the movement options that can be selected, the following selection criteria can be defined:
Date selection
This enables you to indicate the date(s) according to which transactions must be selected for printing.
Customer selection
This enables you to indicate the customer(s) for which sales transactions must be included in the report.
Note:
You can only access this selection if you selected to print sales movements.
Salesperson selection
This enables you to indicate the salesperson(s) for which sales transactions must be included in the
report.
Note:
You can only access this selection if you selected to print sales movements.
Other Options
The following options can be selected on this tab page:
Field
Values
ABC class
selection
Description
This enables you to select a stock item according to its ABC
classification. At lease one ABC class selection must be made.
Make to order
items
Include
Select this to include made to order items in the report.
Exclude
Select this to exclude made to order items from the report.
Only
Select this to only include made to order items in the report.
MPS items
Statistical items

or exclude Master Production Schedule (MPS) items.
Include
Select this to include MPS items in the report.
Exclude
Select this to exclude MPS items from the report.
Only
Select this to only include MPS items in the report.

or exclude statistical items.
| Reports | 479
Field
Values
Description
Note:
This is not relevant if you selected Only at the MPS
items and/or Made to order items fields.
Include
Select this to include statistical items in the report.
Exclude
Select this to exclude statistical items from the report.
Only
Select this to only include statistical items in the report.

This is not relevant if you are including MPS and/or Make to
order items.
Output Options
Report Details
Details of bin transfers are printed for transfers within the same warehouse if you selected the option:
Record movements for bin transfers (Inventory Setup - Options tab). This only applies if you are using
multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Note:
The unit cost is not printed on the report if your costing method is set to either FIFO or LIFO
(Inventory Setup or Inventory Warehouses).
If you are running on an SQL server-based system, the optimized SQL version of the report
does not print warehouse details for which there are no movements.
For receipts, the value in the New Cost column indicates the new average cost calculated by the system
according to the receipt processed for the item. The value in the Entered Cost column indicates the receipt
cost entered at the time of processing the receipt for the item.
Kardex Report
You use the Kardex Report program to print a report listing the movement of selected stock items over a
specified period of time.
Typically, you would use this report to reconcile discrepancies encountered during a stock take.
This report is the equivalent of the stock ledger and should be printed at least every month and retained.
Note:
You will be unable to access this program if you have not enabled the option: Retain last 12
months opening stock balances (Inventory Setup).
Stock items against which you have not selected the option: Retain stock movements (Stock
Code Maintenance - General tab) are not included in the report.
The information used by this report is updated each time you run the Month End function of the
Inventory Period End program.
However, if you have performed a month end for a single warehouse, then reports for the current
period will only reflect opening and closing stock balances for that warehouse. Until you run a
month end for all warehouses, an imbalance will exist if any transactions are processed for that
warehouse.
| Reports | 480
The Kardex report is processed in date order. If your Costing method is set to Average
(Inventory Setup - General tab) and you backdate a receipt, for example, then the average cost
of the item being receipted is not recalculated.
The Kardex Report is merely a movement report and should not be used to balance inventory
values to your General Ledger control accounts. The Inventory Valuation report should be
used for balancing the General Ledger inventory control accounts.
Report Options
Field
Sequence
Values
Description
This option enables you to select the sequence in which you
want the report printed.
You can select to print the report in one of the following
sequences:
Part category
Stock code
Description
Supplier
Product class
Warehouse
This option enables you to select which stock items to include

in the report based on their part category (see Stock Code
Maintenance - Descriptive tab).
Note:
Items defined as Notional parts (Stock Code
Maintenance - Descriptive tab) are not included in the
report.
You can select 'All' to include all stock items irrespective of
their part category or alternatively, only those items with the
following part categories:
Stock code
selection
Made in
Bought out
Subcontracted
Phantom part
Planning bill
Co-product
By-product
Stock items are excluded from the report if you are not
retaining stock movements for the item, or no movements have
been recorded for the item over the specified time period and
the stock on hand in the selected warehouse is zero.
Stock items for which no movements have been recorded, but
where there is a non-zero quantity on hand, are listed with an
opening balance and a closing balance equal to the stock on
hand.
All
Select this to include movements for all stock items in the

report.
| Reports | 481
Field
Values
Description
Range
Select this to include movements for a range of stock items in

the report.
Single
Select this to include movements for a single stock item in the

report.
You indicate this stock item in the From field below.
From
This indicates the first stock item in a range of stock items you
want to include in the report.
If you selected to generate the report or a single stock item,
then you enter that stock item code in this field.
To
This indicates the last stock item in a range of stock items you
want to include in the report.
This field is only enabled if you selected to include a range of
stock items in the report.
Product class
selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection

of products classes in the report. The product class is defined
against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance
program (Descriptive tab).
If a specific product class is entered, then only stock items
belonging to that product class are included in the report.
All
Select this to include stock items for all product classes.
Range
Select this to include stock items for a range of product

classes.
You indicate this range using the From and To fields below.
Single
Select this to include stock items for a single product class

only.
You indicate this product class in the From field below.
From
This indicates the first product class in a range of product

classes for which you want to include stock items in the report.
If you indicated that you want to include stock items for a single
product class, then you enter that product class in this field.
To
This indicates the last product class in a range of product

classes for which you want to include stock items in the report.
This option is only available if you selected to include stock
items for a range of product classes.
Warehouse
selection
This option enables you to indicate the range of warehouses

you want to include in the report.
All
Select this to include all warehouses in the report.
| Reports | 482
Field
Range
Values
Description
Select this if you want to include a range of warehouses in the
report.
You indicate this range in the From and To fields below.
Single
Select this if you want to print the report for a single

warehouse.
You indicate this warehouse code in the From field below.
From
This indicates the first warehouse in a range of warehouses

If you indicated that you want to generate the report for a single
warehouse, then you indicate that warehouse code in this field.
To
This indicates the last warehouse in a range of warehouses

This option is only available if you selected to generate the
report for a range of warehouses.
Ledger period
This option enables you to define the ledger period and year for
which you want to generate the report.
Note:
Even if you selected the option: Retain last 12 months'
opening stock balances (Inventory Setup - tab), the
system automatically saves opening stock balances
after running the Month end option of the Inventory
Period End program. This means that the system can
only retain balances as far back as the first month end
run.
You cannot request opening stock balances exceeding
the number of months for which you have retained
balances (Inventory Setup - History tab).
Current G/L
period
This field displays the current period and year of you General
Ledger and cannot be changed.
Month
This field enables you to select the period for which you want to
Year
This field enables you to select the period for which you want to
Include MPS
items
This option enables you to select whether to include items

defined as MPS items in the report (see Stock Code
Maintenance - Production tab).
Yes
Select this if you want to include MPS items in the report.
No
Select this if you do not want to include MPS items in the

report.
| Reports | 483
Field
Values
Description
Only
Select this if you want to generate the report for MPS items
only.
Include statistical
parts
You will be unable to access this field if you selected to only

include MPS items.
In addition, you will be unable to only include statistical parts if
you selected to include MPS items.
Stock items are defined as statistical items using the program
Stock Code Maintenance (Production tab).
Yes
Select this if you want to include Statistical parts in the report.
No
Select this if you do not want to include Statistical parts in the

report.
Only
Select this if you want to generate the report for Statistical

parts.
Print options
Print movement
details
Select this to print movement transactions from the specified

period up to and including the current period.
Print warehouse
summary only
Select this if you want to print a summary report of totals by

warehouse, excluding the detail transactions processed for the
selected stock codes.
Note:
This option is enabled only if you selected to print
the report in warehouse sequence and you have not
selected to print movement details.
Print product
class totals
This option is enabled only if you selected to print the report in

product class sequence.
Print details for

selection period
only
Select this to print the opening balance of the previous period

and movement transactions for the period specified.
Print Rev/Rel
Select this to print the revision/release per warehouse for ECCcontrolled items. The Revision/Release information is printed
once for each change in the Release and/or Release version.
The wording for this field (as well as the column headings on
the report) defaults to the text defined against the User defined
fields: Revision and Release (Bill of Materials Setup).
Note:
The Print Revision/Release option is available under
the following conditions:
Engineering Change Control is installed (Company

Setup)
| Reports | 484
Field
Values
Description
The stock control level is set to Revision or Release
(Bill of Materials Setup)
You select the Print movement details option.
Other Options
Select this function to print a selective range of stock codes

according to their Buyer, Cycle count and Supplier.
View Months
Select this function to view the current and previous year

monthly open and closed indicators of your Inventory system
(View Inventory Periods).
Print
Select this function to print the report.

Stock items with no movements (for the selected period) and
whose stock on hand for the requested warehouse is zero are
excluded from the report.
Stock items with no movements (for the selected period) and
whose stock on hand for the requested warehouse is not zero
are printed with the opening balance and closing balance equal
to the stock on hand.
The transactions printed on the Kardex report are printed in
date sequence.
In cases where multiple transactions have occurred on the
same date, all the inventory transactions are printed first,
followed by the sales movements. While in most cases this
will not affect the report, a transaction type of PHY (physical
stock adjustment) may cause a running quantity balance
to be adjusted to an incorrect figure. For this reason, we
recommend that either this type of transaction is not used
(the ADJ transaction type can be used instead) or you ensure
that the date of the PHY transaction is unique (i.e. no other
transactions take place on the same date as the PHY entry).
Totals are accumulated for each stock code and warehouse
according to the transaction types processed against them.
These totals are printed upon change of each warehouse
for a stock code, or upon change of each product class (if
printing the report in product class sequence). The totals are a
summary of the transactions processed, indicating the opening
balance of the warehouse, the transaction totals for each
transaction type and the closing balance (quantity and value)
for that warehouse.
The results of the Kardex report will not match other inventory
statistics if you did not enter transactions in the same date
sequence that the transactions occurred. For example, the
Kardex report costs transactions differently if you enter a
receipt today before you record an issue from yesterday.
The following information is printed for each warehouse:
Stock code, Description, Long description

Warehouse, Product Class, Supplier, Supplier Name
Opening Balance of the warehouse
Month end date (this is blank for new warehouses)
| Reports | 485
Field
Values
Description
Quantity balance
Value and Unit Cost
Type of transaction:
O/B: opening balance

REC: receipt
CHG: cost change
ISS: issue
ADJ: adjustment
MOD: cost modification
TRA: transfer
PHY: physical stock adjustment
Inv: invoice
Cr: credit note
Dr: debit note
IBT: inter-branch transfer
Dsp: invoice generated via Dispatch Notes
DsI: IBT invoice generated via Dispatch Notes
Entry date
Reference
Bin number
Transaction quantity
Transaction value
Transaction quantities and values are listed under either a
QTY IN column or a QTY OUT column depending on the
transaction type and whether the value/quantity is positive
or negative.
Accumulated quantity balance and value
Unit cost per transaction (this is blank if your Costing
method is set to FIFO (Inventory Setup - General tab)).
Details of bin transfers are printed for transfers within the same
warehouse if you selected the option: Record movements for
bin transfers (Inventory Setup - Options tab). This only applies
if you are using multiple bins (Inventory Setup - General tab).
Other Options
Field
Values
Description
Buyer selection
You use this field to select stock items to include in the report
according to the buyer defined against the items (see Stock
Code Maintenance - Replenishment tab).
All
Select this to include stock items for all buyer codes in the
report.
Single
Select this to include stock items for a single buyer code in the
report.
You indicate this buyer code in the Buyer field below.
| Reports | 486
Field
Values
Description
Buyer
This indicates the single buyer code for which you want to
include stock items in the report.
Cycle count
selection
You use this field to select stock items to include in the report
according to the number of times the stock item has been
counted during the year.
All
Select this to include all stock items in the report, regardless of

the number of times they have been counted.
Single
Select this to include only those stock items that have been
counted for the number of times you specify at the Cycle count
field.
Cycle count
You use this field to enter the cycle count if you selected to
include stock items for a single cycle count.
Supplier
selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of

suppliers in the report. The default supplier is defined against
the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program
(Replenishment tab).
All
Select this to include stock items purchased from all suppliers

in the report.
Single
Select this to include stock items purchased from a single

supplier only.
You indicate this supplier code in the Supplier field below.
Supplier
This indicates the single supplier for which you want to include
stock items in the report.
Kardex Report Calculation

When the Kardex report is generated, the quantities and total values of the movements are taken directly
from the Inventory Movements file. These are the quantities and values of the movements as recorded
by various programs such as the Inventory Movements, Purchase Order Receipts, Purchase Order
Inspection ,Stock Take Confirmation, etc. The movement values are NOT calculated as being the cost
multiplied by the quantity.
The opening balance is taken from the Warehouse record(s).
For each line, the movements from the Inventory Movements file are added or subtracted from the opening
balance for both the quantity and cost value to give a calculated closing balance. This is the total line
printed at the end of the movements.
This calculated closing balance is checked against the closing balance from the warehouse record(s) and
differences are printed on a rounding line. It is therefore possible for the rounding line to contain a small
rounding error caused by a genuine rounding difference in the calculation.
If the rounding line contains larger values, then this usually indicates that a movement was not written
to the Inventory Movement file or a processing problem occurred. One reason could be incomplete
transactions due to the loss of client connectivity in a client/server environment.
| Reports | 487
The correct inventory valuation is always produced by the Inventory Valuation report. Differences
between the totals on the Kardex Report and Inventory Valuation reports could be caused by Month
ends (Inventory Period End) being run for single warehouses rather than all warehouses or due to the
option: Retain stock movements (Stock Code Maintenance - General tab) not being selected for all stock
items.
Inventory Price List

You use the Inventory Price List program to print a list of prices for your inventory items based on coded
prices, quantity discount breaks or foreign prices that have been assigned to your stock codes.
This listing can be used by salespersons to look up sales prices when they are negotiating without access
to the computer system.
Report Options
Field
Values
Report sequence
Description
This option enables you to select the order in which the report
must be generated.
Stock code
Description
Supplier
Product class
Price method
selection
Coded
Select this to print the pricing information defined against price

codes that have been assigned to stock items.
Quantity
Select this to print the quantity discount breaks applicable to

each stock code selected.
Foreign
Select this to print a list of foreign prices and currencies

applicable to each stock code selected.
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) that you want to include in the report.
Supplier selection
defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment tab).
Price category selection
This enables you to indicate the price category(ies) you want to include in the report.
(Descriptive tab).
| Reports | 488
in the report.
Currency selection
This enables you to indicate the currency(ies) you want to include in the report.
Price code selection
This enables you to indicate the price code(s) you want to include in the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
| Reports | 489
Price History Report

You use the Price History Report program to print a report listing any changes that have been made to
either the price of a stock item or the price basis of an item.
This report serves as an audit trail of changes made using either the Price-Cost Percentage Change
program or the Pricing for a Stock Code program.
Note:
Details of price changes are printed only if you have enabled the option: Retain history of price
changes (Inventory Setup).
The volume of information printed is determined by the number of days you are retaining price
history changes. In addition, because pricing history is deleted only when you run the Purge
function of the Inventory Period End program, the date when you last ran a purge can affect the
volume of information available to print.
Report Options
Field
Values
Report sequence
Description
print the report. You can select one of the following sequences:
Price code, Stock code

Stock code, Price code
Date, Time
Selections
Price code selection
You use this field to indicate the price code(s) that must be included as a selection criterion when
printing the report.
Date selection
You use this field to indicate a range of dates that must be included as a selection criterion when
Operator selection
You use this field to indicate the operator(s) that must be included as a selection criterion when printing
the report.
You use this field to indicate a range of stock codes that must be included as a selection criterion when

Note:
| Reports | 490
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
The report includes details of the Date and Time changes were made, as well as the Operator responsible
for the changes.
The Price basis column indicates the unit of measure against which the price change was made for the
stock item, where S indicates the stocking unit of measure, A indicates the alternate unit of measure, and
O indicates the other unit of measure. These units of measure are configured against the stock item (Stock
Code Maintenance).
ABC Analysis
You use the ABC Analysis program to print a list of stock items in descending order of usage value, based
on the value of stock used over the last 12 months.
The report indicates what your most and least used items are, enabling you to determine what quantities of
selected stock items should be included in your inventory.
| Reports | 491
This technique is also known as Pareto Analysis (80/20 rule) where concentration on the A class items can
achieve greater results from less effort.
Note:
If the quantity sold or issued for the last 12 months does not exceed zero, then the usage value is
set to zero by the Month end function of the Inventory Period End program.
Report Options
Field
Values
Warehouse
selection
Description
Although you can base your ABC analysis on the usage in a
single warehouse, this will not accurately reflect the annual
usage value for the same stock items that are held in different
warehouses.
All
Select this to base the ABC analysis on the usage of the stock
items in all warehouses (i.e. across the entire company).
Single
Select this to base the ABC analysis on the usage of the stock
items in a single warehouse.
You indicate this warehouse on the Warehouse field below.
Note:
If you want to select items for a stock count based on
their ABC classification, then you need to run the ABC
Analysis report for each individual warehouse in which
the stock take is being performed.
Warehouse
You use this field to indicate the single warehouse on which

you want to base the usage for the ABC analysis report.
This field is only enabled when you select to base the usage on
a single warehouse.
Print options
Print 'A' class
items
Select this to include your A class items for printing.
Print 'B' class

items
Select this to include your B class items for printing.
Print 'C' class

items
Select this to include your C class items for printing.
Print 'D' class

items
Select this to include your D class items for printing.
Based on the 80/95 default, stock items are included in class A

until the sum of items equals 80% of the annual usage value of
your entire inventory.
Based on the 80/95 default, stock items are included in class

B until the sum of class A and class B items equals 95% of the
annual usage value.
Based on the 80/95 default all other stock items having a nonzero cost that do not fall into classes A and B are assigned to
class C.
| Reports | 492
Field
Values
Description
Any stock item that has not been used or sold in the last year is
assigned to class D.
Output Options
Report Details
The Annual usage value = Usage brought forward from previous period end plus ((quantity issued x cost) +
(quantity sold x cost) for the current period to date). The cost at the time the transaction was processed is
used, not the current cost.
The annual usage value of a stock item is used to determine its classification. This value is the total cost of
sales and issues of an item over the past 12 months.
The program calculates the total inventory usage value by accumulating the annual usage value for each
warehouse. It then calculates the annual usage value for each stock item.
The annual usage value (A.u.v) is increased in a period by the sales values as invoices are processed. The
cost used at the time that the invoice was processed is used. Similarly, the total inventory usage is updated
when the item is issued. Therefore, during a specific period, the YTD usage is the usage as at the previous
period end, plus the usage from movements that have occurred during the current period. The current cost
at the time of generating the report is therefore irrelevant.
For each month end after the 12th month, the usage value is annualized by dividing the value by 13 and
multiplying by 12. If the annual usage value of a stock item is based on less than 12 months history, then
the value is divided by the number of months that the item has been held on file, and multiplied by 12 to
give an annual usage value.
See Warehouse Values for an example of a YTD usage value calculation.
Classifications
You indicate whether you want to use ABC analysis by selecting the ABC analysis required option (Stock
Code Maintenance) for each individual stock item.
Once the annual usage value has been established, the program classifies each stock item into one of four
categories: A, B, C and D.
The breaks between the categories are defined at the option: Percentage breaks for ABC analysis
(Inventory Setup). The default A/B percentage break is 80 and the B/C percentage break is 95.
Based on these defaults, stock items are included in class A until the sum of items equals 80% of the
annual usage value of your entire inventory.
Stock items are included in class B until the sum of class A and class B items equals 95% of the annual
usage value.
All other stock items having a non-zero cost that do not fall into classes A and B are assigned to class C
and any stock item that has not been used or sold in the last year is assigned to class D.
Warehouse Activity
You use the Warehouse Activity program to generate a selective list of stock items based on the activity
recorded against the items over a period of time.
| Reports | 493
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this if you want the report to be generated in order of

stock codes.
Description

stock code descriptions.
Product class

product classes.
Supplier

suppliers.
Stock value
Select this to generate inactive stock in descending stock

value.
Report sequence
Note:
User defined
sequence
When you select this option, the value generated in

the Total cost field for each stock item is the total of
the quantity multiplied by the unit cost for the item in
ALL warehouses. This is irrespective of the range of
warehouses for which you selected to generate the
report. The report is generated in descending order
of this total cost.
Cost values are only generated on the report when
this option is selected.
Select this to generated the report in a user-defined sequence.

If you select this option, then at the time of generating the
report you will be required to enter the name of the tag-file to
be used.
A tag file is created using a text editor and enables you to print
reports in a sequence not catered for by the system (see Tag
files).
Note:
This option is not available in the SRS version of the
report.
Stock options
Refer to Stock Options for details on the effects of selecting or

deselecting these options.
Report on stock
items
All stock items
Select this to generate a selective list of stock codes,

regardless of the amount of activity recorded against them.
Any monthly
activity
Select this to generate a selective list of stock codes against

which any month-to-date activity has been recorded.
| Reports | 494
Field
Values
Description
Inactive stock
items
Select this to generate a selective list of stock items against

which no activity has been recorded since a specified cut-off
date.
No activity since
You use this field to indicate the cut-off date according to which
stock items must be selected for generating. Stock items are
selected if there has been no activity since this date.
This option is only enabled when you select the option: Inactive
stock items.
Include zero
quantity on hand
Select this if you want to include stock items where the

warehouse quantity on hand is zero.
Include stock
adjustments
Select this to indicate whether you want to include inactive

stock against which adjustments have been processed.
This option is not available if you selected the option: All stock
items.
Show all
warehouses
Select this to list all warehouses in which the stock item

resides, if at least one warehouse matches your selection
criteria (i.e. warehouses that do not match the selection criteria,
but in which the stock item is held, are also listed).
Do not select this option if you only want to list warehouses in
which a stock item resides that matches the selection criteria.
Note:
This option does not override your Warehouse
selection (Report Filters tab). Stock items are
listed only for the warehouses you indicated at the
Warehouse selection option.
ABC class
selection
You use this option to select stock items based on the ABC
classification assigned to them (Stock Code Maintenance).
Ensure that you have run the ABC Analysis program to assign
each stock item to its correct class.
Stock Options
The following table indicates the effect of selecting/deselecting the various Stock options:
Stock Options
Selection
All stock items
Any monthly
activity
Inactive stock items
Report Type
Report includes all

stock items.
Report includes
stock items against
which any monthto-date sales or
other activity has
been recorded.
Report includes
stock items against
which no activity
has been recorded
since a specified
cut-off date.
Include zero
quantity on hand
Selected
Quantity on hand is Quantity on hand is Quantity on hand is

not checked.
not checked.
not checked.
Include zero
quantity on hand
Deselected
Excludes
warehouses with
Excludes
warehouses with
Excludes
warehouses with
| Reports | 495
zero quantity on
hand.
zero quantity on
zero quantity on
hand, unless some hand.
activity is recorded.
Include stock
adjustments
Selected
Not applicable.
Includes
warehouses
against which only
adjustments were
recorded.
Ignores
adjustments.
Include stock
adjustments
Deselected
Not applicable.
Ignores
adjustments.
Excludes
warehouses
against which
adjustments were
recorded.
Show all
warehouses
Selected
A stock item is
listed in all selected
warehouses if it
meets the criteria
in at least one
warehouse.
A stock item is
warehouses if it
meets the criteria
in at least one
warehouse.
A stock item is
warehouses if it
meets the criteria
in at least one
warehouse.
Show all
warehouses
Deselected
A stock item
is listed only
in the selected
warehouse(s) in
which it meets the
criteria.
A stock item
is listed only
in the selected
warehouse(s) in
which it meets the
criteria.
A stock item
is listed only
in the selected
warehouse(s) in
which it meets the
criteria.
Report Filters
The options on this tab page enable you to indicate additional criteria according to which the report must
be generated.
Selections
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock codes in the report.
Supplier selection
defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Replenishment).
This enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report. The product
class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Stock Code
Details).
in the report.
This enables you to include stock items based on the cycle count number assigned to the stock items
(Stock Code Maintenance - Replenishment).
| Reports | 496

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
Stock Take Exception

You use the Stock Take Exception program to print a selective list of stock items according to a cut-off
date when last a stock count was performed.
You typically use this program in a situation where you are not running a full stock take, but merely
counting and checking stock.
The program is designed to work in two phases. In the first phase, you run the Perpetual stock option
to update the last stock count date for the selected stock items with the current system date. When
| Reports | 497
you perform and confirm a stock take, the Stock Take Confirmation program updates the count date.
However, if you merely counted and checked the stock, but did not use the Stock Take Confirmation
program, then you can use the Perpetual stock option to update the count date.
Once the count dates have been updated, you can re-run the report using the Cycle count variance option,
which is the second phase. This enables you to print a selective list of stock items where the last stock
count date is prior to a specific Stock check date which you enter. This enables you to check when a count
was last done for the stock items selected.
You would normally use the Stock Take Exception program in conjunction with a manual or offline system
of count cycles.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this to generate the report in order of stock codes.
Description
Select this if you want the report to be printed in order of stock

code descriptions.
Supplier
Select this if you want the report to be printed in order of

suppliers.
Product class
Select this if you want the report to be printed in order of

product classes.
User defined
sequence
Select this to print the report in a user-defined sequence.
Sequence
If you select this option, then at the time of printing the report
you will be required to enter the name of the tag-file to be used.
files).
Note:
This option is not available when using SYSPRO
Reporting Services.
Report type
ABC class
selection
Perpetual stock
Select this to update the last stock count date for selective
stock items with the current system date.
Cycle count
variance
Select this to print a selective list of stock items where the last
stock count date is prior to the entered Stock check date field
below.
Stock check date
You use this field to enter the stock check date to use with the
Cycle count variance option.
You use this field to select stock items based on the ABC
| Reports | 498
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to include in the report.
Supplier selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report.
The default supplier is defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).
This enables you to select stock items based on the cycle count number assigned to the stock code
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.
This enables you to indicates the product class(es) for which you want to include stock items in the
report.
The product class is defined against the stock item (Stock Code Maintenance).
in the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
| Reports | 499
Field
Values
To
Description
single item.
Output Options
Warehouse Exception
You use the Warehouse Exception program to print a selective list of stock items based on various
warehouse indicators.
This report can be run at any time.
This report is useful when the Requirements Planning module is not installed, because it indicates the
amount of stock on order with your supplier or in transit to the selected warehouse(s) as well as the
amount of stock for which you have customer orders.
Minimum, maximum and safety stock level quantities defined for your stocked items (Warehouses for
Stock Code) are indicated on the report so that you can take them into account when considering the
quantities you need to order from your supplier / factory.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this to generate the report in order of stock codes.
Description

stock code descriptions.
Product class

product classes.
Supplier

suppliers.
User defined
sequence
Report sequence
files).
| Reports | 500
Field
Values
Description
Note:
This option is not available in the SRS format of the
report.
Include options
Available less than Select this to include stock items that have a Quantity Available
zero
less than zero.
This enables you to identify those items where the available
quantity is negative. This situation occurs when there is
insufficient stock on hand to satisfy your customer orders
immediately because the quantity on hand is less than the
quantity allocated to sales orders.
Available equals
zero
Select this to include stock items that have a zero Quantity

Available.
quantity is zero. This situation occurs when you have allocated
all the stock on hand to sales orders (i.e. the quantity allocated
to sales orders equals the quantity on hand).
Available greater
than zero
Select this to include stock items that have a Quantity Available

greater than zero.
quantity is greater than zero. This situation occurs when you
have more stock on hand than the quantity allocated to sales
orders.
On purchase order Select this to include stock items for which there is at least one
outstanding purchase order.
On back order
Select this to include stock items for which there is at least one
sales order on backorder.
This enables you to identify those items for which there is a
quantity on back order for your customer. This situation occurs
either when you have insufficient stock on hand to ship to your
customers or when the quantity ordered is automatically placed
on back order at the time of creating the sales order.
Goods in transit
Select this to include stock items for which there is at least one
goods in transit transaction which has not been receipted in to
the receiving warehouse.
Select this option to identify those items for which there is a
quantity in transit to the selected warehouse. This situation
occurs when stock is transferred from one warehouse to
another.
Available less than Select this to include stock items if the Quantity Available is
minimum
less than the Minimum quantity defined for the stock item.
This enables you to identify those items for which the quantity
available is less than the quantity allocated to sales orders
| Reports | 501
Field
Values
Description
and is less than the quantity on hand and below the minimum
quantity for the selected warehouse.
If the Minimum quantity is zero against the stock code
(Warehouses for Stock Code), then the item is not included
in the report. This is because the system considers a value of
zero to indicate that the minimum quantity is not defined.
Available less than Select this to include stock items if the Quantity Available is
safety
less than the Safety stock level defined for the stock item.
This enables you to identify those items for which the quantity
available is less than the safety stock level defined for the
selected warehouse. This situation occurs when the quantity
allocated to sales orders is less than the quantity on hand and
below the safety stock level for the selected warehouse.
If the Safety stock level is zero against the stock code
(Warehouses for Stock Code), then the item is not included
in the report. This is because the system considers a value of
zero to indicate that the safety stock level is not defined.
Available greater
than maximum
Select this to include stock items if the Quantity Available is

greater than the Maximum quantity defined for the stock item.
This enables you to identify those items for which the
quantity available is greater than that defined for the selected
warehouse. This situation occurs when the quantity allocated
to sales orders is less than the quantity on hand and above the
maximum quantity for the selected warehouse.
If you indicated that the Maximum quantity of an item required
to be stocked in a warehouse at any point in time is zero
(Warehouses for Stock Code) then that item is not selected
for printing if you select this option.
In transit
Select this to print details of any warehouse transfers cleared
conversion cleared during the conversion process to Goods in Transit transfers.
Select All
Select this to set all Include options to selected.
Deselect All
Select this to set all Include options to deselected.

Because most of the options are selected by default, you can
use this option to deselect all the Include options and then
select only those you require.
Notifications

Show multiple
exception
messages
By default, if a stock item matches more than one of the

exceptions selected for inclusion, then only the first exception
encountered is listed on the report.
Select this to indicate all exception messages for each stock
item on the report and not only the first exception encountered.
ABC class
selection
| Reports | 502
Field
Values
Description
Report Filters
The options on this tab page enable you to indicate additional criteria according to which you want to
Selections
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.
Supplier selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the report. The
default supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program
(Replenishment).
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report. The
product class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Stock
Code Details).
in the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

| Reports | 503
Field
Values
From
Description
single item.
To
Output Options
Report Details
If a stock item matches more than one of the exceptions selected for inclusion, then only the first exception
encountered is listed on the report. However, if you select the option Notifications - Show all exception
messages, then all exception messages are printed against the item.
The following exception messages may be printed:
Exception
Message
Available less than zero
Avail<0
Available equals zero
Avail=0
Available greater than zero
Avail>0
On purchase order
On order
On back order
On B/order
Goods in transit
In transit
Available less than minimum
Below min.
Available less than safety
Below safe
Available above maximum
Above max.
Superseded Clearing Stock

You use the Superseded Clearing Stock program to print a list of all clearing stock items and/or stock
items which have reached their supersession date by the specified cut-off date.
Report Options
| Reports | 504
Field
Values
Description
Sequence
This option enables you to indicate the order in which you want
to generate the information on the report.
Stock code
Select this to print the report in stock code order.
Description
Select this to print the report in stock code description order.
Supplier
Select this to print the report in order of
Print options
Select this to print the report in supplier code order.

Product class
Select this to print the report in product class order.
User defined
sequence

files).
This option is not available when you are generating the report
using SYSPRO Reporting Services.
Include
Clearing stock
Select this to include stock codes that have been assigned

a status of Clear (Stock Code Maintenance - Stock Code
Details).
Clearing stock refers to stock codes that have been assigned a
status of Clear (Stock Code Maintenance) and indicates that
the item must be sold or cleared as a matter of urgency.
Superseded stock
Select this to include stock codes that have been assigned a

supersession date (Stock Code Maintenance) after which the
item should no longer be available for resale.
Stock on hold
Select this to include stock codes that have been placed on

hold (see Stock Code Maintenance).
Print details for

stock on hold
Select this to print details for stock items which are on hold.
This option is only enabled if you selected to include stock on
hold.
Print alternate
stock codes
Select this to print any substitute stock items that have been
defined (Alternate Stock Codes).
Supersession date You use this field to select the supercession date if you
selected to include Superseded stock.
ABC code
selection
You use this option to select stock items based on the ABC
| Reports | 505
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) you want to include in the report.
Supplier selection
This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for whom you want to include stock items in the report. The
default supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program.
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of products classes in the report. The
product class is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program (Stock
Code Details).
in the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
| Reports | 506
Field
Values
Description
Output Options
Purchasing Work Sheet

You use the Purchasing Work Sheet program to produce a report which can be used as a tool to assist
you in deciding which stock items must be purchased.
This decision can be based on the calculation of free stock or future free stock, together with the various
criteria selected.
Report Options
Field
Values
Sequence
Description
print the report.
Available sequences include:
Part category
Stock code
Description
Supplier
Product class
You use this field to indicate the part categories for which you
want to print the report.
Part categories are defined against stock items on the
Descriptive tab of the Stock Code Maintenance program.
Available options include:
All
Note:
Items defined as Notional parts (Stock Code

Maintenance - Descriptive tab) are not included in
the report.
Made in
Bought out
Sub contracted
Phantom part
Co-product
By-product
Report options
Detailed
Select this to print the details of each selected warehouse.
| Reports | 507
Field
Values
Description
The information printed for a detailed report is based on the
calculation applied to each warehouse. Only if the calculated
values fall within the specified criteria are details of that
warehouse printed.
Summary
Select this to print a summary of the value of all warehouses

selected per stock code.
The information printed for a summary report is based on the
calculation applied to the totals of all the warehouses for a
given stock item. Only if the calculated values fall within the
specified criteria are details of that warehouse printed.
Selections

(Descriptive tab).
in the valuation.
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) you want to include in the report.
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) that you want to include in the report.
Supplier selection
This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.
The default supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program
Buyer selection
This enables you to indicate the buyer(s) for which you want to include stock items in the report.
The default buyer is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

| Reports | 508
Field
Values
Single
Description
in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Criteria
The following criteria can be defined on this tab page:
Field
Values
Include MPS
items
Description
This option enables you to define th stock items to be included
based on their MPS status.
A stock item is defined as an MPS item on the Production tab
of the Stock Code Maintenance program.
Yes
Select this to include stock items defined as MPS items in the

report.
No
Select this to exclude stock items defined as MPS items in the

report.
Only
Select this to include only stock items defined as MPS items in

the report.
Include statistical
parts
Statistical parts are items which have been excluded from the
cumulative lead time calculation. As a result, if you are using
Material Requirements Planning (MRP) you will not obtain
adequate forward warning of the need to purchase these items.
This report should be used to make purchases based on their
independent historical demand profile rather than rely on
MRPs dependency-driven forecast.
Yes
Select this to include stock items defined as statistical items in

the report.
| Reports | 509
Field
Values
Description
No
Select this to exclude stock items defined as statistical items in

the report.
Only
Select this to include only stock items defined as statistical

items in the report.
Calculation
Calculations can be applied to the accumulated values from

all warehouses, or the values held against each individual
warehouse.
If printing a detailed report, then the calculation is applied to
each warehouse and details for the warehouse are only printed
for those warehouses matching the selection criteria.
If printing a summary report, then the calculation is applied to
the totals of all warehouses for a given stock code and only
those stock codes matching the selection criteria are printed.
Criteria
All
Select this to include all stock codes.
Below minimum
Select this to include only those stock codes where the quantity
on hand is below minimum.
Below safety
Select this to include only those stock codes where the quantity
on hand is below the safety stock level.
Above maximum
Select this to include stock codes where the quantity on hand is

above maximum.
Free stock
Select this if you want the calculation to be based on free

stock.
Based on
Free stock calculation:

Quantity on hand - sales order allocations - WIP allocations +
quantity in inspection
This option is only enabled if you do not select the Criteria as
'All'.
Future free stock
Select this if you want the calculation to be based on future free

stock.
Future free stock calculation:
Quantity on hand - sales order allocations - WIP allocations +
quantity in inspection + quantity on order + quantity in transit
This option is only enabled if you do not select the Criteria as
'All'.
Buying rule
You use this field to select the buying rules of the stock items
Buying rules are defined against stock items in the Batching
rule field on the Replenishment tab of the Stock Code
| Reports | 510
Field
Values
ABC code
Description
You can select to include items for all or a single buying rule in
the report.
This option enables you to enter the ABC classification code of
the items you want to include in the report.
You can select to include items for all or a single ABC code in
the report.
Output Options
Report Details
The header fields M-12 through to M-01 indicate the last 12 months sales/issue quantities, where M-12
indicates the quantity sold 12 months ago and M-01 indicates the quantity sold last month.
Inventory Goods in Inspection

You use the Inventory Goods in Inspection program to print a list of all goods that are in inspection, onsite and off-site.
The report is generated in GRN within stock code within warehouse sequence. Subtotaling occurs upon
change of stock code/warehouse combination.
The report can be used as a mechanism to perform a stock take of goods in inspection. This is particularly
useful for MRP users as the Requirements Calculation program regards these quantities as being in
stock. In addition, the report can be used to supplement the purchase commitment (i.e. Cash flow). Since
two-tier inspection reduces the purchase order (but does not increase stock/GRN suspense until the
goods are inspected and accepted) any goods in inspection should be viewed as an impending liability/
commitment on a par with outstanding purchase orders.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Include nonstocked items
Select this to include non-stocked items in the report.
Include serial
numbers
Select this to print serial numbers receipted into inspection for

serialized items.
Include revision
release
Select this to print the revision/release per GRN for ECCcontrolled items.
Options
The wording for this field (as well as the column headings
on the report) defaults to the text defined against the Userdefined fields: Revision and Release (Bill of Materials Setup Engineering Change Control tab).
| Reports | 511
Field
Values
Description
The Include Revision/Release option is available only if
Engineering Change Control is installed (Company Setup Registration tab).
In addition, the stock control level must be set to Revision
or Release (Bill of Materials Setup - Engineering Change
Control tab).
New page per

warehouse
Select this to print the details for each warehouse on a

separate page.
Selections
Warehouse selection
This enables you to indicate the warehouse(s) you want to include in the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
| Reports | 512
Field
Values
To
Description
Output Options
Report Details
The values printed on the report are calculated as follows:
On-site qty:
base quantity - (quantity accepted into stock + quantity scrapped + quantity rejected)
Where:
Base quantity is the higher of quantity advised or quantity counted. The quantity counted is always used
if the quantity counted flag has been checked.
Total quantity:
Where:
Off-site quantity indicates goods that have been returned to the supplier.
Committed value:
For foreign currency purchase prices, the calculation of the commitment value takes account of
conversion factors.
Rej qty.
This is the number of items rejected but not yet returned to the supplier.
Off-site qty.
This is the number of items rejected and returned to the supplier.
Goods in Inspection Offsite

You use the Goods in Inspection Offsite program to print a list of all goods that are in inspection and offsite (goods that have been returned to the supplier).
The report is generated in GRN within stock code within supplier sequence. Subtotalling occurs upon
change of stock code/supplier combination. The report can be used as a mechanism to perform a stock
take of goods in inspection which have been recorded as returned to the supplier. This is particularly useful
for MRP users as the Requirements Calculation program regards these quantities as being in stock.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Print options
| Reports | 513
Field
Values
Description
Include nonstocked items
Select this to include non-stocked items in the report.
Include serial
numbers
Select this to include serial numbers for the serialized item in

the report.
New page per

supplier
Select this to print the details for each supplier on a separate

page.
Selections
Supplier selection
This enables you to indicate the supplier(s) for whom you want to print the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
| Reports | 514
Field
Values
Description
Output Options
Inventory Amendment Journal

You use the Inventory Amendment Journal program to produce a list of all stock items that have been
added, updated, or deleted using the Stock Code Maintenance program.
Note:
You can only run this program if you enabled the option: Amendment journals required (Inventory
Setup).
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Reprint
Select this to only print journals that have been previously

printed.
Print additions
Select this to print details of stock items added to the file.
Options
Note:
You can only select this option if you enabled the
option: Yes, with additions at the Amendment journals
required field (Inventory Setup).
Print changes
Select this to print details of changes made to existing items
Print deletions
Select this to print details of items that have been deleted.
Delete journal file

after report
Select this to delete the journal file once the report has run.
Note:
If you select this option then you will be unable to
reprint journals.
Output Options
List of Buyers
You use the List of Buyers program to print a selective range of buyers held on file.
| Reports | 515
Buyers are configured using the Buyers program and assigned to stock items using the Stock Code
Maintenance program. Buyers who are assigned to stock items in the Inventory module are responsible
for the purchase of these items.
Report Options
Selections
You can define the following selection criteria according to which the report must be generated:
Buyer selection
You use this field to indicate a selective range of buyers for which you want to generate the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
Output Options
| Reports | 516
List of Inventory Costs Um

You use the List of Inventory Costs Um program to generate a report of inventory cost units of measure
currently defined.
Inventory costs units of measure are maintained using the Cost Unit of Measure program.
List of Inventory Cost Units of Measure

This screen is displayed when you select the List option from the File menu of the Cost Unit of Measure
program.
Field
Values
Description
Print
Select this to generate a report of all inventory cost units of

measure currently held on file.
Close
Select this to return to the previous screen without generating

the report.
Output Options
Inventory Notations
You use the Inventory Notations program to generate a list of inventory notations currently defined.
Inventory notations are maintained using the Notes menu of the Inventory Query program.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Notation type
Select this to generate the report in notation type sequence.
Sequence
If you select this sequence then each notation type selected

is printed together with the stock item(s) against which that
notation is defined.
Stock code
Select this to generate the report in stock code sequence.

If you select this sequence then each stock item selected is
listed together with the notation type(s) defined against it.
Include notation
type
This option enables you to indicate the types of notations you

want to include in th report.
The following notation types can be included in the report:
Dangerous goods handling text

Inspection text
Purchase order additional text
| Reports | 517
Field
Values
Description
Sales order additional text
Technical specification
Job narrations
Selections

Inventory notations are defined against specific stock items.
This selection option enables you to define the stock item(s) for which you want to generate the report.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
single item.
To
| Reports | 518
Output Options
List of Planners
You use the List of Planners program to print a selective range of planners held on file.
A planner indicates the person in a company responsible for planning the manufacture of made-in stock
items. Planners are assigned to stock items within the Inventory module.
Planners can be used as a selection criterion in various Requirements Planning reports. For example: If
you have a number of planners within a planning department (each responsible for a different product line)
you can generate reports selectively by planner.
Report Options
Selections
Planner selection
You use this field to indicate a selective range of planners you want to print.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
| Reports | 519
Field
Values
To
Description
single item.
Output Options
List of Warehouses
You use the List of Warehouses program to print a list of all warehouses held on file..
Warehouses are maintained using the Inventory Warehouses program.
Report Options
Selections
Warehouse selection
You use this field to indicate the warehouse(s) that must be included as a selection criterion when

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

| Reports | 520
Field
Values
From
Description
single item.
To
Output Options
Inventory Label Print

You use the Inventory Label Print program to print up to 9999 labels for each stock code selected.
Report Options
Field
Values
Description
Stock code
Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order of stock

codes.
Description
Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order of stock

code descriptions.
Supplier
Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order of

suppliers.
Product class
Select this if you want the labels to be printed in order of

product classes.
User defined
sequence
Select this to print the labels in a user-defined sequence.
Label sequence
files).
Warehouse to
print
to generate labels.
| Reports | 521
Field
Values
Description
Labels to print
You use this field to indicate the number of labels you want to
generate for each stock code selected.
Other Options
Select this to print labels selectively for stock codes according

to their ABC classification, Product class and Cycle count.
Alignment
Select this to print a test label enabling you to verify that the
labels are correctly aligned in your printed.
Print
Select this to print your labels.
Close
Select this to exit the program without printing any labels.
Selections
This enables you to indicate the stock code(s) for which you want to print labels.
Supplier selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of suppliers in the label print. The default
supplier is defined against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance program.

Note:
Field
Values
Description
All
report.
Range

Single

in the report.
List

From
| Reports | 522
Field
Values
To
Description
single item.
User Defined Sequence

This screen is displayed when you select the Print function and you selected the Label sequence > User
defined sequence option.
Field
Values
Description
Tag-file name
You use this field to indicate the name of the file that contains
the list of stock codes for which you want to print labels.
OK
Select this to use the tag file indicated to generate the labels.
Cancel
Other Options
This screen is displayed when you select the Options function to indicate additional selection criteria
according to which you want to print your labels.
Field
ABC class
Values
Description
Product class
selection
This option enables you to include stock items for a selection of

products classes in the label print. The product class is defined
against the stock item using the Stock Code Maintenance
program (Descriptive tab).
If a specific product class is entered, then only stock items
belonging to that product class are included in the label print.
Cycle count
selection
You use this field to select stock items based on the cycle
count number that you have assigned them (Stock Code
Maintenance).
Close

previous screen.

Syspro Inventory Setup

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syspro Inventory Setup

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Inventory

SYSPRO 6.1 SP1

Unit of Measure Maintenance.............................................................................................. 137

Transaction Processing.............................................................................................. 185

Transaction Date.................................................................................................................. 192

Stock Take System......................................................................................................263

Serial Tracking System............................................................................................... 313

Period End Processing............................................................................................... 355

Inventory Query.................................................................................................................... 369

Parent Lot Reservations for Stock Code Listview............................................................... 426

Select this to value your inventory on a First-In-First-Out basis.

Implications of selecting this option are that stock

Multiple bins can be enabled for all warehouses or for selected

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Select this if you require a specific bin to be entered when you

When switching multiple bins on, the Purge and Archive

Select this to apply multiple bins selectively by warehouse.

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

The Warehouses function is available only after you

Select this to retain details of any changes and deletions of

Select this if you do not want to monitor information that has

This is used when the number of decimals assigned to the

Select this to round up decimal places of .5 or larger, and to

Select this to round up decimals. This option is appropriate only

Select this to round down decimal places. This option is

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

You use this field to indicate the percentage by which:

the cost of an item received into stock is allowed to differ

A warning is displayed if this percentage is exceeded. You can,

The warning does not apply to receipts if your

The costing method you select determines the manner in which

Select this to apply costing methods selectively by warehouse.

Select this to apply the costing method you require to each

The Warehouses function is available only after you

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Select this to average out the unit cost of an item that is

Select this if you want to value your inventory according to the

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Implications of selecting this option are that stock

Costing per warehouse is selected.

Actual cost tracking (also known as item or batch specific

Actual Costing overrides any other costing method

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Lot transaction value

Existing warehouses which use FIFO costing

With actual costing, processing of the buckets is at stock code,

Select this if you do not want to enable actual costing.

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Costing by lot is only possible when manual lot

Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, and

Select this to apply actual costing to batch serialised items.

If against any serialized stock item you selected:

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Create a FIFO bucket for each positive Receipt, and

Actual costing does not apply to manual serials.

Select this to automatically deplete lots and/or serials when

This option only applies to issues in Work in

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Select this to be able to view details of actual costs used in

Traceable, serialized, and ECC-controlled items will

Select this to allow stock on hand to go negative at company

Copyright 2012 Syspro Ltd. All rights reserved.

Select this if stock is not allowed to go negative.

Select this to indicate a specific list of warehouses in which